GE Consumer & Industrial

Multilin

PQM
Power Quality Meter™
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Software Revision: 3.6x
Manual P/N: 1665-0003-CJ
Manual Order Code: GEK-106296E
Copyright © 2006 GE Multilin

ACTUAL STORE

Ia = 100 Ib = 102 SETPOINT RESET

Ic = 100 AMPS
MESSAGE

g PQM Power Quality Meter

STATUS COMMUNICATE RELAYS

ALARM TX1 ALARM

VALUE
PROGRAM RX1 AUX1

SIMULATION TX2 AUX2

SELF TEST RX2 AUX3

823787A4.CDR

GE Multilin
T
215 Anderson Avenue, Markham, Ontario GIS ERE
RE

Canada L6E 1B3 ISO9001:2000

EM I
G

Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098 U LT I L

Internet: http://www.GEmultilin.com GE Multilin's Quality Management

System is registered to ISO9001:2000
QMI # 005094

*1665-0003-CK* UL # A3775

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–1

These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor provide
for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation, or
maintenance. Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise
which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purpose, the matter should be referred
to the General Electric Company.
To the extent required the products described herein meet applicable ANSI, IEEE, and NEMA
standards; but no such assurance is given with respect to local codes and ordinances
because they vary greatly.

© 2006 GE Multilin Incorporated. All rights reserved.

GE Multilin PQM Power Quality Meter instruction manual for revision 3.6x.
PQM Power Quality Meter, is a registered trademark of GE Multilin Inc.
The contents of this manual are the property of GE Multilin Inc. This documentation is
furnished on license and may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the permission
of GE Multilin. The content of this manual is for informational use only and is subject to
change without notice.
Part numbers contained in this manual are subject to change without notice, and should
therefore be verified by GE Multilin before ordering.

Part number: 1601-0003-CJ (September 2006)

TOC TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents
1: OVERVIEW INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................1-1
DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................ 1-1
FEATURE HIGHLIGHTS ......................................................................................................... 1-2
APPLICATIONS ...................................................................................................................... 1-3
STANDARD FEATURES .....................................................................................................1-5
METERING ............................................................................................................................. 1-5
FUTURE EXPANSION ............................................................................................................ 1-6
OPTIONAL FEATURES .......................................................................................................... 1-6
ENERVISTA PQM SETUP SOFTWARE ................................................................................ 1-11
ORDER CODES ..................................................................................................................... 1-12
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................................1-13
PQM SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................................ 1-13

2: INSTALLATION PHYSICAL ............................................................................................................................2-1

MOUNTING ........................................................................................................................... 2-1
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION .................................................................................................. 2-2
REVISION HISTORY .............................................................................................................. 2-3
ELECTRICAL ........................................................................................................................2-5
EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS .................................................................................................. 2-5
CONTROL POWER ................................................................................................................ 2-15
VT INPUTS ............................................................................................................................ 2-15
CT INPUTS ............................................................................................................................ 2-15
OUTPUT RELAYS .................................................................................................................. 2-16
SWITCH INPUTS (OPTIONAL) .............................................................................................. 2-16
ANALOG OUTPUTS (OPTIONAL) ......................................................................................... 2-18
ANALOG INPUT (OPTIONAL) ............................................................................................... 2-19
RS485 SERIAL PORTS ........................................................................................................ 2-19
RS232 FRONT PANEL PORT ............................................................................................. 2-21
DIELECTRIC STRENGTH TESTING ....................................................................................... 2-22

3: OPERATION FRONT PANEL & DISPLAY ................................................................................................3-1

FRONT PANEL ...................................................................................................................... 3-1
DISPLAY ................................................................................................................................ 3-2
STATUS INDICATORS ........................................................................................................3-3
DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................ 3-3
STATUS .................................................................................................................................. 3-3
COMMUNICATE .................................................................................................................... 3-3
RELAYS .................................................................................................................................. 3-4
KEYPAD ................................................................................................................................3-5
DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................ 3-5
SETPOINT KEY ...................................................................................................................... 3-5
ACTUAL KEY ......................................................................................................................... 3-5
STORE KEY ............................................................................................................................ 3-5
RESET KEY ............................................................................................................................ 3-6
MESSAGE KEYS .................................................................................................................... 3-6
VALUE KEYS ......................................................................................................................... 3-7
DATA ENTRY METHODS ...................................................................................................... 3-7
SETPOINT ACCESS SECURITY ............................................................................................. 3-8

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL TOC–I

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DEFAULT MESSAGES ........................................................................................................3-9

DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................ 3-9
ADDING A DEFAULT MESSAGE .......................................................................................... 3-9
DELETING A DEFAULT MESSAGE ....................................................................................... 3-9

4: PROGRAMMING INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................4-1

SETPOINT ENTRY METHODS ............................................................................................... 4-1
S1 PQM SETUP ...................................................................................................................4-3
DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................ 4-3
PREFERENCES ....................................................................................................................... 4-3
SETPOINT ACCESS ............................................................................................................... 4-4
RS485/RS232 SERIAL PORTS ......................................................................................... 4-7
DNP 3.0 CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................ 4-8
CLOCK ................................................................................................................................... 4-9
CALCULATION PARAMETERS ............................................................................................... 4-10
CLEAR DATA ......................................................................................................................... 4-12
EVENT RECORDER ................................................................................................................ 4-14
TRACE MEMORY ................................................................................................................... 4-15
PROGRAMMABLE MESSAGE ................................................................................................ 4-18
PRODUCT OPTIONS ............................................................................................................. 4-20
S2 SYSTEM SETUP .............................................................................................................4-21
CURRENT/VOLTAGE CONFIGURATION .............................................................................. 4-21
ANALOG OUTPUTS .............................................................................................................. 4-24
ANALOG INPUT .................................................................................................................... 4-29
SWITCH INPUTS ................................................................................................................... 4-31
PULSE OUTPUT .................................................................................................................... 4-33
PULSE INPUT ........................................................................................................................ 4-34
DATA LOGGER ...................................................................................................................... 4-36
S3 OUTPUT RELAYS ..........................................................................................................4-37
DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................ 4-37
ALARM RELAY ....................................................................................................................... 4-37
AUXILIARY RELAYS ............................................................................................................... 4-38
S4 ALARMS/CONTROL .....................................................................................................4-39
CURRENT/VOLTAGE ALARMS ............................................................................................. 4-39
TOTAL HARMONIC DISTORTION ......................................................................................... 4-45
FREQUENCY .......................................................................................................................... 4-46
POWER ALARMS .................................................................................................................. 4-47
POWER FACTOR ................................................................................................................... 4-49
DEMAND ALARMS ................................................................................................................ 4-52
PULSE INPUT ........................................................................................................................ 4-54
TIME ....................................................................................................................................... 4-55
MISCELLANEOUS ALARMS .................................................................................................. 4-57
S5 TESTING .........................................................................................................................4-58
TEST OUTPUT RELAYS & LEDS ......................................................................................... 4-58
CURRENT/VOLTAGE SIMULATION ...................................................................................... 4-59
ANALOG OUTPUTS SIMULATION ........................................................................................ 4-60
ANALOG INPUT SIMULATION .............................................................................................. 4-61
SWITCH INPUTS SIMULATION ............................................................................................ 4-62
FACTORY USE ONLY ............................................................................................................ 4-62

TOC–II PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

TOC TABLE OF CONTENTS

5: MONITORING ACTUAL VALUES VIEWING ..............................................................................................5-1

DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................ 5-1
A1 METERING .....................................................................................................................5-3
CURRENT .............................................................................................................................. 5-3
VOLTAGE ............................................................................................................................... 5-5
PHASORS .............................................................................................................................. 5-7
POWER .................................................................................................................................. 5-9
ENERGY ................................................................................................................................. 5-14
DEMAND ............................................................................................................................... 5-16
FREQUENCY .......................................................................................................................... 5-17
PULSE COUNTER .................................................................................................................. 5-18
ANALOG INPUT .................................................................................................................... 5-19
A2 STATUS ..........................................................................................................................5-21
ALARMS ................................................................................................................................. 5-21
SWITCH STATUS .................................................................................................................. 5-23
CLOCK ................................................................................................................................... 5-24
PROGRAMMABLE MESSAGE ............................................................................................... 5-24
A3 POWER ANALYSIS .......................................................................................................5-25
POWER QUALITY .................................................................................................................. 5-25
TOTAL HARMONIC DISTORTION ......................................................................................... 5-26
DATA LOGGER ...................................................................................................................... 5-27
EVENT RECORDER ............................................................................................................... 5-28
A4 PRODUCT INFO ............................................................................................................5-33
SOFTWARE VERSIONS & MODEL INFORMATION ............................................................. 5-33

6: SOFTWARE INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................6-1

OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................ 6-1
HARDWARE CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................ 6-2
ENERVISTA PQM SETUP INSTALLATION ......................................................................6-4
CHECKING IF INSTALLATION/UPGRADE IS REQUIRED .................................................... 6-4
INSTALLING/UPGRADING ENERVISTA PQM SETUP ....................................................... 6-4
CONFIGURING ENERVISTA PQM SETUP COMMUNICATIONS ........................................ 6-6
ENERVISTA PQM SETUP MENUS ....................................................................................6-8
DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................ 6-8
UPGRADING FIRMWARE ..................................................................................................6-9
DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................ 6-9
SAVE/PRINT PQM SETPOINTS TO A FILE ......................................................................... 6-9
LOADING NEW FIRMWARE INTO THE PQM .................................................................... 6-9
FIRMWARE UPGRADE RECOVERY ...................................................................................... 6-11
LOADING SAVED SETPOINTS INTO THE PQM .................................................................. 6-13
USING ENERVISTA PQM SETUP .....................................................................................6-14
ENTERING SETPOINTS ......................................................................................................... 6-14
VIEWING ACTUAL VALUES ................................................................................................. 6-15
SETPOINT FILES .................................................................................................................... 6-15
GETTING HELP ..................................................................................................................... 6-15
POWER ANALYSIS .............................................................................................................6-17
WAVEFORM CAPTURE ......................................................................................................... 6-17
HARMONIC ANALYSIS ......................................................................................................... 6-18
TRACE MEMORY ................................................................................................................... 6-20
DATA LOGGER ...................................................................................................................... 6-22

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL TOC–III

TABLE OF CONTENTS

7: MODBUS OVERVIEW ...........................................................................................................................7-1

COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS PROTOCOL ........................................................................................................... 7-1
ELECTRICAL INTERFACE ....................................................................................................... 7-1
DATA FORMAT & DATA RATE ............................................................................................ 7-2
DATA PACKET FORMAT ....................................................................................................... 7-2
ERROR CHECKING ................................................................................................................ 7-3
CRC-16 ALGORITHM ......................................................................................................... 7-3
TIMING .................................................................................................................................. 7-4
MODBUS FUNCTIONS ......................................................................................................7-5
PQM SUPPORTED MODBUS FUNCTIONS ........................................................................ 7-5
FUNCTION CODES 03/04 – READ SETPOINTS/ACTUAL VALUES ................................ 7-6
FUNCTION CODE 05 - EXECUTE OPERATION .................................................................. 7-7
FUNCTION CODE 05 – BROADCAST COMMAND ............................................................ 7-8
FUNCTION CODE 06 – STORE SINGLE SETPOINT ........................................................... 7-9
FUNCTION CODE 07 – READ DEVICE STATUS ................................................................ 7-10
FUNCTION CODE 08 – LOOPBACK TEST ......................................................................... 7-11
FUNCTION CODE 16 – STORE MULTIPLE SETPOINTS .................................................... 7-12
FUNCTION CODE 16 - PERFORMING COMMANDS ......................................................... 7-13
FUNCTION CODE 16 - BROADCAST COMMAND ............................................................. 7-14
ERROR RESPONSES .............................................................................................................. 7-15
MODBUS MEMORY MAP ..................................................................................................7-16
MEMORY MAP INFORMATION ............................................................................................ 7-16
USER-DEFINABLE MEMORY MAP ...................................................................................... 7-16
PQM MEMORY MAP ........................................................................................................... 7-17
MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS ......................................................................................... 7-72
ANALOG OUTPUT PARAMETER RANGE ............................................................................. 7-92

8: DNP DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL ..........................................................................................................8-1

COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT ............................................................................................. 8-1
IMPLEMENTATION TABLE .................................................................................................... 8-4
DEFAULT VARIATIONS ......................................................................................................... 8-6
INTERNAL INDICATION BITS ................................................................................................ 8-6
BINARY INPUT / BINARY INPUT CHANGE POINT LIST .................................................... 8-7
BINARY OUTPUT / CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT POINT LIST ............................................. 8-9
POINT LIST FOR ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT CHANGE ....................................................... 8-11
POINT LIST FOR COUNTERS ............................................................................................... 8-21

9: COMMISSIONING COMMISSIONING ..............................................................................................................9-1

10: MISCELLANEOUS WARRANTY .........................................................................................................................10-1

TABLE OF REVISIONS ........................................................................................................10-2
REVISIONS:
1605-0003-CH
TO
1605-0003-CJ ................................................................................................................. 10-2

TOC–IV PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

TOC TABLE OF CONTENTS

APPENDIX: APPLICATION EVENT RECORDER .............................................................................................................A-1

NOTES INTERFACING USING HYPERTERMINAL .......................................................................A-7
PHASORS IMPLEMENTATION .........................................................................................A-10
TRIGGERED TRACE MEMORY ..........................................................................................A-12
PULSE OUTPUT APPLICATION .......................................................................................A-13
DATA LOGGER IMPLEMENTATION ................................................................................A-15
READING LONG INTEGERS FROM MEMORY MAP .....................................................A-20
PULSE INPUT APPLICATION ...........................................................................................A-22
PULSE TOTALIZER APPLICATION ...................................................................................A-24

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL TOC–V

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TOC–VI PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

 GE Consumer & Industrial
Multilin

ACTUAL STORE
PQM Power Quality Meter
Ia = 100 Ib = 102 SETPOINT RESET

Ic = 100 AMPS
MESSAGE

g PQM Power Quality Meter

Chapter 1: Overview
STATUS COMMUNICATE RELAYS

ALARM TX1 ALARM

VALUE
PROGRAM RX1 AUX1

SIMULATION TX2 AUX2

SELF TEST RX2 AUX3

823 8 A4 CDR

Overview

1.1 Introduction

1.1.1 Description The GE Multilin PQM Power Quality Meter is an ideal choice for continuous monitoring of a
single or three-phase system. It provides metering for current, voltage, real power, reactive
power, apparent power, energy use, cost of power, power factor, and frequency.
Programmable setpoints and four assignable output relays allow control functions to be
added for specific applications. This includes basic alarm on over/under current or voltage,
unbalance, demand based load shedding, and capacitor power factor correction control.
More complex control is possible using the four switch inputs; these can also be used for
status information such as breaker open/closed, flow information, etc.
As a data gathering device for plant automation systems that integrate process,
instrument, and electrical requirements, all monitored values are available via one of two
RS485 communication ports running the Modbus protocol. If analog values are required
for direct interface to a PLC, any of the monitored values can output as a 4 to 20 mA (or 0
to 1 mA) signal to replace up to 4 separate transducers. A third RS232 communication port
connects to a PC from the front panel for simultaneous access of information by other
plant personnel.
With increasing use of electronic loads such as computers, ballasts, and variable
frequency drives, the quality of the power system is important. With the harmonic analysis
option, any phase current or voltage can be displayed and the harmonic content
calculated. Knowledge of the harmonic distribution allows action to be taken to prevent
overheated transformers, motors, capacitors, neutral wires, and nuisance breaker trips.
Redistribution of system loading can also be determined. The PQM can also provide
waveform and data printouts to assist in problem diagnosis.
Economical system monitoring or control is possible by selecting the non-display chassis
model as a system component and adding required options to obtain the desired level of
functionality.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–1

INTRODUCTION CHAPTER 1: OVERVIEW

1.1.2 Feature • Monitor: A, V, VA, W, var, kWh, kvarh, kVAh, PF, Hz

Highlights • Demand metering: W, var, A, VA
• Setpoints for alarm or control from most measured values, including: unbalance,
frequency, power factor, voltage, and current
• 4 output relays / 4 switch inputs for flexible control configuration
• 4 isolated analog outputs replace transducers for PLC interface
• 1 4-20 mA analog input
• Modbus communications
• Three COM ports (two rear RS485 ports and one front RS232 port) for access by
process, electrical, maintenance, and instrument personnel
• Harmonic analysis for power quality review and problem correction
• 40-character display and keypad for local programming
• Free EnerVista PQM Setup software for setpoint entry or monitoring from a PC
• Simulation mode for testing and training
• Compact design for panel or chassis mount
• AC/DC control power

STATUS: COMMUNICATE: RELAYS:

ALARM - Alarm condition present
PROGRAM - Setpoint programming is For monitoring communication activity: ALARM Alarm condition present.
enabled TX1 COM1 transmit data See display for cause.

}
SIMULATION - Simulated values being RX1 COM1 receive data AUX1
used for test/training TX2 COM2 transmit data AUX2 Auxiliary relay activated by
SELF TEST - internal fault detected, RX2 COM2 receive data AUX3 programmable function.
service required

DISPLAY
40 character illuminated display for
programming, monitoring, status, fault
diagnosis, user programmable messages
and setpoints. Programmable auto scan
sequence for unattended operation.
ACTUAL STORE

DOOR:
Ia = 100 Ib = 102 SETPOINT RESET
Door covers keys and computer port
Ic = 100 AMPS when not in use.

MESSAGE KEYPAD:
Rubber keypad is dust tight and
splash proof.
STATUS COMMUNICATE RELAYS

ALARM TX1 ALARM

VALUE
SETPOINT KEY:
PROGRAM RX1 AUX1 Program all setpoints. Tamperproof
settings with passcode and access jumper
SIMULATION TX2 AUX2 prevent unauthorized setpoint changes.
SELF TEST RX2 AUX3
COMPUTER INTERFACE:

e PQM Power Quality Meter

RS232 comm port for connecting to a PC.
Use for downloading setpoints, monitoring,
data collection, printing reports.
823756am.cdr

FIGURE 1–1: PQM Feature Highlights - 1

1–2 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 1: OVERVIEW INTRODUCTION

ANALOG INPUT
Accept 4-20mA analog inputs for transducer
interface.

ANALOG OUTPUTS
4 isolated 0-1mA or 4-20 mA outputs replace
8 transducers. Programmable including:
A, V, W, var, VA, Wh varh, PF, Hz

SWITCH INPUTS

}
A Programmable for relay activation,
B counters, logic, demand synchronization,
C setpoint access, alarm position
D

4 OUTPUT RELAYS

}
ALARM Programmable alarm conditions
AUX1 actuated by programmable
AUX2 setpoints, switch inputs, remote
AUX3 communication control.

COMMUNICATIONS
®
Dual RS485 comm ports Modbus protocol.
COM1 Continuous monitoring/control via
SCADA system rear (RS485).
COM2/3 Front (RS232) or rear (RS485) access
allows simultaneous communication
via a PC or for redundant comms.
PROGRAM UPDATING
Flash memory storage of firmware for field
updating via communications port. Enables
product updating on-site for latest features.
CT INPUTS: AC/DC CONTROL POWER
3 isolated phase CT inputs Universal control power
1 isolated neutral CT input 90-300 VDC FUSE ACCESS
1 Amp or 5 Amp secondary 70-265 VAC Control power fuse accessible under sliding
door.
VT INPUTS: GROUND: COMPACT DESIGN
0-600V, 3 wire or 4 wire voltage inputs. Separate safety and filter ground
Panel mount replaces many discrete
Direct (up to 600V) or VT (>600V for All inputs meet C37.90 and IEC 801-2
components with one standard model.
isolation) connections. EMI, SWC, RFI interference immunity.
823755AL.CDR

FIGURE 1–2: PQM Feature Highlights - 2

1.1.3 Applications • Metering of distribution feeders, transformers, generators, capacitor banks, and
motors
• Medium and low voltage three-phase systems
• Commercial, industrial, utility
• Flexible control for demand load shedding, power factor, etc.
• Power quality analysis
• System debugging

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–3

INTRODUCTION CHAPTER 1: OVERVIEW

3 PHASE
3/4 WIRE BUS
0-600V DIRECT
>600V CT/VTs CTs VTs

AC/DC PQM RELAY

CONTROL -
POWER

4 SWITCH
INPUTS FOR
CONTROL

MAIN
SCADA COM 1
4
OUTPUT ALARM
INSTRUMENTATION CONTROL
ELECTRICAL COM 2 RELAYS
MAINTENANCE
1
4-20mA
RS232 4 2
PLC
PORT TRANSDUCER 3
or
OUTPUTS 4 RTU

823768A2.CDR

FIGURE 1–3: Single Line Diagram

1–4 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 1: OVERVIEW STANDARD FEATURES

1.2 Standard Features

1.2.1 Metering True RMS monitoring of Ia, Ib, Ic, In, Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vab, Vbc, Vca, voltage/current unbalance,
power factor, line frequency, watts, vars, VA, Wh, varh, VAh, and demand readings for A, W,
vars, and VA. Maximum and minimum values of measured quantities are recorded and are
date and time stamped.
A 40-character liquid crystal display is used for programming setpoints and monitoring
values and status.

a) Alarms
Alarm conditions can be set up for all measured quantities. These include overcurrent,
undercurrent, neutral current, current unbalance, voltage unbalance, phase reversal,
overfrequency, underfrequency, power factor, switch inputs, etc. The alarm messages are
displayed in a simple and easy to understand English format.

b) Communication
The PQM is equipped with one standard RS485 port utilizing the Modbus or DNP 3.0
protocols. This can be used to integrate process, instrumentation, and electrical
requirements in a plant automation system by connecting PQM meters together to a DCS
or SCADA system. A PC running EnerVista PQM Setup can change system setpoints and
monitor values, status, and alarms. Continuous monitoring minimizes process downtime
by immediately identifying potential problems due to faults or changes from growth.
The PQM also includes a front RS232 port which may be employed to perform such tasks
as:
• data monitoring
• problem diagnosis
• viewing event records
• trending
• printing settings and/or actual values
• loading new firmware into the PQM

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–5

STANDARD FEATURES CHAPTER 1: OVERVIEW

1.2.2 Future Flash memory is used to store firmware within the PQM. This allows future product
Expansion upgrades to be loaded via the serial port.

Product update Transfer new firmware

from GE Power to the PQM
Management
Products CD

823774A6.CDR

FIGURE 1–4: Downloading Product Enhancements via the Serial Port

PQM units can initially be used as standalone meters. Their open architecture allows
connection to other Modbus compatible devices on the same communication link. These
can be integrated in a complete plant-wide system for overall process monitoring and
control.

1.2.3 Optional c) Transducer Option

Features Four isolated 4 to 20 mA (or 0 to 1 mA depending on the installed option) analog outputs
are provided that can replace up to eight transducers. The outputs can be assigned to any
measured parameters for direct interface to a PLC.
One 4 to 20 mA analog input is provided to accept a transducer output for displaying
information such as temperature or water level.
An additional rear RS485 communication port is provided for simultaneous monitoring by
process, instrument, electrical, or maintenance personnel.

Main plant Use 2nd/3rd comm ports for simultaneous

control/monitoring access by electrical, maintenance,
communication process, instrumentation personnel
interface for •Data monitoring
•Problem diagnosis
•Event records
RS485 RS485 •Trending
•Report printing

ACTUAL STORE Print reports

SETPOINT RESET

MESSAGE

VALUE

RS232 823779A8.CDR

FIGURE 1–5: Additional Communication Port

1–6 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 1: OVERVIEW STANDARD FEATURES

d) Control Option
An additional three dry-contact form “C” output relays and four dry-contact switch inputs
are provided. These additional relays can be combined with setpoints and inputs/outputs
for control applications. Possibilities include:
• undercurrent alarm warnings for pump protection
• over/undervoltage for generators
• unbalance alarm warnings to protect rotating machines
• dual level power factor for capacitor bank switching
• underfrequency/demand output for load shedding resulting in power cost savings
• kWh, kvarh and kVAh pulse output for PLC interface
• Pulse input for totalizing quantities such as kWh, kvarh, kVAh, etc.

DCS

RS485
MODBUS
PQM
4
SWITCH 4
INPUTS RELAYS
ALARM
AUX 1
AUX 2
AUX 3
823775A7.DWG

FIGURE 1–6: Switch Inputs and Outputs Relays

e) Power Analysis Option

Non-linear loads (such as variable speed drives, computers, and electronic ballasts) can
cause unwanted harmonics that may lead to nuisance breaker tripping, telephone
interference, and transformer, capacitor or motor overheating. For fault diagnostics such
as detecting undersized neutral wiring, assessing the need for harmonic rated
transformers, or judging the effectiveness of harmonic filters, details of the harmonic
spectrum are useful and available with the power analysis option.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–7

STANDARD FEATURES CHAPTER 1: OVERVIEW

FIGURE 1–7: Harmonic Spectrum

Voltage and current waveforms can be captured and displayed on a PC with EnerVista
PQM Setup or third party software. Distorted peaks or notches from SCR switching provide
clues for taking corrective action.

FIGURE 1–8: Captured Waveform

1–8 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 1: OVERVIEW STANDARD FEATURES

Alarms, setpoint triggers, and input and output events can be stored in a 40-event record
and time/date stamped by the internal clock. This is useful for diagnosing problems and
system activity. The event record is available through serial communication. Minimum and
maximum values are also continuously updated and time/date stamped.
Routine event logs of all measured quantities can be created, saved to a file, and/or
printed.

FIGURE 1–9: Data Logger

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–9

STANDARD FEATURES CHAPTER 1: OVERVIEW

The power analysis option also provides a Trace Memory feature. This feature can be used
to record specified parameters based on the user defined triggers.

FIGURE 1–10: Trace Memory Triggers

FIGURE 1–11: Trace Memory Capture

1–10 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 1: OVERVIEW STANDARD FEATURES

1.2.4 EnerVista PQM All data continuously gathered by the PQM can be transferred to a third party software
Setup program for display, control, or analysis through the communications interface. The
Software EnerVista PQM Setup software makes this data immediately useful and assists in
programming the PQM. Some of the tasks that can be executed using the EnerVista PQM
Setup software package are:
• read metered data
• monitor system status
• change PQM setpoints on-line
• save setpoints to a file and download into any PQM
• capture and display voltage and current wave shapes for analysis
• record demand profiles for various measured quantities
• troubleshoot communication problems with a built in communications debugging
tool
• print all graphs, charts, setpoints, and actual data
The EnerVista PQM Setup software is fully described in Chapter : Software.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–11

STANDARD FEATURES CHAPTER 1: OVERVIEW

1.2.5 Order Codes The order code for all options is: PQM-T20-C-A
Table 1–1: Order Codes

PQM
* * *
Basic Unit I I I Basic Unit with display, all current/voltage/power
PQM I I I measurements, 1 RS485 communication port, 1 RS232
I I I communication port
Transducer I I 4 isolated analog outputs, 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA
Option T20 I I assignable to all measured parameters, 4-20 mA analog
I I input, 2nd RS485 communication port
I I 4 isolated analog outputs, 0-1 mA assignable to all
T1 I I measured parameters, 4-20 mA analog input, 2nd RS485
I I communication port
Control I 3 additional programmable output relays (for a total of 4),
Option C
I 4 programmable switch inputs
Power Harmonic analysis, triggered trace memory, waveform
Analysis A capture, event recorder, data logger
Option

Modifications (consult the factory for any additional modification costs):

• MOD 500: Portable test/carrying case
• MOD 501: 20 to 60 V DC / 20 to 48 V AC control power
• MOD 502: Tropicalization
• MOD 504: Removable terminal blocks
• MOD 505: PQM Remote: Base Unit with Detachable Faceplate
• MOD 506: 4 Step Capacitor Bank Switching
• MOD 507: –40°C to +60°C Extended Temperature Operation
• MOD 508: 269/565 Communication Protocol
• MOD 513: Class 1, Division 2 Operation
• MOD 516: PQM Remote: Base Unit only
• MOD 517: PQM Remote: Detachable Faceplate only
• MOD 521: Enhanced Trace Memory Voltage Pickup Accuracy

Accessories (consult the factory for any additional accessory costs):

• EnerVista PQM Setup Windows software (supplied free)
• RS232 to RS485 converter (required to connect a PC to the PQM RS485 ports)
• 2.25” collar for limited depth mounting
• RS485 terminating network
• PQM mounting plate to replace MTM Plus

Control Power:
• 90 to 300 V DC / 70 to 265 V AC standard
• 20 to 60 V DC / 20 to 48 V AC (MOD 501)

1–12 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 1: OVERVIEW SPECIFICATIONS

1.3 Specifications

1.3.1 PQM CURRENT INPUTS

Specifications CONVERSION: true rms, 64 samples/cycle
CT INPUT: 1 A and 5 A secondary
BURDEN: 0.2 VA
OVERLOAD: 20 × CT for 1 sec.
100 × CT for 0.2 sec.
RANGE: 1 to 150% of CT primary
FULL SCALE 150% of CT primary
FREQUENCY: up to 32nd harmonic
ACCURACY: ±0.2% of full scale or 1 amp

VOLTAGE INPUTS
CONVERSION: true rms, 64 samples/cycle
VT INPUT: direct or VT ratio 1.0 to 3500.0:1
BURDEN: 2.2 MΩ
INPUT RANGE: 20 to 600 V AC
FULL SCALE: 150/600 V AC autoscaled
AT VTinput ≤ 150 VAC, full scale is 150 VAC
AT VTinput > 150 VAC, full scale is 600 VAC
FREQUENCY: up to 32nd harmonic
ACCURACY: ±0.2% of full scale or 1 volt

TRACE MEMORY TRIGGER

INPUT 2 data cycles (current, voltage)
TIME DELAY: 0 to 30 cycles
TRIGGER LEVEL PICKUP ACCURACY:
OVERCURRENT: ± 2% of full scale
OVERVOLTAGE: ± 2% of full scale
UNDERVOLTAGE: ± 3% of full scale

SAMPLING MODES
INPUTS
SAMPLE SAMPLED AT A DURATION
S/CYCLE (cycles)
TIME
METERED
64 ALL 2
VALUES
TRACE
16 ALL continuous
MEMORY
HARMONIC
256 1 1
SPECTRUM

SWITCH INPUTS
TYPE: dry contacts
RESISTANCE: 1000 Ω max ON resistance
OUTPUT: 24 V DC @ 2 mA (pulsed)
DURATION: 100 ms minimum

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–13

SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 1: OVERVIEW

ANALOG OUTPUTS
OUTPUT
0-1 mA 4-20 mA
(T1 Option) (T20 Option)
MAX LOAD 2400 Ω 600 Ω
MAX OUTPUT 1.1 mA 21 mA
ACCURACY: ±1% of full scale reading
ISOLATION: ±36 V isolated, active source

ANALOG INPUT
RANGE: 4 to 20 mA
ACCURACY: ±1% of full scale reading
INTERNAL BURDEN
RESISTANCE: 250 Ω

OUTPUT RELAYS
VOLTAGE MAKE/CARRY BREAK
Continuous 0.1 sec.
30 VDC 5A 30 A 5A
125 5A 30 A 0.5 A
RESISTIVE VDC
250
5A 30 A 0.3 A
VDC
30 VDC 5A 30 A 5A
125
INDUCTIVE 5A 30 A 0.25 A
VDC
(L/R=7ms)
250 5A 30 A 0.15 A
VDC
120
5A 30 A 5A
VAC
RESISTIVE
250 5A 30 A 5A
VAC
120
VAC 5A 30 A 5A
INDUCTIVE
PF=0.4 250
5A 30 A 5A
VAC
CONFIGURATION: Form C NO/NC
CONTACT MATERIAL: Silver Alloy

1–14 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 1: OVERVIEW SPECIFICATIONS

Table 2: Measured Values1

PARAMETER ACCURACY RANGE
VOLTAGE ±0.2% of full scale 20 to 100% of VT
CURRENT ±0.2% of full scale 1 to 150% of CT
V UNBALANCE ±1% of full scale 0 to 100%
I UNBALANCE ±1% of full scale 0 to 100%
0 to ±999,999.99
kW ±4% of full scale
kW
0 to ±999,999.99
kvar ±4% of full scale
kvar
0 to 999,999.99
kVA ±4% of full scale
kVA
kWh ±4% of full scale 232 kWh
kvarh ±4% of full scale 232 kvarh
kVAh ±4% of full scale 232 kVAh
PF ±1.0% of full scale ±0.00 to 1.00
FREQUENCY ±0.02Hz 20.00 to 70.00 Hz
0 to ±999 999.99
kW DEMAND ±0.4% of full scale kW
0 to ±999 999.99
kvar DEMAND ±0.4% of full scale kvar
0 to 999 999.99
kVA DEMAND ±0.4% of full scale kVA
AMP DEMAND ±0.2% of full scale 0 to 7500 A
AMPS THD ±2.0% of full scale 0.0 to 100.0%
VOLTS THD ±2.0% of full scale 0.0 to 100.0%
CREST FACTOR ±0.4% of full scale 1 to 9.99
1. Specified for 0 to 40°C

UNDERVOLTAGE MONITORING
REQ’D VOLTAGE: > 20 V applied in all phases
PICKUP: 0.50 to 0.99 in steps of 0.01 × VT
DROPOUT: 103% of pickup
TIME DELAY: 0.5 to 600.0 in steps of 0.5 sec.
PHASES: Any 1 / Any 2 / All 3 (programmable) have to be ≤ pickup to
operate
ACCURACY: Per voltage input
TIMING ACCURACY: –0.5 / +1 sec.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–15

SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 1: OVERVIEW

OVERVOLTAGE MONITORING
PICKUP: 1.01 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 × VT
DROPOUT: 97% of pickup
TIME DELAY: 0.5 to 600.0 in steps of 0.5 sec.
PHASES: Any 1 / Any 2 / All 3 (programmable) must be ≥ pickup to
operate
ACCURACY: Per voltage input
TIMING ACCURACY: –0.5 / +1 sec.

UNDERFREQUENCY MONITORING
REQ’D VOLTAGE: > 30 V applied in phase A
PICKUP: 20.00 to 70.00 in steps of 0.01 Hz
DROPOUT: Pickup + 0.03 Hz
TIME DELAY: 0.1 to 10.0 in steps of 0.1 sec.
ACCURACY: ±0.02 Hz
TIMING ACCURACY: ±100 ms

OVERFREQUENCY MONITORING
REQ’D VOLTAGE: > 30 V applied in phase A
PICKUP: 20.00 to 70.00 in steps of 0.01 Hz
DROPOUT: Pickup – 0.03 Hz
TIME DELAY: 0.0 to 10.0 in steps of 0.1 sec.
ACCURACY: ±0.02 Hz
TIMING ACCURACY: ±100 ms

POWER FACTOR MONITORING

REQ’D VOLTAGE: > 20 V applied in phase A
PICKUP: 0.50 lag to 0.50 lead step 0.01
DROPOUT: 0.50 lag to 0.50 lead step 0.01
TIME DELAY: 0.5 to 600.0 in steps of 0.5 sec.
TIMING ACCURACY: –0.5 / +1 sec.

DEMAND MONITORING
MEASURED VALUES: Phase A/B/C/N Current (A)
3φ Real Power (kW)
3φ Reactive Power (kvar)
3φ Apparent Power (kVA)
MEASUREMENT TYPE:
Thermal Exponential 90% response time
(programmable): 5 to 60 min. step 1
Block interval: (programmable): 5 to 60 min. step 1
Rolling Demand
time interval: (programmable): 5 to 60 min. step 1
PICKUP: A: 10 to 7500 in steps of 1
kW: 1 to 65000 in steps of 1
kvar: 1 to 65000 in steps of 1
kVA: 1 to 65000 in steps of 1

PULSE OUTPUT
PARAMETERS: +kWh, –kWh, +kvarh, –kvarh, kVAh
INTERVAL: 1 to 65000 in steps of 1
PULSE WIDTH: 100 to 2000 ms in steps of 10 ms
MIN. PULSE INTERVAL: 500 ms
ACCURACY: ±10 ms

1–16 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 1: OVERVIEW SPECIFICATIONS

PULSE INPUT
MAX INPUTS: 4
MIN PULSE WIDTH: 150 ms
MIN OFF TIME: 200 ms

COMMUNICATIONS
COM1/COM2 TYPE: RS485 2-wire, half duplex, isolated
COM3 TYPE: RS232 9-pin
BAUD RATE: 1200 to 19200
PROTOCOLS: Modbus® RTU; DNP 3.0
FUNCTIONS: Read/write setpoints
Read actual values
Execute commands
Read Device Status
Loopback Test

CLOCK
ACCURACY: ±1 minute / 30 days at 25°C ± 5°C
RESOLUTION: 1 sec.

CONTROL POWER
INPUT: 90 to 300 V DC or
70 to 265 V AC, 50/60 Hz
POWER: nominal 10 VA
maximum 20 VA
HOLDUP: 100 ms typical
(@ 120 V AC / 125 V DC)
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE PQM BE POWERED UP AT LEAST ONCE PER YEAR
TO AVOID DETERIORATION OF THE ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS IN THE POWER
WARNING SUPPLY.

FUSE TYPE/RATING
5 × 20mm, 2.5 A, 250V
Slow blow, High breaking capacity

TYPE TESTS
DIELECTRIC STRENGTH: .......... 2.0 kV for 1 minute to relays, CTs, VTs, power supply
INSULATION RESISTANCE: ..... IEC255-5, 500 V DC
TRANSIENTS: ................................ ANSI C37.90.1 Oscillatory
2.5 kV/1 MHz
ANSI C37.90.1 Fast Rise 5 kV/10 ns
Ontario Hydro A-28M-82
IEC255-4 Impulse/High Frequency Disturbance Class III Level
IMPULSE TEST:............................. IEC 255-5 0.5 Joule 5kV
RFI:.................................................... 50 MHz/15 W Transmitter
EMI:................................................... C37.90.2 Electromagnetic Interference @ 150 MHz and 450 MHz,
10V/m
STATIC: ........................................... IEC 801-2 Static Discharge
HUMIDITY: ..................................... 95% non-condensing
TEMPERATURE:............................ –10°C to +60°C ambient
ENVIRONMENT: .......................... IEC 68-2-38 Temperature/Humidity Cycle

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–17

SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 1: OVERVIEW

PACKAGING
SHIPPING BOX:............................ 8½" × 6" × 6" (L×H×D)
21.5cm × 15.2cm × 15.2 cm (L×H×D)
SHIP WEIGHT: .............................. 5 lbs/2.3 kg

CERTIFICATION
ISO: ................................................... Manufactured under an ISO9001 registered program
UL:..................................................... E83849 UL listed for the USA and Canada
CE:..................................................... Conforms to EN 55011 / CISPR 11, EN50082-2, IEC 947-1,
IEC 1010-1

SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.

NOTE

1–18 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

 GE Consumer & Industrial
Multilin

ACTUAL STORE
PQM Power Quality Meter
Ia = 100 Ib = 102 SETPOINT RESET

Ic = 100 AMPS
MESSAGE

g PQM Power Quality Meter

STATUS COMMUNICATE RELAYS

Chapter 2: Installation
ALARM TX1 ALARM
VALUE
PROGRAM RX1 AUX1

SIMULATION TX2 AUX2

SELF TEST RX2 AUX3

Installation

2.1 Physical

2.1.1 Mounting Physical dimensions and required cutout dimensions for the PQM are shown below. Once
the cutout and mounting holes are made in the panel, use the eight #6 self-tapping screws
provided to secure the PQM. Mount the unit on a panel or switchgear door to allow
operator access to the keypad and indicators

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–1

PHYSICAL CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION

FIGURE 2–1: Physical Dimensions

2.1.2 Product Product attributes vary according to the configuration and options selected on the
Identification customer order. Before applying power to the PQM, examine the label on the back and
ensure the correct options are installed.

2–2 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION PHYSICAL

The following section explains the information included on the label shown below:

g PQM MODEL NO.: PQM-T20-C-A VERSION: 340.000

MAXIMUM CONTACT RATING CONTROL VOLTAGE: 90-300VDC 20VA

70-265VAC 50/60HZ 20VA SERIAL No.: C6560001
250 VAC 10A RESISTIVE
1/4HP 250VAC 1/2HP 125VAC
MADE IN
CANADA
CUSTOMER TAG No.: 1234-567-89

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

FIGURE 2–2: Product Label

1. MODEL NO: Shows the PQM configuration. The model number for a basic
panel mount PQM is “PQM”. The model number for a basic chassis mount PQM
is “PQM\ND”. T20, C, and A appear in the model number only if the Transducer,
Control, or Power Analysis options are installed.
2. SUPPLY VOLTAGE: Indicates the power supply input configuration installed in
the PQM. The PQM shown in this example can accept any AC 50/60Hz voltage
from 70 to 265 V AC or DC voltage from 90 to 300 V DC.
3. TAG#: An optional identification number specified by the customer.
4. MOD#: Used if unique features have been installed for special customer
orders. This number should be available when contacting GE Multilin for
technical support.
5. VERSION: An internal GE Multilin number that should be available when
contacting us for technical support.
6. SERIAL NO: Indicates the serial number for the PQM in numeric and barcode
formats that should be available when contacting GE Multilin for technical
support.

2.1.3 Revision The following table shows the PQM revision history. Each revision of the instruction manual
History corresponds to a particular firmware revision. The manual revision is located on the title
page as part of the manual part number (the format is 1665-0003-revision). The firmware
revision is loaded in the PQM and can be viewed by scrolling to the A4 PRODUCT
INFO \ SOFTWARE VERSIONS \ MAIN PROGRAM VERSION actual value message.
When using the instruction manual to determine PQM features and settings, ensure that
the instruction manual revision corresponds to the firmware revision installed in the PQM
using the table below.

Table 2–1: Revision History Table

INSTRUCTION MAIN PROGRAM

MANUAL P/N VERSION

1665-0003-C1 0.10

1665-0003-C2 0.20

1665-0003-C3 1.00

1665-0003-C4 1.10

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–3

PHYSICAL CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION

Table 2–1: Revision History Table

INSTRUCTION MAIN PROGRAM

MANUAL P/N VERSION

1665-0003-C5 1.20

1665-0003-C6 1.21, 1.22

1665-0003-C7 2.00

1665-0003-C8 2.01

1665-0003-C9 2.02

1665-0003-CA 3.00

1665-0003-CB 3.01

1665-0003-CC 3.10

1665-0003-CD 3.13

1665-0003-CE 3.2x, 3.3x

1665-0003-CF 3.4x

1665-0003-CG 3.5x

1665-0003-CH 3.6x

1665-0003-CJ 3.66

2–4 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL

2.2 Electrical

2.2.1 External Signal wiring is to Terminals 21 to 51. These terminals accommodate wires sizes up to 12
Connections gauge. Please note that the maximum torque that can be applied to terminals 21 to 51 is 0.5
Nm (or 4.4 in ·lb.). CT, VT, and control power connections are made using Terminals 1 to 20.
These #8 screw ring terminals accept wire sizes as large as 8 gauge. Consult the wiring
diagrams for suggested wiring. A minimal configuration includes connections for control
power, phase CTs/VTs, and the alarm relay; other features can be wired as required.
Considerations for wiring each feature are given in the sections that follow.

Table 2–2: PQM External Connections

VT / CONTROL POWER CT ROW SIGNAL UPPER ROW

ROW

1 V1 Voltage input 9 Phase A CT 5A 21 Analog shield

2 V2 Voltage input 10 Phase A CT 1A 22 Analog in –

3 V3 Voltage input 11 Phase A CT COM 23 Analog in +

4 Vn Voltage input 12 Phase B CT 5A 24 Analog out com

5 Filter ground 13 Phase B CT 1A 25 Analog out 4+

6 Safety ground 14 Phase B CT COM 26 Analog out 3+

7 Control neutral (–) 15 Phase C CT 5A 27 Analog out 2+

8 Control live (+) 16 Phase C CT 1A 28 Analog out 1+

17 Phase C CT COM 29 Switch 4 input

18 Neutral CT 5A 30 Switch 3 input

19 Neutral CT 1A 31 Switch 2 input

20 Neutral CT COM 32 Switch 1 input

33 +24 V DC switch com

34 Aux3 relay NC

35 Aux3 relay COM

36 Aux3 relay NO

37 Aux2 relay NC

38 Aux2 relay COM

39 Aux2 relay NO

40 Aux1 relay NC

41 Aux1 relay COM

42 Aux1 relay NO

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–5

ELECTRICAL CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION

Table 2–2: PQM External Connections

VT / CONTROL POWER CT ROW SIGNAL UPPER ROW

ROW

43 Alarm relay NC

44 Alarm relay COM

45 Alarm relay NO

46 Comm 1 COM

47 Comm 1 –

48 Comm 1 +

49 Comm 2 COM

50 Comm 2 –

51 Comm 2 +

FIGURE 2–3: Rear Terminals

2–6 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL

This wiring diagram shows the typical 4-wire wye connection which will cover any voltage
range. Select the S2 SYSTEM SETUP \ CURRENT/VOLTAGE CONFIGURATION \ VT
WIRING: 4 WIRE WYE (3 VTs) setpoint.

FIGURE 2–4: Wiring Diagram 4-wire Wye (3 Vts)

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–7

ELECTRICAL CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION

The 2½ element 4 wire wye connection can be used for situations where cost or size
restrictions limit the number of VTs to two. With this connection, Phase Vbn voltage is
calculated using the two existing voltages. Select the S2 SYSTEM SETUP \ CURRENT/
VOLTAGE CONFIGURATION \ VT WIRING: 4 WIRE WYE (2 VTs) setpoint.
This wiring configuration will only provide accurate power measurements if
the voltages are balanced
NOTE

2–8 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL

FIGURE 2–5: Wiring Diagram 4-wire Wye (2 Vts)

Four-wire systems with voltages 347 V L-N or less can be directly connected to the PQM
without VTs. Select the S2 SYSTEM SETUP \ CURRENT/VOLTAGE CONFIGURATION \ VT
WIRING: 4 WIRE WYE DIRECT setpoint.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–9

ELECTRICAL CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION

The PQM voltage inputs should be directly connected using HRC fuses rated at 2 A to
ensure adequate interrupting capacity.

FIGURE 2–6: Wiring Diagram 4-wire Wye Direct (No Vts)

2–10 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL

This diagram shows the typical 3-wire delta connection which will cover any voltage range.
Select the S2 SYSTEM SETUP \ CURRENT/VOLTAGE CONFIGURATION \ VT WIRING: 3
WIRE DELTA (2 VTs) setpoint.

FIGURE 2–7: Wiring Diagram 3-wire Delta (2 Vts)

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–11

ELECTRICAL CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION

Three-wire systems with voltages 600 V (L-L) or less can be directly connected to the PQM
without VTs. Select the S2 SYSTEM SETUP \ CURRENT/VOLTAGE CONFIGURATION \ VT
WIRING: 3 WIRE DIRECT setpoint.
The PQM voltage inputs should be directly connected using HRC fuses rated at 2 amps to
ensure adequate interrupting capacity.

FIGURE 2–8: Wiring Diagram 3-wire Direct (No Vts)

2–12 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL

For a single-phase connection, connect current and voltage to the phase A inputs only. All
other inputs are ignored. Select the S2 SYSTEM SETUP \ CURRENT/VOLTAGE
CONFIGURATION \ VT WIRING: SINGLE PHASE setpoint.

FIGURE 2–9: Single Phase Connection

The figure below shows two methods for connecting CTs to the PQM for a 3-wire system.
The top drawing shows the standard wiring configuration using three CTs. An alternate
wiring configuration uses only two CTs. With the two CT method, the third phase is

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–13

ELECTRICAL CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION

measured by connecting the commons from phase A and C to the phase B input on the
PQM. This causes the phase A and phase C current to flow through the PQM’s phase B CT in
the opposite direction, producing a current equal to the actual phase B current.
Ia + Ib + Ic = 0 for a three wire system.
Ib = – (Ia + Ic)
For the CT connections above, the S2 SYSTEM SETUP \ CURRENT/
VOLTAGE CONFIGURATION \ PHASE CT WIRING \ PHASE CT PRIMARY
NOTE setpoint must be set to PHASE A, B, AND C.

FIGURE 2–10: Alternate Ct Connections for 3-wire System

2–14 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL

2.2.2 Control Power The control power supplied to the PQM must match the installed power
supply. If the applied voltage does not match, damage to the unit may occur.
CAUTION Check the product identification to verify the control voltage matches the
intended application.

A universal AC/DC power supply is standard on the PQM. It covers the range 90 to 300 V DC
and 70 to 265 V AC at 50/60 Hz. It is not necessary to adjust the PQM if the control voltage
is within this range. A low voltage power supply is available as an option. It covers the
range 20 to 60 V DC and 24 to 48 V AC at 50/60 Hz. Verify from the product identification
label that the control voltage matches the intended application. Connect the control
voltage input to a stable source for reliable operation. A 2.5 A HRC fuse is accessible from
the back of the PQM via the fuse access door. Consult the factory for replacement fuses, if
required. Using #12 gauge wire or ground braid, connect Terminals 5 and 6 to a solid
system ground, typically a copper bus in the switchgear. The PQM incorporates extensive
filtering and transient protection to ensure reliable operation under harsh industrial
operating environments. Transient energy must be conducted back to the source through
Filter Ground Terminal 5. The Filter Ground Terminal (5) is separated from the Safety
Ground Terminal (6) to allow dielectric testing of switchgear with the PQM wired up. Filter
Ground Terminal connections must be removed during dielectric testing.
When properly installed, the PQM meets the interference immunity requirements of
IEC 801 and ANSI C37.90.1.

2.2.3 VT Inputs The PQM accepts input voltages from 0 to 600 V AC between the voltage inputs (V1, V2, V3)
and voltage common (Vn). These inputs can be directly connected or supplied through
external VTs. If voltages greater than 600 V AC are to be measured, external VTs are
required. When measuring line-to-line quantities using inputs V1, V2, and V3, ensure that
the voltage common input Vn is grounded. This input is used as a reference for measuring
the voltage inputs.
All connections to the PQM voltage inputs should be connected using HRC
fuses rated at 2 Amps to ensure adequate interrupting capacity.
CAUTION

2.2.4 CT Inputs Current transformer secondaries of 1 A or 5 A can be used with the PQM for phase and
neutral sensing. Each current input has 3 terminals: 5 A input, 1 A input, and common.
Select either the 1 A or 5 A terminal and common to match the phase CT secondary.
Correct polarity as indicated in the wiring diagrams is essential for correct measurement of
all power quantities.
The CTs selected should be capable of supplying the required current to the total
secondary load, including the PQM burden of 0.1 VA at rated secondary current and the
connection wiring burden.
All PQM internal calculations are based on information measured at the CT and
VT inputs. The accuracy specified in this manual assumes no error contribution
NOTE from the external CTs and VTs. To ensure the greatest accuracy, Instrument
class CTs and VTs are recommended.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–15

ELECTRICAL CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION

2.2.5 Output Relays The basic PQM comes equipped with one output relay; the control option supplies three
additional output relays. The PQM output relays have form C contacts (normally open (NO),
normally closed (NC), and common (COM)). The contact rating for each relay is 5 A resistive
and 5 A inductive at 250 V AC. Consult Section 1.3: Specifications on page –13 for contact
ratings under other conditions. The wiring diagrams show the state of the relay contacts
with no control power applied; that is, when the relays are not energized. Relay contact
wiring depends on how the relay operation is programmed in the S3: OUTPUT RELAYS
setpoint group (see Section 4.4: S3 Output Relays on page –37).
• ALARM RELAY (Terminals 43 / 44 / 45): A selected alarm condition activates the alarm
relay. Alarms can be enabled or disabled for each feature to ensure only desired
conditions cause an alarm. If an alarm is required when control power is not present,
indicating that monitoring is not available, select FAIL-SAFE operation for the alarm
relay through the S3: OUTPUT RELAYS \ ALARM RELAY \ ALARM OPERATION
setpoint. The NC/COM contacts are normally open going to a closed state on an
alarm. If UNLATCHED mode is selected with setpoint
S3: OUTPUT RELAYS \ ALARM RELAY \ ALARM ACTIVATION, the alarm relay
automatically resets when the alarm condition disappears. For LATCHED mode, the
RESET key must be pressed (or serial port reset command received) to reset the
alarm relay. Refer to Section 5.3.1: Alarms on page –21 for all the displayed alarm
messages.
• AUXILIARY RELAYS 1,2,3 (OPTION) (Terminals 34 to 42): Additional output relays can
be configured for most of the alarms listed in Section 5.3.1: Alarms on page –21. When
an alarm feature is assigned to an auxiliary relay, it acts as a control feature. When
the setpoint is exceeded for a control feature, the output relay changes state and the
appropriate AUX LED lights but no indication is given on the display. The auxiliary
relays can also be programmed to function as kWh, kvarh, and kVAh pulse outputs.

2.2.6 Switch Inputs With the control (C) option installed the PQM has four programmable switch inputs that
(Optional) can be used for numerous functions. The figure below shows the internal circuitry of the
switches .

PQM
TYPICAL
ISOLATED SWITCH
POWER TERMINALS
SUPPLY +24VDC
COM

EXTERNAL
SWITCH
FILTER IN

TO LOGIC
OPTO
ISOLATION

10mA
PULSED

FIGURE 2–11: Switch Input Circuit

2–16 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL

Each switch input can be programmed with a 20-character user defined name and can be
selected to accept a normally open or normally closed switch. A list of various functions
that are assignable to switches is shown below, followed by a description of each function.
OFF ALARM RELAY NEW DEMAND PERIOD
SETPOINT ACCESS SELECT ANALOG OUTPUT SELECT ANALOG INPUT
AUX1 RELAY AUX2 RELAY AUX3 RELAY
PULSE INPUT 1 PULSE INPUT 2 PULSE INPUT 3
PULSE INPUT 4 CLEAR ENERGY CLEAR DEMAND

• ALARM RELAY: When a switch input is assigned to the alarm relay, a change in the
switch status produces an alarm condition and the alarm relay activates.
• PULSE INPUT 1 / 2 / 3 / 4: When a switch input is assigned as a pulse input counter,
the PQM counts the number of transitions from open to closed when the input is
configured as normally open and closed to open when the input is configured as
normally closed. The minimum pulse width required for the PQM to read the switch is
150 ms. Therefore, for the PQM to read one pulse, the switch input must be in its
inactive state (closed/open) for a minimum of 150 ms then in its active state (open/
closed) for another 150 ms. See Section 1.3: Specifications on page –13 for more
details.
• NEW DEMAND PERIOD: The PQM can be used for load shedding by assigning a switch
input to a new demand period. This allows the PQM demand period to be
synchronized with the utility meter. One of the billing parameters used by a utility is
peak demand. By synchronizing the PQM to the utility meter, the PQM can monitor the
demand level read by the utility meter and perform load shedding to prevent the
demand from reaching the penalty level. The utility meter provides a dry contact
output which can be connected to one of the PQM switch inputs. When the PQM
senses a contact closure, it starts a new demand period (with Block Interval Demand
calculation only).
• SETPOINT ACCESS: The access terminals must be shorted together in order for the
faceplate keypad to have the ability to store new setpoints. Typically the access
terminals are connected to a security keyswitch to allow authorized access only. Serial
port commands to store new setpoints operate even if the access terminals are not
shorted. When the access terminals are open, all actual and setpoint values can still
be accessed for viewing; however, if an attempt is made to store a new setpoint value,
the message SETPOINT ACCESS DISABLED is displayed and the previous setpoint
remains intact. In this way, all of the programmed setpoints remain secure and
tamper proof.
• SELECT ANALOG OUTPUT: This switch selection allows each analog output to be
multiplexed into two outputs. If the switch is active, the parameter assigned in
setpoint S2 SYSTEM SETUP \ ANALOG OUTPUT 1 \ ANALOG OUTPUT 1 ALT
determines the output level. If the switch is not active, the parameter assigned in
setpoint S2 SYSTEM SETUP \ ANALOG OUTPUT 1 \ ANALOG OUTPUT 1 MAIN is
used. See Sections 2.2.7: Analog Outputs (Optional) below and 4.3.2: Analog Outputs
on page –24 for additional details.
• SELECT ANALOG INPUT: This switch selection allows the analog input to be
multiplexed into two inputs. If the switch is active, the parameter assigned in setpoint
S2 SYSTEM SETUP \ ANALOG INPUT ALT is used to scale the input. If the switch is

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–17

ELECTRICAL CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION

not active, the parameter assigned in setpoint S2 SYSTEM SETUP

\ ANALOG INPUT \ ANALOG INPUT MAIN is used. If a relay is assigned in S2 SYSTEM
SETUP \ ANALOG INPUT \ ANALOG IN MAIN/ALT SELECT RELAY, that relay
energizes when the switch is active and de-energizes when the switch is not active,
thus providing the ability to feed in analog inputs from two separate sources as shown
in the figure below. See Sections 2.2.8: Analog Input (Optional) below and 4.3.3: Analog
Input on page –29 for additional details.

PQM AUX
4-20 mA RELAY
transducer

ANALOG
INPUT
4-20 mA
transducer
823803A4.CDR

FIGURE 2–12: Analog Input Multiplexing

• AUX 1 / 2 / 3 RELAY: When a switch input is assigned to an AUX relay, a closure on the
switch input causes the programmed auxiliary relay to change state. This selection is
available only if the Control (C) option is installed.
• CLEAR ENERGY: When a switch input is assigned to CLEAR ENERGY, a closure on the
switch input will clear all Energy data within the PQM.
• CLEAR DEMAND: When a switch input is assigned to CLEAR DEMAND, a closure on the
switch input will clear all Demand data within the PQM.

2.2.7 Analog The PQM has four current outputs when the transducer option is installed (T20 = 4 to 20
Outputs mA, T1 = 0 to 1 mA in the order code). These outputs can be multiplexed to produce 8
(Optional) analog transducers. This output is a current source suitable for connection to a remote
meter, chart recorder, programmable controller, or computer load. Use the 4 to 20 mA
option with a programmable controller that has a 2 to 40 mA current input. If only a
voltage input is available, use a scaling resistor at the PLC terminals to scale the current to
the equivalent voltage. For example, install a 500 Ω resistor across the terminals of a 0 to
10 V input to make the 4 to 20 mA output correspond to 2 to 10V (R = V / I = 10 V / 0.02 A =
500 Ω). Current levels are not affected by the total lead and load resistance which must not
exceed 600 Ω for the 4 to 20 mA range and 2400 Ω for the 0 to 1 mA range. For readings
greater than full scale the output will saturate at 22 mA (4 to 20 mA) or 1.1 mA (0 to 1 mA).
These analog outputs are isolated and since all output terminals are floating, the
connection of the analog output to a process input will not introduce a ground loop. Part of
the system should be grounded for safety, typically at the programmable controller. For
floating loads (such as a meter), ground Terminal 24 externally.

2–18 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL

The outputs for these transducers can be selected from any of the measured parameters
in the PQM. The choice of output is selected in the
S2 SYSTEM SETUP \ ANALOG OUTPUT 1-4 setpoints group. See Section 4.3.2: Analog
Outputs on page –24 for a list of available parameters. Each analog output can be
assigned two parameters: a main parameter and an alternate parameter. Under normal
operating conditions, the main parameter will appear at the output terminals. To select the
alternate parameter, one of the switch inputs must be assigned to SELECT ANALOG OUT
and the switch input must be closed (assuming normally closed activation). By opening
and closing the switch input, two analog output parameters can be multiplexed on one
output. This effectively achieves 8 analog outputs for the PQM.

823700A1.CDR

FIGURE 2–13: Analog Output

As shown in wiring diagrams on pages –7 to –13, these outputs are at Terminals 25 to 28

and share Terminal 24 as their common. Shielded cable should be used, with only one end
of the shield grounded, to minimize noise effects.
Signals and power supply circuitry are internally isolated, allowing connection to devices
(PLCs, computers, etc.) at ground potentials different from the PQM. Each terminal,
however, is clamped to ±36 V to ground.

2.2.8 Analog Input Terminals 22(–) and 23(+) are provided for a current signal input. This current signal can be
(Optional) used to monitor any external quantity, such as transformer winding temperature, battery
voltage, station service voltage, transformer tap position, etc. Any transducer output
ranges within the range of 0 to 20 mA can be connected to the analog input terminals of
the PQM. See Section 4.3.3: Analog Input on page –29 for details on programming the
analog input.

2.2.9 RS485 Serial A fully loaded PQM is equipped with three serial ports. COM1 is a RS485 port available at
Ports the rear terminals of the PQM which is normally used as the main communications
interface to the system. COM2, which is also a rear RS485 port, can be used for data
collection, printing reports, or problem analysis without disturbing the main
communications interface. COM3 is a front panel RS232 port that can be used for setpoint
programming or recording using the EnerVista PQM Setup software.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–19

ELECTRICAL CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION

A serial port provides communication capabilities between the PQM and a remote
computer, PLC, or distributed control system (DCS). Up to thirty-two PQMs can be daisy
chained together with 24 AWG stranded, shielded, twisted-pair wire on a single
communication channel. Suitable wire should have a characteristic impedance of 120 Ω
(such as Belden #9841). These wires should be routed away from high power AC lines and
other sources of electrical noise. The total length of the communications wiring should not
exceed 4000 feet for reliable operation. Correct polarity is essential for the
communications port to operate. Terminal (485+) of every PQM in a serial communication
link must be connected together. Similarly, terminal (485–) of every PQM must also be
connected together. These polarities are specified for a 0 logic and should match the
polarity of the master device. If the front panel RX1 or RX2 lights are flashing, this indicates
that the PQM is receiving data. If the front panel TX1 or TX2 lights are flashing, this
indicates that the PQM is transmitting data. Each PQM must be daisy-chained to the next
one as shown in FIGURE 2–14: RS485 Communication Wiring. Avoid star or stub connected
configurations. If a large difference in ground potentials exists, communication on the
serial communication link will not be possible. Therefore, it is imperative that the serial
master and PQM are both at the same ground potential. This is accomplished by joining
the 485 ground terminal (Terminal 46 for COM1; Terminal 49 for COM2) of every unit
together and grounding it at the master only.
The last PQM in the chain and the master computer require a terminating resistor and
terminating capacitor to ensure proper electrical matching of the loads and prevent
communication errors. Using terminating resistors on all the PQMs would load down the
communication network while omitting them at the ends could cause reflections resulting
in communication errors. Install the 120 Ω, ¼ watt terminating resistor and 1 nF capacitor
externally. Although any standard resistor and capacitor of these values are suitable, these
components can also be ordered from GE Multilin as a combined terminating network.
Each communication link must have only one computer (PLC or DCS) issuing commands
called the master. The master should be centrally located and can be used to view actual
values and setpoints from each PQM called the slave device. Other GE Multilin relays or
devices using the Modbus RTU protocol can be connected to the communication link.
Setpoints in each slave can also be changed from the master. Each PQM in the link must be
programmed with a different slave address prior to running communications using the
S1 PQM SETUP \ COM1 RS485 SERIAL PORT \ MODBUS COMMUNICATION ADDRESS
setpoint. The EnerVista PQM Setup software, a communications program developed by GE
Multilin, may be used to view status, actual values, and setpoints. See Chapter 6 for more
information on the EnerVista PQM Setup software.

2–20 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL

48

47

46
PQM

PQM

GE Power Management
Protection Relay

SR Series
GE Power Management
Protection Relay

RS485.CDR

FIGURE 2–14: RS485 Communication Wiring

2.2.10 RS232 Front A 9-pin RS232C serial port provided on the front panel allows the user to program the PQM
Panel Port with a personal computer. This port uses the same communication protocol as the rear
terminal RS485 ports. To use this interface, the personal computer must be running the
EnerVista PQM Setup software provided with the relay. Cabling to the RS232 port of the
computer is shown below for both 9-pin and 25-pin connectors.

PQM

PQM

RS232.CDR

FIGURE 2–15: RS232 Connection

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–21

ELECTRICAL CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION

The RS232 port is only available with the display version. See Section 1.2.5: Order
Codes on page –12 for further details.
NOTE

2.2.11 Dielectric It may be required to test the complete switchgear for dielectric strength with the PQM
Strength installed. This is also known as “flash” or “hipot” testing. The PQM is rated for 1500 V AC
Testing isolation between relay contacts, CT inputs, VT inputs, control power inputs and Safety
Ground Terminal 6. Some precautions are necessary to prevent damage to the PQM during
these tests.
Filter networks and transient protection clamps are used between the control power, serial
port, switch inputs, analog outputs, analog input, and the filter ground terminal 5 to filter
out high voltage transients, radio frequency interference (RFI) and electromagnetic
interference (EMI). The filter capacitors and transient absorbers could be damaged by the
continuous high voltages relative to ground that are applied during dielectric strength
testing. Disconnect the Filter Ground Terminal 5 during testing of the control power inputs.
Relay contact and CT terminals do not require any special precautions. Do not perform
dielectric strength testing on the serial ports, switch inputs, analog input or analog
output terminals or the PQM internal circuitry will be damaged.

823826A1

FIGURE 2–16: HI-POT Testing

2–22 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

 GE Consumer & Industrial
Multilin

ACTUAL STORE
PQM Power Quality Meter
Ia = 100 Ib = 102 SETPOINT RESET

Ic = 100 AMPS
MESSAGE

g PQM Power Quality Meter

STATUS COMMUNICATE RELAYS

Chapter 3: Operation
ALARM TX1 ALARM
VALUE
PROGRAM RX1 AUX1

SIMULATION TX2 AUX2

SELF TEST RX2 AUX3

Operation

3.1 Front Panel & Display

3.1.1 Front Panel The local operator interface for setpoint entry and monitoring of measured values is
through the front panel as shown in the figure below. Control keys are used to select the
appropriate message for entering setpoints or displaying measured values. Alarm and
status messages are automatically displayed when required. Indicator LEDs provide
important status information at all times. An RS232 communications port is also available
for uploading or downloading information to the PQM.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–1

FRONT PANEL & DISPLAY CHAPTER 3: OPERATION

ACTUAL STORE

Ia = 100 Ib = 102 SETPOINT RESET

Ic = 100 AMPS
MESSAGE

g PQM Power Quality Meter

STATUS COMMUNICATE RELAYS

ALARM TX1 ALARM

VALUE
PROGRAM RX1 AUX1

SIMULATION TX2 AUX2

SELF TEST RX2 AUX3

FIGURE 3–1: Front Panel

3.1.2 Display All messages are displayed in English on the 40-character liquid crystal display. This
display is visible under varied lighting conditions. When the keypad and display are not
actively being used, the screen displays a default status message. This message appears if
no key has been pressed for the time programmed in the
S1 PQM SETUP \ PREFERENCES \ DEFAULT MESSAGE TIME setpoint. Note that alarm
condition messages automatically override the default messages.

FIGURE 3–2: Display

3–2 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 3: OPERATION STATUS INDICATORS

3.2 Status Indicators

3.2.1 Description The status indicators provide a quick indication of the overall status of the PQM. These
indicators illuminate if an alarm is present, if setpoint access is enabled, if the PQM is in
simulation mode, or if there is a problem with the PQM itself.

FIGURE 3–3: STATUS INDICATORS

3.2.2 Status • ALARM: When an alarm condition exists, the ALARM indicator will flash.
• PROGRAM: The PROGRAM indicator will be on when setpoint access is enabled.
• SIMULATION: The SIMULATION indicator will be on when the PQM is using simulated
values for current, voltage, analog input, switches and analog outputs. While in
simulation mode, the PQM will ignore the measured parameters detected at its inputs
and will use the simulated values stored in the S5 TESTING \ SIMULATION setpoints
group.
• SELF TEST: Any abnormal condition detected during PQM self-monitoring, such as a
hardware failure, causes the SELF TEST indicator to be on. Loss of control power to the
PQM also causes the SELF TEST indicator to turn on, indicating that no metering is
present.

3.2.3 Communicate The COMMUNICATE indicators monitor the status of the RS485 communication ports.
When no serial data is being received through the rear serial ports terminals, the RX1/2
indicators are off. This situation occurs if there is no connection, the serial wires become
disconnected, or the master computer is inactive. If there is activity on the serial port but
the PQM is not receiving valid messages for its internally programmed address, the TX1/2
indicators remain off. This condition can be caused by incorrect message formats (such as
baud rate or framing), reversed polarity of the two RS485 twisted-pair connections, or the
master not sending the currently programmed PQM address. If the PQM is being
periodically addressed with a valid message, the RX1/2 indicator will turn on followed by
the TX1/2 indicator.
• TX1: The PQM is transmitting information via the COM1 RS485 communications port
when lit.
• RX1: The PQM is receiving information via the COM1 RS485 communications port
when lit.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–3

STATUS INDICATORS CHAPTER 3: OPERATION

• TX2: The PQM is transmitting information via the COM2 RS485 communications port
when lit.
• RX2: The PQM is receiving information via the COM2 RS485 communications port
when lit.

3.2.4 Relays The status of the output relays is displayed with these indicators.
• ALARM: The ALARM relay is intended for general purpose alarm outputs. This indicator
is on while the ALARM relay is operating. When the condition clears, the ALARM
indicator turns off. If the alarm relay has been programmed as latched, the alarm
condition can only be cleared by pressing the RESET key or by issuing a computer
reset command.
• AUX1: The AUX 1 relay is intended for control and customer specific requirements. The
AUX 1 indicator is on while the AUXILIARY 1 relay is operating.
• AUX2: The AUX 2 relay is intended for control and customer specific requirements. The
AUX 2 indicator is on while the AUXILIARY 2 relay is operating.
• AUX3: The AUX 3 relay is intended for control and customer specific requirements. The
AUX 3 indicator is on while the AUXILIARY 3 relay is operating.

3–4 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 3: OPERATION KEYPAD

3.3 Keypad

3.3.1 Description

FIGURE 3–4: Front Panel Keys

3.3.2 Setpoint Key Setpoints are arranged into groups of related messages called setpoint pages. Each time
the SETPOINT key is pressed, the display advances to the first message of the next page of
setpoints. Pressing SETPOINT while in the middle of a setpoints page advances the display
to the beginning of the next page. The MESSAGE and MESSAGE keys move
between messages within a page.

3.3.3 Actual Key Measured values and collected data messages are arranged into groups of related
messages called actual values pages. Each time the ACTUAL key is pressed, the display
advances to the first message of the next page of actual values. Pressing ACTUAL while
in the middle of a page of actual values advances the display to the beginning of the next
page. The MESSAGE and MESSAGE keys move between messages within a page.

3.3.4 Store Key When programming setpoints, enter the new value using the VALUE and VALUE
keys, followed by the STORE key. Setpoint programming must be enabled for the
STORE key to store the edited value. An acknowledgment message will flash if the new
setpoint is successfully saved in non-volatile memory. The STORE key is also used to add
and remove user defined default messages. Refer to Section 3.4: Default Messages on
page –9 for further details.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–5

KEYPAD CHAPTER 3: OPERATION

3.3.5 Reset Key The RESET key is used to clear the latched alarm and/or auxiliary conditions. Upon
pressing the key, the PQM will perform the appropriate action based on the condition
present as shown in the table below.

Table 3–1: Reset Key Actions

CONDITION PRESENT MESSAGE DISPLAYED PQM ACTION PERFORMED

None No action taken

ALARM indicators and

RESET NOT POSSIBLE alarm relay remain on
Alarm
ALARM STILL PRESENT because condition is still
present

AUXILIARY indicator(s) and

RESET NOT POSSIBLE aux relay(s) remain on
Aux Relay
AUX CONDITION EXISTS because condition is still
present

AUXILIARY and ALARM

indicators and alarm and
Alarm and Aux Relay RESET NOT POSSIBLE aux relays remain on
AUX CONDITION EXISTS because condition is still
present

Latched Alarm No message displayed, and

(condition no longer ALARM indicators and the
exists) alarm relay turned off

No message displayed, and

Latched Aux Relay
AUXILIARY indicator and
(condition no longer
the appropriate aux relay(s)
exists)
turned off

No message displayed, and

Alarm and Latched Aux appropriate AUXILIARY
Relay (Aux condition no
indicator(s) and aux relay(s)
longer exists) turned off

Aux Relay and Latched No message displayed, and

Alarm (alarm condition ALARM indicators and
no longer exists) alarm relay turned off

The RESET key, along with the STORE key, is also used to remove user defined
default messages. Refer to Section 3.4: Default Messages on page –9 for further details.

3.3.6 Message Keys To move between message groups within a page use the MESSAGE and MESSAGE
keys. The MESSAGE key moves toward the end of the page and the MESSAGE key
moves toward the beginning of the page. A page header message will appear at the
beginning of each page and a page footer message will appear at the end of each page.

3–6 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 3: OPERATION KEYPAD

To select messages within a subgroup press MESSAGE . To back out of the subgroup,
press MESSAGE to access the previous message or MESSAGE to go to the next
subgroup.

SETPOINT SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S1 PQM SETUP ]] S2 SYSTEM SETUP

M
E
MESSAGE ▲ MOVES BACK S MOVES FORWARD
S
WITHIN SUBGROUP A WITHIN SUBGROUP
MESSAGE ▼ G
E

MESSAGE4

] PREFERENCES DEFAULT MESSAGE TIME

] 1.0 MINUTES
MOVES TO
PREVIOUS DEFAULT MESSAGE
SUBGROUP MESSAGE3 BRIGHTNESS: 60%

MESSAGE ▲ NOTE: The brightness setpoint only has an effect on

MESSAGE PQMs with older hardware revisions that include a
MESSAGE ▼ vacuum flourescent display (VFD), not a liquid crystal
display (LCD).
MOVES
TO NEXT MESSAGE4
SUBGROUP

] COM1 RS485 MODBUS COMMUNICATION

] SERIAL PORT ADDRESS: 1

COM1 BAUD RATE:

MESSAGE3 9600 BAUD

MESSAGE ▲ COM 1 PARITY: NONE

MESSAGE ▼

MSGKEYOP.VSD

FIGURE 3–5: Message Key Operation

3.3.7 Value Keys Setpoint values are entered using the VALUE and VALUE keys. When a setpoint
is displayed calling for a yes/no response, each time VALUE or VALUE is
pressed, the "Yes" becomes a "No," or the "No" becomes a "Yes." Similarly, for multiple
choice selections, each time VALUE or VALUE is pressed, the next choice is
displayed. When numeric values are displayed, each time VALUE is pressed, the
value increases by the step increment, up to the maximum. Hold the key down to rapidly
change the value.

3.3.8 Data Entry a) Keypad Entry

Methods Press the SETPOINT key once and the first page of setpoints is displayed. Press SETPOINT
several times to move to the top of successive pages. A header message with two bars in
the first two character positions is the start of a new page. The page number and page title
appear on the second line. All setpoint page headers are numbered with an ‘S’ prefix.
Actual value page headers are numbered with an ‘A’ prefix.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–7

KEYPAD CHAPTER 3: OPERATION

The messages are organized into logical subgroups within each Setpoints and Actual
Values page as shown below.
Press the MESSAGE / MESSAGE key when displaying a subgroup to access messages
within that subgroup. Otherwise select the MESSAGE and MESSAGE keys to
display the next subgroup.

]] ]
]] ]

PAGE HEADER SUBGROUP HEADER MESSAGE WITHIN

MESSAGE MESSAGE SUBGROUP

b) Computer Entry
When running EnerVista PQM Setup, setpoint values are grouped together on a screen. The
data is organized in a system of menus. See Chapter 6: SOFTWARE for further details.

c) Scada Entry
Details of the complete communication protocol for reading and writing setpoints are
given in Chapter 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS. A SCADA system connected to the RS485
terminals can be custom programmed to make use of any of the communication
commands for remote setpoint programming, monitoring, and control.

3.3.9 Setpoint The PQM incorporates software security to provide protection against unauthorized
Access setpoint changes. A numeric access code must be entered to program new setpoints using
Security the front panel keys. To enable the setpoint access security feature, the user must enter a
value in the range of 1 to 999. The factory default access code is 1. If the switch option is
installed in the PQM, a hardware jumper access can be assigned to a switch input. Setpoint
access can then only be enabled if the switch input is shorted and the correct software
access code entered. Attempts to enter a new setpoint without the electrical connection
across the setpoint access terminals or without the correct access code will result in an
error message. When setpoint programming is via a computer, no setpoint access jumper
is required. If a SCADA system is used for PQM programming, it is up to the programmer to
design in appropriate passcode security.

3–8 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 3: OPERATION DEFAULT MESSAGES

3.4 Default Messages

3.4.1 Description Up to 10 default messages can be selected to display sequentially when the PQM is left
unattended. If no keys are pressed for the default message time in the
S1 PQM SETUP \ PREFERENCES \ DEFAULT MESSAGE TIME setpoint, then the currently
displayed message will automatically be overwritten by the first default message. After
three seconds, the next default message in the sequence will display if more than one is
selected. Alarm messages will override the default message display. Any setpoint or
measured value can be selected as a default message.
Messages are displayed in the order they are selected.

3.4.2 Adding a Use the MESSAGE and MESSAGE keys to display any setpoint or actual value
Default message to be added to the default message queue and follow the steps shown below.
Message When selecting a setpoint message for display as a default, do not modify the value using
the VALUE and VALUE keys or the PQM will recognize the STORE key as
storing a setpoint instead of selecting a default message

STORE

STORE STORE

THREE PHASE REAL TO ADD THIS DEFAULT NEW DEFAULT

POWER = 1000 kW MESSAGE PRESS STORE MESSAGE SELECTED
ACTUAL VALUE OR SETPOINT DISPLAYED FOR 3 SECONDS DISPLAYED FOR 3 SECONDS
TO BE STORED AS DEFAULT WHEN STORE KEY PRESSED WHEN STORE KEY PRESSED
MESSAGE TWICE
ADEFMSG.VSD

If 10 default messages are already selected, the first message is erased and the new
message is added to the end of the queue.

3.4.3 Deleting a Use the MESSAGE / MESSAGE keys to display the default message to be erased. If
Default default messages are not known, wait until the PQM starts to display them and then write
Message them down. If no default messages have been programmed, the PQM will remain on the
current message and the display dims to the level assigned in
S1 PQM SETUP \ PREFERENCES \ DEFAULT MESSAGE BRIGHTNESS after the
DEFAULT MESSAGE TIME delay expires. Use the MESSAGE / MESSAGE keys to display
the setpoint or actual value message to be deleted from the default message queue and
follow the steps below.
The DEFAULT MESSAGE BRIGHTNESS setpoint is only applicable for PQMs
with older hardware revisions that include a vacuum fluorescent display
NOTE (VFD), not a liquid crystal display (LCD).

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–9

DEFAULT MESSAGES CHAPTER 3: OPERATION

STORE VALID DEFAULT

STORE
MESSAGE
RESET
THREE PHASE REAL TO DELETE THIS DEFAULT MESSAGE
POWER = 1000 kW MESSAGE PRESS STORE REMOVED

ACTUAL VALUE OR SETPOINT DISPLAYED FOR 3 SECONDS DISPLAYED FOR 3 SECONDS

TO BE REMOVED FROM THE WHEN STORE KEY AND RESET WHEN STORE KEY PRESSED
DEFAULT MESSAGE QUEUE KEY ARE PRESSED IN SEQUENCE

NOT A DEFAULT
MESSAGE

NOT A SELECTED
DEFAULT MESSAGE
REDEFMSG.VSD
DISPLAYED FOR 3 SECONDS WHEN
STORE KEY AND RESET KEY ARE
PRESSED IN SEQUENCE

Each PQM is pre-programmed with five default messages as shown below. Note, each time
the factory setpoints are reloaded the user programmed default messages are overwritten
with these messages.
The PQM will scroll through the default messages in the sequence shown.

A= 100 B= 100
Location: ACTUAL VALUES A1 METERING\CURRENT
C= 100 AMPS

Van = 120 Vbn = 120

Location: ACTUAL VALUES A1 METERING\POWER
Vcn= 120 V

FREQUENCY = 60.00 Hz
Location: ACTUAL VALUES A1 METERING\FREQUENCY

TIME: 12:00:00am
Location: ACTUAL VALUES A2 STATUS\CLOCK
DATE: JAN 01 1996

Phone: 905-294-6222
Location: ACTUAL VALUES A2 STATUS\PROGRAMMABLE MESSAGE
www.GEmultil in.com

3–10 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

 GE Consumer & Industrial
Multilin

ACTUAL STORE
PQM Power Quality Meter
Ia = 100 Ib = 102 SETPOINT RESET

Ic = 100 AMPS
MESSAGE

g PQM Power Quality Meter

Chapter 4: Programming
STATUS COMMUNICATE RELAYS

ALARM TX1 ALARM

VALUE
PROGRAM RX1 AUX1

SIMULATION TX2 AUX2

SELF TEST RX2 AUX3

Programming

4.1 Introduction

4.1.1 Setpoint Entry Prior to operating the PQM, it is necessary to enter setpoints defining system
Methods characteristics and alarm settings via one of the following methods:
1. Front panel, using the keys and display.
2. Rear terminal RS485 port COM1 or COM2, or front RS232 port and a computer
running the EnerVista PQM Setup communication program available from GE
Multilin or from a SCADA system running user-written software.
Any of the above methods can be used to enter the same information. However, a
computer makes entry considerably easier. Moreover, a computer allows setpoint files to
be stored and downloaded for fast, error-free entry. To facilitate this process, the EnerVista
PQM Setup programming software is available from GE Multilin. With this software installed
on a portable computer, all setpoints can be downloaded to the PQM. Refer to Chapter 6
for additional details.
Setpoint messages are organized into logical groups or pages for easy reference.
Messages may vary somewhat from those illustrated because of installed options. Also,
some messages associated with disabled features are hidden. This context sensitive
operation eliminates confusing detail. Before accurate monitoring can begin, the setpoints
on each page should be worked through, entering values either by local keypad or
computer.
The PQM leaves the factory with setpoints programmed to default values. These values are
shown in all the setpoint message illustrations. Many of these factory default values can be
left unchanged. At a minimum however, setpoints that are shown shaded in Section 4.3.1:
Current/Voltage Configuration on page –21 must be entered for the system to function
correctly. In order to safeguard against the installation of a PQM whose setpoints have not
been entered, the PQM will alarm and lock out until the values have been entered for these
setpoints. The CRITICAL SETPOINTS NOT STORED alarm message is present until the PQM
is programmed with these critical setpoints.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–1

INTRODUCTION CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

SETPOINT SETPOINT SETPOINT SETPOINT SETPOINT

]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS

]] S1 PQM SETUP ]] S2 SYSTEM SETUP ]] S3 OUTPUT RELAYS ]] S4 ALARMS/CONTROL ]] S5 TESTING

MESSAGE ▼ MESSAGE ▼ MESSAGE ▼ MESSAGE ▼ MESSAGE ▼

] PREFERENCES ] CURRENT/VOLTAGE ] ALARM RELAY ] CURRENT/VOLTAGE ] TEST RELAYS & LEDS

] ] CONFIGURATION ] ] ]

] SETPOINT ACCESS ] ANALOG OUTPUT 1 ] AUXILIARY RELAY 1 ] TOTAL HARMONIC ] CURRENT/VOLTAGE

] ] ] ] DISTORTION ] SIMULATION

] COM 1 RS485 ] ANALOG OUTPUT 2 ] AUXILIARY RELAY 2 ] FREQUENCY ] ANALOG OUTPUTS

] SERIAL PORT ] ] ] ] SIMULATION

] COM 2 RS485 ] ANALOG OUTPUT 3 ] AUXILIARY RELAY 3 ] POWER ] ANALOG INPUT

] SERIAL PORT ] ] ] ] SIMULATION

] FRONT PANEL RS232 ] ANALOG OUTPUT 4 ] POWER FACTOR ] SWITCH INPUTS

] SERIAL PORT ] ] ] SIMULATION

] DNP 3.0 ] ANALOG INPUT ] DEMAND ] FACTORY

] CONFIGURATION ] ] ] USE ONLY

] CLOCK ] SWITCH INPUT A ] PULSE INPUT

] ] ]

] CALCULATION ] SWITCH INPUT B ] TIME

] PARAMETERS ] ]

] CLEAR DATA ] SWITCH INPUT C ] MISCELLANEOUS

] ] ]

] EVENT ] SWITCH INPUT D

] RECORDER ]

] TRACE MEMORY ] PULSE OUTPUT

] ]

] PROGRAMMABLE ] PULSE INPUT

] MESSAGE ]

] PRODUCT OPTIONS ] DATA LOGGER

] ]

FIGURE 4–1: Setpoint Message Organization

4–2 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING S1 PQM SETUP

4.2 S1 PQM Setup

4.2.1 Description Settings to configure the PQM itself are entered on this page. This includes user
preferences, the RS485 and RS232 communication ports, loading of factory defaults, and
user programmable messages.

4.2.2 Preferences

SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S1 PQM SETUP ]] S2 SYSTEM SETUP
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

MESSAGE

] PREFERENCES DEFAULT MESSAGE TIME Range: 0.1 to 120.0, OFF

] 1.0 MINUTES Step: 0.1 min.

DEFAULT MESSAGE Range: 0 to 100%

MESSAGE MESSAGE
BRIGHTNESS: 60% Step: 20%
MESSAGE
DISPLAY FILTER Range: 1 to 10
CONSTANT: 4 Step: 1

FIGURE 4–2: Setpoints Page 1 – PQM Setup \ Preferences

• DEFAULT MESSAGE TIME: Up to 10 default messages can be selected to automatically

scan sequentially when the PQM is left unattended. If no keys are pressed for the
default message time set with this setpoint, then the currently displayed message is
automatically overwritten by the first default message. After 3 seconds, the next
default message in the sequence displays if more than one is selected. Alarm
messages always override the default message display. Note that any setpoint or
measured value can be selected as a default message.
• DEFAULT MESSAGE BRIGHTNESS: The brightness of the displayed messages can be
varied with this setpoint. This brightness will be used when the default messages are
being displayed. The brightness defaults back to 100% when:
• an alarm is present
• any one of the keys on the PQM keypad is pressed
• the PQM is turned off and on
• a text display message is sent through the serial port.
When DEFAULT MESSAGE TIME is set to OFF, the brightness adjusts to the
programmed level after 5 minutes have elapsed, since the PQM keys were last pressed
assuming no alarm is present. If no default messages are programmed, the currently
message remains displayed and the display brightness adjusts to the programmed
level after the programmed time in the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIME setpoint has
elapsed.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–3

S1 PQM SETUP CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

The DEFAULT MESSAGE BRIGHTNESS setpoint is only applicable for PQMs

with older hardware revisions that include a vacuum fluorescent display
NOTE (VFD), not a liquid crystal display (LCD).

• DISPLAY FILTER CONSTANT: Display filtering may be required in applications where

large fluctuations in currents and/or voltages are normally present. This setpoint
allows the user to enter the PQM filter constant to average all metered values. If the
DISPLAY FILTER CONSTANT setpoint is set to 1, the PQM updates the displayed
metered values approximately every 400 ms. Therefore, the display updating equals
DISPLAY FILTER CONSTANT × 400 ms.

4.2.3 Setpoint
Access

SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S1 PQM SETUP ]] S2 SYSTEM SETUP

] PREFERENCES
]

MESSAGE
MESSAGE

MESSAGE

] SETPOINT ACCESS SETPOINT ACCESS: Range: DISABLE, ENABLE

] DISABLE
ENTER SETPOINT Range: 1 to 999
MESSAGE MESSAGE
ACCESS CODE: 0 Step: 1
MESSAGE
SETPOINT ACCESS ON Range: 1 to 300 min. or UNLIMITED
FOR: 5 min. Step: 1
CHANGE SETPOINT Range: NO, YES
ACCESS CODE: NO
ENTER NEW ACCESS Range: 1 to 999
CODE: 0 Step: 1

RE-ENTER NEW ACCESS Range: 1 to 999

CODE: 0 Step: 1

ENCRYPTED ACCESS
CODE: 376

FIGURE 4–3: Setpoints Page 1 – PQM Setup / Setpoint Access

4–4 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING S1 PQM SETUP

To enable setpoint access, follow the steps outlined in the diagram below:

STORE STORE

SETPOINT ACCESS: ENTER SETPOINT SETPOINT ACCESS ON

ENABLE ACCESS CODE: 1 FOR: 5 min.
CORRECT
CODE

INCORRECT
CODE

INCORRECT CODE
SETACCEN.VSD

The factory default access code for the PQM is 1.

If three attempts are made to enable setpoint access with an incorrect code, the value of
the SETPOINT ACCESS setpoint changes to DISABLED and the above procedure must be
repeated.
Once setpoint access is enabled, the PROGRAM status indicator turns on. Setpoint
alterations are allowed as long as the PROGRAM status indicator remains on. Setpoint
access is be disabled and the PROGRAM status indicator turns off when:
• The time programmed in S1 PQM SETUP \ SETPOINT ACCESS \ SETPOINT
ACCESS ON FOR is reached
• The control power to the PQM is removed
• The factory setpoints are reloaded
To permanently enable the setpoint access feature, enable setpoint access and then set
SETPOINT ACCESS ON FOR to UNLIMITED. Setpoint access remains enabled even if the
control power is removed from the PQM.
Setpoints can be changed via the serial ports regardless of the state of the
setpoint access feature or the state of an input switch assigned to setpoint
NOTE access.

To change the setpoint access code, enable setpoint access and perform the steps as
outlined below:

STORE STORE

CHANGE SETPOINT ENTER SETPOINT RE-ENTER SETPOINT

ACCESS CODE: YES ACCESS CODE: 4 ACCESS CODE: 4
SAVCCCD.VSD

If an attempt is made to change a setpoint when setpoint access is disabled, the

SETPOINT ACCESS: DISABLED message is displayed to allow setpoint access to be
enabled. Once setpoint access has been enabled, the PQM display will return to the original
setpoint message.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–5

S1 PQM SETUP CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

If the control option is installed and one of the switches is assigned to SETPOINT ACCESS,
the setpoint access switch and the software setpoint access will act as a logic AND. That is,
both conditions must be satisfied before setpoint access will be enabled. Assuming the
setpoint access switch activation is set to closed, the following flash messages will appear
depending upon the condition present when the store key is pressed.

Table 4–1: Setpoint Access Conditions

CONDITION DISPLAYED MESSAGE

ACCESS CODE SWITCH INPUT

INCORRECT OPEN SETPOINT ACCESS OFF

ENTER ACCESS CODE

INCORRECT CLOSED SETPOINT ACCESS OFF

ENTER ACCESS CODE

CORRECT OPEN CANNOT ALTER SETTING

ACCESS SW. DISABLED

CORRECT CLOSED NEW SETPOINT

STORED

4–6 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING S1 PQM SETUP

4.2.4 RS485/RS232
Serial Ports
SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S1 PQM SETUP ]] S2 SYSTEM SETUP

] PREFERENCES
]

] SETPOINT ACCESS
]

MESSAGE

] COM1 RS485 MODBUS COMMUNICATION Range: 1 to 255; Step 1

] SERIAL PORT ADDRESS: 1
COM1 BAUD RATE: Range: 1200, 2400, 4800,
MESSAGE
9600 BAUD 9600, 19200
MESSAGE
COM1 PARITY: NONE Range: NONE, EVEN,
ODD

MESSAGE

Range: 1200, 2400, 4800,

] COM2 RS485 COM2 BAUD RATE:
9600, 19200
] SERIAL PORT 9600 BAUD
COM2 PARITY: NONE Range: NONE, EVEN,
MESSAGE ODD
MESSAGE

MESSAGE

] FRONT PANEL RS232 RS232 BAUD RATE: Range: 1200, 2400, 4800,
] SERIAL PORT 9600 BAUD 9600, 19200

RS232 PARITY: NONE Range: NONE, EVEN,

ODD

FIGURE 4–4: Setpoints Page 1 – PQM Setup / Communication Ports

• MODBUS COMMUNICATION ADDRESS: Enter a unique address from 1 to 255 for the
PQM. The selected address is used for all three serial communication ports. A message
sent with address 0 is a broadcast message to which all PQMs will listen but not
respond. Although addresses do not have to be sequential, no two PQMs can have the
same address or there will be conflicts resulting in errors. Generally, each PQM added
to the link will use the next higher address, starting from address 1.
• BAUD RATE: Enter the baud rate for each port: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200 baud. All
PQMs and the computer on the RS485 communication link must run at the same baud
rate. The fastest response is obtained at 19200 baud. Use slower baud rates if noise
becomes a problem. The data frame consists of 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit and a
programmable parity bit. The BAUD RATE default setting is 9600.
• PARITY: Enter the parity for each communication port: EVEN, ODD, or NONE. All PQMs
on the RS485 communication link and the computer connecting them must have the
same parity.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–7

S1 PQM SETUP CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

4.2.5 DNP 3.0

Configuration

SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S1 PQM SETUP ]] S2 SYSTEM SETUP

] PREFERENCES
]

] SETPOINT ACCESS
]

] COM1 RS485
] SERIAL PORT

] COM2 RS485
] SERIAL PORT

] FRONT PANEL RS232

] SERIAL PORT

MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] DNP 3.0 DNP PORT: NONE Range: NONE, RS232,

COM1, COM2
] CONFIGURATION
DNP SLAVE ADDRESS: Range: 0 to 255; Step 1
0
DNP TURNAROUND TIME: Range 0 to 100 ms; Step 10
0 ms

FIGURE 4–5: Setpoints Page 1 – PQM Setup / DNP Communications

• DNP PORT: Select the appropriate PQM port to be used for DNP protocol. The COM2
selection is only available if T1 or T20 option is installed in the PQM. Each port is
configured as shown in FIGURE 4–4: Setpoints Page 1 – PQM Setup / Communication
Ports on page 4–7.
• DNP SLAVE ADDRESS: Enter a unique address from 0 to 255 for this particular PQM.
The address selected is applied to the PQM port currently assigned to communicate
using the DNP protocol. Although addresses do not have to be sequential, no two
PQMs that are daisy chained together can have the same address or there will be
conflicts resulting in errors. Generally each PQM added to the link will use the next
higher address.
• DNP TURNAROUND TIME: Set the turnaround time to zero if the RS232 port is being
used. The turnaround time is useful in applications where the RS485 converter without
RTS or DTR switching is being employed. A typical value for the delay is 30 ms to allow
the transmitter to drop in the RS485 convertor.

4–8 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING S1 PQM SETUP

4.2.6 Clock

SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S1 PQM SETUP ]] S2 SYSTEM SETUP

] PREFERENCES
]

MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] FRONT PANEL RS232

] SERIAL PORT

] DNP 3.0
] CONFIGURATION

MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] CLOCK SET TIME hh:mm:ss

] 12:00:00 am DATE->
SET DATE mm:dd:yyyy
Jan 01, 1996

FIGURE 4–6: Setpoints Page 1 – PQM Setup / Clock

• SET TIME/DATE: These messages are used to set the time and date for the PQM
software clock.
The PQM software clock is retained for power interruptions of approximately one hour. A
CLOCK NOT SET alarm can be enabled so that an alarm will occur on the loss of clock data.
The time and date are used for all time-stamped data. If the clock has not been set, a “?”
will appear on the right-hand side of the displayed time for all time-stamped data. Follow
the steps shown below to set the new time and date. The time and date can also be set via
Modbus communications. Refer to section 7.2.10 FUNCTION CODE 16 - BROADCAST
COMMAND for an example

MESSAGE MESSAGE

SET TIME hh:mm:ss SET TIME hh:mm:ss SET TIME hh:mm:ss

12:00:00 am DATE-> 03:00:00 am DATE-> 03:35:00 am DATE->
VALUE

MESSAGE
USE THE VALUE MESSAGE STORE
KEYS TO SELECT
THE UNDERLINED SET DATE mm:dd:yyyy NEW TIME SET TIME hh:mm:ss
QUANTITIES Jan 01, 1996 HAS BEEN STORED 03:35:55 am DATE->

MESSAGE
MESSAGE STORE

SET DATE mm:dd:yyyy SET DATE mm:dd:yyyy NEW DATE

Oct 01, 1996 Jan 01, 1997 HAS BEEN STORED

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–9

S1 PQM SETUP CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

4.2.7 Calculation The PQM can be programmed to calculate metering quantities and demand by various
Parameters methods.

SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S1 PQM SETUP ]] S2 SYSTEM SETUP

] PREFERENCES
]

MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] CLOCK
] MESSAGE

] CALCULATION EXTRACT FUNDAMENTAL: Range: ENABLE, DISABLE

] PARAMETERS DISABLE
Range:THERMAL EXPONENTIAL,
CURRENT DEMAND TYPE: ROLLING INTERVAL, BLOCK
THERMAL EXPONENTIAL INTERVAL
CURRENT DEMAND TIME Range: 5 to 180 min.; Step: 1 min.
INTERVAL: 30 min
Range:THERMAL EXPONENTIAL,
POWER DEMAND TYPE: ROLLING INTERVAL, BLOCK
THERMAL EXPONENTIAL INTERVAL
POWER DEMAND TIME Range: 5 to 180 min.; Step: 1 min.
INTERVAL: 30 min
ENERGY COST PER kWh: Range: 0.01 to 5 00.00 cents
10.00 cents Step: 0.01 cents
TARIFF PERIOD 1 Range: 0 to 1439 min.; Step: 1 min.
START TIME: 0 min.
TARIFF PERIOD 1 COST Range: 0.01 to 5 00.00 cents
PER KWH: 10.00 cents Step: 0.01 cents
TARIFF PERIOD 2
Range: 0 to 1439 min.; Step: 1 min.
START TIME: 0 min.
TARIFF PERIOD 2 COST Range: 0.01 to 5 00.00 cents
PER KWH: 10.00 cents Step: 0.01 cents
TARIFF PERIOD 3 Range: 0 to 1439 min.
START TIME: 0 min. Step: 1 min.
TARIFF PERIOD 3 COST Range: 0.01 to 5 00.00 cents
PER KWH: 10.00 cents Step: 0.01 cents

FIGURE 4–7: Setpoints Page 1 – PQM Setup / Calculation Parameters

• EXTRACT FUNDAMENTAL: The PQM can be programmed to calculate all metering

quantities using true RMS values or the fundamental component of the sampled data.
When this setpoint is set to DISABLE, the PQM will include all harmonic content, up to
the 32nd harmonic, when making metering calculations. When this setpoint is set to
ENABLE, the PQM will extract the fundamental contribution of the sampled data only
and use this contribution to calculate all metering quantities. Many utilities base their
metering upon fundamental, or displacement, values. Using the fundamental
contribution allows one to compare the quantities measured by the PQM with the
local utility meter.

4–10 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING S1 PQM SETUP

• DEMAND: The PQM calculates demand using the three methods described in the table
below.

METHOD DESCRIPTION

This selection emulates the action of an analog peak-recording thermal demand

meter. The PQM measures the average quantity (RMS current, real power, reactive
power, or apparent power) on each phase every minute and assumes the circuit
quantity remains at this value until updated by the next measurement. It calculates
the “thermal demand equivalent” based on the following equation:
– kt
d (t ) = D ( 1 – e )d = demand value after applying input quantity for time t (in min.)
D = input quantity (constant)
k = 2.3 / thermal 90% response time
100

Thermal 80
Exponential Demand (%) 60
40
20
0
0 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30
Time (min)
The above graph shows the thermal response characteristic for a thermal 90%
response time of 15 minutes. A setpoint establishes the time to reach 90% of a
steady-state value, just as the response time of an analog instrument (a steady-state
value applied for twice the response time will indicate 99% of the value).

This selection calculates a linear average of the quantity (RMS current, real power,
Block
Interval reactive power, or apparent power) over the programmed demand TIME INTERVAL .
Each new value of demand becomes available at the end of each time interval.

This selection calculates a linear average of the quantity (RMS current, real power,
Rolling reactive power, or apparent power) over the programmed demand TIME INTERVAL (in
Demand the same way as Block Interval). The value is updated every minute and indicates the
demand over the time interval just preceding the time of update.

• CURRENT DEMAND TYPE: Three current demand calculation methods are available:
thermal exponential, block interval, and rolling demand (see the table above). The
current demand for each phase and neutral is calculated individually.
• CURRENT DEMAND TIME INTERVAL: Enter the time period over which the current
demand calculation is to be performed.
• POWER DEMAND TYPE: Three real/reactive/apparent power demand calculation
methods are available: thermal exponential, block interval, and rolling demand (see
the table above). The three phase real/reactive/apparent power demand is calculated.
• POWER DEMAND TIME INTERVAL: Enter the time period over which the power
demand calculation is to be performed.
• ENERGY COST PER kWh: Enter the cost per kWh that is charged by the local utility.
• TARIFF PERIOD START TIME: Enter the start time for each of the three tariff period
calculations.
• TARIFF PERIOD COST PER KWH: Enter the cost per kWh for each of the three tariff
periods.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–11

S1 PQM SETUP CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

4.2.8 Clear Data

SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S1 PQM SETUP ]] S2 SYSTEM SETUP

] PREFERENCES
]

] CALCULATION
] PARAMETERS

MESSAGE
MESSAGE MESSAGE

CLEAR ENERGY Range: YES, NO

] CLEAR DATA
] VALUES: NO
CLEAR MAX DEMAND Range: YES, NO
VALUES: NO
CLEAR ALL DEMAND Range: YES, NO
VALUES: NO
CLEAR MIN/MAX Range: YES, NO
CURRENT VALUES: NO
Range: YES, NO
CLEAR MIN/MAX
VOLTAGE VALUES: NO
CLEAR MIN/MAX Range: YES, NO
POWER VALUES: NO
CLEAR MIN/MAX Range: YES, NO
FREQUENCY VALUES: NO
CLEAR MAX THD Range: YES, NO
VALUES: NO
CLEAR PULSE INPUT Range: YES, NO
VALUES: NO
CLEAR EVENT RECORD: Range: YES, NO
NO
LOAD FACTORY DEFAULT Range: YES, NO
SETPOINTS: NO

FIGURE 4–8: Setpoints Page 1 – PQM Setup / Clear Data

• CLEAR ENERGY VALUES: Enter YES to clear all the energy used data under the actual
values subgroup A1 METERING \ ENERGY. The TIME OF LAST RESET date under the
same subgroup is updated to the current date upon issuing this command.
• CLEAR MAX DEMAND VALUES: Enter YES to clear all the max power and current
demand data under the actual values subgroup A1 METERING \ DEMAND. The time
and date associated with each message will be updated to the current date upon
issuing this command.
• CLEAR ALL DEMAND VALUES: Enter YES to clear all the power and current demand
data under the actual values subgroup A1 METERING \ DEMAND. The time and date
associated with each message will be updated to the current date upon issuing this
command.
• CLEAR MIN/MAX CURRENT VALUES: Enter YES to clear all the min./max current data
under the actual values subgroup A1 METERING \ CURRENT. The time and date

4–12 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING S1 PQM SETUP

associated with each message will be updated to the current date upon issuing this
command.
• CLEAR MIN/MAX VOLTAGE VALUES: Enter YES to clear all the min./max voltage data
under the actual values subgroup A1 METERING \ VOLTAGE. The time and date
associated with each message will be updated to the current date upon issuing this
command.
• CLEAR MIN/MAX POWER VALUES: Enter YES to clear all the min./max power data
under the actual values subgroup A1 METERING \ POWER . The time and date
associated with each message will be updated to the current date upon issuing this
command.
• CLEAR MIN/MAX FREQUENCY VALUES: Enter YES to clear all the min./max frequency
data under the actual values subgroup A1 METERING \ FREQUENCY. The time and
date associated with each message will be updated to the current date upon issuing
this command.
• CLEAR MAX THD VALUES: Enter YES to clear all the max THD data under the actual
values subgroup A3 POWER ANALYSIS \ TOTAL HARMONIC DISTORTION. The time
and date associated with each message will be updated to the current date upon
issuing this command.
• CLEAR PULSE INPUT VALUES: Enter YES to clear all the pulse input values under the
actual values subgroup A1 METERING \ PULSE INPUT. The time and date associated
with this message will be updated to the current date upon issuing this command.
• CLEAR EVENT RECORD: Enter YES to clear all of the events in the Event Record. This
will eliminate all previous events from the Event Record and create a CLEAR EVENTS
event as the new event number 1. The Event Recorder can be cleared only if it is
enabled in S1 PQM SETUP \ EVENT RECORDER \ EVENT RECORDER OPERATION.
• LOAD FACTORY DEFAULT SETPOINTS: When the PQM is shipped from the factory all
setpoints will be set to factory default values. These settings are shown in the setpoint
message reference figures. To return a PQM to these known setpoints select YES and
press the STORE key while this message is displayed. The display will then warn
that all setpoints will be lost and will ask whether to continue. Select YES again to
reload the setpoints. It is a good idea to first load factory defaults when replacing a
PQM to ensure all the settings are defaulted to reasonable values.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–13

S1 PQM SETUP CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

4.2.9 Event
Recorder

SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S1 PQM SETUP ]] S2 SYSTEM SETUP

] PREFERENCES
]

] CLEAR DATA
]

MESSAGE
MESSAGE

MESSAGE

] EVENT RECORDER EVENT RECORDER Range: ENABLE, DISABLE

] OPERATION: DISABLE

FIGURE 4–9: Setpoints Page 1 – PQM Setup / Event Recorder

• EVENT RECORDER OPERATION: The Event Recorder can be disabled or enabled using
this setpoint. When the Event Recorder is disabled no new events are recorded. When
the Event Recorder is enabled new events are recorded with the 40 most recent
events displayed in A3 POWER ANALYSIS \ EVENT RECORDER . Refer to Section
5.4.4: Event Recorder on page –28 for the list of possible events. All data within the
Event Recorder is stored in non-volatile memory.

4–14 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING S1 PQM SETUP

4.2.10 Trace Memory

SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S1 PQM SETUP ]] S2 SYSTEM SETUP

] EVENT RECORDER
]
MESSAGE
MESSAGE MESSAGE

] TRACE MEMORY TRACE MEMORY USAGE: Range: 1 x 36, 2 x 18, 3 x 12 cycles

] 1 x 36 cycles
TRACE MEMORY TRIGGER Range: ONE SHOT, RETRIGGER
MODE: ONE SHOT
Ia OVERCURRENT TRIG Range: 1 to 150; Step 1%
LEVEL: OFF % CT
Ib OVERCURRENT TRIG Range: 1 to 150; Step 1%
LEVEL: OFF % CT
Ic OVERCURRENT TRIG Range: 1 to 150; Step 1%
LEVEL: OFF % CT
In OVERCURRENT TRIG
Range: 1 to 150; Step 1%
LEVEL: OFF % CT
Va OVERVOLTAGE TRIG Range: 20 to 150; Step 1%
LEVEL: OFF % NOMINAL
Vb OVERVOLTAGE TRIG Range: 20 to 150; Step 1%
LEVEL: OFF % NOMINAL
Vc OVERVOLTAGE TRIG Range: 20 to 150; Step 1%
LEVEL: OFF % NOMINAL
Va UNDERVOLTAGE TRIG Range: 20 to 150; Step 1%
LEVEL: OFF % NOMINAL
Vb UNDERVOLTAGE TRIG Range: 20 to 150; Step 1%
LEVEL: OFF % NOMINAL
Vc UNDERVOLTAGE TRIG Range: 20 to 150; Step 1%
LEVEL: OFF % NOMINAL
SWITCH INPUT A TRIG: Range:OFF, OPEN-TO-CLOSED,
OFF CLOSED-TO-OPEN
SWITCH INPUT B TRIG: Range:OFF, OPEN-TO-CLOSED,
OFF CLOSED-TO-OPEN
SWITCH INPUT C TRIG: Range:OFF, OPEN-TO-CLOSED,
OFF CLOSED-TO-OPEN
SWITCH INPUT D TRIG: Range:OFF, OPEN-TO-CLOSED,
OFF CLOSED-TO-OPEN
TRACE MEMORY TRIGGER Range: 0 to 30;
DELAY: 0 cycles Step: 2 cycles
TRACE MEMORY TRIGGER Range:OFF, AUX1,
RELAY: OFF AUX2, AUX3, ALARM

FIGURE 4–10: Setpoints Page 1 – PQM Setup / Trace Memory

This feature involves a separate sampling data stream. All input channels are sampled
continuously at a rate of 16 times per cycle. Using a single-cycle block interval, the input
samples are checked for trigger conditions as per the trigger setpoints below. Note that
the normal sampling burst (64 samples/cycle, 2 cycles) used for all metering calculations is
done on top of the trace memory sampling. The harmonic analysis sampling (256 samples/
cycles, 1 cycle) causes the trace memory sampling to stop for one cycle whenever a
harmonic analysis is requested. Refer to Chapter 6 for details on trace memory
implementation in EnerVista PQM Setup.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–15

S1 PQM SETUP CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

• TRACE MEMORY USAGE: The trace memory feature allows the user to capture
maximum of 36 cycles. The TRACE MEMORY USAGE setpoint allows the buffer to be
divided into maximum of 3 separate buffers as shown in table below.

SETPOINT VALUE RESULT

Upon a trigger, the entire buffer is filled with 36 cycles of

1 x 36 cycles
data.

The buffer is split into 2 separate buffers and upon a

trigger, the first buffer is filled with 18 cycles of data and
2 x 18 cycles
upon a second trigger, the second buffer is filled with 18
cycles of data.

The buffer is split into 3 separate buffers and upon a

trigger, the first buffer is filled with 12 cycles of data,
3 x 12 cycles upon a second trigger, the second buffer is filled with 12
cycles of data and upon a third trigger, the third buffer is
filled with 12 cycles of data.

• TRACE MEMORY TRIGGER MODE: The trace memory can be configured to trigger in
two different modes as described in the table below.

SETPOINT VALUE RESULT

The trace memory will be triggered once per buffer as

defined in the TRACE MEMORY USAGE setpoint above. In
order for it to re-trigger, it must be re-armed through the
ONE SHOT
serial port using EnerVista PQM Setup or other software.
Once re-armed the trace memory will default back to the
first buffer.

The trace memory will automatically re-trigger upon

RETRIGGER
each condition and overwrite the previous buffer data.

• Ia OVERCURRENT TRIG LEVEL: Once the phase A current equals or increases above
this setpoint value, the trace memory is triggered and data on all inputs are captured
in the buffer. The number of cycles captured depends on the value specified in the
TRACE MEMORY USAGE setpoint.
• Ib OVERCURRENT TRIG LEVEL: Once the phase B current equals or increases above
this setpoint value, the trace memory is triggered and data on all inputs are captured
in the buffer. The number of cycles captured depends on the value specified in the
TRACE MEMORY USAGE setpoint.
• Ic OVERCURRENT TRIG LEVEL: Once the phase C current equals or increases above
this setpoint value, the trace memory is triggered and data on all inputs are captured
in the buffer. The number of cycles captured depends on the value specified in the
TRACE MEMORY USAGE setpoint.
• In OVERCURRENT TRIG LEVEL: Once the neutral current equals or increases above
this setpoint value, the trace memory is triggered and data on all inputs are captured
in the buffer. The number of cycles captured depends on the value specified in the
TRACE MEMORY USAGE setpoint.
• Va OVERVOLTAGE TRIG LEVEL: Once the phase A voltage equals or increases above
this setpoint value, the trace memory is triggered and data on all inputs are captured

4–16 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING S1 PQM SETUP

in the buffer. The number of cycles captured depends on the value specified in the
TRACE MEMORY USAGE setpoint. Phase to neutral levels are used regardless of the
VT wiring.
• Vb OVERVOLTAGE TRIG LEVEL: Once the phase B voltage equals or increases above
this setpoint value, the trace memory is triggered and data on all inputs are captured
in the buffer. The number of cycles captured depends on the value specified in the
TRACE MEMORY USAGE setpoint. Phase to neutral levels are used regardless of the
VT wiring.
• Vc OVERVOLTAGE TRIG LEVEL: Once the phase C voltage equals or increases above
this setpoint value, the trace memory is triggered and data on all inputs are captured
in the buffer. The number of cycles captured depends on the value specified in the
TRACE MEMORY USAGE setpoint. Phase to neutral levels are used regardless of the
VT wiring.
• Va UNDERVOLTAGE TRIG LEVEL: Once the phase A voltage is equal to or less than this
setpoint value, the trace memory is triggered and data on all inputs are captured in
the buffer. The number of cycles captured depends on the value specified in the
TRACE MEMORY USAGE setpoint.
• Vb UNDERVOLTAGE TRIG LEVEL: Once the phase B voltage is equal to or less than this
setpoint value, the trace memory is triggered and data on all inputs are captured in
the buffer. The number of cycles captured depends on the value specified in the
TRACE MEMORY USAGE setpoint.
• Vc UNDERVOLTAGE TRIG LEVEL: Once the phase C voltage is equal to or less than this
setpoint value, the trace memory is triggered and data on all inputs are captured in
the buffer. The number of cycles captured depends on the value specified in the
TRACE MEMORY USAGE setpoint.
• SWITCH INPUT A TRIG: If the setpoint is set to OPEN-TO-CLOSED, the trace memory is
triggered and data on all inputs are captured in the buffer on a switch A close
transition. If the setpoint is set to CLOSED-TO-OPEN, the trace memory is triggered and
data on all inputs are captured in the buffer on a switch A open transition. The number
of cycles captured depends on the value specified in the TRACE MEMORY USAGE
setpoint.
• SWITCH INPUT B TRIG: If the setpoint is set to OPEN-TO-CLOSED, the trace memory
will be triggered and data on all inputs are captured in the buffer on a switch B close
transition. If the setpoint is set to CLOSED-TO-OPEN, the trace memory is triggered and
data on all inputs are captured in the buffer on a switch B open transition. The number
of cycles captured depends on the value specified in the TRACE MEMORY USAGE
setpoint.
• SWITCH INPUT C TRIG: If the setpoint is set to OPEN-TO-CLOSED, the trace memory is
triggered and data on all inputs are captured in the buffer on a switch C close
transition. If the setpoint is set to CLOSED-TO-OPEN, the trace memory is triggered and
data on all inputs are captured in the buffer on a switch C open transition. The number
of cycles captured depends on the value specified in the TRACE MEMORY USAGE
setpoint.
• SWITCH INPUT D TRIG: If the setpoint is set to OPEN-TO-CLOSED, the trace memory is
triggered and data on all inputs will be captured in the buffer on a switch D close
transition. If the setpoint is set to CLOSED-TO-OPEN, the trace memory is triggered and

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–17

S1 PQM SETUP CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

data on all inputs are captured in the buffer on a switch D open transition. The number
of cycles captured depends on the value specified in the TRACE MEMORY USAGE
setpoint.
• TRACE MEMORY TRIGGER DELAY: In some applications it may be necessary to delay
the trigger point to observe the data before the fault occurred. The PQM allows the
trigger to be delayed by the amount of cycles set in this setpoint. Therefore, buffer will
always contain the number cycles specified in this setpoint before the trigger point
and the remaining space in the buffer is filled with the cycles after the trigger point.
• TRACE MEMORY TRIGGER RELAY: The relay selected here will be activated upon the
occurrence of a Trace Memory Trigger. This relay will be cleared once the Trace
Memory is re-armed.
See the application note in Section A.4: Triggered Trace Memory for additional details.

4.2.11 Programmable
Message
SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S1 PQM SETUP ]] S2 SYSTEM SETUP

] PREFERENCES
]

] TRACE MEMORY
]

MESSAGE
MESSAGE

MESSAGE

] PROGRAMMABLE PHONE: 905-294-6222 Range: 40 alphanumeric characters

] MESSAGE www.GEmultilin.com

FIGURE 4–11: Setpoints Page 1 – PQM Setup / Programmable Message

4–18 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING S1 PQM SETUP

PROGRAMMABLE MESSAGE: A 40-character message can be programmed using the

keypad, or via a serial port using EnerVista PQM Setup. An example of writing a new
message over the existing one is shown below:

Displayed for 3 sec onds when

MESSAGE STORE
STORE key pressed

] PROGRAMMABLE PHONE: 905-294-6222 NEW SETPOINT

] MESSAGE www.GEmultilin.com STORED

VALUE STORE
USE THE VALUE
KEYS TO SELECT THE
UNDERLINED NEW SETPOINT PHONE: 905-294-6222
QUANTITIES STORED www.GEmultilin.com
Displayed for 3 sec onds when
STORE key pressed

TIPS:
• The setpoint access must be enabled in order to alter the characters.
• To skip over a character press the STORE key.
• If a character is entered incorrectly, press the STORE key repeatedly until the
cursor returns to the position of the error, and re-enter the character.
• To select this message as a default message, see Section 3.4: Default Messages on
page –9.
A copy of this message is displayed in actual values page A2 under PROGRAMMABLE
MESSAGE.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–19

S1 PQM SETUP CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

4.2.12 Product
Options

SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S1 PQM SETUP ]] S2 SYSTEM SETUP

] PREFERENCES
]

MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] PROGRAMMABLE
] MESSAGE

MESSAGE
MESSAGE

MESSAGE

] PRODUCT OPTIONS SELECT ORDER: Range: see Range in PQM memory

PQM-T20-C-A map format F116
]
SELECT MOD1 TO Range: 0 to 999
ENABLE:
SELECT MOD2 TO Range: 0 to 999
ENABLE:
MESSAGE
SELECT MOD3 TO Range: 0 to 999
MESSAGE
ENABLE:
SELECT MOD4 TO Range: 0 to 999
ENABLE:
SELECT MOD5 TO Range: 0 to 999
ENABLE:
] END OF PAGE S1
] ENTER PASSCODE: Range: consult the factory

FIGURE 4–12: Setpoints Page 1 – PQM Setup / Product Options

PRODUCT OPTIONS: The PQM can have options and certain modifications upgraded on-
site via use of a passcode provided by GE Multilin. Consult the factory for details on the use
of this feature.

4–20 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING S2 SYSTEM SETUP

4.3 S2 System Setup

4.3.1 Current/
Voltage
Configuration
SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S2 SYSTEM SETUP ]] S3 OUTPUT RELAYS

MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] CURRENT/VOLTAGE PHASE CT WIRING: Range: A, B, AND C; A AND B ONLY;

A AND C ONLY; A ONLY
] CONFIGURATION PHASES A, B, AND C
PHASE CT PRIMARY: Range: 5 to 12000 or OFF; Step 5
OFF A
NEUTRAL CURRENT Range: OFF, SEPARATE CT,
SENSING: OFF CALCULATED

NEUTRAL CT PRIMARY: Range: 5 to 6000; Step: 5

100 A
Range: OFF, 4 WIRE WYE / 3 VT, 4 WIRE WYE /
VT WIRING: DIRECT, 4 WIRE WYE, 2 VTs, 3 WIRE DELTA / 2
OFF VTs, 3 WIRE DIRECT, SINGLE PHASE DIRECT

VT RATIO: Range: 1.0 to 3500.0; Step 0.1

1.0 : 1
VT NOMINAL SECONDARY Range: 40 to 600 V; Step 1
VOLTAGE: 120 V
NOMINAL DIRECT INPUT Range: 40 to 600 V; Step 1
VOLTAGE: 600 V
NOMINAL SYSTEM Range: 50, 60 Hz
FREQUENCY: 60 Hz

Must be set to a value other than OFF to clear the

CRITICAL SETPOINTS NOT STORED alarm

FIGURE 4–13: Setpoints Page 2 – System Setup / Current/Voltage Configuration

• PHASE CT WIRING: The table below indicates the required connection per setpoint
setting.

SETPOINT VALUE REQUIRED CT CONNECTION

A,B, AND C CTs are connected to phase A, B and C inputs.

CTs are connected to phase A and B only. Phase C input is

A AND B ONLY left open.
The value for phase C is calculated by the PQM.

CTs are connected to phase A and C only. Phase B input is

A AND C ONLY left open.
The value for phase B is calculated by the PQM.

CT is connected to phase A only. Phase B and C inputs are

A ONLY left open.
The values for phase B and C are calculated by the PQM.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–21

S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

If A AND B ONLY, A AND C ONLY, or A ONLY connection is selected, the

neutral sensing must be accomplished with a separate CT.
NOTE
• PHASE CT PRIMARY: Enter the primary current rating of the phase current
transformers. All three phase CTs must have the same rating. For example, if 500:5 CTs
are used, the PHASE CT PRIMARY value is entered as 500. The PHASE CT PRIMARY
factory default is OFF. While set to OFF, the PQM is forced to an alarm state as a safety
precaution until a valid CT value is entered. Ensure that the CT is connected to the
correct 1 A or 5 A terminals to match the CT secondary.
• NEUTRAL CURRENT SENSING: Neutral current sensing can be accomplished by using
a separate external CT connection or by calculations. Select SEPARATE CT when using
an external CT. If CALCULATED is selected, the PQM calculates the neutral current
using the vector sum of Ia + Ib + Ic = In. If a residual connection is required using the
PQM internal CT, the neutral CT primary must be the same as the phase CT primary to
ensure correct readings.
• NEUTRAL CT PRIMARY: This message is visible only if the NEUTRAL CURRENT
SENSING setpoint is set to SEPARATE CT. Enter the CT primary current. For example, if
a 50:5 CT is installed for neutral sensing enter 50. One amp CTs can also be used for
neutral sensing.
• VT WIRING: Enter the VT connection of the system in this setpoint. The three possible
selections are Wye, Delta and Single Phase.
If the system to be measured is a Wye connection, the selections are 4 WIRE WYE
DIRECT, 4 WIRE WYE (3 VTs), and 4 WIRE WYE (2 VTs). The 4 WIRE WYE DIRECT value is
used for systems that are 600 V or less and directly connected to the PQM. The VT
NOMINAL SECONDARY VOLTAGE setpoint is replaced by NOMINAL DIRECT INPUT
VOLTAGE. With external VTs (depending upon how many external VTs are used) 4
WIRE WYE (3 VTs) or 4 WIRE WYE (2 VTs) must be selected. Note that when using the 4
WIRE WYE (2 VTs) value, only two voltages are measured; the third voltage is
calculated on the assumption that Van + Vbn + Vcn = 0. This assumption is valid only for
balanced system voltages.
If the system to be measured is a Delta connection, the values are 3 WIRE DIRECT and
3 WIRE DELTA (2 VTs). The 3 WIRE DIRECT value should be used for systems that are
600 V or less and directly connected to the PQM. With external VTs, 3 WIRE DELTA (2
VTs) must be selected.
The PQM accepts input voltages from 0 to 600 V AC between any two of the voltage
terminals (V1, V2, V3, and Vn). These inputs can be directly connected or supplied via
external VTs. External VTs are required for input voltages greater than 600 V AC (line-
to-line). When measuring line-to-line quantities using inputs V1, V2 and V3, ensure that
the voltage common input Vn is grounded. This input is used as a reference for
measuring the voltage inputs.
All connections to the PQM voltage inputs should be connected using HRC
fuses rated at 2 amps to ensure adequate interrupting capacity.
NOTE

• VT RATIO: Enter the voltage transformer ratio. All three voltage inputs must be of the
same rating. For example, if 4200:120 VTs are used, the VT RATIO should be 4200 /

4–22 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING S2 SYSTEM SETUP

120 = 35.0:1. This setpoint is not visible if VT WIRING is set to 3 WIRE DIRECT, 4 WIRE
DIRECT, or SINGLE PHASE DIRECT.
• VT NOMINAL SECONDARY VOLTAGE: Enter the nominal secondary of the VTs. If the
voltage inputs are directly connected, enter the nominal system voltage that will be
applied to the PQM. This setpoint is not visible if the VT WIRING is set to 3 WIRE
DIRECT, 4 WIRE DIRECT, or SINGLE PHASE DIRECT. This value is used to scale an analog
output that is assigned to display voltage as a percentage of nominal.
• NOMINAL DIRECT INPUT VOLTAGE: This setpoint is displayed only if VT WIRING is
selected as a direct connection. The nominal direct input voltage must be entered in
this message. This value will be used to scale an analog output that is assigned to
display voltage as a percentage of nominal.
• NOMINAL SYSTEM FREQUENCY: Enter the nominal system frequency. The PQM
measures frequency from the Van voltage and adjusts its internal sampling to best fit
the measured frequency. If the Van input is unavailable, the PQM will assume the
frequency entered here.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–23

S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

4.3.2 Analog
Outputs

SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S2 SYSTEM SETUP ]] S3 OUTPUT RELAYS

] CURRENT/VOLTAGE
] CONFIGURATION

MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] ANALOG OUTPUT 1 ANALOG OUTPUT RANGE: Range: 0 - 20 mA, 4 - 20 mA

] 4 - 20 mA
ANALOG OUTPUT 1 MAIN see ANALOG OUTPUT
NOT USED PARAMETERS table
see ANALOG OUTPUT
MAIN 4 mA VALUE:
PARAMETERS table
0
see ANALOG OUTPUT
MAIN 20 mA VALUE:
PARAMETERS table
MESSAGE 0
MESSAGE see ANALOG OUTPUT
ANALOG OUTPUT 1 ALT:
PARAMETERS table
NOT USED
see ANALOG OUTPUT
ALT 4 mA VALUE:
PARAMETERS table
0
ALT 20 mA VALUE: see ANALOG OUTPUT
0 PARAMETERS table
MESSAGE

see ANALOG OUTPUT

] ANALOG OUTPUT 2 ANALOG OUTPUT 2 MAIN
PARAMETERS table
] NOT USED
MAIN 4 mA VALUE: see ANALOG OUTPUT
0 PARAMETERS table

MAIN 20 mA VALUE: see ANALOG OUTPUT

0 PARAMETERS table
see ANALOG OUTPUT
MESSAGE ANALOG OUTPUT 2 ALT:
PARAMETERS table
MESSAGE NOT USED
ALT 4 mA VALUE: see ANALOG OUTPUT
0 PARAMETERS table
see ANALOG OUTPUT
ALT 20 mA VALUE:
PARAMETERS table
0

CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE

4–24 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING S2 SYSTEM SETUP

SEE PREVIOUS PAGE

see ANALOG OUTPUT

] ANALOG OUTPUT 3 ANALOG OUTPUT 3 MAIN
PARAMETERS table
] NOT USED
see ANALOG OUTPUT
MAIN 4 mA VALUE:
PARAMETERS table
0
MAIN 20 mA VALUE: see ANALOG OUTPUT
0 PARAMETERS table

ANALOG OUTPUT 3 ALT: see ANALOG OUTPUT

NOT USED PARAMETERS table

ALT 4 mA VALUE: see ANALOG OUTPUT

0 PARAMETERS table
see ANALOG OUTPUT
ALT 20 mA VALUE:
PARAMETERS table
0

see ANALOG OUTPUT

] ANALOG OUTPUT 4 ANALOG OUTPUT 4 MAIN
PARAMETERS table
] NOT USED
MAIN 4 mA VALUE: see ANALOG OUTPUT
0 PARAMETERS table
see ANALOG OUTPUT
MAIN 20 mA VALUE:
PARAMETERS table
0
see ANALOG OUTPUT
ANALOG OUTPUT 4 ALT:
PARAMETERS table
NOT USED
ALT 4 mA VALUE: see ANALOG OUTPUT
0 PARAMETERS table

ALT 20 mA VALUE: see ANALOG OUTPUT

0 PARAMETERS table

FIGURE 4–14: Setpoints Page 2 – System Setup / Analog Outputs

• ANALOG OUTPUT RANGE: If the T20 option is installed, the Analog Outputs can be
configured to operate as 4 to 20 mA current sources or 0 to 20 mA current sources. All
four Analog Outputs will operate with the same range as selected in this setpoint.
• ANALOG OUTPUT MAIN / ANALOG OUTPUT ALT: If the PQM is used in conjunction
with programmable controllers, automated equipment, or a chart recorder, the
analog outputs can be used for continuous monitoring. Although parameters can be
selected for continuous analog output, all values are available digitally through the
communications interface. Applications include using a computer to automatically
shed loads as the frequency decreases by monitoring frequency or a chart recorder to
plot the loading of a system in a particular process.
Each of the analog outputs can be assigned to two of the parameters listed in Table
4–3: Analog Output Parameters. The analog output main selection is the default
selection and a programmable switch input can be programmed to multiplex the
ANALOG OUTPUT ALT selection to the same output depending upon the open or
closed state of the switch input. See Section 4.3.4: Switch Inputs on page –31 for

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–25

S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

details about configuring a switch input. If no switch input is assigned as an analog

output multiplexer, the analog output main selection will be the only parameter which
appears at the analog output terminals. The ability to multiplex two different analog
output quantities on one analog output effectively gives the PQM eight analog
outputs. The table below shows the criteria used by the PQM to decide whether the
output is based on MAIN or ALT settings.

Table 4–2: Analog Output Selection Criteria

CONDITION PRESENT ‘MAIN’ ‘ALT’ PARAMETER OUTPUT

PARAMETER BASED ON

Any condition NOT USED NOT USED MAIN

Control option ‘C’ not

any not available MAIN
installed

Switch assigned to SELECT

ANALOG OUTPUT and is any NOT USED MAIN
disabled

Switch assigned to SELECT

ANALOG OUTPUT and is any NOT USED MAIN
enabled

anything other than

Any condition NOT USED ALT
NOT USED

Switch assigned to SELECT

ANALOG OUTPUT and is NOT USED anything other than ALT
NOT USED
disabled

Switch assigned to SELECT anything other than

ANALOG OUTPUT and is any NOT USED ALT
enabled

• MAIN/ALT 4 mA VALUE: This message appears for each analog output and allows the
user to assign a numeric value which corresponds to the 4 mA end of the 4 to 20 mA
signal range (T20 option) or the 0 mA end of the 0 to 1 mA signal range (T1 option). The
numeric value range will depend upon which parameter is selected. See Table 4–3:
Analog Output Parameters below for details. Note that if the T20 option is installed and
the ANALOG OUTPUT RANGE setpoint is set to 0-20 mA, this message represents the
0 mA end of the signal range.
• MAIN/ALT 20 mA Value: This message appears for each analog output and allows the
user to assign a numeric value which corresponds to the 20 mA end of the 4 to 20 mA
signal range (T20 option) or the 1 mA end of the 0 to 1 mA signal range (T1 option). The
numeric value range will depend upon which parameter is selected. See Table 4–3:
Analog Output Parameters below for details.
If the 4 mA (or 0 mA) value is programmed to be higher than the 20 mA (or 1 mA) value,
the analog output will decrease towards 4 mA (or 0 mA) as the value increases and the
analog output will increase towards 20 mA (or 1 mA) as the value decreases. If the 4
mA (or 0 mA) and 20 mA (or 1 mA) values are programmed to an identical value, the
output will always be 4 mA (or 0 mA).

4–26 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING S2 SYSTEM SETUP

Table 4–3: Analog Output Parameters

PARAMETER RANGE STEP PARAMETER RANGE STEP

Phase A Current 0 to 150% 1% Phase B kVA 0 to 65400 1 kVA

0.01 lead to 0.01

Phase B Current 0 to 150% 1% Phase C PF 0.01
lag

–32500 to
Phase C Current 0 to 150% 1% Phase C kW 1 kW
+32500

–32500 to
Neutral Current 0 to 150% 1% Phase C kvar 1 kvar
+32500

Average Phase
Current 0 to 150% 1% Phase C kVA 0 to 65400 1 kVA

Current Unbalance 0 to 100.0% 0.1% 3 Phase +kWh Used 0 to 65400 1 kWh

Voltage Van 0 to 200% 1% 3 Phase +kvarh Used 0 to 65400 1 kvarh

Voltage Vbn 0 to 200% 1% 3 Phase –kWh Used 0 to 65400 1 kWh

Voltage Vcn 0 to 200% 1% 3 Phase –kvarh Used 0 to 65400 1 kvarh

Voltage Vab 0 to 200% 1% 3 Phase kVAh Used 0 to 65400 1 kVAh

Ph. A Current
Voltage Vbc 0 to 200% 1% 0 to 7500 1A
Demand

Voltage Vca 0 to 200% 1% Ph. B Current 0 to 7500 1A

Demand

Average Phase Ph. C Current

0 to 200% 1% 0 to 7500 1A
Voltage Demand

Average Line Voltage 0 to 200% 1% Neutral Current 0 to 7500 1A

Demand

–32500 to
Voltage Unbalance 0 to 100.0% 0.1% 3 Phase kW Demand 1 kW
+32500

–32500 to
Frequency 00.00 to 75.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 3 Phase kvar Demand 1 kvar
+32500

0.01 lead to 0.01

3 Phase PF 0.01 3 Phase kVA Demand 0 to 65400 1 kVA
lag

–32500 to
3 Phase kW 1 kW 3 Phase Current THD 0.0 to 100% 0.1%
+32500

–32500 to
3 Phase kvar +32500 1 kvar 3 Phase Voltage THD 0.0 to 100% 0.1%

3 Phase kVA 0 to 65400 1 kVA Phase A Current THD 0.0 to 100% 0.1%

–3250.0 to
3 Phase MW 0.1 MW Phase B Current THD 0.0 to 100% 0.1%
+3250.0

–3250.0 to
3 Phase Mvar 0.1 Mvar Phase C Current THD 0.0 to 100% 0.1%
+3250.0

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–27

S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

PARAMETER RANGE STEP PARAMETER RANGE STEP

3 Phase MVA 0 to 6540.0 0.1 MVA Voltage Van THD 0.0 to 100% 0.1%

0.01 lead to 0.01

Phase A PF 0.01 Voltage Vbn THD 0.0 to 100% 0.1%
lag

–32500 to
Phase A kW 1 kW Voltage Vcn THD 0.0 to 100% 0.1%
+32500

–32500 to
Phase A kvar 1 kvar Voltage Vab THD 0.0 to 100% 0.1%
+32500

Phase A kVA 0 to 65400 1 kVA Voltage Vbc THD 0.0 to 100% 0.1%

0.01 lead to 0.01

Phase B PF 0.01 Neutral Current THD 0.0 to 100% 0.1%
lag

–32500 to –32500 to
Phase B kW +32500 1 kW Serial Control +32500 1 Unit

–32500 to
Phase B kvar 1 kvar
+32500

• ANALOG OUTPUT PARAMETER – Serial Control: When the Analog Output parameter
is set to Serial Control, the analog output(s) reflect a value in proportion to the serial
value written to a specific register within the PQM memory map. The locations are as
described in the table below.

ANALOG OUTPUT MODBUS REGISTER REGISTER

Analog Output 1 Analog Output1 Serial Value 1067

Analog Output 2 Analog Output2 Serial Value 106F

Analog Output 3 Analog Output3 Serial Value 1077

Analog Output 4 Analog Output4 Serial Value 107F

4–28 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING S2 SYSTEM SETUP

4.3.3 Analog Input

SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S2 SYSTEM SETUP ]] S3 OUTPUT RELAYS

] CURRENT/VOLTAGE
] CONFIGURATION

] ANALOG OUTPUT 4
]

] ANALOG INPUT ANALOG IN MAIN/ALT Range: AUX1, AUX2, A UX3, OFF

] SELECT RELAY: OFF
ANALOG IN MAIN NAME: Range: 20 alphanumeric
MAIN ANALOG INPUT characters
ANALOG IN MAIN Range: 10 alphanumeric
UNITS: mA characters

MAIN 4mA VALUE: Range: 0 to 65000 ; Step: 1

0
MAIN 20mA VALUE: Range: 0 to 65000 ; Step: 1
0
ANALOG IN MAIN RELAY: Range:ALARM, AUX1,
OFF AUX2, AUX3, OFF
ANALOG IN MAIN LEVEL: Range: 0 to 65000 ; Step: 1
100
ANALOG IN MAIN Range: 0.5 to 600.0 s
DELAY: 10.0 s Step: 0.5 s

ANALOG IN ALT NAME: Range: 20 alphanumeric

ALT ANALOG INPUT characters
ANALOG IN ALT Range: 10 alphanumeric
characters
UNITS:
ALT 4 mA VALUE: Range: 0 to 65000
0 Step: 1

ALT 20mA VALUE: Range: 0 to 65000

0 Step 1

ANALOG IN ALT Range:ALARM, AUX1,

RELAY: OFF AUX2, AUX3, OFF

ANALOG IN ALT LEVEL: Range: 0 to 65000

100 Step: 1
ANALOG IN ALT Range: 0.5 to 600.0 s
DELAY: 10.0 s Step: 0.5 s

FIGURE 4–15: Setpoints Page 2 – System Setup / Analog Input

• ANALOG IN MAIN/ALT SELECT RELAY: Select the output relay that is to be used to
multiplex two analog input signals to the PQM. If this setpoint is OFF, the MAIN analog
input setpoints will be used unless a switch input assigned to SELECT ANALOG INPUT is
activated. For more information on multiplexing two analog inputs using one of the
PQM output relays, refer to Section 2.2.6: Switch Inputs (Optional) on page –16.
• ANALOG IN MAIN/ALT NAME: This message allows the user to input a user defined 20
character alphanumeric name for the MAIN and ALT analog inputs. To enter the
names, perform the following steps:
1.Allow access to setpoints by enabling setpoint access.
2.Select the Analog Input name message display under the
S2 SYSTEM SETUP \ ANALOG INPUT setpoints group.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–29

S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

3.Use the VALUE and VALUE keys to change the blinking character over
the cursor. A space is selected like a character.
4.Press the STORE key to store the character and advance the cursor to the next
position. To skip over a character press the STORE key.
5.Continue entering characters and spaces until the desired message is displayed. If a
character is entered incorrectly, press the STORE key repeatedly until the cur-
sor returns to the position of the error, and re-enter the character.
• ANALOG IN MAIN/ALT UNITS: This message allows the user to input a user defined 10
character alphanumeric name for the MAIN and ALT units. To enter the units, perform
the same steps as shown for analog input name.
• MAIN/ALT 4 mA VALUE: This message appears for each analog input and allows the
user to assign a numeric value which corresponds to the 4 mA end of the 4 to 20 mA
signal range.
• MAIN/ALT 20 mA VALUE: This message appears for each analog input and allows the
user to assign a numeric value which corresponds to the 20 mA end of the 4 to 20 mA
signal range.
• ANALOG IN MAIN/ALT RELAY: Analog input MAIN and ALT detection can either be
disabled, used as an alarm or as a process control. Set this setpoint to OFF if the
feature is not required. Selecting ALARM causes the alarm relay to activate and
displays an alarm message whenever a MAIN or ALT analog input condition exists.
Selecting an AUXILIARY relay causes the selected auxiliary relay to activate with no
message displayed. This is intended for process control.
• ANALOG IN MAIN/ALT LEVEL: When the measured MAIN or ALT analog input equals or
exceeds the level set by this setpoint, a MAIN or ALT analog input condition will occur.
• ANALOG IN MAIN/ALT DELAY: If the MAIN or ALT analog input equals or exceeds the
ANALOG IN MAIN/ALT LEVEL setpoint value and remains this way for the time delay
programmed in this setpoint, an analog input condition will occur. If the ANALOG IN
MAIN/ALT RELAY: setpoint is set to ALARM, the alarm relay will activate and the
ANALOG IN MAIN/ALT ALARM message will be displayed. If the setpoint ANALOG IN
MAIN/ALT RELAY: is set to AUX1, AUX2 or AUX3 the respective auxiliary relay will
activate and no message will be displayed after the delay expires.

4–30 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING S2 SYSTEM SETUP

4.3.4 Switch Inputs

SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S2 SYSTEM SETUP ]] S3 OUTPUT RELAYS

] CURRENT/VOLTAGE
] CONFIGURATION
NOTE: Range for Switch A, B, C, D Function (below):
NOT USED, ALARM, AUX 1, AUX 2, AUX 3, NEW DEMAND PERIOD,
SETPOINT ACCESS, SELECT ANALOG OUT, SELECT ANALOG IN, PULSE
] ANALOG INPUT INPUT 1, PULSE INPUT 2, PULSE INPUT 3, PULSE INPUT 4, CLEAR
ENERGY, CLEAR DEMAND
]

] SWITCH INPUT A SWITCH A NAME: Range: 20 alphanumeric characters

] SWITCH INPUT A
Range: see NOTE above
SWITCH A FUNCTION:
NOT USED
MESSAGE SWITCH A ACTIVATION: Range: OPEN, CLOSED
MESSAGE OPEN
SWITCH A TIME DELAY: Range: 0.0 to 600.0 s; Step 0.1 s
MESSAGE
0.0 s

] SWITCH INPUT B SWITCH B NAME: Range: 20 alphanumeric characters

] SWITCH INPUT B
SWITCH B FUNCTION: Range: see NOTE above
NOT USED
SWITCH B ACTIVATION: Range: OPEN, CLOSED
MESSAGE
OPEN
MESSAGE
SWITCH B TIME DELAY: Range: 0.0 to 600.0 s; Step 0.1 s
MESSAGE 0.0 s

] SWITCH INPUT C SWITCH C NAME: Range: 20 alphanumeric characters

] SWITCH INPUT C
SWITCH C FUNCTION: Range: see NOTE above
NOT USED
SWITCH C ACTIVATION: Range: OPEN, CLOSED
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
OPEN
SWITCH C TIME DELAY: Range: 0.0 to 600.0 s; Step 0.1 s
MESSAGE 0.0 s

] SWITCH INPUT D SWITCH D NAME: Range: 20 alphanumeric characters

] SWITCH INPUT D
SWITCH D FUNCTION: Range: see NOTE above
NOT USED
SWITCH D ACTIVATION: Range: OPEN, CLOSED
OPEN
SWITCH D TIME DELAY: Range: 0.0 to 600.0 s; Step 0.1 s
0.0 s

FIGURE 4–16: Setpoints Page 2 – System Setup / Switch Inputs

• SWITCH A/B/C/D NAME: This message allows the user to input a user defined 20-
character alphanumeric name for each switch input. To enter a switch name, perform
the following steps:
1.Allow access to setpoints by enabling setpoint access.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–31

S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

2.Select the switch input message display under the subgroup S2: SYSTEM SETUP \
SWITCH INPUT A .
3.Use the VALUE and VALUE keys to change the blinking character
over the cursor. A space is selected like a character.
4.Press the STORE key to store the character and advance the cursor to the next
position. To skip over a character press the STORE key.
5.Continue entering characters and spaces until the desired message is displayed. If a
character is entered incorrectly, press the STORE key repeatedly until the
cursor returns to the position of the error, and re-enter the character.
• SWITCH A/B/C/D FUNCTION: Select the required function for each switch input. See
chapter 2 “Switch Inputs” for a description of each function. The NEW DEMAND
PERIOD, SETPOINT ACCESS, SELECT ANALOG OUTPUT and SELECT ANALOG INPUT,
PULSE INPUT 1, PULSE INPUT 2, PULSE INPUT 3, PULSE INPUT 4, CLEAR ENERGY and
CLEAR DEMAND functions can be assigned to only one switch input at a time. If an
attempt is made to assign one of these functions to more than one input, the flash
message THIS SWITCH FUNCTION ALREADY ASSIGNED will be displayed. If an
attempt is made via the serial port, no flash message will appear but an error code will
be returned.
• SWITCH A/B/C/D ACTIVATION: This setpoint determines the operating sequence of
the switch. Select OPEN if a switch activation is required for a switch input transition of
closed to open. Select CLOSED if a switch activation is required for a switch input
transition of open to closed.
• SWITCH A/B/C/D TIME DELAY: If the switch input function is assigned to ALARM,
AUX1, AUX2, or AUX3, this message will be displayed. Enter the required time delay in
this message.

4–32 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING S2 SYSTEM SETUP

4.3.5 Pulse Output

SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S2 SYSTEM SETUP ]] S3 OUTPUT RELAYS

] CURRENT/VOLTAGE
] CONFIGURATION

] SWITCH INPUT D
]

MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

POS kWh PULSE OUTPUT Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, OFF
] PULSE OUTPUT
] RELAY: OFF
POS kWh PULSE OUTPUT Range: 1 to 65000; Step: 1 kWh
INTERVAL: 100 kWh
NEG kWh PULSE OUTPUT Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, OFF
RELAY: OFF
NEG kWh PULSE OUTPUT Range: 1 to 65000; Step: 1 kWh
INTERVAL: 100 kWh
POS kvarh PULSE OUTPUT Range: ALARM, AUX1,
RELAY: OFF AUX2, AUX3, OFF
POS kvarh PULSE OUTPUT Range: 1 to 65000; Step: 1 kvarh
INTERVAL: 100 kvarh
NEG kvarh PULSE OUTPUT Range: ALARM, AUX1,
RELAY: OFF AUX2, AUX3, OFF

NEG kvarh PULSE OUTPUT Range: 1 to 65000; Step: 1 kvarh

INTERVAL: 100 kvarh
kVAh PULSE OUTPUT Range: ALARM, AUX1,
RELAY: OFF AUX2, AUX3, OFF
kVAh PULSE OUTPUT Range: 1 to 65000; Step: 1 kVAh
INTERVAL: 100 kVAh
PULSE WIDTH: Range: 100 to 2000; Step: 10 ms
100 ms

FIGURE 4–17: Setpoints Page 2 – System Setup / Pulse Output

• kWh / kvarh / kVAh PULSE OUTPUT RELAY: Five pulse output parameters can be
assigned to the alarm or auxiliary relays. They are Positive kWh, Negative kWh,
Positive kvarh, Negative kvarh, and kVAh. Enter the desired relay to which each
parameter is assigned. Select OFF if a particular output parameter is not required.
• KWh / kvarh / kVAh PULSE OUTPUT INTERVAL: Enter the interval for the appropriate
quantity at which the relay pulse will occur. The pulse width is set by the PULSE WIDTH
setpoint described below. If the pulse interval is set to 100 kWh, one pulse will indicate
that 100kWh has been accumulated.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–33

S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

• PULSE WIDTH: This setpoint determines the duration of each pulse as shown in the
figure below.

STATUS STATUS STATUS

Normally Open (NO) Contact OPEN CLOSED OPEN

Normally Closed (NC) Contact CLOSED OPEN CLOSED

PULSE
WIDTH

FIGURE 4–18: Pulse Output Timing

4.3.6 Pulse Input

SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S2 SYSTEM SETUP ]] S3 OUTPUT RELAYS

] CURRENT/VOLTAGE
] CONFIGURATION

MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] PULSE OUTPUT
]

MESSAGE
MESSAGE MESSAGE

Range: 10 alphanumeric characters

] PULSE INPUT PULSE INPUT UNITS:
] Units
PULSE INPUT 1 VALUE: Range: 0 to 65000; Step: 1
1 Units
PULSE INPUT 2 VALUE: Range: 0 to 65000; Step: 1
1 Units
PULSE INPUT 3 VALUE: Range: 0 to 65000; Step: 1
1 Units
PULSE INPUT 4 VALUE: Range: 0 to 65000; Step: 1
1 Units
PULSE INPUT TOTAL: Range: 1+2, 1+3, 1+4, 2+3, 2+4,
1+2+3+4 3+4, 1+2+3, 1+3+4,
2+3+4,1+2+4, 1+2+3+4

4–34 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING S2 SYSTEM SETUP

FIGURE 4–19: Setpoints Page 2 – System Setup / Pulse Input

• PULSE INPUT UNITS: This message allows the user to input a user defined 10
character alphanumeric unit for the pulse inputs (i.e. kWh). The unit will be used by all
pulse inputs including the totalized value.
To enter the unit, perform the following steps:
1. Allow access to setpoints by enabling setpoint access.
2. Select the PULSE INPUT UNITS message under the subgroup
S2 SYSTEM SETUP \ PULSE INPUT.
3. Use the VALUE and VALUE keys to change the blinking character
over the cursor. A space is selected like a character.
4. Press the STORE key to store the character and advance the cursor to the
next position. To skip over a character press the STORE key.
5. Continue entering characters and spaces until the desired message is
displayed. If a character is entered incorrectly, press the STORE key
repeatedly until the cursor returns to the position of the error, and re-enter the
character.
• PULSE INPUT 1 VALUE: Enter a value in this setpoint that will be equivalent to 1 pulse
input on the switch input assigned to PULSE INPUT 1 (i.e. 1 pulse = 100 kWh). The
accumulated value is displayed in actual values under A1 METERING\PULSE INPUT
COUNTERS\PULSE INPUT 1.
• PULSE INPUT 2 VALUE: Enter a value in this setpoint that will be equivalent to 1 pulse
input on the switch input assigned to PULSE INPUT 2 (i.e. 1 pulse = 100 kWh). The
accumulated value is displayed in actual values under A1 METERING\PULSE INPUT
COUNTERS\PULSE INPUT 2.
• PULSE INPUT 3 VALUE: Enter a value in this setpoint that will be equivalent to 1 pulse
input on the switch input assigned to PULSE INPUT 3 (i.e. 1 pulse = 100 kWh). The
accumulated value is displayed in actual values under A1 METERING\PULSE INPUT
COUNTERS\PULSE INPUT 3.
• PULSE INPUT 4 VALUE: Enter a value in this setpoint that will be equivalent to 1 pulse
input on the switch input assigned to PULSE INPUT 4 (i.e. 1 pulse = 100 kWh). The
accumulated value is displayed in actual values under A1 METERING\PULSE INPUT
COUNTERS\PULSE INPUT 4.
• PULSE INPUT TOTAL: This setpoint allows the user to define which pulse inputs are to
be added together. For example, if the selection is this setpoint is 1+2+3, the PULSE
INPUT 1, PULSE INPUT 2 and PULSE INPUT 3 values shown in A1 METERING \ PULSE
COUNTERS \ PULSE INPUT 1/2/3/4 will be added together and displayed in
A1:METERING \ PULSE INPUT COUNTERS \ PULSE IN 1+2+3.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–35

S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

4.3.7 Data Logger

SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S2 SYSTEM SETUP ]] S3 OUTPUT RELAYS

] CURRENT/VOLTAGE
] CONFIGURATION

MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] PULSE INPUT
]

MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] DATA LOGGER STOP DATA LOG 1: Range: NO, YES

] NO (STOPPED)
STOP DATA LOG 2: Range: NO, YES
NO (STOPPED)
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] END OF PAGE S2
]

FIGURE 4–20: Setpoints Page 2 – System Setup / Data Logger

• STOP DATA LOG 1 / 2: The data logger operation is only configurable over the serial
port using EnerVista PQM Setup or other third party software. On occasions it may be
necessary to stop the data loggers using the PQM keypad and then a computer to
extract the logged information. The STOP DATA LOG 1 and 2 setpoints allow the user to
stop the respective data log. These setpoints also display the current status of the
respective data logger. Refer to the Appendix for a detailed description of the data
logger implementation.

4–36 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING S3 OUTPUT RELAYS

4.4 S3 Output Relays

4.4.1 Description

SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S3 OUTPUT RELAYS ]] S4 ALARMS/CONTROL

MESSAGE
MESSAGE

MESSAGE

] ALARM RELAY ALARM OPERATION: Range: NON-FAILSAFE, FAILSAFE

] NON-FAILSAFE
ALARM ACTIVATION: Range: UNLATCHED, LATCHED
MESSAGE
UNLATCHED
MESSAGE

MESSAGE

] AUXILIARY RELAY 1 AUX1 OPERATION: Range: NON-FAILSAFE, FAILSAFE

] NON-FAILSAFE
AUX2 ACTIVATION: Range: UNLATCHED, LATCHED
UNLATCHED
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] AUXILIARY RELAY 2 AUX2 OPERATION: Range: NON-FAILSAFE, FAILSAFE

] NON-FAILSAFE
AUX2 ACTIVATION: Range: UNLATCHED, LATCHED
MESSAGE UNLATCHED
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] AUXILIARY RELAY 3 AUX3 OPERATION: Range: NON-FAILSAFE, FAILSAFE

] NON-FAILSAFE
AUX3 ACTIVATION: Range: UNLATCHED, LATCHED
UNLATCHED
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] END OF PAGE S3
]

NON-FAILSAFE: The relay coil is not energized in its non-active state. Loss of control power will cause the
relay to remain in the non-active state. That is, a non-failsafe alarm relay will not cause an
alarm on loss of control power. Contact configuration in the Wiring Diagrams is shown with
relays programmed non-failsafe and control power not applied.

FAILSAFE: The relay coil is energized in its non-active state. Loss of control power will cause the relay
to go into its active state. That is, a failsafe alarm relay will cause an alarm on loss of
control power. Contact configuration is opposite to that shown in the Wiring Diagrams for
relays programmed as failsafe when control power is applied.

FIGURE 4–21: Setpoints Page 3 – Output Relays

4.4.2 Alarm Relay • ALARM OPERATION: The terms ‘failsafe’ and ‘non-failsafe’ are defined above as
implemented in the PQM. If an alarm is required when the PQM is not operational due
to a loss of control power, select failsafe operation. Otherwise, choose non-failsafe.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–37

S3 OUTPUT RELAYS CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

• ALARM ACTIVATION: If an alarm indication is required only while an alarm is present,

select unlatched. Once the alarm condition disappears, the alarm and associated
message automatically clear. To ensure all alarms are acknowledged, select latched.
Even if an alarm condition is no longer present, the alarm relay and message can only
be cleared by pressing the RESET key or by sending the reset command via the
computer.

4.4.3 Auxiliary • AUXILIARY 1, 2, 3 OPERATION: The terms ‘failsafe’ and ‘non-failsafe’ are defined
Relays above as implemented in the PQM. If an output is required when the PQM is not
operational due to a loss of control power, select failsafe auxiliary operation,
otherwise, choose non-failsafe.
• AUXILIARY 1, 2, 3 ACTIVATION: If an auxiliary relay output is required only while the
selected conditions are present, select unlatched. Once the selected condition
disappears, the auxiliary relay returns to the non-active state. To ensure all conditions
are acknowledged, select latched. If the condition is no longer present, the auxiliary
relay can be reset by pressing the RESET key or by sending the reset command via
the computer.
Since the relays can be assigned to perform many different functions, the PQM
uses a priority system to determine which function will control the relays if they
NOTE happen to be assigned to more than one function. The Table below shows the
priority of the functions.

Table 4–4: Auxiliary Relays Activation Priority

PRIORITY FUNCTION

HIGHEST PULSE OUTPUT

↓ ANALOG INPUT MAIN/ALT SELECT

LOWEST ALL ALARM FUNCTIONS

For example, if one of the relays is assigned to an alarm function and it is also
assigned to one of the pulse output parameters, the relay will respond only to the
pulse output function.

4–38 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING S4 ALARMS/CONTROL

4.5 S4 Alarms/Control

4.5.1 Current/
Voltage
Alarms
SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S4 ALARMS/CONTROL ]] S5 TESTING

MESSAGE

MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] CURRENT/VOLTAGE DETECT I/V ALARMS Range: NO, YES

] USING PERCENTAGE: NO

PHASE UNDERCURRENT Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2,

RELAY: OFF AUX3, OFF

PHASE UNDERCURRENT Range: 1 to 12000 A in steps of 1, or 1

LEVEL d 100 A to 100% of CT in steps of 1, set
by the DETECT I/V ALARMS
USING PERCENTAGE value.

PHASE UNDERCURRENT Range: 0.5 to 600.0 s; Step 0.5 s

DELAY: 10.0 s

DETECT UNDERCURRENT Range: NO, YES

WHEN 0A: NO

PHASE OVERCURRENT
Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2,
RELAY: OFF AUX3, OFF
PHASE OVERCURRENT Range: 1 to 12000 A in steps of 1, or
LEVEL t 100 A to 150% of CT in steps of 1, set by
the DETECT I/V ALARMS USING
PERCENTAGE value

PHASE OVERCURRENT Range: 0.5 to 600.0 s; Step 0.5 s

DELAY: 10.0 s

PHASE OVERCURRENT Range: AVERAGE, MAXIMUM

ACTIVATION: AVERAGE

NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2,

CONTINUED ON RELAY: OFF AUX3, OFF
NEXT PAGE
NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT Range: 1 to 12000 in steps of 1, or 1
LEVEL t 100 A to 150% of CT in steps of 1,
set by the DETECT I/V
ALARMS USING PERCENTAGE
value
NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT
Range: 0.5 to 600.0 s; Step 0.5 s
DELAY: 10.0 s

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–39

S4 ALARMS/CONTROL CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

CONTINUED FROM
UNDERVOLTAGE Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2,
PREVIOUS PAGE
RELAY: OFF AUX3, OFF
UNDERVOLTAGE Range: 20 to 65000 V in steps of 1, or 20 to 100%
LEVEL d 100 V of VT in steps of 1, set by the DETECT I/V
ALARMS USING PERCENTAGE value

UNDERVOLTAGE Range: 0.5 to 600.0 s; Step 0.5 s

DELAY: 10.0 s
PHASES REQ'D FOR U/V Range: ANY ONE, ANY TWO, ALL THREE
OPERATION: ANY ONE
DETECT UNDERVOLTAGE Range: NO, YES
BELOW 20V: NO
OVERVOLTAGE Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, OFF
RELAY: OFF
OVERVOLTAGE Range: 20 to 65000 V in steps of 1, or 20 to
LEVEL t 100 V 150% of VT in steps of 1, set by the
DETECT I/V ALARMS USING
PERCENTAGE value
OVERVOLTAGE Range: 0.5 to 600.0 s; Step 0.5 s
DELAY: 10.0 s
PHASES REQ'D FOR O/V Range: ANY ONE, ANY TWO, ALL THREE
OPERATION: ANY ONE
CURRENT UNBALANCE Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2,
RELAY: OFF AUX3, OFF
CURRENT UNBALANCE Range: 1 to 100%; Step 1%
LEVEL t 100%
CURRENT UNBALANCE Range: 0.5 to 600.0 s; Step 0.5 s
DELAY: 10.0 s
VOLTAGE UNBALANCE Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2,
RELAY: OFF AUX3, OFF
VOLTAGE UNBALANCE Range: 1 to 100%; Step 1%
LEVEL t 100%
VOLTAGE UNBALANCE Range: 0.5 to 600.0 s; Step 0.5 s
DELAY: 10.0 s
VOLTS PHASE REVERSAL Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2,
RELAY: OFF AUX3, OFF
VOLTS PHASE REVERSAL Range: 0.5 to 600.0 s; Step 0.5 s
DELAY: 1.0 s

These setpoints are not visib le if VT WIRING

is set to SINGLE PHASE DIRECT

FIGURE 4–22: Setpoints Page 4 – Alarms/Control / Current/Voltage

• DETECT I/V ALARMS USING PERCENTAGE: When YES is selected, all current and
voltage alarms can be set in percentages of CT and VT. When NO is selected, all
current and voltage alarms are actual voltage and current levels.
• PHASE UNDERCURRENT RELAY: Undercurrent can either be disabled, used as an
alarm or as a process control feature. Set this setpoint to off if the feature is not
required. Selecting alarm relay will cause the alarm relay to activate and display an
alarm message whenever an undercurrent condition exists. Selecting an auxiliary
relay will cause the selected auxiliary relay to activate for an undercurrent condition
but no message will be displayed. This is intended for process control.

4–40 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING S4 ALARMS/CONTROL

• PHASE UNDERCURRENT LEVEL: When the average three phase current drops to or
below the level set by this setpoint, a phase undercurrent condition will occur. Refer to
the DETECT UNDERCURRENT WHEN 0A setpoint description below to enable/
disable undercurrent detection below 5% of CT.
• PHASE UNDERCURRENT DELAY: If the average phase current drops to or below the
PHASE UNDERCURRENT LEVEL setpoint value and remains this way for the time
delay programmed in this setpoint, a phase undercurrent condition will occur.
• DETECT UNDERCURRENT WHEN 0A: If this setpoint is set to YES, undercurrent will be
detected if the average phase current drops below 5% of CT. If the setting is NO, the
undercurrent detection is only enabled if the average phase current is equal to or
above 5% of CT.
• PHASE OVERCURRENT RELAY: Overcurrent can either be disabled, used as an alarm
or as a process control. Set this setpoint to off if the feature is not required. Selecting
alarm relay will cause the alarm relay to activate and display an alarm message
whenever an overcurrent condition exists. Selecting auxiliary relay will cause the
auxiliary relay to activate for an overcurrent condition but no message will be
displayed. This is intended for process control.
• PHASE OVERCURRENT LEVEL: When the average (or maximum, see below) three
phase current equals or exceeds the level set by this setpoint, a phase overcurrent
condition will occur.
• PHASE OVERCURRENT DELAY: If the average (or maximum, see below) phase current
equals or exceeds the PHASE OVERCURRENT LEVEL setpoint value and remains this
way for the time delay programmed in this setpoint, a phase overcurrent condition will
occur.
• PHASE OVERCURRENT ACTIVATION: The Phase Overcurrent function can use either
the average phase current or the maximum of the three phase currents. This setpoint
determines which is used.
• NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT RELAY: Neutral overcurrent can either be disabled, used as
an alarm or as a process control. Set this setpoint to off if the feature is not required.
Selecting alarm relay will cause the alarm relay to activate and display an alarm
message whenever a neutral overcurrent condition exists. Selecting auxiliary relay will
cause the auxiliary relay to activate for a neutral overcurrent condition but no
message will be displayed. This is intended for process control.
• NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT LEVEL: When the neutral current equals or exceeds the level
set by this setpoint, a neutral overcurrent condition will occur.
• NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT DELAY: If the neutral current equals or exceeds the
NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT LEVEL setpoint value and remains this way for the time
delay programmed in this setpoint, a neutral overcurrent condition will occur.
• UNDERVOLTAGE RELAY: Undervoltage can either be disabled, used as an alarm or as
a process control. Set this setpoint to off if the feature is not required. Selecting alarm
relay will cause the alarm relay to activate and display an alarm message whenever
an undervoltage condition exists. Selecting auxiliary relay will cause the auxiliary relay
to activate for an undervoltage condition but no message will be displayed. This is
intended for process control.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–41

S4 ALARMS/CONTROL CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

• UNDERVOLTAGE LEVEL: When the voltage on one, two, or three phases drops to or
below this level, an undervoltage condition occurs. The number of phases required is
determined by the PHASES REQUIRED FOR U/V OPERATION setpoint. To clear the
undervoltage condition, the level must increase to 103% of the UNDERVOLTAGE
LEVEL setting. For example, if the UNDERVOLTAGE LEVEL is set to 4000 V, the
condition clears when the voltage in the appropriate phase(s) increases above 4120 V
(4000 × 1.03). This hysteresis is implemented to avoid nuisance alarms due to voltage
fluctuations.
• UNDERVOLTAGE DELAY: If the voltage drops to or below the UNDERVOLTAGE LEVEL
setpoint value and remains this way for the time delay programmed in this setpoint,
an undervoltage condition will occur.
• PHASES REQ’D FOR U/V OPERATION: Select the minimum number of phases on which
the undervoltage condition must be detected before the selected output relay will
operate. This setpoint is not visible if VT WIRING is set to SINGLE PHASE DIRECT.
• DETECT UNDERVOLTAGE BELOW 20V: If an indication is required for loss of voltage,
select YES for this setpoint. If NO is selected and any one of the voltage inputs has less
than 20 V applied, the undervoltage feature will be disabled.
• OVERVOLTAGE RELAY: Overvoltage can either be disabled, used as an alarm or as a
process control. Set this setpoint to off if the feature is not required. Selecting alarm
relay will cause the alarm relay to activate and display an alarm message whenever
an overvoltage condition exists. Selecting auxiliary relay will cause the auxiliary relay
to activate for an overvoltage condition but no message will be displayed. This is
intended for process control.
• OVERVOLTAGE LEVEL: When the voltage on one, two, or three phases equals or
exceeds the level determined with this setpoint, an overvoltage condition occurs. The
number of phases required is determined by the PHASES REQUIRED FOR O/V
OPERATION setpoint. To clear the overvoltage condition, the level must decrease to
97% of the OVERVOLTAGE LEVEL setting. For example, if the OVERVOLTAGE LEVEL
is set to 4200 V, the condition clears when the voltage in the appropriate phase(s) goes
below 4074 V (4200 × 0.97). This hysteresis is implemented to avoid nuisance alarms
due to voltage fluctuations.
• OVERVOLTAGE DELAY: If the voltage equals or exceeds the OVERVOLTAGE LEVEL
setpoint value and remains this way for the time delay programmed in this setpoint,
an overvoltage condition will occur.
• PHASES REQ’D FOR O/V OPERATION: Select the minimum number of phases on which
the overvoltage condition must be detected before the selected output relay will
operate. This setpoint is not visible if VT WIRING is set to SINGLE PHASE DIRECT.
• CURRENT UNBALANCE RELAY: Current unbalance is calculated as the maximum
deviation from the average divided by the average three phase current. Current
unbalance can either be disabled, used as an alarm or as a process control. Set this
setpoint to off if the feature is not required. Selecting alarm relay will cause the alarm
relay to activate and display an alarm message whenever a current unbalance
condition exists. Selecting auxiliary relay will cause the auxiliary relay to activate for a
current unbalance condition but no message will be displayed. This is intended for
process control.

4–42 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING S4 ALARMS/CONTROL

• CURRENT UNBALANCE LEVEL: When the current unbalance equals or exceeds this
level, a current unbalance condition will occur. See chapter 5 for details on the method
of calculation.
• CURRENT UNBALANCE DELAY: If the current unbalance equals or exceeds the
CURRENT UNBALANCE LEVEL value for the time delay programmed in this setpoint,
a current unbalance condition occurs.
• VOLTAGE UNBALANCE RELAY: Voltage unbalance is calculated as the maximum
deviation from the average divided by the average three phase voltage. Voltage
unbalance can either be disabled, used as an alarm or as a process control. Set this
setpoint to off if the feature is not required. Selecting alarm relay will cause the alarm
relay to activate and display an alarm message whenever a voltage unbalance
condition exists. Selecting auxiliary relay will cause the auxiliary relay to activate for a
voltage unbalance condition but no message will be displayed. This is intended for
process control.
• VOLTAGE UNBALANCE LEVEL: When the voltage unbalance equals or exceeds this
level, a voltage unbalance condition occurs. See chapter 5 for details on the method of
calculation.
• VOLTAGE UNBALANCE DELAY: If the voltage unbalance equals or exceeds the
VOLTAGE UNBALANCE LEVEL setpoint value and remains this way for the time delay
programmed in this setpoint, a voltage unbalance condition will occur.
• VOLTAGE PHASE REVERSAL: Under normal operating conditions, the PQM expects to
see the voltages connected with a 1-2-3 or A-B-C sequence. If the voltages are
connected with the wrong sequence, 2-1-3 or B-A-C, a voltage phase reversal
condition will occur. A minimum of 20 V must be applied to the PQM on all voltage
inputs before the phase reversal feature will operate.
A phase reversal condition is determined by looking at the phase angle at the
occurrence of the peak sample of phase B voltage and subtracting it from the phase
angle at the peak sample of phase A voltage (phase A angle - phase B angle). This
angle is averaged over several cycles before deciding on the condition to avoid any
false triggering of the feature. Only two phases are required to detect phase reversal
because all phase reversal conditions can be covered without the use of the third
phase. The angle to detect phase reversal will vary depending on the connection
being used as described below.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–43

S4 ALARMS/CONTROL CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

For 4-wire wye (3 VTs), 4-wire wye (2 VTs), 4-wire direct, and 3-wire direct connections,
the phase reversal function operates when the angle between phase A and B
becomes ≤ –150° or ≥ –90° as shown below.

Vc(a or n) = –240°

Va(b or n) = 0° (reference)

Vb(c or n) – 30°

Vb(c or n) = –120°
shaded area = angle tolerance allowed
Vb(c or n) + 30° before phase reversal will occur
FIGURE 4–23: Phase Reversal For 4-wire & 3-wire Direct Connections

For the 3 WIRE DELTA (2 VTs) connection the phase reversal function operates when
the angle between phase A and B becomes ≤ 30° or ≥ 90° as shown below.

Vcb + 30°
shaded area = angle tolerance
allowed before phase reversal Vcb = 60°
will occur
Vcb – 30°

Vab = 0° (reference)

Vbc = –120°
FIGURE 4–24: Phase Reversal For 3-wire Delta (2 Vts Open-delta) Connection

When the SINGLE PHASE DIRECT connection is used the phase reversal feature will
never operate.
• VOLTAGE PHASE REVERSAL DELAY: If a voltage phase reversal exists for the time
programmed in this setpoint a voltage phase reversal condition will occur.

4–44 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING S4 ALARMS/CONTROL

4.5.2 Total
Harmonic
Distortion
SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S4 ALARMS/CONTROL ]] S5 TESTING

] CURRENT/VOLTAGE
]

MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] TOTAL HARMONIC AVERAGE CURRENT THD Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, OFF
] DISTORTION RELAY: OFF
AVERAGE CURRENT THD Range: 0.5 to 100.0; Step 0.5%
LEVEL t 10.0 %
AVERAGE CURRENT THD Range: 0.5 to 600.0; Step 0.5 s
DELAY: 10.0 s
AVERAGE VOLTAGE THD Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2,
RELAY: OFF AUX3, OFF
AVERAGE VOLTAGE THD Range: 0.5 to 100.0; Step 0.5%
LEVEL t 10.0%
AVERAGE VOLTAGE THD Range: 0.5 to 600.0; Step 0.5 s
DELAY: 10.0 s

FIGURE 4–25: Setpoints Page 4: Alarms/Control / Total Harmonic Distortion

• AVERAGE CURRENT THD RELAY: Excessive phase current THD detection can either be
disabled, used as an alarm, or as a process control. Set this setpoint to OFF if the
feature is not required. Selecting alarm relay will cause the alarm relay to activate and
display an alarm message whenever an excessive average current THD condition
exists. Selecting auxiliary relay will cause the auxiliary relay to activate, but no
message will be displayed. This is intended for process control.
• AVERAGE CURRENT THD LEVEL: When the measured average current THD exceeds
this setpoint value, an average current THD condition occurs.
• AVERAGE CURRENT THD DELAY: If the average current THD exceeds the AVERAGE
CURRENT THD LEVEL for the time delay programmed in this setpoint, an average
current THD condition occurs.
• AVERAGE VOLTAGE THD RELAY: Average voltage THD detection can either be
disabled, used as an alarm or as a process control. Set this setpoint to off if the feature
is not required. Selecting alarm relay will cause the alarm relay to activate and display
an alarm message whenever an average voltage THD condition exists. Selecting
auxiliary relay will cause the auxiliary relay to activate, but no message will be
displayed. This is intended for process control.
• AVERAGE VOLTAGE THD LEVEL: When the measured average voltage THD equals or
exceeds this setpoint value, an AVERAGE VOLTAGE THD condition occurs.
• AVERAGE VOLTAGE THD DELAY: If the average voltage THD equals or exceeds the
AVERAGE VOLTAGE THD LEVEL setpoint value and remains this way for the time
delay programmed in this setpoint, an AVERAGE VOLTAGE THD condition will occur.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–45

S4 ALARMS/CONTROL CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

4.5.3 Frequency
SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S4 ALARMS/CONTROL ]] S5 TESTING

] CURRENT/VOLTAGE
]

MESSAGE
MESSAGE MESSAGE

] FREQUENCY UNDERFREQUENCY Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, OFF

] RELAY: OFF
UNDERFREQUENCY Range: 20.00 to 70.00 Hz; Step: 0.01 Hz
LEVEL d 40.00 Hz
UNDERFREQUENCY Range: 0.1 to 10.0; Step 0.1 s
DELAY: 1.0 s
UNDERFREQUENCY WHEN Range: Yes, No
FREQ = 0 Hz: NO
OVERFREQUENCY Range: Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, Aux3, Off
RELAY: OFF
OVERFREQUENCY Range: 20.00 to 125.00
LEVEL t 70.00 Hz Step 0.01 Hz
OVERFREQUENCY
Range: 0.1 to 10.0; Step 0.1 s
DELAY: 10.0 s

FIGURE 4–26: Setpoints Page 4 – Alarms/Control / Frequency

• UNDERFREQUENCY RELAY: Underfrequency detection can either be disabled or used

as an alarm, or process control. Set this setpoint to OFF if the feature is not required.
Selecting alarm relay will cause the alarm relay to activate and display an alarm
message whenever an underfrequency condition exists. Selecting auxiliary relay will
cause the auxiliary relay to activate for an underfrequency condition, but no message
will be displayed. This is intended for process control.
• UNDERFREQUENCY LEVEL: When the measured frequency drops to or below the level
set by this setpoint, an underfrequency condition will occur.
• UNDERFREQUENCY DELAY: If the underfrequency drops to or below the
UNDERFREQUENCY LEVEL value for the time delay programmed in this setpoint, an
underfrequency condition will occur.
• UNDERFREQUENCY WHEN FREQ = 0 Hz: A voltage greater than 20 V is required on
phase AN (AB) voltage input before frequency can be measured. If no voltage is
applied or if the voltage applied is less than 20 V, the displayed frequency will be 0 Hz.
If “No” is selected in this setpoint, an underfrequency condition will not occur when
the displayed frequency is 0 Hz.
• OVERFREQUENCY RELAY: Overfrequency detection can either be disabled, used as an
alarm or as a process control. Set this setpoint to off if the feature is not required.
Selecting alarm relay will cause the alarm relay to activate and display an alarm
message whenever an overfrequency condition exists. Selecting auxiliary relay will
cause the auxiliary relay to activate for an overfrequency condition, but no message
will be displayed. This is intended for process control.
• OVERFREQUENCY LEVEL: When the measured frequency equals or exceeds the level
set by this setpoint, an overfrequency condition will occur.

4–46 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING S4 ALARMS/CONTROL

• OVERFREQUENCY DELAY: If the overfrequency equals or exceeds the

OVERFREQUENCY LEVEL setpoint value for the time delay programmed in this
setpoint, an overfrequency condition will occur.

4.5.4 Power Alarms

SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S4 ALARMS/CONTROL ]] S5 TESTING

] CURRENT/VOLTAGE
]

MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] POWER POWER ALARMS LEVEL Range: kW/kVAR, MW/MVAR

] BASE UNITS: kW/kVAR
POSITIVE REAL POWER Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, OFF
RELAY: OFF
POSITIVE REAL POWER Range: 1 to 65000, Step 1 kW
LEVEL t 1000 kW 0.01 to 650.00, Step 0.01 MW **
POSITIVE REAL POWER Range: 0.5 to 600.0; Step 0.5 s
DELAY: 10.0 s
NEGATIVE REAL POWER Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2,
RELAY: OFF AUX3, OFF
NEGATIVE REAL POWER Range: 1 to 65000, Step 1 kW
LEVEL t 1000 kW 0.01 to 650.00, Step 0.01 MW **
NEGATIVE REAL POWER Range: 0.5 to 600.0; Step 0.5 s
DELAY: 10.0 s
POSITIVE REACT POWER Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2,
RELAY: OFF AUX3, OFF
POSITIVE REACT POWER Range: 1 to 65000, Step 1 kvar
LEVEL t 1000 kvar 0.01 to 650.00, Step 0.01 Mvar **
POSITIVE REACT POWER Range: 0.5 to 600.0
DELAY: 10.0 s Step 0.5 s

NEGATIVE REACT POWER Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2,

RELAY: OFF AUX3, OFF
NEGATIVE REACT POWER Range: 1 to 65000, Step 1 kvar
LEVEL t 1000 kvar 0.01 to 650.00, Step 0.01 Mvar **

NEGATIVE REACT POWER Range: 0.5 to 600.0

DELAY: 10.0 s Step 0.5 s

** These setpoint ranges are dependent upon the POWER ALARMS LEVEL BASE UNITS setpoint.
If POWER ALARMS LEVEL BASE UNITS = kW/kVAR, then the ranges are in kW/kvar.
If POWER ALARM LEVEL BASE UNITS = MW/Mvar, then the ranges are in MW/Mvar

FIGURE 4–27: Setpoints Page 4 – Alarms/Control / Power

• POWER ALARMS LEVEL BASE UNITS: This setpoint is used to select the base unit
multiplier for all power alarms. When set to kW/kVAR , all power alarm levels can be set
in terms of kW and kVAR with a step value of 1 kW/kVAR. When set to MW/MVAR, all
power alarm levels can be set in terms of MW and MVAR with a step value of 0.01 MW/
MVAR.
• POSITIVE REAL POWER RELAY: Positive real power level detection can either be
disabled, used as an alarm or as a process control. Set this setpoint to off if the feature
is not required. Selecting alarm relay will cause the alarm relay to activate and display
an alarm message whenever a positive real power level exceeds the selected level.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–47

S4 ALARMS/CONTROL CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

Selecting auxiliary relay will cause the auxiliary relay to activate for a set level of
positive real power but no message will be displayed. This is intended for process
control.
• POSITIVE REAL POWER LEVEL: When the three phase real power equals or exceeds
the level set by this setpoint, an excess positive real power condition will occur.
• POSITIVE REAL POWER DELAY: If the positive real power equals or exceeds the
POSITIVE REAL POWER LEVEL setpoint value for the time delay programmed in this
setpoint, an excessive positive real power condition will occur.
• NEGATIVE REAL POWER RELAY: Negative real power level detection can either be
disabled, used as an alarm or as a process control. Set this setpoint to off if the feature
is not required. Selecting alarm relay will cause the alarm relay to activate and display
an alarm message whenever a negative real power level exceeds the selected level.
Selecting auxiliary relay will cause the auxiliary relay to activate for a set level of
negative real power but no message will be displayed. This is intended for process
control.
• NEGATIVE REAL POWER LEVEL: When the three phase real power equals or exceeds
the level set by this setpoint, an excess negative real power condition will occur.
• NEGATIVE REAL POWER DELAY: If the negative real power equals or exceeds the
NEGATIVE REAL POWER LEVEL setpoint value for the time delay programmed in this
setpoint, an excessive negative real power condition will occur.
• POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER RELAY: Positive reactive power level detection can either
be disabled, used as an alarm or as a process control. Set this setpoint to off if the
feature is not required. Selecting alarm relay will cause the alarm relay to activate and
display an alarm message whenever a positive reactive power level exceeds the
selected level. Selecting auxiliary relay will cause the auxiliary relay to activate for a
set level of positive reactive power but no message will be displayed. This is intended
for process control.
• POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER LEVEL: When the three phase reactive power equals or
exceeds the level set by this setpoint, an excess positive reactive power condition will
occur.
• POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER DELAY: If the positive reactive power equals or exceeds
the POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER LEVEL setpoint value for the time delay
programmed in this setpoint, an excessive positive reactive power condition will occur.
• NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER RELAY: Negative reactive power level detection can
either be disabled, used as an alarm or as a process control. Set this setpoint to off if
the feature is not required. Selecting alarm relay will cause the alarm relay to activate
and display an alarm message whenever a negative reactive power level exceeds the
selected level. Selecting auxiliary relay will cause the auxiliary relay to activate for a
set level of negative reactive power but no message will be displayed. This is intended
for process control.
• NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER LEVEL: When the three phase reactive power equals or
exceeds the level set by this setpoint, an excess negative reactive power condition will
occur.
• NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER DELAY: If the negative reactive power equals or exceeds
the NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER LEVEL setpoint value for the time delay

4–48 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING S4 ALARMS/CONTROL

programmed in this setpoint, an excessive negative reactive power condition will

occur.

4.5.5 Power Factor

SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S4 ALARMS/CONTROL ]] S5 TESTING

MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] POWER FACTOR POWER FACTOR LEAD 1 Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, OFF
] RELAY: OFF
POWER FACTOR LEAD 1 Range: 0.50 to 1.00, Step 0.01
PICKUP ≤ 0.99
POWER FACTOR LEAD 1 Range: 0.50 to 1.00, Step 0.01
DROPOUT ≥ 1.00
POWER FACTOR LEAD 1 Range: 0.5 to 600.0; Step 0.5 s
DELAY: 10.0 s
POWER FACTOR LAG 1 Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2,
RELAY: OFF AUX3, OFF

POWER FACTOR LAG 1 Range: 0.50 to 1.00, Step 0.01

PICKUP ≤ 0.99
POWER FACTOR LAG 1 Range: 0.50 to 1.00, Step 0.01
DROPOUT ≥ 1.00
POWER FACTOR LAG 1 Range: 0.5 to 600.0; Step 0.5 s
DELAY: 10.0 s
POWER FACTOR LEAD 2 Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2,
RELAY: OFF AUX3, OFF

POWER FACTOR LEAD 2 Range: 0.50 to 1.00, Step 0.01

PICKUP ≤ 0.99
POWER FACTOR LEAD 2 Range: 0.50 to 1.00, Step 0.01
DROPOUT ≥ 1.00
POWER FACTOR LEAD 2 Range: 0.5 to 600.0; Step 0.5 s
DELAY: 10.0 s
POWER FACTOR LAG 2 Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2,
RELAY: OFF AUX3, OFF
POWER FACTOR LAG 2 Range: 0.50 to 1.00, Step 0.01
PICKUP ≤ 0.99
POWER FACTOR LAG 2 Range: 0.50 to 1.00, Step 0.01
DROPOUT ≥ 1.00
POWER FACTOR LAG 2 Range: 0.5 to 600.0; Step 0.5 s
DELAY: 10.0 s

FIGURE 4–28: Setpoints Page 4 – Alarms/Control / Power Factor

It is generally desirable for a system operator to maintain the power factor as close to
unity as possible (that is, to make the real power of the system as close as possible to the
apparent power) to minimize both costs and voltage excursions. On dedicated circuits
such as some large motors, with a near-fixed load, a capacitor bank may be switched on
or off with the motor to supply leading vars to compensate for the lagging vars required by
the motor. Since the power factor is variable on common non-dedicated circuits, it is

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–49

S4 ALARMS/CONTROL CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

advantageous to compensate for low (lagging) power factor values by connecting a

capacitor bank to the circuit when required. The PQM provides power factor monitoring
and allows two stages of capacitance switching for power factor compensation.

FIGURE 4–29: Capacitor Bank Switching

The PQM calculates the average power factor in the three phases, according to the
following equation:

Total 3-phase Real Power

Average Power Factor = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total 3-phase Apparent Power

Two independent “elements” are available for monitoring power factor, POWER FACTOR 1
and POWER FACTOR 2, each having a pickup and a dropout level. For each element, when
the measured power factor is equal to or becomes more lagging than the pickup level (i.e.
numerically less than), the PQM will operate a user-selected output relay. This output can
be used to control a switching device which connects capacitance to the circuit, or to
signal an alarm to the system operator. After entering this state, when the power factor
becomes less lagging than the power factor dropout level, the PQM will reset the output
relay to the non-operated state.
Both power factor 1 and 2 features are inhibited from operating unless all three voltages
are above 20% of nominal and one or more currents is above 0. Power factor 1 and 2 delay
timers will be allowed to time only when the 20% threshold is exceeded on all phases (and,
of course, only while the power factor remains outside of the programmed pickup and
dropout levels). In the same way, when a power factor condition starts the power factor 1
or 2 delay timer, if all three phase voltages fall below the 20% threshold before the timer
has timed-out, the element will reset without operating. A loss of voltage during any state
will return both power factor 1 and 2 to the reset state.

4–50 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING S4 ALARMS/CONTROL

• POWER FACTOR LEAD 1 / 2 RELAY: Power factor detection can either be disabled,
used as an alarm or as a process control. Set this setpoint to off if the feature is not
required. Selecting alarm relay will cause the alarm relay to activate and display an
alarm message when the power factor is more leading than the level set. Selecting
AUX1, AUX2 or AUX3 relay will cause the respective auxiliary relay to activate when
the power factor is equal to or more leading than the level set, but no message will be
displayed. This is intended for process control. A minimum of 20V applied must exist
on all voltage inputs before this feature will operate.
• POWER FACTOR LEAD 1 / 2 PICKUP: When a leading power factor equals or exceeds
the level set by this setpoint, a power factor lead 1/2 condition will occur.
• POWER FACTOR LEAD 1 / 2 DROPOUT: When a leading power factor drops below the
level set by this setpoint, the power factor lead 1/2 condition will drop out.
• POWER FACTOR LEAD 1 / 2 DELAY: If the power factor equals or exceeds the POWER
FACTOR LEAD 1/2 PICKUP setpoint value and remains this way for the time delay
programmed in this setpoint, a power factor lead 1/2 condition will occur.
If the power factor drops below the POWER FACTOR LEAD 1/2 DROPOUT setpoint
value, the power factor lead 1/2 condition will drop out. If the POWER FACTOR LEAD
1/2 RELAY setpoint is set to ALARM, the alarm relay will deactivate and the POWER
FACTOR LEAD 1/2 ALARM message will be cleared. If the POWER FACTOR LEAD 1/2
RELAY setpoint is set to AUX1, AUX2, or AUX3, the respective auxiliary relay will
deactivate.
• POWER FACTOR LAG 1 / 2 RELAY: Power factor detection can either be disabled, used
as an alarm or as a process control. Set this setpoint to off if the feature is not
required. Selecting alarm relay will cause the alarm relay to activate and display an
alarm message when the power factor is more lagging than the level set. Selecting
AUX1, AUX2, or AUX3 relay activates the respective auxiliary relay when the power
factor is equal to or more lagging than the level set, but no message will be displayed.
This is intended for process control. A minimum of 20 V applied must exist on all
voltage inputs before this feature will operate.
• POWER FACTOR LAG 1 / 2 PICKUP: When a lagging power factor equals or exceeds
the level set by this setpoint, a power factor lag 1/2 condition will occur.
• POWER FACTOR LAG 1 / 2 DROPOUT: When a lagging power factor drops below the
level set by this setpoint, the power factor lag 1/2 condition will drop out.
• POWER FACTOR LAG 1 / 2 DELAY: If the power factor equals or exceeds the POWER
FACTOR LAG 1/2 PICKUP setpoint value and remains this way for the time delay
programmed in this setpoint, a power factor lag 1/2 condition will occur.
If the power factor drops below the POWER FACTOR LAG 1/2 DROPOUT setpoint
value, the power factor 1/2 lag condition will drop out. If the POWER FACTOR LAG 1/
2 RELAY setpoint is set to ALARM, the alarm relay will deactivate and the POWER
FACTOR LAG 1/2 ALARM message will be cleared. If the POWER FACTOR LAG 1/2
RELAY setpoint is set to AUX1, AUX2. or AUX3, the respective auxiliary relay will
deactivate.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–51

S4 ALARMS/CONTROL CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

4.5.6 Demand
Alarms

SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S4 ALARMS/CONTROL ]] S5 TESTING

MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] DEMAND PHASE A CURRENT DMD Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, OFF
] RELAY: OFF
PHASE A CURRENT DMD Range: 10 to 7500, Step: 1 A
LEVEL ≥ 100 A
PHASE B CURRENT DMD Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, OFF
RELAY: OFF
PHASE A CURRENT DMD Range: 10 to 7500, Step: 1 A
LEVEL ≥ 100 A
PHASE C CURRENT DMD Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, OFF
RELAY: OFF
PHASE C CURRENT DMD Range: 10 to 7500, Step: 1 A
LEVEL ≥ 100 A
NEUTRAL CURRENT DMD Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, OFF
RELAY: OFF
NEUTRAL CURRENT DMD Range: 10 to 7500, Step: 1 A
LEVEL ≥ 100 A
Φ POS REAL PWR DMD
3Φ Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2,
RELAY: OFF AUX3, OFF
Φ POS REAL PWR DMD
3Φ Range: 1 to 65000; Step: 1 kW
LEVEL ≥ 1000 kW
3Φ POS REACT PWR DMD Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2,
RELAY: OFF AUX3, OFF
3Φ POS REACT PWR DMD Range: 1 to 65000; Step: 1 kvar
LEVEL ≥ 1000 kvar
Φ NEG REAL PWR DMD
3Φ Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2,
RELAY: OFF AUX3, OFF
Φ NEG REAL PWR DMD
3Φ Range: 1 to 65000; Step: 1 kW
LEVEL ≥ 1000 kW
3Φ NEG REACT PWR DMD Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2,
RELAY: OFF AUX3, OFF
3Φ NEG REACT PWR DMD Range: 1 to 65000; Step: 1 kvar
LEVEL ≥ 1000 kvar
Φ APPARENT PWR DMD
3Φ Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2,
RELAY: OFF AUX3, OFF
Φ APPARENT PWR DMD
3Φ Range: 1 to 65000; Step: 1 kVA
LEVEL ≥ 1000 kVA

FIGURE 4–30: Setpoints Page 4 – Alarms/Control / Demand

• PHASE A/B/C/N CURRENT DEMAND RELAY: Phase/neutral current demand detection

can either be disabled or used as an alarm or process control. Set this setpoint to OFF
if the feature is not required. Selecting alarm relay activates the alarm relay and
displays an alarm message whenever a phase/neutral current demand level is
equalled or exceeded. Selecting AUX1, AUX2 or AUX3 relay activates the respective
auxiliary relay with no message displayed. This is intended for process control.
• PHASE A/B/C/N CURRENT DEMAND LEVEL: When the phase A/B/C/N current demand
equals or exceeds this setpoint, a phase A/B/C/N demand alarm or process control
indication occurs.

4–52 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING S4 ALARMS/CONTROL

• 3Φ POSITIVE REAL POWER DEMAND RELAY: Three-phase positive real power demand
detection can either be disabled or used as an alarm or process control. Set this
setpoint to OFF if the feature is not required. Selecting ALARM activates the alarm
relay and displays an alarm message whenever the three-phase real power demand
level is equalled or exceeded. Selecting AUX1, AUX2 or AUX3 activates the respective
auxiliary relay with no message displayed. This is intended for process control.
• 3Φ POSITIVE REAL POWER DEMAND LEVEL: When the three-phase real power
demand exceeds this setpoint, a three-phase positive real power demand alarm or
process control indication will occur.
• 3Φ POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER DEMAND RELAY: Three-phase positive reactive power
demand detection can either be disabled or used as an alarm or process control. Set
to OFF if this feature is not required. Selecting ALARM activates the alarm relay and
displays an alarm message whenever the three-phase reactive power demand level is
equalled or exceeded. Selecting AUX1, AUX2, or AUX3 activates the respective
auxiliary relay with no message displayed. This is intended for process control.
• 3Φ POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER DEMAND LEVEL: When the three-phase reactive
power demand equals or exceeds this setpoint, a three-phase positive reactive power
demand alarm or process control indication will occur.
• 3Φ NEGATIVE REAL POWER DEMAND RELAY: Three-phase negative real power
demand detection can be disabled or used as an alarm or process control. Set to OFF
if this feature is not required. Selecting ALARM activates the alarm relay and displays
an alarm message whenever the level of the negative three-phase real power
demand is equalled or exceeded. Selecting AUX1, AUX2 or AUX3 activates the
respective auxiliary relay with no message displayed. This is intended for process
control.
• 3Φ NEGATIVE REAL POWER DEMAND LEVEL: When the three-phase real power
demand is negative and exceeds this setpoint, a three-phase negative real power
demand alarm or process control indication will occur.
• 3Φ NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER DEMAND RELAY: Three-phase negative reactive
power demand detection can be disabled or used as an alarm or process control. Set
to OFF if this feature is not required. Selecting ALARM activates the alarm relay and
displays an alarm message if the level of the negative three-phase reactive power
demand is equalled or exceeded. Selecting AUX1, AUX2 or AUX3 activates the
respective auxiliary relay with no message displayed (intended for process control).
• 3Φ NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER DEMAND LEVEL: If the three-phase reactive power
demand is negative and equals or exceeds this setpoint, a three-phase negative
reactive power demand alarm or process control indication will occur.
• 3Φ APPARENT POWER DEMAND RELAY: Three-phase apparent power demand
detection can be disabled or used as an alarm or process control. Set to OFF if this
feature is not required. Selecting ALARM activates the alarm relay and displays an
alarm message if the three-phase apparent power demand level is equalled or
exceeded. Selecting AUX1, AUX2 or AUX3 activates the respective auxiliary relay with
no message displayed. This is intended for process control.
• 3Φ APPARENT POWER DEMAND LEVEL: When the three-phase apparent power
demand equals or exceeds this setpoint, a three-phase apparent power alarm or
process control indication will occur.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–53

S4 ALARMS/CONTROL CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

4.5.7 Pulse Input

SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S4 ALARMS/CONTROL ]] S5 TESTING

MESSAGE
MESSAGE MESSAGE

] PULSE INPUT PULSE INPUT 1 Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, OFF
] RELAY: OFF
PULSE INPUT 1 Range: 1 to 65000, Step 1
LEVEL ≥ 100 Units
PULSE INPUT 1 Range: 0.5 to 600.0, Step 0.5 s
DELAY: 10.0 s
PULSE INPUT 2 Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2,
RELAY: OFF AUX3, OFF

PULSE INPUT 2 Range: 1 to 65000, Step 1

LEVEL ≥ 100 Units
PULSE INPUT 2 Range: 0.5 to 600.0, Step 0.5 s
DELAY: 10.0 s
PULSE INPUT 3 Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2,
RELAY: OFF AUX3, OFF

PULSE INPUT 3 Range: 1 to 65000, Step 1

LEVEL ≥ 100 Units
PULSE INPUT 3 Range: 0.5 to 600.0, Step 0.5 s
DELAY: 10.0 s
PULSE INPUT 4 Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2,
RELAY: OFF AUX3, OFF

PULSE INPUT 4 Range: 1 to 65000, Step 1

LEVEL ≥ 100 Units
PULSE INPUT 4 Range: 0.5 to 600.0, Step 0.5 s
DELAY: 10.0 s
TOTALIZED PULSES Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2,
RELAY: OFF AUX3, OFF

TOTALIZED PULSES Range: 1 to 65000, Step 1

LEVEL ≥ 100 Units
TOTALIZED PULSES Range: 0.5 to 600.0, Step 0.5 s
DELAY: 10.0 s

FIGURE 4–31: Setpoints Page 4 – Alarms/Control / Pulse Input

• PULSE INPUT 1 RELAY: Any of the PQM switch inputs can be assigned to count pulse
inputs as shown in Section 4.3.4: Switch Inputs on page –31. This setpoint can be used
to give an indication (alarm or control) if the programmed level is equalled or
exceeded. Set this setpoint to OFF if the feature is not required. Selecting ALARM will
cause the alarm relay to activate and display an alarm message whenever a pulse
count level equals or exceeds the selected level. Selecting AUX1, AUX2 or AUX3
activates the appropriate auxiliary relay but no message is displayed. The AUX1, AUX2
or AUX3 selections are intended for process control.
• PULSE INPUT 1 LEVEL: When the pulse input value accumulated in the
A1 METERING \ PULSE INPUT COUNTERS \ PULSE INPUT 1 actual value equals or
exceeds this setpoint value, the relay assigned in the PULSE INPUT 1 RELAY will
energize. If the ALARM relay is assigned, a PULSE INPUT 1 ALARM message will also be
displayed. The units in this setpoint are determined by the
S2 SYSTEM SETUP \ PULSE INPUT \ PULSE INPUT UNITS setpoint.

4–54 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING S4 ALARMS/CONTROL

• PULSE INPUT 1 DELAY: This setpoint can be used to allow a time delay before the
assigned relay will energize after the PULSE INPUT 1 LEVEL has been equaled or
exceeded.
• PULSE INPUT 2 RELAY: See PULSE INPUT 1 RELAY description above and replace all
references to PULSE INPUT 1 with PULSE INPUT 2.
• PULSE INPUT 2 LEVEL: See PULSE INPUT 1 RELAY description above and replace all
references to PULSE INPUT 1 with PULSE INPUT 2.
• PULSE INPUT 2 DELAY: See PULSE INPUT 1 RELAY description above and replace all
references to PULSE INPUT 1 with PULSE INPUT 2.
• PULSE INPUT 3 RELAY: See PULSE INPUT 1 RELAY description above and replace all
references to PULSE INPUT 1 with PULSE INPUT 3.
• PULSE INPUT 3 LEVEL: See PULSE INPUT 1 RELAY description above and replace all
references to PULSE INPUT 1 with PULSE INPUT 3.
• PULSE INPUT 3 DELAY: See PULSE INPUT 1 RELAY description above and replace all
references to PULSE INPUT 1 with PULSE INPUT 3.
• PULSE INPUT 4 RELAY: See PULSE INPUT 1 RELAY description above and replace all
references to PULSE INPUT 1 with PULSE INPUT 4.
• PULSE INPUT 4 LEVEL: See PULSE INPUT 1 RELAY description above and replace all
references to PULSE INPUT 1 with PULSE INPUT 4.
• PULSE INPUT 4 DELAY: See PULSE INPUT 1 RELAY description above and replace all
references to PULSE INPUT 1 with PULSE INPUT 4.
• TOTALIZED PULSES RELAY: A relay can be selected to operate based upon a Total
Pulse Input Count as configured in the PQM. Selecting ALARM will cause the alarm
relay to activate and display an alarm message whenever a pulse count level equals
or exceeds the selected level. Selecting AUX1, AUX2, or AUX3 will cause the
appropriate auxiliary relay to activate but no message will be displayed. The AUX1,
AUX2, and AUX3 selections are intended for process control.
• TOTALIZED PULSES LEVEL: See PULSE INPUT 1 LEVEL description above and replace
all references to PULSE INPUT 1 with TOTALIZED PULSES.
• TOTALIZED PULSES DELAY: See PULSE INPUT 1 DELAY description above and replace
all references to PULSE INPUT 1 with TOTALIZED PULSES.

4.5.8 Time
SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S4 ALARMS/CONTROL ]] S5 TESTING

MESSAGE
MESSAGE MESSAGE

] TIME TIME Range: ALARM, AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, OFF

] RELAY: OFF
PICKUP TIME ≥ Range: hh:mm:ss am/pm
12:00:00 am
DROPOUT TIME ≥ Range: hh:mm:ss am/pm
12:00:00 pm

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–55

S4 ALARMS/CONTROL CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

FIGURE 4–32: Setpoints Page 4 – Alarms/Control / Time

The time function is useful where a general purpose time alarm is required or a process is
required to start and stop each day at the specified time.
• TIME RELAY: This setpoint can be used to give an indication (alarm or control) if the
programmed PICKUP TIME is equaled or exceeded. Set to OFF if the feature is not
required. Selecting ALARM activates the alarm relay and displays an alarm message
whenever the PQM clock time equals or exceeds the set PICKUP TIME. Selecting
AUX1, AUX2 or AUX3 activates the appropriate auxiliary relay but no message is
displayed. The AUX1, AUX2 and AUX3 selections are intended for process control. The
selected relay will de-energize when the PQM clock time equals or exceeds the
DROPOUT TIME setting.
• PICKUP TIME: The relay assigned in the TIME RELAY setpoint energizes when the PQM
clock time equals or exceeds the time specified in this setpoint. Follow the example
below to set the PICKUP TIME.

MESSAGE MESSAGE

PICKUP TIME ≥ PICKUP TIME ≥ PICKUP TIME ≥

12:00:00 am 03:00:00 am 03:35:00 am

STORE MESSAGE

VALUE
NEW SETPOINT PICKUP TIME ≥
STORED 03:35:55 am
USE THE VALUE
KEYS TO SELECT THE
UNDERLINED
QUANTITIES

• DROPOUT TIME: The relay assigned in the TIME RELAY setpoint de-energizes when
the PQM clock time equals or exceeds the time specified in this setpoint. Follow the
example above to set the DROPOUT TIME.

4–56 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING S4 ALARMS/CONTROL

4.5.9 Miscellaneous
Alarms

SETPOINT SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S4 ALARMS/CONTROL ]] S5 TESTING

] CURRENT/VOLTAGE
]

MESSAGE ▲

MESSAGE ▼

] TIME
]

MESSAGE ▲

MESSAGE ▼
MESSAGE


] MISCELLANEOUS SERIAL COM1 FAILURE Range: 5 to 60, OFF; Step: 1 sec.

] ALARM DELAY: OFF s
SERIAL COM2 FAILURE Range: 5 to 60, OFF; Step: 1 sec.
MESSAGE
 ALARM DELAY: OFF s

CLOCK NOT SET ALARM: Range: OFF, ON

ON

DATA LOG 1 MEMORY Range: 50 to 100%, OFF; Step: 1 sec.

FULL LEVEL: OFF %
] END OF PAGE S4 DATA LOG 2 MEMORY Range: 50 to 100%, OFF; Step: 1 sec.
] FULL LEVEL: OFF %

FIGURE 4–33: Setpoints Page 4 – Alarms/Control / Miscellaneous

• SERIAL COM1/2 FAILURE ALARM DELAY: If loss of communications to the external

master is required to activate the alarm relay, select a time delay in the range of 5 to
60 seconds. In this case, an absence of communication polling on the RS485
communication port for the selected time delay will generate the alarm condition.
Disable this alarm if communications is not used or is not considered critical. This
alarm is not available on the front RS232 port.
• CLOCK NOT SET ALARM: The software clock in the PQM will remain running for a
period of approximately one hour after power has been removed from the PQM power
supply inputs. Selecting ON in this message causes a “CLOCK NOT SET ALARM” to
occur at power-up for power losses greater than approximately one hour. Once the
alarm occurs, the clock setting on S1 PQM SETUP \ CLOCK \ SET TIME & DATE must
be stored to reset the alarm.
• DATA LOG 1 / 2 MEMORY FULL LEVEL: These messages can be used to configure
alarms to indicate that the Data Logger memory is almost full. Separate alarms are
provided for each log. When the log memory reaches the level programmed in this
message a DATA LOG 1 / 2 Alarm will occur.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–57

S5 TESTING CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

4.6 S5 Testing

4.6.1 Test Output

Relays & LEDs
SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S5 TESTING ]] S1 PQM SETUP

MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] TEST RELAYS & LEDS OPERATION TEST:

] NORMAL MODE

FIGURE 4–34: Setpoints Page 5 – Testing

• OPERATION TEST: To verify correct operation of output relay wiring, each output relay
and status indicator can be manually forced on or off via the keypad or serial port.
While the OPERATION TEST setpoint is displayed, use the VALUE or VALUE
keys to scroll to the desired output relay and/or status indicator to be tested. As long
as the test message remains displayed the respective output relay and/or status
indicator will be forced to remain energized. As soon as a new message is selected,
the respective output relay and/or status indicator return to normal operation.

4–58 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING S5 TESTING

4.6.2 Current/
Voltage
Simulation
SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S5 TESTING ]] S1 PQM SETUP

] TEST RELAYS & LEDS

]

MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] CURRENT/VOLTAGE SIMULATION: Range: OFF, ON

] SIMULATION OFF
SIMULATION ENABLED Range: 5 to 300, UN LIMITED
FOR: 15 min Step: 5 min
PHASE A CURRENT: Range: 0 to 10000; Step 1 A
0 A
PHASE B CURRENT: Range: 0 to 10000; Step 1 A
0 A
PHASE C CURRENT: Range: 0 to 10000; Step 1 A
0 A
NEUTRAL CURRENT: Range: 0 to 10000; Step 1 A
0 A
Vax VOLTAGE: Range: 0 to 65000, Step 1 V
0 V
Vbx VOLTAGE: Range: 0 to 65000, Step 1 V
0 V
Vcx VOLTAGE: Range: 0 to 65000, Step 1 V
0 V
PHASE ANGLE: Range: 0 to 359, S tep: 1°
0 DEGREES

FIGURE 4–35: Setpoints Page 5 – Testing / Current/Voltage Simulation

Simulated currents and voltages can be forced instead of the actual currents or voltages
sensed by the external CTs and VTs. This allows for verification of all current and voltage
related relay functions.
• SIMULATION: Enter ON to switch from actual currents and voltages to the
programmed simulated values. Set this setpoint OFF after simulation is complete.
• SIMULATION ENABLED FOR: Select the desired length of time that simulation will be
enabled. When the programmed time has elapsed, current and voltage simulation will
turn off. If unlimited is selected, simulated currents and voltages will be used until
simulation is turned off via the simulation on/off setpoint or via the serial port or until
control power is removed from the PQM.
• PHASE A/B/C/NEUTRAL CURRENT: Enter the desired phase and neutral currents for
simulation.
• Vax/Vbx/Vcx VOLTAGE: Enter the desired voltages for simulation. The voltages
entered will be line or phase quantities depending upon the VT wiring type selected
with the S2 SYSTEM SETUP \ CURRENT/VOLTAGE CONFIGURATION \ VT WIRING
setpoint.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–59

S5 TESTING CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

• PHASE ANGLE: The phase angle in this setpoint represents the phase shift from a unity
power factor. Enter the desired phase angle between the current and voltage. The
angle between the individual currents and voltages is fixed at 120°.

4.6.3 Analog
Outputs
Simulation
SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S5 TESTING ]] S1 PQM SETUP

] TEST RELAYS & LEDS

]

] CURRENT/VOLTAGE
] SIMULATION

MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] ANALOG OUTPUTS SIMULATION: Range: OFF, ON

] SIMULATION OFF
SIMULATION ENABLED Range: 5 to 300, UNLIMITED
FOR: 15 min Step: 5 min

ANALOG OUTPUT 1: Range: 0.0 to 120.0, OFF; Step: 0.1%

OFF %
ANALOG OUTPUT 2: Range: 0.0 to 120.0, OFF; Step: 0.1%
OFF %
ANALOG OUTPUT 3: Range: 0.0 to 120.0, OFF; Step: 0.1%
OFF %
ANALOG OUTPUT 4: Range: 0.0 to 120.0, OFF
OFF % Step: 0.1%

FIGURE 4–36: Setpoints Page 5 – Analog Output Simulation

• SIMULATION: Enter ON to switch from actual analog outputs to the programmed

simulated values. Set this setpoint OFF after simulation is complete.
• SIMULATION ENABLED FOR: Select the desired length of time that simulation will be
enabled. When the programmed time has elapsed, analog output simulation will turn
off. If unlimited is selected, simulated analog outputs will be used until simulation is
turned off via the simulation on/off setpoint or via the serial port or until control power
is removed from the PQM.
• ANALOG OUTPUT 1/2/3/4: Enter the percent analog output value to be simulated.
Whether the output is 0 to 1 mA, or 4 to 20 mA is dependent upon the option installed.
For example, alter the setpoints below:
S5 TESTING \ ANALOG OUTPUTS SIMULATION \ ANALOG OUTPUT 1: 50.0%
S5 TESTING \ ANALOG OUTPUTS SIMULATION \ SIMULATION: ON
The output current level on analog output 1 will be 12 mA (4 to 20mA) or 0.5 mA (0 to 1mA).

4–60 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING S5 TESTING

4.6.4 Analog Input

Simulation
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S5 TESTING ]] S1 PQM SETUP

] TEST RELAYS & LEDS

]

] CURRENT/VOLTAGE
] SIMULATION

] ANALOG OUTPUTS
] SIMULATION

MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] ANALOG INPUTS SIMULATION: Range: OFF, ON

] SIMULATION OFF
Range: 5 to 300, UNLIMITED
SIMULATION ENABLED
Step: 5 min
FOR: 15 min
ANALOG INPUT: Range: 4.0 to 20.0, OFF
OFF mA Step: 0.1 mA

FIGURE 4–37: Setpoints Page 5 – Analog Input Simulation

• SIMULATION: Enter ON to switch from an actual analog input to the programmed

simulated value. Set this setpoint OFF after simulation is complete.
• SIMULATION ENABLED FOR: Select the desired length of time that simulation will be
enabled. When the programmed time has elapsed, analog input simulation will turn
off. If unlimited is selected, the simulated analog input will be used until simulation is
turned off via the SIMULATION setpoint or via the serial port or until control power is
removed from the PQM.
• ANALOG INPUT: Enter an analog input current in the range of 4 to 20 mA to be
simulated.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–61

S5 TESTING CHAPTER 4: PROGRAMMING

4.6.5 Switch Inputs

Simulation
SETPOINT
]] SETPOINTS ]] SETPOINTS
]] S5 TESTING ]] S1 PQM SETUP

MESSAGE
MESSAGE MESSAGE

] SWITCH INPUTS SIMULATION: Range: OFF, ON

] SIMULATION OFF
SIMULATION ENABLED Range: 5 to 300, UNLIMITED
Step: 5 min
FOR: 15 min
SWITCH INPUT A: Range: OPEN, CLOSED
OPEN
SWITCH INPUT B: Range: OPEN, CLOSED
MESSAGE OPEN
MESSAGE
SWITCH INPUT C: Range: OPEN, CLOSED
OPEN
SWITCH INPUT D: Range: OPEN, CLOSED
OPEN
MESSAGE

] FACTORY SERVICE PASSCODE:

] USE ONLY 0

MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] END OF PAGE S5
]

FIGURE 4–38: Setpoints Page 5 – Testing / Switch Inputs Simulation

• SIMULATION: Enter ON to switch from actual switch inputs to the programmed

simulated switches. Set this setpoint OFF after simulation is complete.
• SIMULATION ENABLED FOR: Select the desired length of time that simulation will be
enabled. When the programmed time has elapsed, switch input simulation will turn
off. If UNLIMITED is selected, the simulated switch inputs will be used until simulation is
turned off via the simulation on/off setpoint or via the serial port or until control power
is removed from the PQM.
• SWITCH INPUT A / B / C / D: Enter the switch input status (open or closed) to be
simulated.

4.6.6 Factory Use • SERVICE PASSCODE: These messages are for access by GE Multilin personnel only for
Only testing and service.

4–62 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

 GE Consumer & Industrial
Multilin

ACTUAL STORE
PQM Power Quality Meter
Ia = 100 Ib = 102 SETPOINT RESET

Ic = 100 AMPS
MESSAGE

g PQM Power Quality Meter

STATUS COMMUNICATE RELAYS

Chapter 5: Monitoring
ALARM TX1 ALARM
VALUE
PROGRAM RX1 AUX1

SIMULATION TX2 AUX2

SELF TEST RX2 AUX3

Monitoring

5.1 Actual Values Viewing

5.1.1 Description Any measured value can be displayed on demand using the ACTUAL key. Each time the
ACTUAL key is pressed, the beginning of a new page of monitored values is displayed.

These are grouped as: A1 METERING, A2 STATUS, A3 POWER ANALYSIS, A4 PRODUCT INFO.
Use the MESSAGE and MESSAGE keys to move between actual value messages. A
detailed description of each displayed message in these groups is given in the sections
that follow.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–1

ACTUAL VALUES VIEWING CHAPTER 5: MONITORING

ACTUAL ACTUAL ACTUAL ACTUAL

]] ACTUAL VALUES ]] ACTUAL VALUES ]] ACTUAL VALUES ]] ACTUAL VALUES

]] A1 METERING ]] A2 STATUS ]] A3 POWER ANALYSIS ]] A4 PRODUCT INFO

MESSAGE ▼ MESSAGE ▼ MESSAGE ▼ MESSAGE ▼

] CURRENT ] ALARMS ] POWER QUALITY ] SOFTWARE VERSIONS

] ] ] VALUES ]

] VOLTAGE ] SWITCHES ] TOTAL HARMONIC ] MODEL INFORMATION

] ] ] DISTORTION ]

] PHASORS ] CLOCK ] DATA LOGGER

] ] ]

] POWER ] PROGRAMMABLE ] EVENT RECORDER

] ] MESSAGE ]

] ENERGY
]

] DEMAND
]

] FREQUENCY
]

] PULSE INPUT
] COUNTERS

] ANALOG INPUT
]

FIGURE 5–1: Actual Values Message Organization

5–2 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 5: MONITORING A1 METERING

5.2 A1 Metering

5.2.1 Current
ACTUAL
]] ACTUAL VALUES ]] ACTUAL VALUES
]] A1 METERING ]] A2 STATUS

MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] CURRENT A = 100 B = 100

] C = 100 AMPS
Iavg= 100 AMPS
Vavg= 120 V L-N
NEUTRAL CURRENT =
0 AMPS
CURRENT UNBALANCE =
0.0%
Ia MIN = 100 AMPS
12:00:00am 01/01/95
Ib MIN = 100 AMPS
12:00:00am 01/01/95
Ic MIN = 100 AMPS
12:00:00am 01/01/95
In MIN = 100 AMPS
12:00:00am 01/01/95
I U/B MIN = 0.0%
12:00:00am 01/01/95
Ia MAX = 100 AMPS
12:00:00am 01/01/95
Ib MAX = 100 AMPS
12:00:00am 01/01/95
Ic MAX = 100 AMPS
12:00:00am 01/01/95
In MAX = 100 AMPS
12:00:00am 01/01/95
I U/B MAX = 0.0%
12:00:00am 01/01/95

FIGURE 5–2: Actual Values – Metering / Current

A: B: C: CURRENT: Displays the current in each phase corresponding to the A, B, and C

phase inputs. Current will be measured correctly only if the CT PRIMARY is entered to
match the installed CT primary and the CT secondary is wired to match the 1 or 5 A input. If
the displayed current does not match the actual current, check this setpoint and wiring.
Iavg/Vavg: Displays the average of the three phase currents and three voltages. This line is
not visible if the VT WIRING setpoint is set to SINGLE PHASE DIRECT. L-N is displayed when
VT WIRING is set to 4 WIRE WYE (3 VTs), 4 WIRE WYE DIRECT, 4 WIRE WYE (2 VTs), or 3 WIRE
DIRECT. L-L is displayed when VT WIRING is set to 3 WIRE DELTA (2 VTs).

NEUTRAL CURRENT: Neutral current can be determined by two methods. One method
measures the current via the neutral CT input. The second calculates the neutral current
based on the three phase currents; using the instantaneous samples, Ia + Ib + Ic = In. If the

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–3

A1 METERING CHAPTER 5: MONITORING

sum of the phase currents does not equal 0, the result is the neutral current. When using
the CT input, the neutral current reading will be correct only if the CT is wired correctly and
the correct neutral CT primary value is entered. Verify neutral current by connecting a
clamp-on ammeter around all 3 phases. If the neutral current appears incorrect, check the
settings in S2 SYSTEM SETUP \ CURRENT/VOLTAGE CONFIGURATION and verify the CT
wiring.
CURRENT UNBALANCE: Displays the percentage of current unbalance. Current unbalance
is calculated as:

I m – I av
--------------------
- × 100%
I av

where:Iav = average phase current = (Ia + Ib + Ic) / 3

Im = current in phase with maximum deviation from Iav,
Even though it is possible to achieve unbalance greater than 100% with the
above formula, the PQM limits unbalance readings to 100%.
NOTE

If the average current is below 10% of the CT PRIMARY setpoint, the unbalance reading is
forced to 0%. This avoids nuisance alarms when the system is lightly loaded. If the
simulation currents are being used, the unbalance is never forced to 0%.
Ia, Ib, Ic, In MINIMUM: Displays the minimum current magnitudes and the time and date of
their occurrence. This information is stored in non-volatile memory and is retained during
loss of control power. The S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR DATA \ CLEAR MIN/MAX CURRENT
VALUES setpoint clears these values.
I U/B MINIMUM: Displays the minimum current unbalance and the time and date of its
measurement. This information is stored in non-volatile memory and is retained during
loss of control power. The S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR DATA \ CLEAR MIN/MAX CURRENT
VALUES setpoint clears this value.
Ia, Ib, Ic, In MAXIMUM: Displays the maximum current magnitudes and the time and date
of their occurrence. This information is stored in non-volatile memory and is retained
during loss of control power. The S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR DATA \ CLEAR MIN/MAX
CURRENT VALUES setpoint clears these values.
I U/B MAXIMUM: Displays the maximum current unbalance and the time and date of its
measurement. This information is stored in non-volatile memory and is retained during
loss of control power. The S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR DATA \ CLEAR MIN/MAX CURRENT
VALUES setpoint command clears this value.

5–4 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 5: MONITORING A1 METERING

5.2.2 Voltage

ACTUAL
]] ACTUAL VALUES ]] ACTUAL VALUES
]] A1 METERING ]] A2 STATUS

MESSAGE
MESSAGE MESSAGE

] VOLTAGE Van = 120 Vbn = 120

] Vcn = 120 V
Iavg= 100 AMPS
Vavg= 120 V L-N
AVERAGE LINE
VOLTAGE = 208 V
VOLTAGE UNBALANCE =
0.0%
Van MIN = 100 V
12:00:00am 01/01/95
Vbn MIN = 100 V
12:00:00am 01/01/95
Vcn MIN = 100 V
12:00:00am 01/01/95
Vab MIN = 173 V
12:00:00am 01/01/95
Vbc MIN = 173 V
12:00:00am 01/01/95
Vca MIN = 173 V
12:00:00am 01/01/95
V U/B MIN = 0.0%
12:00:00am 01/01/95
Van MAX = 140 V
12:00:00am 01/01/95
Vbn MAX = 140 V
12:00:00am 01/01/95
Vcn MAX = 140 V
12:00:00am 01/01/95
Vab MAX = 242 V
12:00:00am 01/01/95
Vbc MAX = 242 V
12:00:00am 01/01/95
Vca MAX = 242 V
12:00:00am 01/01/95
V U/B MAX = 5.1%
12:00:00am 01/01/95

FIGURE 5–3: Actual Values Page 1 – Metering / Voltage

Van, Vbn, Vcn, VOLTAGE: Displays each phase voltage corresponding to the A, B, and C
voltage inputs. This voltage will be measured correctly only if the VT RATIO, VT NOMINAL
SECONDARY, and VOLTAGE WIRING setpoint values match the installed VTs. If the
displayed voltage does not match the actual voltage, check the setpoints and wiring. This
message appears only if the VT WIRING is configured for a wye input.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–5

A1 METERING CHAPTER 5: MONITORING

Iavg/Vavg: Displays the average of the three phase currents/voltages. This value is not
visible if the VT WIRING setpoint is set to SINGLE PHASE DIRECT. L-N is displayed when VT
WIRING is set to 4 WIRE WYE (3 VTs), 4 WIRE WYE DIRECT, 4 WIRE WYE (2 VTs), or 3 WIRE
DIRECT and L-L is displayed when VT WIRING is set to 3 WIRE DELTA (2 VTs).
Vab, Vbc, Vca, VOLTAGE: Displays each line voltage corresponding to the A, B, and C
voltage inputs. The measured voltage is correct only if the VT RATIO, VT NOMINAL
SECONDARY, and VOLTAGE WIRING setpoints match the installed VTs. If the displayed
voltage does not match the actual voltage, check the setpoints and wiring.
AVERAGE LINE VOLTAGE: Displays the average of the three line voltages. This value is not
visible if the VT WIRING setpoint is set to SINGLE PHASE DIRECT.
VOLTAGE UNBALANCE: Displays the percentage voltage unbalance. Voltage unbalance is
calculated as shown below. If the VOLTAGE WIRING is configured for a WYE input, voltage
unbalance is calculated using phase quantities. If the VT WIRING is configured as a DELTA
input, voltage unbalance is calculated using line voltages.

V m – V av
------------------------ × 100%
V av

where:Vav = average phase voltage = (Van + Vbn + Vcn) / 3 for WYE and 3 WIRE DIRECT
connections
= average line voltage (Vab + Vbc + Vca) / 3 for 3 WIRE DELTA/2 VTs connection
Vm = voltage in a phase (or line) with maximum deviation from Vav,
Even though it is possible to achieve unbalance greater than 100% with the
above formula, the PQM will limit unbalance readings to 100%.
NOTE
If the average voltage is below 10% of VT RATIO × VT NOMINAL SECONDARY VOLTAGE
for 3 WIRE DELTA/2 VTs, 4 WIRE WYE/3 VTs, and 4 WIRE WYE/2 VTs connections, or below
10% of VT RATIO × NOMINAL DIRECT INPUT VOLTAGE for 4 WIRE WYE/DIRECT and 3
WIRE DIRECT connections, the unbalance reading is forced to 0%. This is implemented to
avoid nuisance alarms when the system is lightly loaded. If the simulation voltages are
being used, the unbalance is never forced to 0%.
Van, Vbn, Vcn MINIMUM: Displays the minimum phase voltage magnitudes and the time
and date of their occurrence. This information is stored in non-volatile memory and is
retained during loss of control power. The S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR DATA \ CLEAR MIN/
MAX VOLTAGE VALUES setpoint clears these values.
Vab, Vbc, Vca MINIMUM: Displays the minimum line voltage magnitudes and the time and
date of their occurrence. This information is stored in non-volatile memory and is retained
during loss of control power. The S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR DATA \ CLEAR MIN/MAX
VOLTAGE VALUES setpoint clears these values.
V U/B MINIMUM: Displays minimum voltage unbalance and the time and date of its
measurement. This information is stored in non-volatile memory and is retained during
loss of control power. This value is cleared with the S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR DATA \
CLEAR MIN/MAX VOLTAGE VALUES setpoint.

5–6 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 5: MONITORING A1 METERING

Van, Vbn, Vcn MAXIMUM: Displays the maximum phase voltage magnitudes and the time
and date of their occurrence. This information is stored in non-volatile memory and is
retained during loss of control power. The S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR DATA \ CLEAR MIN/
MAX VOLTAGE VALUES setpoint clears these values.
Vab, Vbc, Vca MAXIMUM: Displays the maximum line voltage magnitudes and the time
and date of their occurrence. This information is stored in non-volatile memory and is
retained during loss of control power. The S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR DATA \ CLEAR MIN/
MAX VOLTAGE VALUES setpoint clears these values.
V U/B MAXIMUM: Displays the maximum voltage unbalance and the time and date of its
measurement. This information is stored in non-volatile memory and is retained during
loss of control power. The value is cleared with the S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR DATA \ CLEAR
MIN/MAX VOLTAGE VALUES setpoint.

5.2.3 Phasors
ACTUAL
]] ACTUAL VALUES ]] ACTUAL VALUES
]] A1 METERING ]] A2 STATUS

MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] PHASORS Va PHASOR
] 0V 0° LAG
Vb PHASOR
0V 0° LAG
Vc PHASOR
0V 0° LAG
Ia PHASOR
0A 0° LAG
Ib PHASOR
0A 0° LAG
Ic PHASOR
0A 0° LAG

FIGURE 5–4: Actual Values Page 1 – Metering/Phasors

Va PHASOR: Displays a phasor representation for the magnitude and angle of Va. Va is
used as a reference for all other phasor angles. If there is no voltage present at the PQM
voltage inputs, then Ia will be used as the reference for all other angles. Va is also used as
the reference when in Simulation Mode.
Vb PHASOR: Displays a phasor representation for the magnitude and angle of Vb. Vb uses
the angle of Va as a reference point. If there is no voltage at the PQM voltage inputs, Ia is
used as the reference. Vb is not displayed when the PQM is configured for the 3 WIRE
DELTA/2 VTs, 4 WIRE WYE/2 VTs, or SINGLE PHASE DIRECT connections.
Vc PHASOR: A phasor representation for the magnitude and angle of Vc is displayed here.
Vc uses the angle of Va as a reference point. If there is no voltage at the PQM voltage
inputs, Ia is used as the reference. Vc is not displayed when the PQM is configured for
SINGLE PHASE DIRECT connection.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–7

A1 METERING CHAPTER 5: MONITORING

Ia PHASOR: A phasor representation for the magnitude and angle of Ia is displayed here. Ia
is used as a reference for all other Phasor angles only when there is no voltage present at
the PQM voltage inputs, otherwise, Va is used as the reference.
Ib PHASOR: A phasor representation for the magnitude and angle of Ib is displayed here. Ib
uses the angle of Va as a reference point. If there is no voltage at the PQM voltage inputs,
Ia is used as the reference. Ib is not displayed when the PQM is configured for SINGLE
PHASE DIRECT connection.
Ic PHASOR: A phasor representation for the magnitude and angle of Ic is displayed here. Ic
is uses the angle of Va as a reference point. If there is no voltage at the PQM voltage inputs,
Ia is used as the reference. Ic is not displayed when the PQM is configured for SINGLE
PHASE DIRECT connection.

5–8 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 5: MONITORING A1 METERING

5.2.4 Power

]] ACTUAL VALUES
]] A1 METERING

MESSAGE
MESSAGE MESSAGE

] POWER THREE PHASE REAL

] POWER = 1000 kW
THREE PHASE REACTIVE
POWER = 120 kvar
THREE PHASE APPARENT
POWER = 1007 kVA
THREE PHASE POWER
FACTOR = 0.99 LAG
PHASE A REAL
POWER = 1000 kW
PHASE A REACTIVE
POWER = 120 kvar
PHASE A APPARENT
POWER = 1007 kVA
PHASE A POWER FACTOR
= 0.99 LAG
PHASE B REAL
POWER = 1000 kW
PHASE B REACTIVE
POWER = 120 kvar
PHASE B APPARENT
POWER = 1007 kVA
PHASE B POWER FACTOR
= 0.99 LAG
PHASE C REAL
POWER = 1000 kW
PHASE C REACTIVE
POWER = 1000 kW
PHASE C APPARENT
POWER = 1000 kW
CONTINUED ON PHASE C POWER FACTOR
NEXT PAGE = 0.99 LAG
THREE PHASE REAL
POWER = 10.00 MW

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–9

A1 METERING CHAPTER 5: MONITORING

CONTINUED FROM
PREVIOUS PAGE THREE PHASE REACTIVE
POWER = 1.20 Mvar
THREE PHASE APPARENT
POWER = 10.07 MVA
3) kW MIN = 1000
12:00:00am 01/01/95
3) kvar MIN = 120
12:00:00am 01/01/95
3) kVA MIN = 1007
MESSAGE
12:00:00am 01/01/95
MESSAGE 3) PF MIN = 0.99 LAG
12:00:00am 01/01/95
3) kW MAX = 1000
12:00:00am 01/01/95
3) kvar MAX = 120
12:00:00am 01/01/95
3) kVA MAX = 1007
12:00:00am 01/01/95
3) PF MAX = 0.99 LAG
12:00:00am 01/01/95
A) kW MIN = 1000
12:00:00am 01/01/95
A) kvar MIN = 120
12:00:00am 01/01/95
A) kVA MIN = 1007
12:00:00am 01/01/95
A) PF MIN = 0.99 LAG
12:00:00am 01/01/95
A) kW MAX = 1000
12:00:00am 01/01/95
A) kvar MAX = 120
12:00:00am 01/01/95
A) kVA MAX = 1007
12:00:00am 01/01/95
CONTINUED ON A) PF MAX = 0.99 LAG
NEXT PAGE 12:00:00am 01/01/95

5–10 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 5: MONITORING A1 METERING

CONTINUED FROM
PREVIOUS PAGE
BΦ kW MIN = 1000
12:00:00am 01/01/95
BΦ kvar MIN = 120
12:00:00am 01/01/95
BΦ kVA MIN = 1007
12:00:00am 01/01/95
BΦ PF MIN = 0.99 LAG
12:00:00am 01/01/95
BΦ kW MAX = 1000
12:00:00am 01/01/95
MESSAGE BΦ kvar MAX = 120
MESSAGE
12:00:00am 01/01/95
BΦ kVA MAX = 1007
12:00:00am 01/01/95
BΦ PF MAX = 0.99 LAG
12:00:00am 01/01/95
CΦ kW MIN = 1000
12:00:00am 01/01/95
CΦ kvar MIN = 120
12:00:00am 01/01/95
CΦ kVA MIN = 1007
12:00:00am 01/01/95
CΦ PF MIN = 0.99 LAG
12:00:00am 01/01/95
CΦ kW MAX = 1000
12:00:00am 01/01/95
CΦ kvar MAX = 120
12:00:00am 01/01/95
CΦ kVA MAX = 1007
12:00:00am 01/01/95
CΦ PF MAX = 0.99 LAG
12:00:00am 01/01/95

FIGURE 5–5: Actual Values Page 1 – Metering/power

THREE PHASE/A/B/C REAL POWER: The total RMS three phase real power as well as the
individual phase A/B/C real power is displayed in these messages. The phase A/B/C real
power messages will be displayed only for a WYE or 3 WIRE DIRECT connected system. The
PQM shows direction of flow by displaying the signed value of kW. Refer to Figure 5.6 for
the convention used to describe power direction.
THREE PHASE/A/B/C REACTIVE POWER: The total RMS three phase reactive power as well
as the individual phase A/B/C reactive power is displayed in these messages. The phase A/
B/C reactive power messages will be displayed only for a WYE or 3 WIRE DIRECT connected
system. The PQM shows direction of flow by displaying the signed value of kvar. Refer to
Figure 5.6 for the convention used to describe power direction.
THREE PHASE/A/B/C APPARENT POWER: The total RMS three phase apparent power as
well as the individual phase A/B/C apparent power is displayed in these messages. The
phase A/B/C apparent power messages will be displayed only for a WYE or 3 WIRE DIRECT
connected system.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–11

A1 METERING CHAPTER 5: MONITORING

THREE PHASE/A/B/C POWER FACTOR: The three phase true power factor as well as the
individual phase A/B/C true power factors is displayed in these messages. The phase A/B/C
true power factor messages will be displayed only for a WYE or 3 WIRE DIRECT connected
system.
THREE PHASE/A/B/C kW MINIMUM: The minimum three phase real power as well as the
minimum individual phase A/B/C real power is displayed in these messages. The time and
date at which these minimum values were measured is also displayed in these messages.
This information is stored in non-volatile memory and will be retained during a loss of
control power. The phase A/B/C minimum real power messages will be displayed only for a
WYE connected system. The setpoint S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR DATA \ CLEAR MIN/
MAX POWER VALUES is used to clear these values.
THREE PHASE/A/B/C kvar MINIMUM: The minimum three phase reactive power as well as
the minimum individual phase A/B/C reactive power is displayed in these messages. The
time and date at which these minimum values were measured is also displayed in these
messages. This information is stored in non-volatile memory and will be retained during a
loss of control power. The phase A/B/C minimum reactive power messages will be
displayed only for a WYE connected system. The setpoint
S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR DATA \ CLEAR MIN/MAX POWER VALUES is used to clear these
values.
THREE PHASE/A/B/C kVA MINIMUM: The minimum three phase apparent power as well as
the minimum individual phase A/B/C apparent power is displayed in these messages. The
time and date at which these minimum values were measured is also displayed in these
messages. This information is stored in non-volatile memory and will be retained during a
loss of control power. The phase A/B/C minimum apparent power messages will be
displayed only for a WYE connected system. The setpoint
S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR DATA \ CLEAR MIN/MAX POWER VALUES is used to clear these
values.
THREE PHASE/A/B/C PF MINIMUM: The minimum three phase lead or lag power factor as
well as the minimum lead or lag individual phase A/B/C power factor is displayed in these
messages. The time and date at which these minimum values were measured is also
displayed in these messages. This information is stored in non-volatile memory and will be
retained during a loss of control power. The phase A/B/C minimum lead or lag power factor
messages will be displayed only for a WYE connected system. The setpoint
S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR DATA \ CLEAR MIN/MAX POWER VALUES is used to clear these
values.
THREE PHASE/A/B/C kW MAXIMUM: The maximum three phase real power as well as the
maximum individual phase A/B/C real power is displayed in these messages. The time and
date at which these maximum values were measured is also displayed in these messages.
This information is stored in non-volatile memory and will be retained during a loss of
control power. The phase A/B/C maximum real power messages will be displayed only for a
WYE connected system. The setpoint S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR DATA \ CLEAR MIN/
MAX POWER VALUES is used to clear these values.
THREE PHASE/A/B/C kvar MAXIMUM: The maximum three phase reactive power as well
as the maximum individual phase A/B/C reactive power is displayed in these messages.
The time and date at which these maximum values were measured is also displayed in
these messages. This information is stored in non-volatile memory and will be retained

5–12 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 5: MONITORING A1 METERING

during a loss of control power. The phase A/B/C maximum reactive power messages will be
displayed only for a WYE connected system. The setpoint S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR
DATA \ CLEAR MIN/MAX POWER VALUES is used to clear these values.
THREE PHASE/A/B/C kVA MAXIMUM: The maximum three phase apparent power as well
as the maximum individual phase A/B/C apparent power is displayed in these messages.
The time and date at which these maximum values were measured is also displayed in
these messages. This information is stored in non-volatile memory and will be retained
during a loss of control power. The phase A/B/C maximum apparent power messages will
be displayed only for a WYE connected system. The setpoint
S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR DATA \ CLEAR MIN/MAX POWER VALUES is used to clear these
values.
THREE PHASE/A/B/C PF MAXIMUM: The maximum three phase lead or lag power factor as
well as the maximum lead or lag individual phase A/B/C power factor is displayed in these
messages. The time and date at which these maximum values were measured is also
displayed in these messages. This information is stored in non-volatile memory and will be
retained during a loss of control power. The phase A/B/C maximum lead or lag power
factor messages will be displayed only for a WYE connected system. The setpoint
S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR DATA \ CLEAR MIN/MAX POWER VALUES is used to clear these
values.

FIGURE 5–6: Power Measurement Conventions

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–13

A1 METERING CHAPTER 5: MONITORING

5.2.5 Energy

ACTUAL
]] ACTUAL VALUES ]] ACTUAL VALUES
]] A1 METERING ]] A2 STATUS

MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] ENERGY 3ΦΦ POS REAL ENERGY

] = 32745 kWh
3ΦΦ NEG REAL ENERGY
= 32745 kWh
3ΦΦ POS REACT ENERGY
= 32745 kvarh
3ΦΦ NEG REACT ENERGY
= 32745 kvarh
3ΦΦ APPARENT ENERGY
= 32745 kVAh
REAL ENERGY LAST 24h
= 1245 kWh
REAL ENERGY COST =
$12575.34
REAL ENERGY COST =
$125.01 / DAY
TARIFF PERIOD 1 COST
$0.00
TARIFF PERIOD 2 COST
$0.00
TARIFF PERIOD 3 COST
$0.00
TARIFF PERIOD 1 NET
ENERGY: 0 kWh
TARIFF PERIOD 2 NET
ENERGY: 0 kWh
TARIFF PERIOD 3 NET
ENERGY: 0 kWh
TIME OF LAST RESET:
12:00:00am 01/01/95

FIGURE 5–7: Actual Values Page 1 – Metering / Energy

3Φ POS REAL ENERGY: This message displays the positive watthours (in kWh) since the
TIME OF LAST RESET date. Real power in the positive direction will add to this
accumulated value, and real power in the negative direction will add to the negative
watthour value. The setpoint S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR DATA \ CLEAR ENERGY VALUES is
used to clear this value. The displayed value rolls over to 0 once the value 4294967295
(FFFFFFFFh) has been reached.
3Φ NEG REAL ENERGY: This message displays the negative watthours (in kWh) since the
TIME OF LAST RESET date. Real power in the negative direction will add to this
accumulated value, and real power in the positive direction will add to the positive

5–14 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 5: MONITORING A1 METERING

watthour value. The setpoint S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR DATA \ CLEAR ENERGY VALUES is
used to clear this value. The displayed value will roll over to 0 once the value 4294967295
(FFFFFFFFh) has been reached.
3Φ POS REACT ENERGY: This message displays the positive varhours (in kvarh) since the
TIME OF LAST RESET date. Reactive power in the positive direction will add to this
accumulated value, and reactive power in the negative direction will add to the negative
varhour value. The setpoint S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR DATA \ CLEAR ENERGY VALUES is
used to clear this value. The displayed value will roll over to 0 once the value 4294967295
(FFFFFFFFh) has been reached.
3Φ NEG REACT ENERGY: This message displays the negative varhours (in kvarh) since the
TIME OF LAST RESET date. Reactive power in the negative direction will add to this
accumulated value, and reactive power in the positive direction will add to the positive
varhour value. The S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR DATA \ CLEAR ENERGY VALUES setpoint
clears this value. The displayed value will roll over to 0 once the value 4294967295
(FFFFFFFFh) has been reached.
3Φ APPARENT ENERGY: This message displays the accumulated VAhours (in kVAh) since
the TIME OF LAST RESET date. The setpoint S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR DATA \ CLEAR
ENERGY VALUES clears this value. The displayed value will roll over to 0 once the value
4294967295 (FFFFFFFFh) has been reached.
REAL ENERGY LAST 24h: This message displays the accumulated real energy (in kWh) over
the last 24-hour period. The 24-hour period used by the PQM is started when control power
is applied. The PQM updates this value every hour based on the previous 24-hour period.
This information will be lost if control power to the PQM is removed.
REAL ENERGY COST: This message displays the total cost for the real energy accumulated
since the TIME OF LAST RESET date. The setpoint S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR DATA \ CLEAR
ENERGY VALUES clears this value.
REAL ENERGY COST PER DAY: This message displays the average cost of real energy per
day from time of last reset to the present day. The cost per kWh is entered in the S1 PQM
SETUP \ CALCULATION PARAMETERS \ ENERGY COST PER KWH setpoint.
TARIFF PERIOD 1/2/3 COST: These messages display the cost accrued for the three user-
definable tariff periods. The start time and cost per KWh for these tariff periods are entered
with the S1 PQM SETUP \ CALCULATION PARAMETERS \ TARIFF PERIOD 1/2/3 START
TIME and the S1 PQM SETUP \ CALCULATION PARAMETERS \ TARIFF PERIOD 1/2/3
COST PER KWH setpoints, respectively.
TARIFF PERIOD 1/2/3 NET ENERGY: These messages display the net energy for the three
user-definable tariff periods. The start time and cost per KWh for these tariff periods are
entered with the S1 PQM SETUP \ CALCULATION PARAMETERS \ TARIFF PERIOD 1/2/3
START TIME and the S1 PQM SETUP \ CALCULATION PARAMETERS \ TARIFF PERIOD 1/
2/3 COST PER KWH setpoints, respectively.
TIME OF LAST RESET: This message displays the time and date when the energy
parameters were last cleared. The setpoint S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR DATA \ CLEAR
ENERGY VALUES clears the energy values.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–15

A1 METERING CHAPTER 5: MONITORING

5.2.6 Demand

ACTUAL
]] ACTUAL VALUES ]] ACTUAL VALUES
]] A1 METERING ]] A2 STATUS

MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] DEMAND PHASE A CURRENT

] DEMAND = 125 A
PHASE B CURRENT
DEMAND = 125 A
PHASE C CURRENT
DEMAND = 125 A
NEUTRAL CURRENT
DEMAND = 25 A
3) REAL POWER
DEMAND = 1000 kW
3) REACTIVE POWER
DEMAND = 25 kvar
3) REAL APPARENT
DEMAND = 1007 kVA
Ia MAX DMD = 560 A
12:00:00am 01/01/95
Ib MAX DMD = 560 A
12:00:00am 01/01/95
Ic MAX DMD = 560 A
12:00:00am 01/01/95
In MAX DMD = 560 A
12:00:00am 01/01/95
3) kW MAX = 1000
12:00:00am 01/01/95
3) kvar MAX = 25
12:00:00am 01/01/95
3) kVA MAX = 1007
12:00:00am 01/01/95

FIGURE 5–8: Actual Values Page 1 – Metering / Demand

PHASE A/B/C/NEUTRAL DEMAND: This message displays the phase A/B/C/N current
demand (in Amps) over the most recent time interval.
3Φ REAL POWER DEMAND: This message displays the 3 phase real power demand (in kW)
over the most recent time interval.
3Φ REACTIVE POWER DEMAND: This message displays the 3 phase reactive power
demand (in kvar) over the most recent time interval.
3Φ APPARENT POWER DEMAND: This message displays the 3 phase apparent power
demand (in kVA) over the most recent time interval.
A/B/C/N CURRENT MAX DEMAND: This message displays the maximum phase A/B/C/N
current demand (in Amps) and the time and date when this occurred. The setpoint S1 PQM
SETUP \ CLEAR DATA \ CLEAR MAX DEMAND VALUES is used to clear this value.

5–16 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 5: MONITORING A1 METERING

3Φ kW MAX: This message displays the maximum three-phase real power demand (in kW)
and the time and date when this occurred. The setpoint S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR DATA \
CLEAR MAX DEMAND VALUES clears this value.
3Φ kvar MAX: This message displays the maximum 3 phase reactive power demand (in
kvar) and the time and date when this occurred. The setpoint S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR
DATA \ CLEAR MAX DEMAND VALUES is used to clear this value.
3Φ kVA MAX: This message displays the maximum 3 phase apparent power demand (in
kVA) and the time and date when this occurred. The setpoint S1 PQM SETUP\CLEAR
DATA\CLEAR MAX DEMAND VALUES is used to clear this value.

5.2.7 Frequency
ACTUAL
]] ACTUAL VALUES ]] ACTUAL VALUES
]] A1 METERING ]] A2 STATUS

MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] FREQUENCY FREQUENCY = 60.00 Hz

]
FREQ MIN = 59.98 Hz
12:00:00am 01/01/95
FREQ MAX = 60.01 Hz
12:00:00am 01/01/95

FIGURE 5–9: Actual Values Page 1 – Metering / Frequency

FREQUENCY: This message displays the frequency (in Hz). Frequency is calculated from the
phase A-N voltage (when setpoint S2 SYSTEM SETUP \ CURRENT/VOLTAGE
CONFIGURATION \ VT WIRING is WYE) or from phase A-B voltage (when setpoint S2
SYSTEM SETUP \ CURRENT/VOLTAGE CONFIGURATION \ VT WIRING is DELTA). A value
of 0.00 is displayed if there is insufficient voltage applied to the PQM’s terminals (less than
30 V on phase A).
FREQUENCY MIN: This message displays the minimum frequency measured as well as the
time and date at which the minimum frequency occurred. The S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR
DATA \ CLEAR MIN/MAX FREQUENCY VALUES setpoint clears these values.
FREQUENCY MAX: This message displays the maximum frequency measured as well as
the time and date at which the maximum frequency occurred. The S1 PQM SETUP \
CLEAR DATA \ CLEAR MIN/MAX FREQUENCY VALUES setpoint clears these values.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–17

A1 METERING CHAPTER 5: MONITORING

5.2.8 Pulse Counter

ACTUAL
]] ACTUAL VALUES ]] ACTUAL VALUES
]] A1 METERING ]] A2 STATUS

MESSAGE
MESSAGE

MESSAGE

] PULSE COUNTER PULSE INPUT 1 =

] 0 Units
PULSE INPUT 2 =
0 Units
PULSE INPUT 3 =
0 Units
PULSE INPUT 4 =
0 Units
PULSE INPUT 1+2+3+4
= 0 Units
TIME OF LAST RESET:
12:00:00am 01/01/95

FIGURE 5–10: Actual Values Page 1 – Metering / Pulse Counter

PULSE INPUT 1: This message displays the accumulated value based on total number of
pulses counted since the last reset. One switch input pulse is equal to the value assigned in
the S2 SYSTEM SETUP \ PULSE INPUT \ PULSE INPUT 1 VALUE setpoint. The units shown
after the value are as defined in the S2 SYSTEM
SETUP \ PULSE INPUT \ PULSE INPUT UNITS setpoint. The displayed value will roll over
to 0 once the value 4294967295 (FFFFFFFFh) has been reached. To use this feature, the “C”
(control) option must be installed and one of the PQM switch inputs must be assigned to
PULSE INPUT 1 function. The switch input will then count the number of closures or
openings depending upon how the switch is configured. See setpoints page S2 SYSTEM
SETUP \ SWITCH INPUT A/B/C/D for details on programming the switch inputs. The
minimum timing requirements are shown below in Figure 5.11.
PULSE INPUT 2: See the PULSE INPUT 1 description above and replace all references to
PULSE INPUT 1 with PULSE INPUT 2.
PULSE INPUT 3: See the PULSE INPUT 1 description above and replace all references to
PULSE INPUT 1 with PULSE INPUT 3.
PULSE INPUT 4: See the PULSE INPUT 1 description above and replace all references to
PULSE INPUT 1 with PULSE INPUT 4.
PULSE IN 1+2+3+4: The totalized pulse input value is displayed here. The pulse inputs
totalized is based on the S2 SYSTEM SETUP \ PULSE INPUT \ PULSE INPUT TOTAL
setpoint.

5–18 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 5: MONITORING A1 METERING

TIME OF LAST RESET: This message displays the time and date when the pulse input
values were last cleared. The S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR DATA \ CLEAR PULSE INPUT
VALUES setpoint clears the pulse input values.

STATUS STATUS STATUS

SWITCH ACTIVATION = OPEN OPEN CLOSED OPEN

SWITCH ACTIVATION = CLOSED CLOSED OPEN CLOSED

150 ms 150 ms

FIGURE 5–11: Pulse Input Timing

5.2.9 Analog Input

ACTUAL
]] ACTUAL VALUES ]] ACTUAL VALUES
]] A1 METERING ]] A2 STATUS

MESSAGE
MESSAGE

MESSAGE

] ANALOG INPUT MAIN/ALT ANALOG INPUT

] 20.1 mA

MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] END OF PAGE A1
]

FIGURE 5–12: Actual Values Page 1 – Metering / Analog Input

ANALOG INPUT: This message displays the measured 4 to 20 mA analog input scaled to
the user defined name and units. The analog input can be configured via a switch input
and output relay to multiplex two analog input signals. The displayed user defined name

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–19

A1 METERING CHAPTER 5: MONITORING

and units will change to the corresponding values depending upon which analog input is
connected. Refer to chapter 4, Analog Input, for information regarding user defined names
and units as well as analog input multiplexing.

5–20 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 5: MONITORING A2 STATUS

5.3 A2 Status

5.3.1 Alarms

]] ACTUAL VALUES
]] A2 STATUS

MESSAGE
MESSAGE MESSAGE

] ALARMS PHASE UNDERCURRENT

] ALARM
PHASE OVERCURRENT
ALARM
NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT
ALARM
UNDERVOLTAGE
ALARM
OVERVOLTAGE
ALARM
VOLTAGE UNBALANCE
ALARM
CURRENT UNBALANCE
ALARM
PHASE REVERSAL
ALARM
POWER FACTOR LEAD 1
ALARM
POWER FACTOR LEAD 2
ALARM
POWER FACTOR LAG 1
ALARM
POWER FACTOR LAG 2
ALARM
POSITIVE REAL POWER
ALARM
NEGATIVE REAL POWER
ALARM
POSITIVE REACTIVE
POWER ALARM
NEGATIVE REACTIVE
POWER ALARM
UNDERFREQUENCY
ALARM
OVERFREQUENCY
ALARM
CONTINUED ON PHASE A CURRENT
NEXT PAGE DEMAND ALARM
PHASE B CURRENT
DEMAND ALARM

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–21

A2 STATUS CHAPTER 5: MONITORING

PHASE C CURRENT
CONTINUED FROM DEMAND ALARM
PREVIOUS PAGE DATA LOG 1
ALARM
DATA LOG 2
ALARM
NEUTRAL CURRENT
DEMAND ALARM
POSITIVE REAL POWER
DEMAND ALARM
NEGATIVE REAL POWER
DEMAND ALARM
POSITIVE REACTIVE
POWER DEMAND ALARM
NEGATIVE REACTIVE
POWER DEMAND ALARM
APPARENT POWER
DEMAND ALARM
SWITCH INPUT A
ALARM
MESSAGE SWITCH INPUT B
MESSAGE ALARM
SWITCH INPUT C
ALARM
SWITCH INPUT D
ALARM
SELF-TEST FAILURE
ALARM
SERIAL COM1 FAILURE
ALARM
SERIAL COM2 FAILURE
ALARM
CLOCK NOT SET
ALARM
MAIN ANALOG INPUT
ALARM
ALT ANALOG INPUT
ALARM
CRITICAL SETPOINTS
NOT STORED
CURRENT THD
CONTINUED ON ALARM
NEXT PAGE VOLTAGE THD
ALARM

5–22 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 5: MONITORING A2 STATUS

CONTINUED FROM
PREVIOUS PAGE PULSE INPUT 1
ALARM
MESSAGE PULSE INPUT 2
MESSAGE ALARM
PULSE INPUT 3
ALARM
PULSE INPUT 4
ALARM
TOTALIZED PULSES
ALARM
TIME
ALARM

FIGURE 5–13: Actual Values Page 2 – Status / Alarms

The alarm messages appear only when the alarm threshold has been exceeded for the
programmed time. When an alarm is assigned to an output relay, the relay can be set to be
unlatched or latched. When the alarm is set as unlatched, it automatically resets when the
alarm condition no longer exists. If the alarm is set as latched, a keypad reset or a serial
port reset is required.
The SELF TEST ALARM occurs if a fault in the PQM hardware is detected. This
alarm is permanently assigned to the alarm output relay and is not user
NOTE configurable. If this alarm is present, contact the GE Multilin Service
Department.

5.3.2 Switch Status

ACTUAL
]] ACTUAL VALUES ]] ACTUAL VALUES
]] A2 STATUS ]] A3 POWER ANALYSIS

MESSAGE
MESSAGE MESSAGE

] SWITCHES SWITCH INPUT A

] STATE: CLOSED
SWITCH INPUT B
STATE: CLOSED
SWITCH INPUT C
STATE: CLOSED
SWITCH INPUT D
STATE: CLOSED

FIGURE 5–14: Actual Values Page 2 – Switch Status

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–23

A2 STATUS CHAPTER 5: MONITORING

SWITCH INPUT A/B/C/D STATE: To assist in troubleshooting, the state of each switch can
be verified using these messages. A separate message displays the status of each input
identified by the corresponding name as shown in the wiring diagrams in chapter 2. For a
dry contact closure across the corresponding switch terminals the message will read
CLOSED.

5.3.3 Clock
ACTUAL
]] ACTUAL VALUES ]] ACTUAL VALUES
]] A2 STATUS ]] A3 POWER ANALYSIS

MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] CLOCK TIME: 12:00:00am

] DATE: JAN 01 1996

FIGURE 5–15: Actual Values Page 2 – Clock

TIME/DATE: The current time and date is displayed in this message. The PQM uses an
internally generated software clock which runs for approximately one hour after the
control power has been removed. To set the clock, see setpoints page
S1 PQM SETUP \ CLOCK . The S4 ALARMS/
CONTROL \ MISCELLANEOUS \ CLOCK NOT SET ALARM alarm occurs if power has
been removed for longer than approximately 1 hour and the clock value has been lost.

5.3.4 Programmable
Message
ACTUAL
]] ACTUAL VALUES ]] ACTUAL VALUES
]] A2 STATUS ]] A3 POWER ANALYSIS

MESSAGE
MESSAGE

MESSAGE

] PROGRAMMABLE PHONE: 905-294-6222

] MESSAGE www.GEmultilin.com

MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] END OF PAGE A2
]

FIGURE 5–16: Actual Values Page 2 – Programmable Message

A 40-character user defined message is displayed. The message is programmed using the
keypad or via the serial port using EnerVista PQM Setup. See
S1 PQM SETUP \ PROGRAMMABLE MESSAGE for programming details.

5–24 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 5: MONITORING A3 POWER ANALYSIS

5.4 A3 Power Analysis

5.4.1 Power Quality

ACTUAL
]] ACTUAL VALUES ]] ACTUAL VALUES
]] A3 POWER ANALYSIS ]] A4 PRODUCT INFO

MESSAGE
MESSAGE MESSAGE

] POWER QUALITY Ia CREST FACTOR =

] VALUES 1.233
Ib CREST FACTOR =
1.008
Ic CREST FACTOR =
1.000
Ia THDF = 0.944

Ib THDF = 0.999

Ic THDF = 0.988

FIGURE 5–17: Actual Values Page 3 – Power Quality Values

Ia / Ib / Ic CREST FACTOR: The crest factor describes how much the load current can vary
from a pure sine wave while maintaining the system’s full rating. A completely linear load
(pure sine wave) has a crest factor of 2 ( 1 ⁄ 0.707 ), which is the ratio of the peak value of
sine wave to its rms value. Typically, the crest factor can range from 2 to 2.5.
Ia/Ib/Ic THDF: Transformer Harmonic Derating Factor (THDF), also known as CBEMA factor,
is defined as the crest factor of a pure sine wave ( 2 ) divided by the measured crest
factor. This method is useful in cases where lower order harmonics are dominant. In a case
where higher order harmonics are present, it may be necessary to use a more precise
method (K-factor) of calculating the derating factor. This method also does not take into
consideration the losses associated with rated eddy current in the transformer. The
EnerVista PQM Setup software provides the K-factor method of calculating the derating
factor, which is defined on a per unit basis as follows:
h max
2 2
K = ∑ Ih × h
h=1

where: Ih = rms current at harmonic h, in per unit of rated rms load current

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–25

A3 POWER ANALYSIS CHAPTER 5: MONITORING

5.4.2 Total
Harmonic
Distortion

ACTUAL
]] ACTUAL VALUES ]] ACTUAL VALUES
]] A3 POWER ANALYSIS ]] A4 PRODUCT INFO

MESSAGE
MESSAGE MESSAGE

] TOTAL HARMONIC PHASE A CURRENT THD=

] DISTORTION 5.3 %
PHASE B CURRENT THD=
7.8 %
PHASE C CURRENT THD=
4.5 %
NEUTRAL CURRENT THD=
15.4 %
VOLTAGE Van THD =
1.2 %
VOLTAGE Vbn THD =
2.0 %
VOLTAGE Vcn THD =
2.0 %
VOLTAGE Vab THD =
2.0 %
VOLTAGE Vbc THD =
1.1 %
Ia MAX THD = 5.9 %
12:00:00am 01/01/95
Ib MAX THD = 7.8 %
12:00:00am 01/01/95
Ic MAX THD = 4.5 %
12:00:00am 01/01/95
In MAX THD = 15.4 %
12:00:00am 01/01/95
Van MAX THD = 1.2 %
12:00:00am 01/01/95
Vbn MAX THD = 2.0 %
12:00:00am 01/01/95
Vcn MAX THD = 2.0 %
12:00:00am 01/01/95
Vab MAX THD = 2.0 %
12:00:00am 01/01/95
Vbc MAX THD = 1.1 %
12:00:00am 01/01/95

FIGURE 5–18: Actual Values Page 3 – Total Harmonic Distortion

PHASE A/B/C/N CURRENT THD: These messages display the calculated total harmonic
distortion for each current input.
VOLTAGE Van/Vbn/Vcn/Vab/Vbc THD: These messages display the calculated total
harmonic distortion for each voltage input. Phase to neutral voltages will appear when the
setpoint S2 SYSTEM SETUP \ CURRENT/VOLTAGE CONFIGURATION \ VT WIRING is

5–26 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 5: MONITORING A3 POWER ANALYSIS

stored as WYE. Line to line voltages will appear when the setpoint
S2 SYSTEM SETUP \ CURRENT/VOLTAGE CONFIGURATION \ VT WIRING is stored as
DELTA .

Ia/Ib/Ic/In MAX THD: The maximum total harmonic value for each current input and the
time and date which the maximum value occurred are displayed. The
S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR DATA \ CLEAR MAX THD VALUES setpoint clears this value.
Van/Vbn/Vcn/Vab/Vbc MAX THD: These messages display the maximum total harmonic
value for each voltage input and the time and date at which the maximum value occurred.
The setpoint S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR DATA \ CLEAR MAX THD VALUES is used to clear
this value. Phase to neutral voltages will appear when the setpoint
S2 SYSTEM SETUP \ CURRENT/VOLTAGE CONFIGURATION \ VT WIRING is set to WYE.
Line to line voltages will appear when the setpoint S2 SYSTEM SETUP \ CURRENT/
VOLTAGE CONFIGURATION \ VT WIRING is set to DELTA .

5.4.3 Data Logger

ACTUAL
]] ACTUAL VALUES ]] ACTUAL VALUES
]] A3 POWER ANALYSIS ]] A4 PRODUCT INFO

MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] DATA LOGGER DATA LOG 1: STOPPED

] 0% FULL
DATA LOG 2: STOPPED
0% FULL

FIGURE 5–19: Actual Values Page 3 – Data Logger

DATA LOG 1: This message display the current status of the Data Logger 1. The Data
Logger can be set up and run only from EnerVista PQM Setup. See Sections 6.6.4: Data
Logger on page –22 and A.6: Data Logger Implementation on page –15 for a details on the
Data Logger feature.
It is possible to stop the data logger from the PQM front panel using the
S2 SYSTEM SETUP/DATA LOGGER/STOP DATA LOGGER 1 setpoint.
NOTE

DATA LOG 2: See DATA LOG 1 description above and replace all references to DATA LOGGER
1 with DATA LOGGER 2.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–27

A3 POWER ANALYSIS CHAPTER 5: MONITORING

5.4.4 Event
Recorder
ACTUAL
]] ACTUAL VALUES ]] ACTUAL VALUES
]] A3 POWER ANALYSIS ]] A4 PRODUCT INFO

MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

] EVENT RECORDER 3: POWER ON

] 12:00:00am 01/01/96
2: POWER OFF
12:00:00am 01/01/96
MESSAGE
1: CLEAR RECORDS
MESSAGE
12:00:00am 01/01/96

] END OF PAGE A3
]

FIGURE 5–20: Actual Values Page 3 – Event Recorder

The PQM Event Recorder runs continuously and records the number, cause, time, date, and
metering quantities present at the occurrence of each event. This data is stored in non-
volatile memory and is not lost when power to the PQM is removed. The Event Recorder
must be enabled in S1 PQM SETUP \ EVENT RECORDER \ EVENT RECORDER
OPERATION. The Event Recorder can be cleared in S1 PQM SETUP \ CLEAR DATA \
CLEAR EVENT RECORD. Data for the 40 most recent events is stored. Event data for older
events is lost. Note that the event number, cause, time, and date is available in the
messages as shown in the following table, but the associated metering data is available
only via serial communications.
The event data stored for POWER OFF events does not reflect values at the
time of power-off.
NOTE

EVENT RECORDS- EVENT NUMBER, EVENT CAUSE, TIME, DATE: These messages display
the 40 most recent events recorded by the event recorder.

5–28 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 5: MONITORING A3 POWER ANALYSIS

Table 5–1: List Of Possible Events (Sheet 1 of 4)

EVENT NAME DISPLAYED EVENT NAME

Undercurrent Alarm/Control Pickup UNDERCURRENT ↑

Undercurrent Alarm/Control Dropout UNDERCURRENT ↓

Overcurrent Alarm/Control Pickup OVERCURRENT ↑

Overcurrent Alarm/Control Dropout OVERCURRENT ↓

Neutral Overcurrent Alarm/Control Pickup NEUTRAL ↑

Neutral Overcurrent Alarm/Control Dropout NEUTRAL ↓

Undervoltage Alarm/Control Pickup UNDERVOLTAGE ↑

Undervoltage Alarm/Control Dropout UNDERVOLTAGE ↓

Overvoltage Alarm/Control Pickup OVERVOLTAGE ↑

Overvoltage Alarm/Control Dropout OVERVOLTAGE ↓

Current Unbalance Alarm/Control Pickup CURRENT U/B ↑

Current Unbalance Alarm/Control Dropout CURRENT U/B ↓

Voltage Unbalance Alarm/Control Pickup VOLTAGE U/B ↑

Voltage Unbalance Alarm/Control Dropout VOLTAGE U/B ↓

Phase Reversal Alarm/Control Pickup PHASE REVERSAL↑

Phase Reversal Alarm/Control Dropout PHASE REVERSAL↓

Power Factor Lead 1 Alarm/Control Pickup PF LEAD 1 ↑

Power Factor Lead 1 Alarm/Control Dropout PF LEAD 1 ↓

Power Factor Lag 1 Alarm/Control Pickup PF LAG 1 ↑

Power Factor Lag 1 Alarm/Control Dropout PF LAG 1 ↓

Power Factor Lead 2 Alarm/Control Pickup PF LEAD 2 ↑

Power Factor Lead 2 Alarm/Control Dropout PF LEAD 2 ↓

Power Factor Lag 2 Alarm/Control Pickup PF LAG 2 ↑

Power Factor Lag 2 Alarm/Control Dropout PF LAG 2 ↓

Positive Real Power Alarm/Control Pickup POS kW ↑

Positive Real Power Alarm/Control Dropout POS kW ↓

Negative Real Power Alarm/Control Pickup NEG kW ↑

Negative Real Power Alarm/Control Dropout NEG kW ↓

Positive Reactive Power Alarm/Control Pickup POS kvar ↑

Positive Reactive Power Alarm/Control Dropout POS kvar ↓

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–29

A3 POWER ANALYSIS CHAPTER 5: MONITORING

Table 5–1: List Of Possible Events (Sheet 2 of 4)

EVENT NAME DISPLAYED EVENT NAME

Negative Reactive Power Alarm/Control Pickup NEG kvar ↑

Negative Reactive Power Alarm/Control Dropout NEG kvar ↓

Underfrequency Alarm/Control Pickup UNDRFREQUENCY ↑

Underfrequency Alarm/Control Dropout UNDRFREQUENCY ↓

Overfrequency Alarm/Control Pickup OVERFREQUENCY ↑

Overfrequency Alarm/Control Dropout OVERFREQUENCY ↓

Positive Real Power Demand Alarm/Control Pickup 3Φ +kW DMD ↑

Positive Real Power Demand Alarm/Control Dropout 3Φ +kW DMD ↓

Negative Real Power Demand Alarm/Control Pickup 3Φ –kW DMD ↑

Negative Real Power Demand Alarm/Control Dropout 3Φ –kW DMD ↓

Positive Reactive Power Demand Alarm/Control Pickup 3Φ +kvar DMD ↑

Positive Reactive Power Demand Alarm/Control

3Φ +kvar DMD ↓
Dropout

Negative Reactive Power Demand Alarm/Control 3Φ –kvar DMD ↑

Pickup

Negative Reactive Power Demand Alarm/Control

3Φ –kvar DMD ↓
Dropout

Apparent Power Demand Alarm/Control Pickup 3Φ kVA DEMAND ↑

Apparent Power Demand Alarm/Control Dropout 3Φ kVA DEMAND ↓

Phase A Current Demand Alarm/Control Pickup Ia DEMAND ↑

Phase A Current Demand Alarm/Control Dropout Ia DEMAND ↓

Phase B Current Demand Alarm/Control Pickup Ib DEMAND ↑

Phase B Current Demand Alarm/Control Dropout Ib DEMAND ↓

Phase C Current Demand Alarm/Control Pickup Ic DEMAND ↑

Phase C Current Demand Alarm/Control Dropout Ic DEMAND ↓

Neutral Current Demand Alarm/Control Pickup In DEMAND ↑

Neutral Current Demand Alarm/Control Dropout In DEMAND ↓

Switch Input A Alarm/Control Pickup SW A ACTIVE ↑

Switch Input A Alarm/Control Dropout SW A ACTIVE ↓

Switch Input B Alarm/Control Pickup SW B ACTIVE ↑

Switch Input B Alarm/Control Dropout SW B ACTIVE ↓

Switch Input C Alarm/Control Pickup SW C ACTIVE ↑

5–30 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 5: MONITORING A3 POWER ANALYSIS

Table 5–1: List Of Possible Events (Sheet 3 of 4)

EVENT NAME DISPLAYED EVENT NAME

Switch Input C Alarm/Control Dropout SW C ACTIVE ↓

Switch Input D Alarm/Control Pickup SW D ACTIVE ↑

Switch Input D Alarm/Control Dropout SW D ACTIVE ↓

Pulse Input 1 Alarm/Control Pickup PULSE IN 1 ↑

Pulse Input 1 Alarm/Control Dropout PULSE IN 1 ↓

Pulse Input 2 Alarm/Control Pickup PULSE IN 2 ↑

Pulse Input 2 Alarm/Control Dropout PULSE IN 2 ↓

Pulse Input 3 Alarm/Control Pickup PULSE IN 3 ↑

Pulse Input 3 Alarm/Control Dropout PULSE IN 3 ↓

Pulse Input 4 Alarm/Control Pickup PULSE IN 4 ↑

Pulse Input 4 Alarm/Control Dropout PULSE IN 4 ↓

Totalized Pulses Alarm/Control Pickup PULSE TOTAL ↑

Totalized Pulses Alarm/Control Dropout PULSE TOTAL ↓

Current THD Alarm/Control Pickup CURRENT THD ↑

Current THD Alarm/Control Dropout CURRENT THD ↓

Voltage THD Alarm/Control Pickup VOLTAGE THD ↑

Voltage THD Alarm/Control Dropout VOLTAGE THD ↓

Main Analog Input Alarm/Control Pickup AN INPUT MAIN ↑

Main Analog Input Alarm/Control Dropout AN INPUT MAIN ↓

Alternate Analog Input Alarm/Control Pickup AN INPUT ALT ↑

Alternate Analog Input Alarm/Control Dropout AN INPUT ALT ↓

Self Test Failure Alarm Pickup SELF TEST ↑

Self Test Failure Alarm Dropout SELF TEST ↓

COM1 Failure Alarm Pickup COM1 FAILURE ↑

COM1 Failure Alarm Dropout COM1 FAILURE ↓

COM2 Failure Alarm Pickup COM2 FAILURE ↑

COM2 Failure Alarm Dropout COM2 FAILURE ↓

Clock Not Set Alarm Pickup CLOCK NOT SET ↑

Clock Not Set Alarm Dropout CLOCK NOT SET ↓

Critical Setpoints Not Stored Alarm Pickup PARAM NOT SET ↑

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–31

A3 POWER ANALYSIS CHAPTER 5: MONITORING

Table 5–1: List Of Possible Events (Sheet 4 of 4)

EVENT NAME DISPLAYED EVENT NAME

Critical Setpoints Not Stored Alarm Dropout PARAM NOT SET ↓

Data Log 1 Alarm Pickup DATA LOG 1 ↑

Data Log 1 Alarm Dropout DATA LOG 1 ↓

Data Log 2 Alarm Pickup DATA LOG 2 ↑

Data Log 2 Alarm Dropout DATA LOG 2 ↓

Time Alarm/Control Pickup TIME ↑

Time Alarm/Control Dropout TIME ↓

Power On POWER ON

Power Off POWER OFF

Latched Alarm/Auxiliary Reset ALARM RESET

Setpoint Access On PROGRAM ENABLE

Trace Memory Triggered TRACE TRIG ↑

5–32 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 5: MONITORING A4 PRODUCT INFO

5.5 A4 Product Info

5.5.1 Software
Versions &
Model
Information

ACTUAL
]] ACTUAL VALUES ]] ACTUAL VALUES
]] A4 PRODUCT INFO ]] A1 METERING

MESSAGE
MESSAGE

MESSAGE

] SOFTWARE VERSIONS MAIN PROGRAM VER:

] 3.66 Oct 06, 2006
MAIN COMPILE TIME
16:01:30
BOOT PROGRAM
MESSAGE VERSION: 2.00
MESSAGE
SUPERVISOR PROGRAM
VERSION: 1.03

MESSAGE

] MODEL INFORMATION ORDER CODE:

] PQM-T20-C-A
MOD NUMBER(S): 000

SERIAL NUMBER:
C6587777
MESSAGE
DATE OF MANUFACTURE:
MESSAGE Jun 20, 2006
DATE OF CALIBRATION:
Jun 20, 2006

] END OF PAGE A4
]

FIGURE 5–21: Actual Values Page 4 – Software Versions

a) Software Versions
Product software revision information is contained in these messages.
MAIN PROGRAM VERSION: When referring to documentation or requesting technical
assistance from the factory, record the MAIN PROGRAM VERSION and MODIFICATION
FILE NUMBER . The MAIN PROGRAM VERSION identifies the firmware installed internally
in the flash memory. The title page of this instruction manual states the main program
revision code for which the manual is written. There may be differences in the product and
manual if the revision codes do not match.
BOOT PROGRAM VERSION: This identifies the firmware installed internally in the memory
of the PQM. This does not affect the functionality of the PQM.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–33

A4 PRODUCT INFO CHAPTER 5: MONITORING

SUPERVISOR PROGRAM VERSION: This identifies the firmware installed internally in the
supervisor (power fail) processor of the PQM. This does not affect the functionality of the
PQM.

b) Model Information
Product identification information is contained in these messages.
ORDER CODE: This indicates which features were ordered with this PQM. T = Transducer
option (T20=4-20 mA, T1=0-1 mA Analog Outputs), C = Control option, A = Power Analysis
option.
MOD NUMBER(S): If unique features have been installed for special customer orders, the
MOD NUMBER will be used by factory personnel to identify the matching product records.
If an exact replacement model is required, the MAIN PROGRAM VERSION, MOD
NUMBER, ORDER CODE, SERIAL NUNBER should be specified with the order.
SERIAL NUMBER: This is the serial number of the PQM. This should match the number on
the label located on the back of the PQM.
DATE OF MANUFACTURE: This is the date the PQM was final tested at GE Multilin.
DATE OF CALIBRATION: This is the date the PQM was last calibrated.

5–34 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

 GE Consumer & Industrial
Multilin

ACTUAL STORE
PQM Power Quality Meter
Ia = 100 Ib = 102 SETPOINT RESET

Ic = 100 AMPS
MESSAGE

g PQM Power Quality Meter

Chapter 6: Software
STATUS COMMUNICATE RELAYS

ALARM TX1 ALARM

VALUE
PROGRAM RX1 AUX1

SIMULATION TX2 AUX2

SELF TEST RX2 AUX3

Software

6.1 Introduction

6.1.1 Overview Although setpoints can be entered manually using the front panel keys, it is much easier to
use a computer to download values through the communications port. A free program
called EnerVista PQM Setup is available from GE Multilin to make this as convenient as
possible. With EnerVista PQM Setup running on your personal computer under Windows it
is possible to:
• Program/modify setpoints
• Load/save setpoint files from/to disk
• Read actual values
• Monitor status
• Perform waveform capture
• Perform harmonic analysis
• log data
• triggered trace memory
• Get help on any topic
• Print the instruction manual from compact disc
EnerVista PQM Setup allows immediate access to all the features of the PQM with easy to
use pull down menus in the familiar Windows environment. EnerVista PQM Setup can also
run without a PQM connected. This allows you to edit and save setpoints to a file for later
use. If a PQM is connected to a serial port on a computer and communication is enabled,
the PQM can be programmed from the Setpoint screens. In addition, measured values,
status and alarm messages can be displayed with the Actual screens.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–1

INTRODUCTION CHAPTER 6: SOFTWARE

6.1.2 Hardware The PQM communication can be set up two ways. The figure below shows the connection
Configuration using the RS232 front port. FIGURE 6–2: EnerVista PQM Setup Communications Using Rear
RS485 PORT shows the connection through the RS485 port. If the RS232 option is installed,
this port will be visible on the front panel.

COMPUTER
ACTUAL STORE PQM Windows Application - PQM
File Setpoints Actual Communication Help
Actual - Chart Recorder
SETPOINT RESET CHANAGBLE PARAMTERS
Selection: Ib OK
RUN
Sample Rate: 1s Cancel
PRINT
X Range: 0-10s
MESSAGE

PQM Power Quality Meter Trending Chart

Amps
300.0
STATUS COMMUNICATE RELAYS
250.0
ALARM TX1 ALARM
VALUE 200.0
PROGRAM RX1 AUX1
150.0

SIMULATION TX2 AUX2 100.0

SELF TEST RX2 AUX3

RS232 50.0

0
-100.0 -80.0 -60.0 -40.0 -20.0 0

Seconds (Elapsed Time)

For Help, press F1

PQM RELAY

RS232 CONNECTOR
TO COMPUTER COM
PORT TYPICALLY 823806A3.CDR
COM1 OR COM2

FIGURE 6–1: EnerVista PQM Setup Communications Using the Front RS232 Port

6–2 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 6: SOFTWARE INTRODUCTION

POWER SUPPLY COMPUTER

MODULE TO
GE Power
WALL PLUG Mangagement PQM Windows Application - PQM

F485 Converter File Setpoints Actual Communication

Actual - Chart Recorder
Help

CHANAGBLE PARAMTERS
Selection: Ib OK
RUN
Sample Rate: 1s Cancel
PRINT
X Range: 0-10s

Trending Chart
Amps
300.0

250.0

200.0

POWER - + GND RS232 150.0

100.0

50.0

0
-100.0 -80.0 -60.0 -40.0 -20.0 0

Seconds (Elapsed Time)

For Help, press F1

RS232 CONNECTOR
TO COMPUTER COM
PORT TYPICALLY
COM1 OR COM2

823805A2.CDR

FIGURE 6–2: EnerVista PQM Setup Communications Using Rear RS485 PORT

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–3

ENERVISTA PQM SETUP INSTALLATION CHAPTER 6: SOFTWARE

6.2 EnerVista PQM Setup Installation

6.2.1 Checking if If EnerVista PQM Setup is already installed, run the program and check if it needs to be
Installation/ upgraded as described in the following procedure:
Upgrade is Z While EnerVista PQM Setup is running, insert the GE Multilin
Required Products CD and allow it to autostart (alternately, load the
D:\index.htm file into your browser), OR
Z Go to the GE Multilin website at www.GEmultilin.com
Z Click the “Software” menu item and select “PQM Power Quality
Meter” from the list of products.
Z Verify that the version shown on this page is identical to the
installed version as shown below. Select the Help > About
EnerVista PQM Setup menu item to determine the version running
on the local PC.

No upgrade
required if
these two
numbers
match

6.2.2 Installing/ The following minimum requirements must be met for EnerVista PQM Setup to operate on
Upgrading your computer.
EnerVista PQM • 486 PC with at least 8MB RAM, more recommended
Setup
• WindowsTM 3.1 or higher is installed and running
• Minimum of 10MB hard disk space

6–4 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 6: SOFTWARE ENERVISTA PQM SETUP INSTALLATION

If EnerVista PQM Setup is being upgraded, then note the exact path and directory name of
the current installation as it will be required during the new installation process. Follow the
procedure below to install EnerVista PQM Setup.
Z With windows running, insert the GE Multilin Products CD into the
local CD-ROM drive or go to the GE Multilin website at
www.GEmultilin.com.
If the CD does not autostart, use your web browser to open the file
index.htm in the Products CD root directory.
Z Select the “Software” link and choose “PQM Power Quality Meter”
from the list of products.
Z Click on “EnerVista PQM Setup Version 3.xx” and save the
installation program to the local PC.
Z Start the EnerVista PQM Setup installation program by double-
clicking its icon.
The installation program will request whether or not you wish to
create a 3.5” floppy disk set as shown below.
If so, click on the Start Copying button and follow the instructions.
If not, click on CONTINUE WITH EnerVista PQM Setup
VERSION 3.50 INSTALLATION.

Z Enter the complete path including the new directory name

indicating where EnerVista PQM Setup program is to be installed
(see below).
Z If an earlier version of EnerVista PQM Setup has been installed and
is to be upgraded, enter the complete path and directory name of
its current location on the local PC.
The installation program will automatically update the older files.
Z Click on Next to begin the installation.
The files will be installed in the directory indicated and the
installation program will automatically create icons and add
EnerVista PQM Setup to the Windows start menu.
Z Click Finish to end the installation.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–5

ENERVISTA PQM SETUP INSTALLATION CHAPTER 6: SOFTWARE

6.2.3 Configuring Z Start EnerVista PQM Setup. Once the program starts to execute, it
EnerVista PQM will attempt communications with the PQM.
Setup If communication is established, the screen will display the same
Communicatio information displayed on the PQM display.
ns If EnerVista PQM Setup cannot establish communications with the PQM, the following
message is displayed:

Z Click OK to edit the communications settings.

EnerVista PQM Setup opens the COMMUNICATION/COMPUTER
window shown below:

Z Set Slave Address to match the PQM address setpoint.

Z Set Communication Port # to the COM port number (on the local
PC) where the PQM is connected.
Z Set Baud Rate to match the PQM BAUD RATE setpoint.
Z Set Parity to match the PQM PARITY setpoint.
Z Select the Control Type being used for communication.
Z Set Startup Mode to Communicate with Relay.
Z Click the ON button to communicate with the PQM.
The EnerVista PQM Setup software will notify when it has
established a communication link with the PQM. If communication
does not succeed, check the following:
• Review the settings above to ensure they match the PQM settings

6–6 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 6: SOFTWARE ENERVISTA PQM SETUP INSTALLATION

• Ensure the Communication Port # setting matches the COM

port being used
• Ensure the hardware connection is correct – refer to the
connection diagrams in Section 6.1.2: Hardware Configuration on
page –2
• If using RS485 communications, ensure that the wire’s polarity is
correct and it is connected to the correct PQM terminals
Z Once communication has been established, click OK to return to
the main screen.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–7

ENERVISTA PQM SETUP MENUS CHAPTER 6: SOFTWARE

6.3 EnerVista PQM Setup Menus

6.3.1 Description

Create a new setpoint file with factory defaults

Open an existing file
Save the file to an existing or new name
View setpoint file properties

Send setpoint file information to the PQM

Print parameters setup

Print Preview
Print PQM file setpoints

Exit PQMPC

Change setpoint access permission

Change system calculation parameters
Change system setup setponts
Change output relays setpoints
Change alarm and control setpoints
Perform various input/output simulation tests
Monitor user-selected memory map locations

View PQM status

View metering data
View detailed power data
Display PQM model information

Set computer communication parameters

Setup PQMPC modem communication parameters
Troubleshoot various memory map locations
Upgrade PQM firmware

Display PQM instruction manual

Display instructions on how to use Help

Display PQMPC information

1. Create a new file 5. Set computer communications parameters

2. Open an existing file 6. Modem setup/dialer
3. Save the file 7. Hang up modem
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4. Print current file 8. Open the Help window

FIGURE 6–3: EnerVista PQM Setup Menus

6–8 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 6: SOFTWARE UPGRADING FIRMWARE

6.4 Upgrading Firmware

6.4.1 Description To upgrade the PQM firmware, follow the procedures listed in this section.
Upon successful completion of this procedure, the PQM will have new firmware installed
with the original setpoints.
The latest firmware files are available from the GE Multilin website at http://
www.GEmultilin.com.
NOTE

6.4.2 Save/Print Z To save setpoints to a file, select the File > Save As menu item.
PQM Setpoints Z Enter the filename to save the current setpoints and click OK . Use
to a File the extension “.pqm” for PQM setpoint files.

Z To print setpoints or actual values, select the File > Print Setup
menu item.
Z Select one of Setpoints (Enabled Features), Setpoints (All),
Actual Values, or User Definable Memory Map and click OK.
Z Ensure the printer is setup and on-line.
Z Select the File > Print menu item and click OK to print the
setpoints

6.4.3 Loading New For PQM relays with Boot code versions 2.00 and higher, the Upload message
Firmware into will not appear during the upload process if the display is a VFD (Vacuum
the PQM NOTE Fluorescent Display); it only appears for units with an LCD (Liquid Crystal
Display).
Z Select the Communication > Upgrade Firmware menu item.
A warning window will appear.
Z Select Yes to proceed or No the abort the process.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–9

UPGRADING FIRMWARE CHAPTER 6: SOFTWARE

Z Do not proceed unless you have saved the current setpoints as

shown in Section 6.4.2: Save/Print PQM Setpoints to a File above.

Z Locate the file to load into the PQM.

The firmware filename has the following format:

65 C 366 C4 . 000

Modification number (000 = none)

For GE Power Management use only

Product firmware revision (e.g. 350 = 3.50). This number

must be larger than the current number of the PQ M. This
number is found in actual values page A4 under SOFTWARE
VERSIONS \ MAIN PROGRAM VERSION.

Required product hardware revision. This letter must

match the first character of the serial number located on
the PQM product label (on the back of the unit)

Product Name (65 = P QM)

Z Select the required file.

Z Click on OK to proceed or Cancel to abort the firmware upgrade.

6–10 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 6: SOFTWARE UPGRADING FIRMWARE

The final warning shown below will appear. This will be the last chance to abort the
firmware upgrade.
Z Select Yes to proceed, No to load a different file, or Cancel to
abort the process.

EnerVista PQM Setup now prepares the PQM to receive the new firmware file. The
PQM will display a message indicating that it is in UPLOAD MODE. While the file is
being loaded into the PQM, a status box appears showing how much of the new
firmware file has been transferred and how much is remaining. The entire transfer
process takes approximately five minutes.
EnerVista PQM Setup will notify the user when the PQM has finished loading the
file. Carefully read any notes and click OK to return the main screen.
If the PQM does not communicate with the EnerVista PQM Setup software, ensure
that the following PQM setpoints correspond with the EnerVista PQM Setup
settings:
• MODBUS COMMUNICATION ADDRESS
• BAUD RATE
• PARITY (if applicable)
Also, ensure that the correct COM port is being used

6.4.4 Firmware If the EnerVista PQM Setup is interrupted during firmware upgrade, the meter will display
Upgrade one of the following:
Recovery • The upload mode message:

PQM FLASH LOADER

UPLOAD MODE

• The enter text load message:

PQM FLASH LOADER

ENTER TEXT LOAD

• A blank display
• Unreadable characters or symbols on the display.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–11

UPGRADING FIRMWARE CHAPTER 6: SOFTWARE

Procedure
The following procedure describes how to recover and complete the firmware upgrade.
Z Run the EnerVista PQM Setup software.
Z Connect the PQM to a local PC through an RS232 serial cable.
Z Select the Communication > Upgrade Firmware menu item.
Z Select "Yes" to confirm that you want to upgrade the firmware.
Z Select the desired firmware file and click OK.
The following message appears on the display.

Z Select "Ignore".
The following message will appear next.

Z Select "Ignore" again.

The EnerVista PQM Setup software will erase the flash and load
correct firmware into meter.
If the firmware upgrade process is interrupted there is a possibility that the baud rate in
the PQM will default to 9600 Baud. If the above steps do not succeed then the baud rate in
the EnerVista PQM Setup program may no longer match the PQM baud rate. Change the
communication baud rate setting in the EnerVista PQM Setup program to 9600 Baud and
repeat the above process.

6–12 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 6: SOFTWARE UPGRADING FIRMWARE

6.4.5 Loading Saved Z Select the File > Open menu item.
Setpoints into Z Select the file containing the setpoints to be loaded into the PQM
the PQM and click OK .
Z Select the File > Properties menu item and change the file
version of the setpoint file to match the firmware version of the
PQM.

Z Select the File > Send Info to Meter menu item to load the
setpoint file into the PQM.
Z A dialog box will appear to confirm the request to download
setpoints.
Z Click Yes to send the setpoints to the PQM now or No to abort the
process.
Z EnerVista PQM Setup now loads the setpoint file into the PQM.
If new setpoints were added in the upgrade software, they will be
set to factory defaults.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–13

USING ENERVISTA PQM SETUP CHAPTER 6: SOFTWARE

6.5 Using EnerVista PQM Setup

6.5.1 Entering The System Setup page will be used as an example to illustrate the entering of setpoints.
Setpoints Z Select the Setpoint > System Setup menu item.
The following window will appear:

When a non-numeric setpoint such as CT WIRING is selected, EnerVista PQM Setup

displays a drop-down menu:

6–14 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 6: SOFTWARE USING ENERVISTA PQM SETUP

When a numeric setpoint such as NOMINAL INPUT DIRECT VOLTAGE is selected,

EnerVista PQM Setup displays a keypad that allows the user to enter a value within the
setpoint range displayed near the top of the keypad:

Z Click Accept to exit from the keypad and keep the new value.
Z Click on Cancel to exit from the keypad and retain the old value.
Z Click on Store to save the values into the PQM.
Z Click OK to accept any changes and exit the Setpoint / System
Setup dialog box.
Z Click Cancel to retain previous values and exit.

6.5.2 Viewing Actual If a PQM is connected to a computer via the serial port, any measured value, status and
Values alarm information can be displayed. Use the Actual pull-down menu to select various
measured value screens. Monitored values will be displayed and continuously updated.

6.5.3 Setpoint Files Saving/printing Setpoint Files

To print and save all the setpoints to a file follow the steps outlined in Section 6.4.2: Save/
Print PQM Setpoints to a File on page –9.

Loading Setpoint Files

To load an existing setpoints file to a PQM and/or send the setpoints to the PQM follow the
steps outlined in Section 6.4.5: Loading Saved Setpoints into the PQM on page –13.

6.5.4 Getting Help The complete instruction manual, including diagrams, is available on the GE Multilin
Products CD and through the EnerVista PQM Setup Help menu.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–15

USING ENERVISTA PQM SETUP CHAPTER 6: SOFTWARE

Z Select the Help > Instruction Manual menu item and select the
desired topic.
Consult EnerVista PQM Setup Help for an explanation of any
feature, specifications, wiring, installation, etc. Context-sensitive
help can also be activated by clicking on the desired function.
For easy reference, any topic can be printed by selecting File > Print Topic item from the
Help file menu bar. For printing illustrations, it is recommended that the user download the
instruction manual PDF files from the GE Multilin CD or from the GE Multilin website at
www.GEmultilin.com. Screen colors will appear in the printout if a color printer is
used.

6–16 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 6: SOFTWARE POWER ANALYSIS

6.6 Power Analysis

6.6.1 Waveform Two cycles (64 samples/cycle) of voltage and current waveforms can be captured and
Capture displayed on a PC using EnerVista PQM Setup or third party software. Distorted peaks or
notches from SCR switching provides clues for taking corrective action. Waveform capture
is also a useful tool when investigating possible wiring problems due to its ability to display
the phase relationship of the various inputs. The waveform capture feature is implemented
into EnerVista PQM Setup as shown below.
Z Select the Actual > Power Analysis > Waveform Capture
menu item.
EnerVista PQM Setup will open the Waveform Capture dialog box.

Z Check the boxes on the left to display the desired waveforms.

• The waveform values for the current cursor line position are
displayed to the right of any checked boxes.
• The Trigger Selected Waveforms button captures new
waveforms from the PQM.
• The Read Selected Waveforms From Device button loads
and views previously selected waveforms.
• The Open button loads and views previously saved waveforms
• The Save button saves the captured waveforms to a file
• The Print button prints the currently displayed waveforms
• The Setup button allows for the setup of capture attributes

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–17

POWER ANALYSIS CHAPTER 6: SOFTWARE

6.6.2 Harmonic Non-linear loads such as variable speed drives, computers, and electronic ballasts can
Analysis cause harmonics which may lead to problems such as nuisance breaker tripping,
telephone interference, transformer, capacitor or motor overheating. For fault diagnosis
such as detecting undersized neutral wiring, need for a harmonic rated transformer or
effectiveness of harmonic filters; details of the harmonic spectrum are useful and available
with the PQM and EnerVista PQM Setup.
EnerVista PQM Setup can perform a harmonic analysis on any of the four current inputs or
any of the three voltage inputs by placing the PQM in a high speed sampling mode (256
samples/cycle) where it will sample one cycle of the user defined parameter. EnerVista
PQM Setup then takes this data and performs a FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) to extract the
harmonic information. The harmonic analysis feature is implemented into EnerVista PQM
Setup as shown below.
Z Select the Actual > Power Analysis > Harmonic Analysis menu
item.
Z Select the desired output type: Waveform or Spectrum format.
Z Select Spectrum EnerVista PQM Setup to display Harmonic
Analysis Spectrum window including the harmonic spectrum up to
and including the 62nd harmonic.
Z Select the trigger parameter from the Select Trigger box and
press Trigger to display the harmonic spectrum.

The window includes details of the currently selected harmonic and other harmonic
analysis related data (for example, THD, K Factor, etc.).
Z Select Read Last Trigger From Device to load previous acquired
spectra from the PQM.

6–18 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 6: SOFTWARE POWER ANALYSIS

Open loads and views previously save spectra, Save saves the captured spectrum to
a file, and Print prints the currently displayed spectrum.
Z Select Actual Values > Power Analysis > Harmonic Analysis >
Waveform to display the Harmonic Analysis Waveform window.
Z Select the trigger parameter from the Select Trigger box and
press Trigger to capture new waveforms from the PQM.

The window includes waveform values for the current cursor line position and check
boxes to display the desired waveforms.
Z Select Read Last Trigger From Device to load previous acquired
waveforms from the PQM.
Open loads and views previously save waveforms, Save saves the captured
waveforms, Print prints the currently displayed waveforms, and Setup allows the
user to change the capture parameters.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–19

POWER ANALYSIS CHAPTER 6: SOFTWARE

Z Click Setup to display the GRAPH ATTRIBUTE window:

From this window, the waveforms appearance and format can be modified.

6.6.3 Trace Memory The trace memory feature allows the PQM to be setup to trigger on various conditions. The
trace memory can record maximum of 36 cycles of data (16 samples per cycle) for all
voltage and current inputs simultaneously. A Total Trace Triggers Counter has been
implemented in the PQM Memory Map at Register 0x0B83. This register will keep a running
total of all valid Trace Memory Triggers from the last time power was applied to the PQM.
The Total Trace Triggers counter will rollover to 0 at 65536. The trace memory feature is
implemented into EnerVista PQM Setup as shown below.
Z Select the Setpoint > PQM Setup menu item to setup the trace
memory feature.
This launches the PQM Setup dialog box shown below.
Z Click on the Trace Memory tab to display the trace memory
parameters

6–20 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 6: SOFTWARE POWER ANALYSIS

The Memory Usage is set as follows:

• 1 x 36 cycles: upon trigger, the entire buffer is filled with 36 cycles of data
• 2 x 18 cycles: 2 separate 18-cycle buffers are created and each is filled
upon a trigger
• 3 x 12 cycles: 3 separate 12 cycle buffers are created and each is filled
upon a trigger
If the Trigger Mode is set to One-Shot , then the trace memory is triggered once per
buffer; if it is set to Retrigger, then it automatically retriggers and overwrites the
previous data.
The Trigger Delay delays the trigger by the number of cycles specified.
The VOLTAGE, CURRENT, and SWITCH INPUTS selections are the parameters and
levels that are used to trigger the trace memory.
Z Click Store to send the current settings to the PQM.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–21

POWER ANALYSIS CHAPTER 6: SOFTWARE

Z Select the Actual > Power Analysis > Trace Memory menu item
to view the trace memory data.
This launches the Trace Memory Waveform window shown below.

Use the Trigger Selected Traces button to force a trace memory trigger.
Use the Re-Arm All Traces button to re-trigger after all the buffers have been filled if
the Trigger Mode has been set to One-Shot . Pressing this button causes the trace
memory to default back to the first buffer.
The Read Selected Traces From Device button loads and views previously
captured data.
For the Select Buffer option, select 1, 2, or 3 to display one of the three different
buffers. This option is dependent on the Trigger Mode selected in the Setpoint > PQM
Options menu item.
Open loads previously saved waveforms for viewing, Save saves the captured
waveforms to a file, Print prints the current waveforms, and Setup allows for the
configuration of capture parameters.

6.6.4 Data Logger The data logger feature allows the PQM to continuously log various specified parameters
at the specified rate. The data logger uses the 64 samples/cycle data. This feature is
implemented into EnerVista PQM Setup as shown below.
Z Select the Setpoint > System Setup menu item to setup the data
logger feature.
This launches the System Setup dialog box shown below.
Z Select the Data Log tab to display the data logger parameters.

6–22 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 6: SOFTWARE POWER ANALYSIS

The state of each data logger and percent filled is shown. Use the START and
STOP buttons to start and stop the logs.
In the CONFIGURATION settings, the Log Mode is set as follows:
• Run to Fill: when the data logger is full (100%) it will stop logging
• Circulate: when the data logger is full, it will start from the beginning and
overwrite the previous data (under development).
The Log 1/2 Interval value determines how frequently the PQM logs each piece
of data.
The total log size is approximately 64KB. The allotment of this memory can be
varied between the two logs to maximize the overall log time. Set the preference in
Size Determination to let the PQM automatically optimize the memory. If
desired, the optimization can also be performed manually by the user.
In the PARAMETER ASSIGNMENTS settings, the Log 1/2 Fill Time values
represent the amount of time the data logger takes to fill to 100%. This time is
dependent on the logging interval and the number of parameters being logged.
Set the parameters to be logged by Log 1 and Log 2 by highlighting the selection in
the Assigned Parameters menu and checking the check box to assign it to the
desired log.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–23

POWER ANALYSIS CHAPTER 6: SOFTWARE

Z Select the Actual > Power Analysis > Data Logger > Log 1 (or
Log 2) item to view the respective data logger.

The Data Log 1/2 dialog box displays the record numbers, data log start time, the
current time, and parameter values for the current cursor line position.
The Read All Records from Device button views all previously acquired data up
to the present time.
The Sync With Device button retrieves all data from the PQM as it is acquired.
The Stop Data Log button de-activates the PQM data log.
The Stop Reading button stops the data acquisition from the PQM, but the log
continues to acquire values.
Open loads previously saved logs for viewing, Save saves captured log values to a
file, Print prints the currently displayed log values, and Setup allows for the
configuration of the graph display parameters.

6–24 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

 GE Consumer & Industrial
Multilin

ACTUAL STORE
PQM Power Quality Meter
Ia = 100 Ib = 102 SETPOINT RESET

Ic = 100 AMPS
MESSAGE

g PQM Power Quality Meter

STATUS COMMUNICATE RELAYS

Chapter 7: Modbus
ALARM TX1 ALARM
VALUE
PROGRAM RX1 AUX1

SIMULATION TX2 AUX2

SELF TEST RX2 AUX3

Communications

Modbus Communications

7.1 Overview

7.1.1 Modbus The GE Multilin PQM implements a subset of the AEG Modicon Modbus RTU serial
Protocol communication standard. Many popular programmable controllers support this protocol
directly with a suitable interface card allowing direct connection of the PQM. Although the
Modbus protocol is hardware independent, the PQM interface uses 2-wire RS485 and 9-pin
RS232 interfaces. Modbus is a single-master multiple-slave protocol suitable for a
multi-drop configuration provided by RS485 hardware. In this configuration, up to 32
slaves can be daisy-chained together on a single communication channel.
The PQM is always a Modbus slave; it cannot be programmed as a Modbus master.
Computers or PLCs are commonly programmed as masters. The Modbus protocol exists in
two versions: Remote Terminal Unit (RTU, binary) and ASCII. Only the RTU version is
supported by the PQM. Monitoring, programming and control functions are possible using
read and write register commands.

7.1.2 Electrical The electrical interface is 2-wire RS485 and 9-pin RS232. In a 2-wire RS485 link, data flow is
Interface bi-directional and half duplex. That is, data is never transmitted and received at the same
time. RS485 lines should be connected in a daisy-chain configuration (avoid star
connections) with a terminating network installed at each end of the link, i.e. at the master
end and the slave farthest from the master. The terminating network should consist of a
120 Ω resistor in series with a 1 nF ceramic capacitor when used with Belden 9841 RS485
wire. The value of the terminating resistors should be equal to the characteristic
impedance of the line. This is approximately 120 Ω for standard #22 AWG twisted-pair
wire. Shielded wire should always be used to minimize noise. Polarity is important in RS485
communications: each '+' terminal of every device must be connected together for the
system to operate. See Section 2.2.9: RS485 Serial Ports on page –19 for details on serial
port wiring.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–1

OVERVIEW CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

7.1.3 Data Format & One data frame of an asynchronous transmission to or from a PQM consists of 1 start bit, 8
Data Rate data bits, and 1 stop bit, resulting in a 10-bit data frame. This is important for high-speed
modem transmission, since 11-bit data frames are not supported by Hayes modems at bit
rates greater than 300 bps. The Modbus protocol can be implemented at any standard
communication speed. The PQM supports operation at 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200
baud.

7.1.4 Data Packet A complete request/response sequence consists of the following bytes (transmitted as
Format separate data frames):
Master Request Transmission:
SLAVE ADDRESS: 1 byte
FUNCTION CODE: 1 byte
DATA: variable number of bytes depending on FUNCTION CODE
CRC: 2 bytes
Slave Response Transmission:
SLAVE ADDRESS: 1 byte
FUNCTION CODE: 1 byte
DATA: variable number of bytes depending on FUNCTION CODE
CRC: 2 bytes
• SLAVE ADDRESS: The first byte of every transmission. It represents the user-assigned
address of the slave device assigned to receive the message sent by the master. Each
slave device must be assigned a unique address so only it responds to a transmission
that starts with its address. In a master request transmission, the SLAVE ADDRESS
represents the address to which the request is being sent. In a slave response
transmission the SLAVE ADDRESS represents the address sending the response.
A master transmission with a SLAVE ADDRESS of 0 indicates a broadcast
command. Broadcast commands can be used only to store setpoints or
NOTE perform commands.

• FUNCTION CODE: This is the second byte of every transmission. Modbus defines
function codes of 1 to 127. The PQM implements some of these functions. See section
3 for details of the supported function codes. In a master request transmission the
FUNCTION CODE tells the slave what action to perform. In a slave response
transmission if the FUNCTION CODE sent from the slave is the same as the FUNCTION
CODE sent from the master then the slave performed the function as requested. If the
high order bit of the FUNCTION CODE sent from the slave is a 1 (i.e. if the FUNCTION
CODE is > 127) then the slave did not perform the function as requested and is sending
an error or exception response.
• DATA: This will be a variable number of bytes depending on the FUNCTION CODE. This
may be Actual Values, Setpoints, or addresses sent by the master to the slave or by
the slave to the master. See section 3 for a description of the supported functions and
the data required for each.
• CRC: This is a two byte error checking code.

7–2 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS OVERVIEW

7.1.5 Error Checking The RTU version of Modbus includes a 2-byte CRC-16 (16-bit cyclic redundancy check) with
every transmission. The CRC-16 algorithm essentially treats the entire data stream (data
bits only; start, stop and parity are ignored) as one continuous binary number. This number
is first shifted left 16 bits and then divided by a characteristic polynomial
(11000000000000101B). The 16-bit remainder is appended to the end of the transmission,
MSByte first. The resulting message including CRC, when divided by the same polynomial
at the receiver, results in a zero remainder if no transmission errors have occurred.
If a PQM Modbus slave device receives a transmission in which an error is indicated by the
CRC-16 calculation, the slave device will not respond to the transmission. A CRC-16 error
indicates that one or more bytes of the transmission were received incorrectly and thus
the entire transmission should be ignored in order to avoid the PQM performing any
incorrect operation.
The CRC-16 calculation is an industry standard method used for error detection. An
algorithm is included here to assist programmers in situations where no standard CRC-16
calculation routines are available.

7.1.6 CRC-16 Once the following algorithm is complete, the working register "A" will contain the CRC
Algorithm value to be transmitted. Note that this algorithm requires the characteristic polynomial to
be reverse bit ordered. The MSbit of the characteristic polynomial is dropped since it does
not affect the value of the remainder. The following symbols are used in the algorithm:
--> data transfer
A 16 bit working register
AL low order byte of A
AH high order byte of A
CRC 16 bit CRC-16 value
i,j loop counters
(+) logical exclusive-or operator
Di i-th data byte (i = 0 to N-1)
G 16-bit characteristic polynomial = 1010000000000001 with MSbit
dropped & bit order reversed
shr(x) shift right (the LSbit of the low order byte of x shifts into a carry flag, a '0'
is shifted into the MSbit of the high order byte of x, all other bits shift
right one location

ALGORITHM:
1. FFFF hex --> A
2. 0 --> i
3. 0 --> j
4. Di (+) AL --> AL
5. j+1 --> j
6. shr(A)
7. is there a carry? No: go to 8.
Yes: G (+) A --> A

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–3

OVERVIEW CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

8. is j = 8? No: go to 5.
Yes: go to 9.
9. i+1 --> i
10. is i = N?No: go to 3.
Yes: go to 11.
11. A --> CRC

7.1.7 Timing Data packet synchronization is maintained by timing constraints. The receiving device
must measure the time between the reception of characters. If three and one half
character times elapse without a new character or completion of the packet, then the
communication link must be reset (i.e. all slaves start listening for a new transmission from
the master). Thus at 9600 baud a delay of greater than 3.5 × 1/9600 × 10 = 3.65 ms will
cause the communication link to be reset.

7–4 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS FUNCTIONS

7.2 Modbus Functions

7.2.1 PQM The following functions are supported by the PQM:

Supported • 03: Read Setpoints and Actual Values
Modbus
Functions • 04: Read Setpoints and Actual Values
• 05: Execute Operation
• 06: Store Single Setpoint
• 07: Read Device Status
• 08: Loopback Test
• 16: Store Multiple Setpoints

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–5

MODBUS FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

7.2.2 Function Modbus implementation: Read Input and Holding Registers

Codes 03/04 – PQM Implementation: Read Setpoints and Actual Values
Read For the PQM Modbus implementation, these commands are used to read any setpoint
Setpoints/ ("holding registers") or actual value ("input registers"). Holding and input registers are 16-bit
Actual Values (two byte) values with the high-order byte transmitted first. Thus, all setpoints and actual
values are sent as two bytes. A maximum of 125 registers can be read in one transmission.
Function codes 03 and 04 are configured to read setpoints or actual values
interchangeably since some PLCs do not support both of them.
The slave response to function codes 03/04 is the slave address, function code, number of
data bytes to follow, the data, and the CRC. Each data item is sent as a 2 byte number with
the high order byte first.

MESSAGE FORMAT AND EXAMPLE:

Request slave 17 to respond with 3 registers starting at address 006B. For this example the
register data in these addresses is:
Address:006B006C006D
Data:022B00000064

Table 7–1: Master/Slave Packet Format for Function Code 03h/04h

MASTER BYTES EXAMPLE DESCRIPTION

TRANSMISSION

SLAVE ADDRESS 1 11 message for slave 17

FUNCTION CODE 1 03 read registers

DATA STARTING
2 00 6B data starting at 006B
ADDRESS

NUMBER OF
2 00 03 3 registers = 6 bytes total
SETPOINTS

CRC 2 9D 8D CRC error code

SLAVE RESPONSE BYTES EXAMPLE DESCRIPTION

SLAVE ADDRESS 1 11 message from slave 17

FUNCTION CODE 1 03 read registers

BYTE COUNT 1 06 3 registers = 6 bytes

DATA 1 (see definition

2 02 2B value in address 006B
above)

DATA 2 (see definition 2 00 00 value in address 006C

above)

DATA 3 (see definition 2 00 64 value in address 006D

above)

CRC 2 C8 B8 CRC error code

7–6 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS FUNCTIONS

7.2.3 Function Code Modbus Implementation: Force Single Coil

05 - Execute PQM Implementation: Execute Operation
Operation This function code allows the master to request a PQM to perform specific command
operations. The command numbers listed in the Commands area of the memory map
correspond to operation codes for function code 05.
The operation commands can also be initiated by writing to the Commands area of the
memory map using function code 16. Refer to FUNCTION 16 - PERFORMING COMMANDS
section for complete details.

MESSAGE FORMAT AND EXAMPLE:

Reset PQM (operation code 1).

Table 7–2: Master/Slave Packet Format for Function Code 05H

MASTER BYTES EXAMPLE DESCRIPTION

TRANSMISSION

SLAVE ADDRESS 1 11 message for slave 17

FUNCTION CODE 1 05 execute operation

reset command
OPERATION CODE 2 00 01
(operation code 1)

CODE VALUE 2 FF 00 perform function

CRC 2 DF 6A CRC error code

SLAVE RESPONSE BYTES EXAMPLE DESCRIPTION

SLAVE ADDRESS 1 11 message from slave 17

FUNCTION CODE 1 05 execute operation

OPERATION CODE 2 00 01 operation code 1

CODE VALUE 2 FF 00 perform function

CRC 2 DF 6A CRC error code

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–7

MODBUS FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

7.2.4 Function Code Modbus Implementation: Force Single Coil

05 – Broadcast PQM Implementation: Execute Operation
Command This function code allows the master to request all PQMs on a particular communications
link to Clear All Demand Data. The PQM will recognize a packet as being a broadcast
command if the SLAVE ADDRESS is transmitted as 0. Below is an example of the Broadcast
Command to Clear All Demand Data.

MESSAGE FORMAT AND EXAMPLE:

Clear All Demand Data on all PQMs (operation code 34).

Table 7–3: Master/Slave Packet Format for Broadcast Command

MASTER TRANSMISSION BYTES EXAMPLE DESCRIPTION

broadcast command
SLAVE ADDRESS 1 00
(address = 0)

FUNCTION CODE 1 05 execute operation

clear all demand data

OPERATION CODE 2 00 22
(operation code 34)

CODE VALUE 2 FF 00 perform function

CRC 2 2D E1 CRC error code

SLAVE RESPONSE BYTES EXAMPLE DESCRIPTION

Slave does not respond back to the master.

7–8 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS FUNCTIONS

7.2.5 Function Code Modbus Implementation: Preset Single Register

06 – Store PQM Implementation: Store Single Setpoint
Single Setpoint This command allows the master to store a single setpoint into the memory of a PQM. The
slave response to this function code is to echo the entire master transmission.

MESSAGE FORMAT AND EXAMPLE:

Request slave 17 to store the value 01E4 in setpoint address 1020. After the transmission in
this example is complete, setpoint address 1020 will contain the value 01E4.

Table 7–4: Master/Slave Packet Format for Function Code 06h

MASTER BYTES EXAMPLE DESCRIPTION

TRANSMISSION

SLAVE ADDRESS 1 11 message for slave 17

FUNCTION CODE 1 06 store single setpoint

DATA STARTING
2 10 20 setpoint address 1020
ADDRESS

DATA 2 01 E4 data for setpoint address

1020

CRC 2 8E 47 CRC error code

SLAVE RESPONSE BYTES EXAMPLE DESCRIPTION

SLAVE ADDRESS 1 11 message from slave 17

FUNCTION CODE 1 06 store single setpoint

DATA STARTING
2 10 20 setpoint address 1020
ADDRESS

data stored in setpoint

DATA 2 01 E4
address 1020

CRC 2 8E 47 CRC error code

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–9

MODBUS FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

7.2.6 Function Code Modbus Implementation: Read Exception Status

07 – Read PQM Implementation: Read Device Status
Device Status This is a function used to quickly read the status of a selected device. A short message
length allows for rapid reading of status. The status byte returned will have individual bits
set to 1 or 0 depending on the status of the slave device.
PQM General Status Byte:
LSBit B0: Alarm condition = 1
B1: Self test failure = 1
B2: Alarm relay energized = 1
B3: Aux 1 relay energized = 1
B4: Aux 2 relay energized = 1
B5: Aux 3 relay energized = 1
B6: Not used
MSBit B7: Not used

MESSAGE FORMAT AND EXAMPLE:

Request status from slave 17.

Table 7–5: Master/Slave Packet Format for Function Code 07h

MASTER BYTES EXAMPLE DESCRIPTION

TRANSMISSION

SLAVE ADDRESS 1 11 message for slave 17

FUNCTION CODE 1 07 read device status

CRC 2 4C 22 CRC error code

SLAVE RESPONSE BYTES EXAMPLE DESCRIPTION

SLAVE ADDRESS 1 11 message from slave 17

FUNCTION CODE 1 07 read device status

DEVICE STATUS (see status = 00101100 (in

1 2C
definition above) binary)

CRC 2 22 28 CRC error code

7–10 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS FUNCTIONS

7.2.7 Function Code Modbus Implementation: Loopback Test

08 – Loopback PQM Implementation: Loopback Test
Test This function is used to test the integrity of the communication link. The PQM will echo the
request.

MESSAGE FORMAT AND EXAMPLE:

Loopback test from slave 17.

Table 7–6: Master/Slave Packet Format for Function Code 08h

MASTER BYTES EXAMPLE DESCRIPTION

TRANSMISSION

SLAVE ADDRESS 1 11 message for slave 17

FUNCTION CODE 1 08 loopback test

DIAG CODE 2 00 00 must be 00 00

DATA 2 00 00 must be 00 00

CRC 2 E0 0B CRC error code

SLAVE RESPONSE BYTES EXAMPLE DESCRIPTION

SLAVE ADDRESS 1 11 message from slave 17

FUNCTION CODE 1 08 loopback test

DIAG CODE 2 00 00 must be 00 00

DATA 2 00 00 must be 00 00

CRC 2 E0 0B CRC error code

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–11

MODBUS FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

7.2.8 Function Code Modbus Implementation: Preset Multiple Registers

16 – Store PQM Implementation: Store Multiple Setpoints
Multiple This function code allows multiple Setpoints to be stored into the PQM memory. Modbus
Setpoints "registers" are 16 bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. Thus all PQM
setpoints are sent as two bytes. The maximum number of Setpoints that can be stored in
one transmission is dependent on the slave device. Modbus allows up to a maximum of 60
holding registers to be stored. The PQM allows 60 registers to be stored in one
transmission. The PQM response to this function code is to echo the slave address, function
code, starting address, the number of Setpoints stored, and the CRC.

MESSAGE FORMAT AND EXAMPLE:

Request slave 17 to store the value 01F4 to Setpoint address 1028 and the value 2710 to
setpoint address 1029. After the transmission in this example is complete, PQM slave 17
will have the following Setpoints information stored:
AddressData
102801F4
10292710

Table 7–7: Master/Slave Packet Format for Function Code 10h

MASTER BYTES EXAMPLE DESCRIPTION

TRANSMISSION

SLAVE ADDRESS 1 11 message for slave 17

FUNCTION CODE 1 10 store setpoints

DATA STARTING
2 10 28 setpoint address 1028
ADDRESS

NUMBER OF 2 00 02 2 setpoints = 4 bytes total

SETPOINTS

BYTE COUNT 1 04 4 bytes of data

data for setpoint address

DATA 1 2 01 F4 1028

data for setpoint address

DATA 2 2 27 10 1029

CRC 2 33 23 CRC error code

SLAVE RESPONSE BYTES EXAMPLE DESCRIPTION

SLAVE ADDRESS 1 11 message from slave 17

FUNCTION CODE 1 10 store setpoints

DATA STARTING
2 10 28 setpoint address 1028
ADDRESS

NUMBER OF
2 00 02 2 setpoints
SETPOINTS

CRC 2 C7 90 CRC error code

7–12 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS FUNCTIONS

7.2.9 Function Code Some PLCs may not support execution of commands using function code 5 but do support
16 - storing multiple setpoints using function code 16. To perform this operation using function
Performing code 16 (10H), a certain sequence of commands must be written at the same time to the
Commands PQM. The sequence consists of: Command Function register, Command operation register
and Command Data (if required). The Command Function register must be written with the
value of 5 indicating an execute operation is requested. The Command Operation register
must then be written with a valid command operation number from the list of commands
shown in the memory map. The Command Data registers must be written with valid data if
the command operation requires data. The selected command will be executed
immediately upon receipt of a valid transmission.

MESSAGE FORMAT AND EXAMPLE:

Perform a reset on PQM (operation code 1).

Table 7–8: Master/Slave Packet Format for Performing Commands

MASTER BYTES EXAMPLE DESCRIPTION

TRANSMISSION

SLAVE ADDRESS 1 11 message for slave 17

FUNCTION CODE 1 10 store multiple setpoints

DATA STARTING
2 00 80 setpoint address 1028
ADDRESS

NUMBER OF 2 00 02 2 setpoints = 4 bytes total

SETPOINTS

BYTE COUNT 1 04 4 bytes of data

DATA 1 2 00 05 data for address 0080

DATA 2 2 00 01 data for address 0081

CRC 2 B0 D6 CRC error code

SLAVE RESPONSE BYTES EXAMPLE DESCRIPTION

SLAVE ADDRESS 1 11 message from slave 17

FUNCTION CODE 1 10 store multiple setpoints

DATA STARTING
ADDRESS 2 00 80 setpoint address 00 80

NUMBER OF
SETPOINTS 2 00 02 2 setpoints

CRC 2 46 7A CRC error code

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–13

MODBUS FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

7.2.10 Function Code In applications where multiple devices are daisy chained, it may be necessary to
16 - Broadcast synchronize the clocks (date and/or time) in all the devices by sending one command. The
Command broadcast command allows such synchronization as shown in an example below. The PQM
will recognize a packet as being a broadcast command if the SLAVE ADDRESS is
transmitted as 0.

MESSAGE FORMAT AND EXAMPLE:

Send broadcast command to the PQM to store 1:27:10.015 pm, October 29, 1997.

Table 7–9: Packet Format for Function Code 16 Broadcast Command

MASTER BYTES EXAMPLE DESCRIPTION

TRANSMISSION

broadcast command
SLAVE ADDRESS 1 00
(address = 0)

FUNCTION CODE 1 10 store multiple setpoints

DATA STARTING
2 00 F0 start at address 00F0
ADDRESS

NUMBER OF
2 00 04 4 setpoints = 8 bytes total
SETPOINTS

BYTE COUNT 1 08 8 bytes of data

hours (24 hour format),

DATA 1 2 0D 1B
minutes

DATA 2 2 27 1F milliseconds

DATA 3 2 0A 1D month, day

DATA 4 2 07 CD year (four digits, i.e. 1997)

CRC 2 9D 8D CRC error code

SLAVE RESPONSE BYTES EXAMPLE DESCRIPTION

Slave does not respond back to the master.

The PQM allows the date and time to be stored separately. In other word, a broadcast
command can be sent to store just date or time.

7–14 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS FUNCTIONS

7.2.11 Error When a PQM detects an error other than a CRC error, a response will be sent to the master.
Responses The MSbit of the FUNCTION CODE byte will be set to 1 (i.e. the function code sent from the
slave will be equal to the function code sent from the master plus 128). The following byte
will be an exception code indicating the type of error that occurred.
Transmissions received from the master with CRC errors will be ignored by the PQM.
The slave response to an error (other than CRC error) will be:
• SLAVE ADDRESS: 1 byte
• FUNCTION CODE: 1 byte (with MSbit set to 1)
• EXCEPTION CODE: 1 byte
• CRC: 2 bytes
The PQM implements the following exception response codes.
01 - ILLEGAL FUNCTION
The function code transmitted is not one of the functions supported by the PQM.
02 - ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS
The address referenced in the data field transmitted by the master is not an allowable
address for the PQM.
03 - ILLEGAL DATA VALUE
The value referenced in the data field transmitted by the master is not within range for the
selected data address.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–15

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

7.3 Modbus Memory Map

7.3.1 Memory Map The data stored in the PQM is grouped as Setpoints and Actual Values. Setpoints can be
Information read and written by a master computer. Actual Values can be read only. All Setpoints and
Actual Values are stored as two byte values. That is, each register address is the address of
a two byte value. Addresses are listed in hexadecimal. Data values (Setpoint ranges,
increments, factory values) are in decimal.

7.3.2 User-definable The PQM contains a User Definable area in the memory map. This area allows remapping
Memory Map of the addresses of all Actual Values and Setpoints registers. The User Definable area has
two sections:
1. A Register Index area (memory map addresses 0180H-01F7H) that contains 120
Actual Values or Setpoints register addresses.
2. A Register area (memory map addresses 0100H-017FH) that contains the data at the
addresses in the Register Index.
Register data that is separated in the rest of the memory map may be remapped to
adjacent register addresses in the User Definable Registers area. This is accomplished by
writing to register addresses in the User Definable Register Index area. This allows for
improved throughput of data and can eliminate the need for multiple read command
sequences.
For example, if the values of Phase A Current (register address 0220H) and Phase A Power
Factor (register address 02DDH) are required to be read from a PQM, their addresses may
be remapped as follows:
1. Write 0220H to address 0180H (User Definable Register Index 0000) using function
code 06 or 16.
2. Write 02DDH to address 0181H (User Definable Register Index 0001) using function
code 06 or 16.
A read (function code 03 or 04) of registers 0100H (User Definable Register 0000) and
0101H (User Definable Register 0001) will return the Phase A Current and Phase A Power
Factor.

7–16 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

7.3.3 PQM Memory

Map
Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 1 of 55)
GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
Product Information (Input Registers) Addresses - 0000-007F
PRODUCT 0000 Product Device Code --- --- --- F1 65
ID
0001 Hardware Version Code --- --- --- F5 current version
0002 Main Software Version Code --- --- --- F1 current version
0003 Modification File Number 1 --- --- --- F1 mod. file number
1
0004 Boot Software Version Code --- --- --- F1 current version
0005 Supervisor Processor Version Code --- --- --- F1 current version
0006 Product options --- --- --- F100 from order code
0007 Modification File Number 2 --- --- --- F1 mod. file number
2
0008 Modification File Number 3 --- --- --- F1 mod. file number
3
0009 Modification File Number 4 --- --- --- F1 mod. file number
4
000A Modification File Number 5 --- --- --- F1 mod. file number
5
000B Reserved
to ↓
001F Reserved
0020 Serial Number Character 1 and 2 --- --- ASCII F10 1st , 2nd char.
0021 Serial Number Character 3 and 4 --- --- ASCII F10 3rd, 4th char.
0022 Serial Number Character 5 and 6 --- --- ASCII F10 5th, 6th char
0023 Serial Number Character 7 and 8 --- --- ASCII F10 7th, 8th char.
0024 Reserved
to ↓
002F Reserved
0030 Manufacture Month/Day --- --- --- F24 manf. month/day
0031 Manufacture Year --- --- --- F25 manufacture
year
0032 Calibration Month/Day --- --- --- F24 cal. month/day
0033 Calibration Year --- --- --- F25 calibration year
0034 Reserved
0035 Reserved
to ↓
007F Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–17

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 2 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
Commands (Holding Registers) Addresses - 0080-00EF
COMMANDS 0080 Command Function Code 5 --- --- F1 5
0081 Command Operation Code 1 to 35 1 --- F7 0
0082 Command Data 1 0 to 65535 1 --- * 0
0083 Command Data 2 0 to 65535 1 --- F31 0
0084 Command Data 3 0 to 65535 1 --- F8 0
0085 Command Data 4 0 to 65535 1 --- F8 0
0086 Command Data 5 0 to 65535 1 --- F8 0
0087 Command Data 6 0 to 65535 1 --- F8 0
0088 Command Data 7 0 to 65535 1 --- F8 0
0089 Command Data 8 0 to 65535 1 --- F8 0
008A Command Data 9 0 to 65535 1 --- F8 0
008B Command Data 10 0 to 65535 1 --- F8 0
008C Command Data 11 0 to 65535 1 --- F8 0
008D Reserved
to ↓
00EF Reserved
Broadcast Command (Holding Registers) Addresses - 00F0-00FF
BROADCAST 00F0 Time Hours/Minutes 0 to 65535 1 hr/min F22 N/A
COMMAND
00F1 Time Seconds 0 to 59999 1 ms F23 N/A
00F2 Date Month/Day 0 to 65535 1 --- F24 N/A
00F3 Date Year 0 to 59999 1 --- F25 N/A
00F4 Reserved
to ↓
00FF Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

7–18 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 3 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
User Definable Register (Input Registers) Addresses - 0100-017F
USER 0100 User Definable Data 0000 --- --- --- --- ---
DEFINABLE
REGISTERS 0101 User Definable Data 0001 --- --- --- --- ---
0102 User Definable Data 0002 --- --- --- --- ---
0103 User Definable Data 0003 --- --- --- --- ---
0104 User Definable Data 0004 --- --- --- --- ---
0105 User Definable Data 0005 --- --- --- --- ---
0106 User Definable Data 0006 --- --- --- --- ---
0107 User Definable Data 0007 --- --- --- --- ---
0108 User Definable Data 0008 --- --- --- --- ---
0109 User Definable Data 0009 --- --- --- --- ---
010A User Definable Data 000A --- --- --- --- ---
010B User Definable Data 000B --- --- --- --- ---
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
0177 User Definable Data 0077 --- --- --- --- ---
0178 Reserved
to ↓
017F Reserved
User Definable Register Index (Holding Registers) Addresses - 0180-01FF
USER 0180 Register address for User Data 0000 ** 1 --- F1 0
DEFINABLE
REGISTER 0181 Register address for User Data 0001 ** 1 --- F1 0
INDEX 0182 Register address for User Data 0002 ** 1 --- F1 0
0183 Register address for User Data 0003 ** 1 --- F1 0
0184 Register address for User Data 0004 ** 1 --- F1 0
0185 Register address for User Data 0005 ** 1 --- F1 0
0186 Register address for User Data 0006 ** 1 --- F1 0
0187 Register address for User Data 0007 ** 1 --- F1 0
0188 Register address for User Data 0008 ** 1 --- F1 0
0189 Register address for User Data 0009 ** 1 --- F1 0
018A Register address for User Data 000A ** 1 --- F1 0
018B Register address for User Data 000B ** 1 --- F1 0
018C Register address for User Data 000C ** 1 --- F1 0
018D Register address for User Data 000D ** 1 --- F1 0
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
01F7 Register address for User Data 0077 ** 1 --- F1 0
01F8 Reserved
to ↓
01FF Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–19

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 4 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
Actual Values (Input Registers) Addresses - 0200-0E1F
STATUS 0200 Switch Input Status --- --- --- F101 N/A
0201 LED Status Flags --- --- --- F102 N/A
0202 LED Attribute Flags --- --- --- F103 N/A
0203 Output Relay Status Flags --- --- --- F104 N/A
0204 Alarm Active Status Flags 1 --- --- --- F105 N/A
0205 Alarm Pickup Status Flags 1 --- --- --- F105 N/A
0206 Alarm Active Status Flags 2 --- --- --- F106 N/A
0207 Alarm Pickup Status Flags 2 --- --- --- F106 N/A
0208 Alarm Active Status Flags 3 --- --- --- F107 N/A
0209 Alarm Pickup Status Flags 3 --- --- --- F107 N/A
020A Aux. 1 Active Status Flags 1 --- --- --- F105 N/A
020B Aux. 1 Pickup Status Flags 1 --- --- --- F105 N/A
020C Aux. 1 Active Status Flags 2 --- --- --- F106 N/A
020D Aux. 1 Pickup Status Flags 2 --- --- --- F106 N/A
020E Aux. 1 Active Status Flags 3 --- --- --- F107 N/A
020F Aux. 1 Pickup Status Flags 3 --- --- --- F107 N/A
0210 Aux. 2 Active Status Flags 1 --- --- --- F105 N/A
0211 Aux. 2 Pickup Status Flags 1 --- --- --- F105 N/A
0212 Aux. 2 Active Status Flags 2 --- --- --- F106 N/A
0213 Aux. 2 Pickup Status Flags 2 --- --- --- F106 N/A
0214 Aux. 2 Active Status Flags 3 --- --- --- F107 N/A
0215 Aux. 2 Pickup Status Flags 3 --- --- --- F107 N/A
0216 Aux. 3 Active Status Flags 1 --- --- --- F105 N/A
0217 Aux. 3 Pickup Status Flags 1 --- --- --- F105 N/A
0218 Aux. 3 Active Status Flags 2 --- --- --- F106 N/A
0219 Aux. 3 Pickup Status Flags 2 --- --- --- F106 N/A
021A Aux. 3 Active Status Flags 3 --- --- --- F107 N/A
021B Aux. 3 Pickup Status Flags 3 --- --- --- F107 N/A
021C General Status --- --- --- F109 N/A
021D Encrypted Passcode --- --- --- F1 N/A
021E Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
022F Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

7–20 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 5 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
CLOCK 0230 Time - Hours/Minutes --- --- --- F22 N/A
0231 Time - Seconds --- --- --- F23 N/A
0232 Time - Month/Day --- --- --- F24 N/A
0233 Time Year --- --- --- F25 N/A
0234 Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
023F Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–21

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 6 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
CURRENT 0240 Phase A Current --- --- A F1 N/A
0241 Phase B Current --- --- A F1 N/A
0242 Phase C Current --- --- A F1 N/A
0243 Average Current --- --- A F1 N/A
0244 Neutral Current --- --- A F1 N/A
0245 Current Unbalance --- --- 0.1 x% F1 N/A
0246 Phase A Current - Minimum A F1 N/A
0247 Phase B Current - Minimum A F1 N/A
0248 Phase C Current - Minimum A F1 N/A
0249 Neutral Current - Minimum A F1 N/A
024A Current Unbalance - Minimum 0.1 x% F1 N/A
024B Phase A Current - Maximum A F1 N/A
024C Phase B Current - Maximum A F1 N/A
024D Phase C Current - Maximum A F1 N/A
024E Neutral Current - Maximum A F1 N/A
024F Current Unbalance - Maximum 0.1 x% F1 N/A
0250 Time - Hour/Minutes of Phase A Curr. Min --- --- --- F22 N/A
0251 Time - Seconds of Phase A Current Min --- --- --- F23 N/A
0252 Date - Month/Day of Phase A Current Min --- --- --- F24 N/A
0253 Date - Year of Phase A Current Min --- --- --- F25 N/A
0254 Time - Hour/Minutes of Phase B Curr. Min --- --- --- F22 N/A
0255 Time - Seconds of Phase B Current Min --- --- --- F23 N/A
0256 Date - Month/Day of Phase B Current Min --- --- --- F24 N/A
0257 Date - Year of Phase B Current Min --- --- --- F25 N/A
0258 Time - Hour/Minutes of Phase C Curr. Min --- --- --- F22 N/A
0259 Time - Seconds of Phase C Current Min --- --- --- F23 N/A
025A Date - Month/Day of Phase C Current Min --- --- --- F24 N/A
025B Date - Year of Phase C Current Min --- --- --- F25 N/A
025C Time - Hour/Minutes of Neutral Current --- --- --- F22 N/A
Min
025D Time - Seconds of Neutral Current Min --- --- --- F23 N/A
025E Date - Month/Day of Neutral Current Min --- --- --- F24 N/A
025F Date - Year of Neutral Current Min --- --- --- F25 N/A
0260 Time - Hour/Minutes of Current Unbal. Min --- --- --- F22 N/A
0261 Time - Seconds of Current Unbalance Min --- --- --- F23 N/A
0262 Date - Month/Day of Current Unbal. Min --- --- --- F24 N/A
0263 Date - Year of Current Unbalance Min --- --- --- F25 N/A
0264 Time - Hour/Minutes of Phase A Curr. Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

7–22 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 7 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
CURRENT 0265 Time - Seconds of Phase A Current Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
continued
0266 Date - Month/Day of Phase A Current Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
0267 Date - Year of Phase A Current Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
0268 Time - Hour/Minutes of Phase B Curr. Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
0269 Time - Seconds of Phase B Current Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
026A Date - Month/Day of Phase B Current Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
026B Date - Year of Phase B Current Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
026C Time - Hour/Minutes of Phase C Curr. Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
026D Time - Seconds of Phase C Current Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
026E Date - Month/Day of Phase C Current Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
026F Date - Year of Phase C Current Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
0270 Time - Hour/Minutes of Neutral Current --- --- --- F22 N/A
Max
0271 Time - Seconds of Neutral Current Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
0272 Date - Month/Day of Neutral Current Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
0273 Date - Year of Neutral Current Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
0274 Time - Hour/Minutes of Current Unbal. Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
0275 Time - Seconds of Current Unbal. Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
0276 Date - Month/Day of Current Unbal. Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
0277 Date - Year of Current Unbalance Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
0278 Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
027F Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–23

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 8 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
VOLTAGE 0280 Voltage Van (High)
--- --- V F3 N/A
0281 Voltage Van (Low)
0282 Voltage Vbn (High)
--- --- V F3 N/A
0283 Voltage Vbn (Low)
0284 Voltage Vcn (High)
--- --- V F3 N/A
0285 Voltage Vcn (Low)
0286 Average Phase Voltage (High)
--- --- V F3 N/A
0287 Average Phase Voltage (Low)
0288 Voltage Vab (High)
--- --- V F3 N/A
0289 Voltage Vab (Low)
028A Voltage Vbc (High)
--- --- V F3 N/A
028B Voltage Vbc (Low)
028C Voltage Vca (High)
--- --- V F3 N/A
028D Voltage Vca (Low)
028E Average Line Voltage (High)
--- --- V F3 N/A
028F Average Line Voltage (Low)
0290 Voltage Unbalance --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
0291 Voltage Van - Minimum (high)
--- --- V F3 N/A
0292 Voltage Van - Minimum (Low)
0293 Voltage Vbn - Minimum (high)
--- --- V F3 N/A
0294 Voltage Vbn - Minimum (Low)
0295 Voltage Vcn - Minimum (high)
--- --- V F3 N/A
0296 Voltage Vcn - Minimum (Low)
0297 Voltage Vab - Minimum (high)
--- --- V F3 N/A
0298 Voltage Vab - Minimum (Low)
0299 Voltage Vbc - Minimum (high)
--- --- V F3 N/A
029A Voltage Vbc - Minimum (Low)
029B Voltage Vca - Minimum (high)
--- --- V F3 N/A
029C Voltage Vca - Minimum (Low)
029D Voltage Unbalance - Minimum --- --- 0.1 x% F1 N/A
029E Voltage Van - Maximum (high)
--- --- V F3 N/A
029F Voltage Van - Maximum (Low)
02A0 Voltage Vbn - Maximum (high)
--- --- V F3 N/A
02A1 Voltage Vbn - Maximum (Low)
02A2 Voltage Vcn - Maximum (high)
--- --- V F3 N/A
02A3 Voltage Vcn - Maximum (Low)
02A4 Voltage Vab - Maximum (high)
--- --- V F3 N/A
02A5 Voltage Vab - Maximum (Low)
02A6 Voltage Vbc - Maximum (high)
--- --- V F3 N/A
02A7 Voltage Vbc - Maximum (Low)
02A8 Voltage Vca - Maximum (high)
--- --- V F3 N/A
02A9 Voltage Vca - Maximum (Low)

Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

7–24 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 9 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
VOLTAGE 02AA Voltage Unbalance - Maximum --- --- 0.1 x% F1 N/A
continued
02AB Time - Hour/Minutes of Voltage Van Min --- --- --- F22 N/A
02AC Time - Seconds of Voltage Van Min --- --- --- F23 N/A
02AD Date - Month/Day of Voltage Van Min --- --- --- F24 N/A
02AE Date - Year of Voltage Van Min --- --- --- F25 N/A
02AF Time - Hour/Minutes of Voltage Vbn Min --- --- --- F22 N/A
02B0 Time - Seconds of Voltage Vbn Min --- --- --- F23 N/A
02B1 Date - Month/Day of Voltage Vbn Min --- --- --- F24 N/A
02B2 Date - Year of Voltage Vbn Min --- --- --- F25 N/A
02B3 Time - Hour/Minutes of Voltage Vcn Min --- --- --- F22 N/A
02B4 Time - Seconds of Voltage Vcn Min --- --- --- F23 N/A
02B5 Date - Month/Day of Voltage Vcn Min --- --- --- F24 N/A
02B6 Date - Year of Voltage Vcn Min --- --- --- F25 N/A
02B7 Time - Hour/Minutes of Voltage Vab Min --- --- --- F22 N/A
02B8 Time - Seconds of Voltage Vab Min --- --- --- F23 N/A
02B9 Date - Month/Day of Voltage Vab Min --- --- --- F24 N/A
02BA Date - Year of Voltage Vab Min --- --- --- F25 N/A
02BB Time - Hour/Minutes of Voltage Vbc Min --- --- --- F22 N/A
02BC Time - Seconds of Voltage Vbc Min --- --- --- F23 N/A
02BD Date - Month/Day of Voltage Vbc Min --- --- --- F24 N/A
02BE Date - Year of Voltage Vbc Min --- --- --- F25 N/A
02BF Time - Hour/Minutes of Voltage Vca Min --- --- --- F22 N/A
02C0 Time - Seconds of Voltage Vca Min --- --- --- F23 N/A
02C1 Date - Month/Day of Voltage Vca Min --- --- --- F24 N/A
02C2 Date - Year of Voltage Vca Min --- --- --- F25 N/A
02C3 Time - Hour/Minutes of Voltage Unbal. Min --- --- --- F22 N/A
02C4 Time - Seconds of Voltage Unbalance Min --- --- --- F23 N/A
02C5 Date - Month/Day of Voltage Unbal. Min --- --- --- F24 N/A
02C6 Date - Year of Voltage Unbalance Min --- --- --- F25 N/A
02C7 Time - Hour/Minutes of Voltage Van Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
02C8 Time - Seconds of Voltage Van Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
02C9 Date - Month/Day of Voltage Van Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
02CA Date - Year of Voltage Van Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
02CB Time - Hour/Minutes of Voltage Vbn Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
02CC Time - Seconds of Voltage Vbn Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
02CD Date - Month/Day of Voltage Vbn Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
02CE Date - Year of Voltage Vbn Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
02CF Time - Hour/Minutes of Voltage Vcn Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
02D0 Time - Seconds of Voltage Vcn Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
02D1 Date - Month/Day of Voltage Vcn Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
02D2 Date - Year of Voltage Vcn Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
02D3 Time - Hour/Minutes of Voltage Vab Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–25

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 10 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
VOLTAGE 02D4 Time - Seconds of Voltage Vab Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
continued
02D5 Date - Month/Day of Voltage Vab Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
02D6 Date - Year of Voltage Vab Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
02D7 Time - Hour/Minutes of Voltage Vbc Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
02D8 Time - Seconds of Voltage Vbc Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
02D9 Date - Month/Day of Voltage Vbc Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
02DA Date - Year of Voltage Vbc Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
02DB Time - Hour/Minutes of Voltage Vca Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
02DC Time - Seconds of Voltage Vca Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
02DD Date - Month/Day of Voltage Vca Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
02DE Date - Year of Voltage Vca Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
02DF Time - Hour/Minutes of Voltage Unbal. Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
02E0 Time - Seconds of Voltage Unbalance Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
02E1 Date - Month/Day of Voltage Unbalance --- --- --- F24 N/A
Max
02E2 Date - Year of Voltage Unbalance Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
02E3 Reserved
02E4 Reserved
02E5 Reserved
02D6 Reserved
02E7 Va Phasor Angle --- --- ° lag F1
02E8 Vb Phasor Angle --- --- ° lag F1
02E9 Vc Phasor Angle --- --- ° lag F1
02EA Ia Phasor Angle --- --- ° lag F1
02EB Ib Phasor Angle --- --- ° lag F1
02EC Ic Phasor Angle --- --- ° lag F1
02ED Reserved
02EE Reserved
02EF Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

7–26 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 11 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
POWER 02F0 3 Phase Real Power (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kW F4 N/A
02F1 3 Phase Real Power (low)
02F2 3 Phase Reactive Power (high) 0.01 x
--- --- F4 N/A
02F3 3 Phase Reactive Power (low) kvar
02F4 3 Phase Apparent Power (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kVA F3 N/A
02F5 3 Phase Apparent Power (low)
02F6 3 Phase Power Factor --- --- 0.01 x PF F2 N/A
02F7 Phase A Real Power (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kW F4 N/A
02F8 Phase A Real Power (low)
02F9 Phase A Reactive Power (high) 0.01 x
--- --- F4 N/A
02FA Phase A Reactive Power (low) kvar
02FB Phase A Apparent Power (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kVA F3 N/A
02FC Phase A Apparent Power (low)
02FD Phase A Power Factor --- --- 0.01 x PF F2 N/A
02FE Phase B Real Power (high)
-- --- 0.01 x kW F4 N/A
02FF Phase B Real Power (low)
0300 Phase B Reactive Power (high) 0.01 x
--- --- F4 N/A
0301 Phase B Reactive Power (low) kvar
0302 Phase B Apparent Power (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kVA F3 N/A
0303 Phase B Apparent Power (low)
0304 Phase B Power Factor --- --- 0.01 x PF F2 N/A
0305 Phase C Real Power (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kW F4 N/A
0306 Phase C Real Power (low)
0307 Phase C Reactive Power (high) 0.01 x
--- --- F4 N/A
0308 Phase C Reactive Power (low) kvar
0309 Phase C Apparent Power (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kVA F3 N/A
030A Phase C Apparent Power (low)
030B Phase C Power Factor --- --- 0.01 x PF F2 N/A
030C 3 Phase Real Power - Minimum (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kW F4 N/A
030D 3 Phase Real Power - Minimum (low)
030E 3 Phase Reactive Power - Minimum (high) 0.01 x
--- --- F4 N/A
030F 3 Phase Reactive Power - Minimum (low) kvar
0310 3 Phase Apparent Power - Minimum (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kVA F3 N/A
0311 3 Phase Apparent Power - Minimum (low)
0312 3 Phase Power Factor - Minimum --- --- 0.01 x PF F2 N/A
0313 3 Phase Real Power - Maximum (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kW F4 N/A
0314 3 Phase Real Power - Maximum (low)
0315 3 Phase Reactive Power - Maximum (high) 0.01 x
--- --- F4 N/A
0316 3 Phase Reactive Power - Maximum (low) kvar
0317 3 Phase Apparent Power - Maximum (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kVA F3 N/A
0318 3 Phase Apparent Power - Maximum (low)
0319 3 Phase Power Factor - Maximum --- --- 0.01 x PF F2 N/A
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–27

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 12 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
POWER 031A Phase A Real Power - Minimum (high)
continued --- --- 0.01 x kW F4 N/A
031B Phase A Real Power - Minimum (low)
031C Phase A Reactive Power - Minimum (high) 0.01 x
--- --- F4 N/A
031D Phase A Reactive Power - Minimum (low) kvar
031E Phase A Apparent Power - Minimum (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kVA F3 N/A
031F Phase A Apparent Power - Minimum (low)
0320 Phase A Power Factor - Minimum --- --- 0.01 xPF F2 N/A
0321 Phase A Real Power - Maximum (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kW F4 N/A
0322 Phase A Real Power - Maximum (low)
0323 Phase A Reactive Power - Maximum (high) 0.01 x
--- --- F4 N/A
0324 Phase A Reactive Power - Maximum (low) kvar
0325 Phase A Apparent Power - Maximum (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kVA F3 N/A
0326 Phase A Apparent Power - Maximum (low)
0327 Phase A Power Factor - Maximum --- --- 0.01 x PF F2 N/A
0328 Phase B Real Power - Minimum (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kW F4 N/A
0329 Phase B Real Power - Minimum (low)
032A Phase B Reactive Power - Minimum (high) 0.01 x
--- --- F4 N/A
032B Phase B Reactive Power - Minimum (low) kvar
032C Phase B Apparent Power - Minimum (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kVA F3 N/A
032D Phase B Apparent Power - Minimum (low)
032E Phase B Power Factor - Minimum --- --- 0.01 x PF F2 N/A
032F Phase B Real Power - Maximum (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kW F4 N/A
0330 Phase B Real Power - Maximum (low)
0331 Phase B Reactive Power - Maximum (high) 0.01 x
--- --- F4 N/A
0332 Phase B Reactive Power - Maximum (low) kvar
0333 Phase B Apparent Power - Maximum (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kVA F3 N/A
0334 Phase B Apparent Power - Maximum (low)
0335 Phase B Power Factor - Maximum --- --- 0.01 x PF F2 N/A
0336 Phase C Real Power - Minimum (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kW F4 N/A
0337 Phase C Real Power - Minimum (low)
0338 Phase C Reactive Power - Minimum (high) 0.01 x
--- --- F4 N/A
0339 Phase C Reactive Power - Minimum (low) kvar
033A Phase C Apparent Power - Minimum (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kVA F3 N/A
033B Phase C Apparent Power - Minimum (low)
033C Phase C Power Factor - Minimum --- --- 0.01 x PF F2 N/A
033D Phase C Real Power - Maximum (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kW F4 N/A
033E Phase C Real Power - Maximum (low)
033F Phase C Reactive Power - Maximum (high) 0.01 x
--- --- F4 N/A
0340 Phase C Reactive Power - Maximum (low) kvar
0341 Phase C Apparent Power - Maximum (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kVA F3 N/A
0342 Phase C Apparent Power - Maximum (low)
0343 Phase C Power Factor - Maximum --- --- 0.01 x PF F2 N/A
0344 Time - Hour/Minutes of Real Power Min --- --- --- F22 N/A
0345 Time - Seconds of Real Power Min --- --- --- F23 N/A
0346 Date - Month/Day of Real Power Min --- --- --- F24 N/A
0347 Date - Year of Real Power Min --- --- --- F25 N/A
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

7–28 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 13 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
POWER 0348 Time - Hour/Minutes of Reactive Pwr Min --- --- --- F22 N/A
continued
0349 Time - Seconds of Reactive Power Min --- --- --- F23 N/A
034A Date - Month/Day of Reactive Power Min --- --- --- F24 N/A
034B Date - Year of Reactive Power Min --- --- --- F25 N/A
034C Time - Hour/Minutes of Apparent Pwr Min --- --- --- F22 N/A
034D Time - Seconds of Apparent Power Min --- --- --- F23 N/A
034E Date - Month/Day of Apparent Power Min --- --- --- F24 N/A
034F Date - Year of Apparent Power Min --- --- --- F25 N/A
0350 Time - Hour/Minutes of Power Factor Min --- --- --- F22 N/A
0351 Time - Seconds of Power Factor Min --- --- --- F23 N/A
0352 Date - Month/Day of Power Factor Min --- --- --- F24 N/A
0353 Date - Year of Power Factor Min --- --- --- F25 N/A
0354 Time - Hour/Minutes of Real Power Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
0355 Time - Seconds of Real Power Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
0356 Date - Month/Day of Real Power Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
0357 Date - Year of Real Power Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
0358 Time - Hour/Minutes of Reactive Pwr Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
0359 Time - Seconds of Reactive Power Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
035A Date - Month/Day of Reactive Pwr Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
035B Date - Year of Reactive Power Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
035C Time - Hour/Minutes of Apparent Pwr Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
035D Time - Seconds of Apparent Pwr Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
035E Date - Month/Day of Apparent Pwr Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
035F Date - Year of Apparent Power Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
0360 Time - Hour/Minutes of Power Factor Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
0361 Time - Seconds of Power Factor Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
0362 Date - Month/Day of Power Factor Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
0363 Date - Year of Power Factor Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
0364 Time - Hour/Min of Phase A Real Pwr Min --- --- --- F22 N/A
0365 Time - Seconds of Phase A Real Pwr Min --- --- --- F23 N/A
0366 Date - Month/Day of Phase A Real Pwr Min --- --- --- F24 N/A
0367 Date - Year of Phase A Real Pwr Min --- --- --- F25 N/A
0368 Time - Hour/Min of Phase A React Pwr Min --- --- --- F22 N/A
0369 Time - Seconds of Phase A React Pwr Min --- --- --- F23 N/A
036A Date - Month/Day of Phase A React Pwr --- --- --- F24 N/A
Min
036B Date - Year of Phase A Reactive Pwr Min --- --- --- F25 N/A
036C Time - Hour/Minutes of Phase A App Pwr --- --- --- F22 N/A
Min
036D Time - Seconds of Phase A App Pwr Min --- --- --- F23 N/A
036E Date - Month/Day of Phase A App Pwr Min --- --- --- F24 N/A
036F Date - Year of Phase A Apparent Pwr Min --- --- --- F25 N/A
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–29

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 14 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
POWER 0370 Time - Hour/Minutes of Phase A PF Min --- --- --- F22 N/A
continued
0371 Time - Seconds of Phase A PF Min --- --- --- F23 N/A
0372 Date - Month/Day of Phase A PF Min --- --- --- F24 N/A
0373 Date - Year of Phase A Power Factor Min --- --- --- F25 N/A
0374 Time - Hour/Min of Phase A Real Pwr Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
0375 Time - Seconds of Phase A Real Pwr Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
0376 Date - Month/Day of Phase A Real Pwr Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
0377 Date - Year of Phase A Real Power Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
0378 Time - Hour/Min of Phase A React Pwr Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
0379 Time - Seconds of Phase A React Pwr Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
037A Date - Mnth/Day of Phase A React Pwr Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
037B Date - Year of Phase A Reactive Pwr Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
037C Time - Hour/Min of Phase A App Pwr Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
037D Time - Seconds of Phase A App Pwr Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
037E Date - Month/Day of Phase A App Pwr Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
037F Date - Year of Phase A Apparent Pwr Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
0380 Time - Hour/Minutes of Phase A PF Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
0381 Time - Seconds of Phase A PF Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
0382 Date - Month/Day of Phase A PF Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
0383 Date - Year of Phase A Power Factor Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
0384 Time - Hour/Min of Phase B Real Pwr Min --- --- --- F22 N/A
0385 Time - Seconds of Phase B Real Pwr Min --- --- --- F23 N/A
0386 Date - Month/Day of Phase B Real Pwr Min --- --- --- F24 N/A
0387 Date - Year of Phase B Real Power Min --- --- --- F25 N/A
0388 Time - Hour/Min of Phase B React Pwr Min --- --- --- F22 N/A
0389 Time - Seconds of Phase B React Pwr Min --- --- --- F23 N/A
038A Date - Month/Day of Phase B React Pwr --- --- --- F24 N/A
Min
038B Date - Year of Phase B Reactive Pwr Min --- --- --- F25 N/A
038C Time - Hour/Min of Phase B App Pwr Min --- --- --- F22 N/A
038D Time - Seconds of Phase B App Pwr Min --- --- --- F23 N/A
038E Date - Month/Day of Phase B App Pwr Min --- --- --- F24 N/A
038F Date - Year of Phase B Apparent Pwr Min --- --- --- F25 N/A
0390 Time - Hour/Minutes of Phase B PF Min --- --- --- F22 N/A
0391 Time - Seconds of Phase B PF Min --- --- --- F23 N/A
0392 Date - Month/Day of Phase B PF Min --- --- --- F24 N/A
0393 Date - Year of Phase B PF Min --- --- --- F25 N/A
0394 Time - Hour/Min of Phase B Real Pwr Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
0395 Time - Seconds of Phase B Real Pwr Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
0396 Date - Month/Day of Phase B Real Pwr Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
0397 Date - Year of Phase B Real Power Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
0398 Time - Hour/Min of Phase B React Pwr Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

7–30 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 15 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
POWER 0399 Time - Seconds of Phase B React Pwr Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
continued
039A Date - Mnth/Day of Phase B React Pwr Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
039B Date - Year of Phase B Reactive Pwr Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
039C Time - Hour/Min of Phase B App Pwr Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
039D Time - Seconds of Phase B App Pwr Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
039E Date - Month/Day of Phase B App Pwr Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
039F Date - Year of Phase B Apparent Pwr Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
03A0 Time - Hour/Minutes of Phase B PF Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
03A1 Time - Seconds of Phase B PF Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
03A2 Date - Month/Day of Phase B PF Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
03A3 Date - Year of Phase B Power Factor Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
03A4 Time - Hour/Min of Phase C Real Pwr Min --- --- --- F22 N/A
03A5 Time - Seconds of Phase C Real Pwr Min --- --- --- F23 N/A
03A6 Date - Month/Day of Phase C Real Pwr Min --- --- --- F24 N/A
03A7 Date - Year of Phase C Real Power Min --- --- --- F25 N/A
03A8 Time - Hour/Min of Phase C React Pwr Min --- --- --- F22 N/A
03A9 Time - Seconds of Phase C React Pwr Min --- --- --- F23 N/A
03AA Date - Mnth/Day of Phase C React Pwr Min --- --- --- F24 N/A
03AB Date - Year of Phase C Reactive Pwr Min --- --- --- F25 N/A
03AC Time - Hour/Min of Phase C App Pwr Min --- --- --- F22 N/A
03AD Time - Seconds of Phase C App Pwr Min --- --- --- F23 N/A
03AE Date - Month/Day of Phase C App Pwr Min --- --- --- F24 N/A
03AF Date - Year of Phase C Apparent Pwr Min --- --- --- F25 N/A
03B0 Time - Hour/Minutes of Phase C PF Min --- --- --- F22 N/A
03B1 Time - Seconds of Phase C PF Min --- --- --- F23 N/A
03B2 Date - Month/Day of Phase C PF Min --- --- --- F24 N/A
03B3 Date - Year of Phase C Power Factor Min --- --- --- F25 N/A
03B4 Time - Hour/Min of Phase C Real Pwr Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
03B5 Time - Seconds of Phase C Real Pwr Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
03B6 Date - Month/Day of Phase C Real Pwr Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
03B7 Date - Year of Phase C Real Power Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
03B8 Time - Hour/Min of Phase C React Pwr Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
03B9 Time - Seconds of Phase C React Pwr Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
03BA Date - Mnth/Day of Phase C React Pwr Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
03BB Date - Year of Phase C Reactive Pwr Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
03BC Time - Hour/Min of Phase C App Pwr Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
03BD Time - Seconds of Phase C App Pwr Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
03BE Date - Month/Day of Phase C App Pwr Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
03BF Date - Year of Phase C Apparent Pwr Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
03C0 Time - Hour/Minutes of Phase C PF Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
03C1 Time - Seconds of Phase C PF Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–31

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 16 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
POWER 03C2 Date - Month/Day of Phase C PF Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
continued
03C3 Date - Year of Phase C Power Factor Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
03C4 Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
03CF Reserved
ENERGY 03D0 3 Phase Positive Real Energy Used (high)
--- --- kWh F3 N/A
03D1 3 Phase Positive Real Energy Used (low)
03D2 3 Phase Negative Real Energy Used (high)
--- --- kWh F3 N/A
03D3 3 Phase Negative Real Energy Used (low)
03D4 3 Phase Positive React. Energy Used (high)
--- --- kvarh F3 N/A
03D5 3 Phase Positive React. Energy Used (low)
03D6 3 Phase Neg. React. Energy Used (high)
--- --- kvarh F3 N/A
03D7 3 Phase Neg. React. Energy Used (low)
03D8 3 Phase Apparent Energy Used (high)
--- --- kVAh F3 N/A
03D9 3 Phase Apparent Energy Used (low)
03DA 3 Phase Energy Used in Last 24 h (high)
--- --- kWh F3 N/A
03DB 3 Phase Energy Used in Last 24 h (low)
03DC 3 Phase Energy Cost Since Reset (high)
--- --- $ x 0.01 F3 N/A
03DD 3 Phase Energy Cost Since Reset (low)
03DE 3 Phase Energy Cost Per Day (high)
--- --- $ x 0.01 F3 N/A
03DF 3 Phase Energy Cost Per Day (low)
03E0 Time - Hours/Minutes of Last Reset --- --- --- F22 N/A
03E1 Time - Seconds of Last Reset --- --- --- F23 N/A
03E2 Date - Month/Day of Last Reset --- --- --- F24 N/A
03E3 Date - Year of Last Reset --- --- --- F25 N/A
03E4 Tariff Period 1 Positive Real Energy (high)
--- --- kWh F3 N/A
03E5 Tariff Period 1 Positive Real Energy (low)
03E6 Tariff Period 1 Negative Real Energy (high)
--- --- kWh F3 N/A
03E7 Tariff Period 1 Negative Real Energy (low)
03E8 Tariff Period 2 Positive Real Energy (high)
--- --- kWh F3 N/A
03E9 Tariff Period 2 Positive Real Energy (low)
03EA Tariff Period 2 Negative Real Energy (high)
--- --- kWh F3 N/A
03EB Tariff Period 2 Negative Real Energy (low)
03EC Tariff Period 3 Positive Real Energy (high)
--- --- kWh F3 N/A
03ED Tariff Period 3 Positive Real Energy (low)
03EE Tariff Period 3 Negative Real Energy (high)
--- --- kWh F3 N/A
03EF Tariff Period 3 Negative Real Energy (low)
03F0 Tariff Period 1 Cost (high)
--- --- $ x 0.01 F3 N/A
03F1 Tariff Period 1 Cost (low)
03F2 Tariff Period 2 Cost (high)
--- --- $ x 0.01 F3 N/A
03F3 Tariff Period 2 Cost (low)

Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

7–32 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 17 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
ENERGY 03F4 Tariff Period 3 Cost (high)
continued --- --- $ x 0.01 F3 N/A
03F5 Tariff Period 3 Cost (low)
03F6 Tariff Period 1 Net Energy Used (high)
--- --- kWh F3 N/A
03F7 Tariff Period 1 Net Energy Used (low)
03F8 Tariff Period 2 Net Energy Used (high)
--- --- kWh F3 N/A
03F9 Tariff Period 2 Net Energy Used (low)
03FA Tariff Period 3 Net Energy Used (high)
--- --- kWh F3 N/A
03FB Tariff Period 3 Net Energy Used (low)
03FC Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
03FF Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–33

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 18 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
DEMAND 0400 Phase A Current Demand --- --- A F1 N/A
0401 Phase B Current Demand --- --- A F1 N/A
0402 Phase C Current Demand --- --- A F1 N/A
0403 Neutral Current Demand --- --- A F1 N/A
0404 3 Phase Real Power Demand (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kW F4 N/A
0405 3 Phase Real Power Demand (low)
0406 3 Phase React Power Demand (high) 0.01 x
--- --- F4 N/A
0407 3 Phase React Power Demand (low) kvar
0408 3 Phase Apparent Power Demand (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kVA F3 N/A
0409 3 Phase Apparent Power Demand (low)
040A Phase A Current Demand - Maximum --- --- A F1 N/A
040B Phase B Current Demand - Maximum --- --- A F1 N/A
040C Phase C Current Demand - Maximum --- --- A F1 N/A
040D Neutral Current Demand - Maximum --- --- A F1 N/A
040E 3 Phase Real Power Dmd (high) - Max
--- --- 0.01 x kW F4 N/A
040F 3 Phase Real Power Dmd (low) - Max
0410 3 Phase React Power Dmd (high) - Max 0.01 x
--- --- F4 N/A
0411 3 Phase React Power Dmd (low) - Max kvar
0412 3 Phase Apparent Power Dmd (high) - Max
--- --- 0.01 x kVA F3 N/A
0413 3 Phase Apparent Power Dmd (low) - Max
0414 Time - Hours/Min of Phase A Cur. Dmd Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
0415 Time - Seconds of Phase A Cur. Dmd Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
0416 Date - Mnth/Day of Phase A Cur. Dmd Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
0417 Date - Year of Phase A Cur. Dmd Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
0418 Time - Hours/Min of Phase B Cur. Dmd Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
0419 Time - Seconds of Phase B Cur. Dmd Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
041A Date - Mnth/Day of Phase B Cur. Dmd Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
041B Date - Year of Phase B Cur. Dmd Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
041C Time - Hours/Min of Phase C Cur. Dmd Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
041D Time - Seconds of Phase C Cur. Dmd Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
041E Date - Mnth/Day of Phase C Cur. Dmd Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
041F Date - Year of Phase C Cur. Dmd Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
0420 Time - Hours/Min of Neutral Cur. Dmd Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
0421 Time - Seconds of Neutral Cur. Dmd Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
0422 Date - Month/Day of Neutral Cur. Dmd Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
0423 Date - Year of Neutral Cur. Dmd Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
0424 Time - Hours/Min of Real Pwr Dmd Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
0425 Time - Seconds of Real Pwr Dmd Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
0426 Date - Month/Day of Real Pwr Dmd Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
0427 Date - Year of Real Pwr Dmd Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
0428 Time - Hours/Min of React Pwr Dmd Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

7–34 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 19 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
DEMAND 0429 Time - Seconds of React Pwr Dmd Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
continued 042A Date - Month/Day of React Pwr Dmd Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
042B Date - Year of React Pwr Dmd Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
042C Time - Hour/Min of App. Pwr Dmd Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
042D Time - Seconds of Apparent Pwr Dmd Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
042E Date - Month/Day of App. Pwr Dmd Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
042F Date - Year of Apparent Pwr Dmd Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
0430 Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
043F Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–35

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 20 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
FREQUENCY 0440 Frequency --- --- 0.01 x Hz F1 N/A
0441 Frequency Minimum --- --- 0.01 x Hz F1 N/A
0442 Frequency Maximum --- --- 0.01 x Hz F1 N/A
0443 Time - Hours/Min of Frequency Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
0444 Time - Seconds of Frequency Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
0445 Date - Month/Day of Frequency Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
0446 Date - Year of Frequency Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
0447 Time - Hours/Min of Frequency Min --- --- --- F22 N/A
0448 Time - Seconds of Frequency Min --- --- --- F23 N/A
0449 Date - Month/Day of Frequency Min --- --- --- F24 N/A
044A Date - Year of Frequency Min --- --- --- F25 N/A
044B Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
044F Reserved
PULSE INPUT 0450 Pulse Input 1 (high)
COUNTERS --- --- --- F3 N/A
0451 Pulse Input 1 (low)
0452 Pulse Input 2 (high)
--- --- --- F3 N/A
0453 Pulse Input 2 (low)
0454 Pulse Input 3 (high)
--- --- --- F3 N/A
0455 Pulse Input 3 (low)
0456 Pulse Input 4 (high)
--- --- --- F3 N/A
0457 Pulse Input 4 (low)
ANALOG 0458 Main/Alternate Analog Input (High)
INPUT --- --- --- F3 N/A
0459 Main/Alternate Analog Input (low)
045A Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
045F Reserved
PULSE INPUT 0460 Totalized Pulse Input (high)
COUNTERS --- --- --- F3 N/A
0461 Totalized Pulse Input (low)
0462 Pulse Count Cleared Time – Hours/Min --- --- --- F22 N/A
0463 Pulse Count Cleared Time – Seconds --- --- --- F23 N/A
0464 Pulse Count Cleared Date – Month/Day --- --- --- F24 N/A
0465 Pulse Count Cleared Date – Year --- --- --- F25 N/A
0466 Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
046F Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

7–36 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 21 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
POWER 0470 Ia Crest Factor --- --- 0.001 xCF F1 N/A
QUALITY
0471 Ib Crest Factor --- --- 0.001 xCF F1 N/A
0472 Ic Crest Factor --- --- 0.001 xCF F1 N/A
0473 Ia Transformer Harmonic Derating Factor --- --- 0.01xTHDF F1 N/A
0474 Ib Transformer Harmonic Derating Factor --- --- 0.01xTHDF F1 N/A
0475 Ic Transformer Harmonic Derating Factor --- --- 0.01xTHDF F1 N/A
0476 Reserved
0477 Reserved
HARMONIC 0478 Phase A Current THD --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
DISTORTION
0479 Phase B Current THD --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
047A Phase C Current THD --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
047B Neutral Current THD --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
047C Voltage Van THD --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
047D Voltage Vbn THD --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
047E Voltage Vcn THD --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
047F Voltage Vab THD --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
0480 Voltage Vbc THD --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
0481 Reserved --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
0482 Phase A Current THD - Maximum --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
0483 Phase B Current THD - Maximum --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
0484 Phase C Current THD - Maximum --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
0485 Neutral Current THD - Maximum --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
0486 Voltage Van THD - Maximum --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
0487 Voltage Vbn THD - Maximum --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
0488 Voltage Vcn THD - Maximum --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
0489 Voltage Vab THD - Maximum --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
048A Voltage Vbc THD - Maximum --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
048B Reserved --- --- --- --- ---
048C Time - Hour/Min of Phase A Cur. THD Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
048D Time - Seconds of Phase A Cur. THD Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
048E Date - Mnth/Day of Phase A Cur. THD Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
048F Date - Year of Phase A Cur. THD Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
0490 Time - Hour/Min of Phase B Cur. THD Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
0491 Time - Seconds of Phase B Cur. THD Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
0492 Date - Mnth/Day of Phase B Cur. THD Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
0493 Date - Year of Phase B Cur. THD Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
0494 Time - Hour/Min of Phase C Cur. THD Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
0495 Time - Seconds of Phase C Cur. THD Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
0496 Date - Mnth/Day of Phase C Cur. THD Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
0497 Date - Year of Phase C Cur. THD Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
0498 Time - Hour/Min of Neutral Cur. THD Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–37

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 22 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
HARMONIC 0499 Time - Seconds of Neutral Cur. THD Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
DISTORTION
continued 049A Date - Mnth/Day of Neutral Cur. THD Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
049B Date - Year of Neutral Cur. THD Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
049C Time - Hours/Min of Van THD Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
049D Time - Seconds of Van THD Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
049E Date - Month/Day of Van THD Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
049F Date - Year of Van THD Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
04A0 Time - Hours/Min of Vbn THD Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
04A1 Time - Seconds of Vbn THD Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
04A2 Date - Month/Day of Vbn THD Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
04A3 Date - Year of Vbn THD Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
04A4 Time - Hours/Min of Vcn THD Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
04A5 Time - Seconds of Vcn THD Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
04A6 Date - Month/Day of Vcn THD Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
04A7 Date - Year of Vcn THD Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
04A8 Time - Hours/Min of Vab THD Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
04A9 Time - Seconds of Vab THD Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
04AA Date - Month/Day of Vab THD Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
04AB Date - Year of Vab THD Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
04AC Time - Hours/Min of Vbc THD Max --- --- --- F22 N/A
04AD Time - Seconds of Vbc THD Max --- --- --- F23 N/A
04AE Date - Month/Day of Vbc THD Max --- --- --- F24 N/A
04AF Date - Year of Vbc THD Max --- --- --- F25 N/A
04B0 Reserved
04B1 Reserved
04B2 Reserved
04B3 Reserved
04B4 Average Current THD --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
04B5 Average Voltage THD --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
04B6 Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
04C7 Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

7–38 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 23 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
DEBUG DATA 04C8 ADC Reference --- --- --- F1 N/A
04C9 Power Loss Fine Time --- --- 10 ms F1 N/A
04CA Power Loss Coarse Time --- --- 0.1 min F1 N/A
04CB Current Key Press --- --- --- F6 N/A
04CC Internal Fault Error Code --- --- --- F108 N/A
04CD Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
04D7 Reserved
MESSAGE 04D8 Message Buffer characters 1 and 2 --- --- ASCII F10 N/A
BUFFER
04D9 Message Buffer characters 3 and 4 --- --- ASCII F10 N/A
04DA Message Buffer characters 5 and 6 --- --- ASCII F10 N/A
04DB Message Buffer characters 7 and 8 --- --- ASCII F10 N/A
04DC Message Buffer characters 9 and 10 --- --- ASCII F10 N/A
04DD Message Buffer characters 11 and 12 --- --- ASCII F10 N/A
04DE Message Buffer characters 13 and 14 --- --- ASCII F10 N/A
04DF Message Buffer characters 15 and 16 --- --- ASCII F10 N/A
04E0 Message Buffer characters 17 and 18 --- --- ASCII F10 N/A
04E1 Message Buffer characters 19 and 20 --- --- ASCII F10 N/A
04E2 Message Buffer characters 21 and 22 --- --- ASCII F10 N/A
04E3 Message Buffer characters 23 and 24 --- --- ASCII F10 N/A
04E4 Message Buffer characters 25 and 26 --- --- ASCII F10 N/A
04E5 Message Buffer characters 27 and 28 --- --- ASCII F10 N/A
04E6 Message Buffer characters 29 and 30 --- --- ASCII F10 N/A
04E7 Message Buffer characters 31 and 32 --- --- ASCII F10 N/A
04E8 Message Buffer characters 33 and 34 --- --- ASCII F10 N/A
04E9 Message Buffer characters 35 and 36 --- --- ASCII F10 N/A
04EA Message Buffer characters 37 and 38 --- --- ASCII F10 N/A
04EB Message Buffer characters 39 and 40 --- --- ASCII F10 N/A
04EC Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
04F7 Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–39

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 24 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
HIGH SPEED 04F8 High Speed Sampling Parameter --- --- --- F26 N/A
SAMPLES
FOR 04F9 High Speed Sampling Scale Factor (high) A or V x
--- --- F3 N/A
HARMONIC 04FA High Speed Sampling Scale Factor (low) 10000
SPECTRUM
04FB Freq. of High Speed Sampling Waveform --- --- 0.01 xHz F1 N/A
04FC Time - Hours/Minutes of Last Sampling --- --- --- F22 N/A
04FD Time - Seconds of Last Sampling --- --- --- F23 N/A
04FE Date - Month/Day of Last Sampling --- --- --- F24 N/A
04FF Date - Year of Last Sampling --- --- --- F25 N/A
0500 High Speed Sample Buffer 1 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
0501 High Speed Sample Buffer 2 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
0502 High Speed Sample Buffer 3 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
0503 High Speed Sample Buffer 4 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
05FD High Speed Sample Buffer 254 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
05FE High Speed Sample Buffer 255 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
05FF High Speed Sample Buffer 256 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
0600 Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
061F Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

7–40 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 25 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
WAVEFORM 0620 Time - Hours/Minutes of Last Capture --- --- --- F22 N/A
CAPTURE
HEADER
0621 Time - Seconds of Last Capture --- --- --- F23 N/A
0622 Date - Month/Day of Last Capture --- --- --- F24 N/A
0623 Date - Year of Last Capture --- --- --- F25 N/A
0624 Frequency of Last Capture --- --- 0.01 x Hz F1 N/A
0625 Reserved
0626 Reserved
0627 Reserved
WAVEFORM 0628 Ia Waveform Capture Scale Factor (high)
CAPTURE --- --- A x 10000 F3 N/A
0629 Ia Waveform Capture Scale Factor (low)
Ia
062A Ia Sample Buffer 1 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
062B Ia Sample Buffer 2 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
062C Ia Sample Buffer 3 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
062D Ia Sample Buffer 4 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
06A6 Ia Sample Buffer 125 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
06A7 Ia Sample Buffer 126 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
06A8 Ia Sample Buffer 127 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
06A9 Ia Sample Buffer 128 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
06AA Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
06AF Reserved
WAVEFORM 06B0 Ib Waveform Capture Scale Factor (high)
CAPTURE --- --- A x 10000 F3 N/A
06B1 Ib Waveform Capture Scale Factor (low)
Ib
06B2 Ib Sample Buffer 1 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
06B3 Ib Sample Buffer 2 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
06B4 Ib Sample Buffer 3 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
06B5 Ib Sample Buffer 4 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
072E Ib Sample Buffer 125 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–41

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 26 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
072F Ib Sample Buffer 126 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
0730 Ib Sample Buffer 127 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
0731 Ib Sample Buffer 128 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
0732 Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
0737 Reserved
WAVEFORM 0738 Ic Waveform Capture Scale Factor (high)
CAPTURE --- --- A x 10000 F3 N/A
0739 Ic Waveform Capture Scale Factor (low)
Ic
073A Ic Sample Buffer 1 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
073B Ic Sample Buffer 2 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
073C Ic Sample Buffer 3 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
073D Ic Sample Buffer 4 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
07B6 Ic Sample Buffer 125 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
07B7 Ic Sample Buffer 126 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
07B8 Ic Sample Buffer 127 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
07B9 Ic Sample Buffer 128 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
07BA Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
07BF Reserved
WAVEFORM 07C0 In Waveform Capture Scale Factor (high)
CAPTURE 07C1 --- --- A x 10000 F3 N/A
In Waveform Capture Scale Factor (low)
In
07C2 In Sample Buffer 1 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
07C3 In Sample Buffer 2 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
07C4 In Sample Buffer 3 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
07C5 In Sample Buffer 4 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
083E In Sample Buffer 125 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
083F In Sample Buffer 126 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

7–42 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 27 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
0840 In Sample Buffer 127 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
0841 In Sample Buffer 128 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
0842 Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
0847 Reserved
WAVEFORM 0848 Van Waveform Capture Scale Factor (high)
CAPTURE --- --- V x 10000 F3 N/A
0849 Van Waveform Capture Scale Factor (low)
Van
084A Van Sample Buffer 1 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
084B Van Sample Buffer 2 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
084C Van Sample Buffer 3 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
084D Van Sample Buffer 4 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
08C6 Van Sample Buffer 125 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
08C7 Van Sample Buffer 126 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
08C8 Van Sample Buffer 127 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
08C9 Van Sample Buffer 128 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
08CA Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
08CF Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–43

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 28 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
WAVEFORM 08D0 Vbn Waveform Capture Scale Factor (high)
CAPTURE --- --- V x 10000 F3 N/A
08D1 Vbn Waveform Capture Scale Factor (low)
Vbn
08D2 Vbn Sample Buffer 1 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
08D3 Vbn Sample Buffer 2 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
08D4 Vbn Sample Buffer 3 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
08D5 Vbn Sample Buffer 4 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
094E Vbn Sample Buffer 125 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
094F Vbn Sample Buffer 126 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
0950 Vbn Sample Buffer 127 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
0951 Vbn Sample Buffer 128 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
0952 Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
0957 Reserved
WAVEFORM 0958 Vcn Waveform Capture Scale Factor (high)
CAPTURE --- --- V x 10000 F3 N/A
0959 Vcn Waveform Capture Scale Factor (low)
Vcn
095A Vcn Sample Buffer 1 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
095B Vcn Sample Buffer 2 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
095C Vcn Sample Buffer 3 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
095D Vcn Sample Buffer 4 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
09D6 Vcn Sample Buffer 125 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
09D7 Vcn Sample Buffer 126 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
09D8 Vcn Sample Buffer 127 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
09D9 Vcn Sample Buffer 128 --- --- ADC F2 N/A
counts
09DA Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
09FF Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

7–44 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 29 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
DATA 0A00 Data Log Memory Access Block Number --- --- --- F1 0
LOGGER
DATA 0A01 Data Log Register 1 --- --- --- F1 ---
0A02 Data Log Register 2 --- --- --- F1 ---
0A03 Data Log Register 3 --- --- --- F1 ---
0A04 Data Log Register 4 --- --- --- F1 ---
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
0A3D Data Log Register 61 --- --- --- F1 ---
0A3E Data Log Register 62 --- --- --- F1 ---
0A3F Data Log Register 63 --- --- --- F1 ---
0A40 Data Log Register 64 --- --- --- F1 ---
0A41 Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
0A4F Reserved
DATA 0A50 Ia Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
LOGGER
LOG 0A51 Ib Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
NUMBERS 0A52 Ic Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A53 Iavg Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A54 In Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A55 I Unbalance Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A56 Van Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A57 Vbn Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A58 Vcn Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A59 Vpavg Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A5A Vab Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A5B Vbc Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A5C Vca Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A5D Vlavg Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A5E V Unbalance Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A5F Pa Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A60 Qa Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A61 Sa Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A62 PFa Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A63 Pb Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A64 Qb Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A65 Sb Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A66 PFb Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A67 Pc Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A68 Qc Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A69 Sc Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A6A PFc Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A6B P3 Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A6C Q3 Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–45

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 30 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
DATA 0A6D S3 Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
LOGGER 0A6E PF3 Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
LOG
0A6F Frequency Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
NUMBERS
0A70 Positive kWh Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A71 Negative kWh Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A72 Positive kvarh Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A73 Negative kvarh Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A74 kVAh Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A75 Ia Demand Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A76 Ib Demand Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A77 Ic Demand Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A78 In Demand Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A79 P3 Demand Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A7A Q3 Demand Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A7B S3 Demand Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A7C Ia THD Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A7D Ib THD Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A7E Ic THD Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A7F In THD Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A80 Van THD Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A81 Vbn THD Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A82 Vcn THD Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A83 Vab THD Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A84 Vbc THD Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A85 Analog Input Log Number --- --- --- F110 0 = not selected
0A86 Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
0A8F Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

7–46 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 31 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
DATA 0A90 Log 1 Time Interval (high)
LOGGER --- --- s F3 N/A
0A91 Log 1 Time Interval (low)
LOG 1
HEADER 0A92 Log 1 Time - Hours/Minutes --- --- --- F22 N/A
0A93 Log 1 Time - Seconds --- --- --- F23 N/A
0A94 Log 1 Date - Month/Day --- --- --- F24 N/A
0A95 Log 1 Date - Year --- --- --- F25 N/A
0A96 Log 1 Start Address --- --- --- F1 0
0A97 Log 1 Record Size --- --- bytes F1 0
0A98 Log 1 Total Records --- --- --- F1 0
0A99 Log 1 Pointer to First Item of First Record --- --- --- F1 0
0A9A Log 1 Pointer to 1st Item of Record After --- --- --- F1 0
Last
0A9B Log 1 Status --- --- --- F35 0 = STOPPED
0A9C Log 1 Records Used --- --- --- F1 0
0A9D Log 1 Time Until next Reading (high)
--- --- s F3 N/A
0A9E Log 1 Time Until next Reading (low)
0A9F Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
0AA7 Reserved
DATA 0AA8 Log 2 Time Interval (high) --- --- s F3 N/A
LOGGER
LOG 2 0AA9 Log 2 Time Interval (low) --- --- s F3 N/A
HEADER 0AAA Log 2 Time - Hours/Minutes --- --- --- F22 N/A
0AAB Log 2 Time - Seconds --- --- --- F23 N/A
0AAC Log 2 Date - Month/Day --- --- --- F24 N/A
0AAD Log 2 Date - Year --- --- --- F25 N/A
0AAE Log 2 Start Address --- --- --- F1 0
0AAF Log 2 Record Size --- --- bytes F1 0
0AB0 Log 2 Total Records --- --- --- F1 0
0AB1 Log 2 Pointer to First Item of First Record --- --- --- F1 0
0AB2 Log 2 Pointer to 1st Item of Record After --- --- --- F1 0
Last
0AB3 Log 2 Status --- --- --- F35 0 = STOPPED
0AB4 Log 2 Records Used --- --- --- F1 0
0AB5 Log 2 Time Until next Reading (high)
--- --- s F3 N/A
0AB6 Log 2 Time Until next Reading (low)
0AB7 Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
0ACF Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–47

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 32 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
EVENT 0AD0 Total Number of Events Since Last Clear --- --- --- F1 0
RECORD
0AD1 Event Record Last Cleared Time - Hrs./Min. --- --- --- F22 N/A
0AD2 Event Record Last Cleared Time - Seconds --- --- --- F23 N/A
0AD3 Event Record Last Cleared Date - Month/ --- --- --- F24 N/A
Day
0AD4 Event Record Last Cleared Date - Year --- --- --- F25 N/A
0AD5 Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
0ADF Reserved
0AE0 Record #N Event Number --- --- --- F1 N/A
0AE1 Record #N Event Cause --- --- --- F36 0 = NO EVENT
0AE2 Record #N Time - Hours/Minutes --- --- --- F22 N/A
0AE3 Record #N Time - Seconds --- --- --- F23 N/A
0AE4 Record #N Date - Month/Day --- --- --- F24 N/A
0AE5 Record #N Date - Year --- --- --- F25 N/A
0AE6 Record #N Switches and Relays States --- --- --- F111 N/A
0AE7 Record #N Ia --- --- A F1 N/A
0AE8 Record #N Ib --- --- A F1 N/A
0AE9 Record #N Ic --- --- A F1 N/A
0AEA Record #N In --- --- A F1 N/A
0AEB Record #N I Unbalance --- --- 0.1 x% F1 N/A
0AEC Record #N Van (high)
--- --- V F3 N/A
0AED Record #N Van (low)
0AEE Record #N Vbn (high)
--- --- V F3 N/A
0AEF Record #N Vbn (low)
0AF0 Record #N Vcn (high)
--- --- V F3 N/A
0AF1 Record #N Vcn (low)
0AF2 Record #N Vab (high)
--- --- V F3 N/A
0AF3 Record #N Vab (low)
0AF4 Record #N Vbc (high)
--- --- V F3 N/A
0AF5 Record #N Vbc (low)
0AF6 Record #N Vca (high)
--- --- V F3 N/A
0AF7 Record #N Vca (low)
0AF8 Record #N V Unbalance --- --- 0.1 x% F1 N/A
0AF9 Record #N Pa (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kW F4 N/A
0AFA Record #N Pa (low)
0AFB Record #N Qa (high) 0.01 x
--- --- F4 N/A
0AFC Record #N Qa (low) kvar
0AFD Record #N Sa (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kVA F3 N/A
0AFE Record #N Sa (low)

Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

7–48 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 33 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
EVENT 0AFF Record #N PFa --- --- 0.01 x PF F2 N/A
RECORD
continued 0B00 Record #N Pb (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kW F4 N/A
0B01 Record #N Pb (low)
0B02 Record #N Qb (high) 0.01 x
--- --- F4 N/A
0B03 Record #N Qb (low) kvar
0B04 Record #N Sb (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kVA F3 N/A
0B05 Record #N Sb (low)
0B06 Record #N PFb --- --- 0.01 x PF F2 N/A
0B07 Record #N Pc (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kW F4 N/A
0B08 Record #N Pc (low)
0B09 Record #N Qc (high) 0.01 x
--- --- F4 N/A
0B0A Record #N Qc (low) kvar
0B0B Record #N Sc (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kVA F3 N/A
0B0C Record #N Sc (low)
0B0D Record #N PFc --- --- 0.01 x PF F2 N/A
0B0E Record #N P3 (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kW F4 N/A
0B0F Record #N P3 (low)
0B10 Record #N Q3 (high) 0.01 x
--- --- F4 N/A
0B11 Record #N Q3 (low) kvar
0B12 Record #N S3 (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kVA F3 N/A
0B13 Record #N S3 (low)
0B14 Record #N PF3 --- --- 0.01 x PF F2 N/A
0B15 Record #N Frequency --- --- 0.01 x Hz F1 N/A
0B16 Record #N Positive kWh (high)
--- --- kWh F3 N/A
0B17 Record #N Positive kWh (low)
0B18 Record #N Negative kWh (high)
--- --- kWh F3 N/A
0B19 Record #N Negative kWh (low)
0B1A Record #N Positive kvarh (high)
--- --- kvarh F3 N/A
0B1B Record #N Positive kvarh (low)
0B1C Record #N Negative kvarh (high)
--- --- kvarh F3 N/A
0B1D Record #N Negative kvarh (low)
0B1E Record #N kVAh (high)
--- --- kVAh F3 N/A
0B1F Record #N kVAh (low)
0B20 Record #N Ia Demand --- --- A F1 N/A
0B21 Record #N Ib Demand --- --- A F1 N/A
0B22 Record #N Ic Demand --- --- A F1 N/A
0B23 Record #N In Demand --- --- A F1 N/A
0B24 Record #N P3 Demand (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kW F4 N/A
0B25 Record #N P3 Demand (low)
0B26 Record #N Q3 Demand (high) 0.01 x
--- --- F4 N/A
0B27 Record #N Q3 Demand (low) kvar
0B28 Record #N S3 Demand (high)
--- --- 0.01 x kVA F3 N/A
0B29 Record #N S3 Demand (low)

Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–49

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 34 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
EVENT 0B2A Record #N Ia THD --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
RECORD
continued 0B2B Record #N Ib THD --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
0B2C Record #N Ic THD --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
0B2D Record #N In THD --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
0B2E Record #N Van THD --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
0B2F Record #N Vbn THD --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
0B30 Record #N Vcn THD --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
0B31 Record #N Vab THD --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
0B32 Record #N Vbc THD --- --- 0.1 x % F1 N/A
0B33 Record #N Analog Input (high) --- --- --- F3 N/A
0B34 Record #N Analog Input (low) --- --- --- F3 N/A
0B35 Record #N Trace Memory Trigger Cause --- --- --- F41 N/A
0B36 Record #N Internal Fault Error Code --- --- --- F108 N/A
0B37 Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
0B7F Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

7–50 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 35 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
TRACE 0B80 Trace Memory Usage --- --- --- F37 N/A
MEMORY
0B81 Trace Memory Trigger Flag --- --- --- F113 N/A
0B82 Trace Memory Trigger Counter --- --- --- F1 N/A
0B83 Total Trace Memory Triggers --- --- --- F1 N/A
0B88 Trigger Cause - Trace 1 --- --- --- F41 N/A
0B89 Time - Hours/Minutes - Trace 1 --- --- --- F22 N/A
0B8A Time - Seconds - Trace 1 --- --- --- F23 N/A
0B8B Date - Month/Day - Trace 1 --- --- --- F24 N/A
0B8C Date - Year - Trace 1 --- --- --- F25 N/A
0B8D Trigger Sample Number 1 --- --- --- F1 N/A
0B8E Frequency 1 --- --- 0.01 x Hz F1 N/A
0B98 Trigger Cause - Trace 2 --- --- --- F41 N/A
0B99 Time - Hours/Minutes - Trace 2 --- --- --- F22 N/A
0B9A Time - Seconds - Trace 2 --- --- --- F23 N/A
0B9B Date - Month/Day - Trace 2 --- --- --- F24 N/A
0B9C Date - Year - Trace 2 --- --- --- F25 N/A
0B9D Trigger Sample Number 2 --- --- --- F1 N/A
0B9E Frequency 2 --- --- 0.01 x Hz F1 N/A
0BA8 Trigger Cause - Trace 3 --- --- --- F41 N/A
0BA9 Time - Hours/Minutes - Trace 3 --- --- --- F22 N/A
0BAA Time - Seconds - Trace 3 --- --- --- F23 N/A
0BAB Date - Month/Day - Trace 3 --- --- --- F24 N/A
0BAC Date - Year - Trace 3 --- --- --- F25 N/A
0BAD Trigger Sample Number 3 --- --- --- F1 N/A
0BAE Frequency 3 --- --- 0.01xHz F1 N/A
0BB8 Trace Memory Waveform Selection --- --- --- F40 N/A
0BB9 Waveform Scale Factor (high) A/
--- --- F3 N/A
0BBA Waveform Scale Factor (low) Vx10000
0BBB Data Buffer 1 --- --- ADCcount F2 N/A
s/2
0BBC Data Buffer 2 --- --- ADCcount F2 N/A
s/2
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
0DF9 Data Buffer 575 --- --- ADCcount F2 N/A
s/2
0DFA Data Buffer 576 --- --- ADCcount F2 N/A
s/2
0DFB Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
0DFF Reserved
0E00 Invalid Serial Number Flag --- --- --- F117 N/A
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–51

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 36 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
Setpoint Values (Holding Registers) Addresses - 1000-131F
METER ID 1000 Meter ID characters 1 and 2 --- --- ASCII F10 N/A
1001 Meter ID characters 3 and 4 --- --- ASCII F10 N/A
1002 Meter ID characters 5 and 6 --- --- ASCII F10 N/A
1003 Meter ID characters 7 and 8 --- --- ASCII F10 N/A
1004 Meter ID characters 9 and 10 --- --- ASCII F10 N/A
1005 Meter ID characters 11 and 12 --- --- ASCII F10 N/A
1006 Meter ID characters 13 and 14 --- --- ASCII F10 N/A
1007 Meter ID characters 15 and 16 --- --- ASCII F10 N/A
1008 Meter ID characters 17 and 18 --- --- ASCII F10 N/A
1009 Meter ID characters 19 and 20 --- --- ASCII F10 N/A
100A Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
100F Reserved
PREFERENCE 1010 Default Message Time 1 to 1 min x0.1 F1 10 = 1.0 min
S 1201***
1011 Default Message Brightness ****** 0 to 100 20 % F1 60%
1012 Display Filter Constant 1 to 10 1 --- F1 4
1013 Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
1017 Reserved
RS485 COM1 1018 Serial Communication Address 1 to 255 1 --- F1 1
SERIAL PORT
1019 Modbus Baud Rate for RS485 COM1 0 to 4 1 --- F12 3 = 9600
101A Parity for RS485 COM1 0 to 2 1 --- F13 0 = NONE
101B Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
101F Reserved
RS485 COM2 1020 Modbus Baud Rate for RS485 COM2 0 to 4 1 --- F12 3 = 9600
SERIAL PORT
1021 Parity for RS485 COM2 0 to 2 1 --- F13 0 = NONE
1022 Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
1027 Reserved
RS232 1028 Modbus Baud Rate for RS232 0 to 4 1 --- F12 3 = 9600
SERIAL PORT
1029 Parity for RS232 0 to 2 1 --- F13 0 = NONE
102A Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
102F Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

7–52 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 37 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
CALCU- 1030 Current Demand Calculation Type 0 to 2 1 --- F28 0 = Thermal
LATION Exponential
PARAMETERS
1031 Current Demand Time Interval 5 to 180 1 minutes F1 30 min
1032 Power Demand Calculation Type 0 to 2 1 --- F28 0 = Thermal
Exponential
1033 Power Demand Time Interval 5 to 180 1 minutes F1 30 min
1034 Energy Cost Per kWh 1 to 50000 1 ¢ x 0.01 F1 10.00 ¢
1035 Extract Fundamental 0 to 1 1 --- F11 0=DISABLE
1036 Reserved
1037 Reserved
CLEAR DATA 1038 Clear Energy Values 0 to 1 1 --- F31 0 = NO
1039 Clear Max Demand Values 0 to 1 1 --- F31 0 = NO
103A Clear Min/Max Current Values 0 to 1 1 --- F31 0 = NO
103B Clear Min/Max Voltage Values 0 to 1 1 --- F31 0 = NO
103C Clear Min/Max Power Values 0 to 1 1 --- F31 0 = NO
CLEAR DATA 103D Clear Max THD Values 0 to 1 1 --- F31 0 = NO
continued
103E Clear Pulse Input Values 0 to 1 1 --- F31 0 = NO
103F Clear Event Record 0 to 1 1 --- F31 0 = NO
1040 Clear All Demand Values 0 to 1 1 --- F31 0 = NO
1041 Clear Frequency Values 0 to 1 1 --- F31 0 = NO
1042 Reserved
1043 Reserved
DNP 1044 DNP Port 0 to 3 1 --- F47 0 = NONE
1045 DNP Slave Address 0 to 255 1 --- F1 0
1046 DNP Turnaround Time 0 to 100 10 ms F1 10 ms
TARIFF 1047 Tariff Period 1 Start Time 0 to 1439 1 minutes F1 0 min.
1048 Tariff Period 1 Cost per kWh 1 to 50000 1 ¢ × 0.01 F1 10.00 ¢
1049 Tariff Period 2 Start Time 0 to 1439 1 minutes F1 0 min.
104A Tariff Period 2 Cost per kWh 1 to 50000 1 ¢ × 0.01 F1 10.00 ¢
104B Tariff Period 3 Start Time 0 to 1439 1 minutes F1 0 min.
104C Tariff Period 3 Cost per kWh 1 to 50000 1 ¢ × 0.01 F1 10.00 ¢
104D Reserved
104E Reserved
104F Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–53

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 38 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
CURRENT 1050 Phase CT Primary 0 to 5 A F1 0 = OFF
/VOLTAGE 12000****
CONFIG.
1051 Neutral Current Sensing 0 to 2 1 --- F16 0 = OFF
1052 Neutral CT Primary 5 to 6000 5 A F1 100 A
1053 VT Wiring 0 to 6 1 --- F15 0 = OFF
1054 VT Ratio 10 to 1 0.1 xratio F1 1.0:1
35000
1055 VT Nominal Secondary Voltage 40 to 600 1 V F1 120 V
1056 Nominal Direct Input Voltage 40 to 600 1 V F1 600 V
1057 Nominal Frequency 50 to 60 10 Hz F1 60 Hz
1058 CT Wiring 0 to 3 1 --- F44 0=A,B AND C
1059 Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
105F Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

7–54 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 39 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
ANALOG 1060 Analog Output 1 Main Type 0 to 59 1 --- F14 5=Avg Ph Current
OUTPUT 1
1061 Analog Output 1 Main Min Value See Analog Output Range Table on page –92 0
1062 Analog Output 1 Main Max Value See Analog Output Range Table on page –92 0
1063 Analog Output 1 Alternate Type 0 to 59 1 --- F14 0=NOT USED
1064 Analog Output 1 Alternate Min Value See Analog Output Range Table on page –92 0
1065 Analog Output 1 Alternate Max Value See Analog Output Range Table on page –92 0
1066 Reserved
1067 Analog Output 1 Serial Value 1 --- F2 0
ANALOG 1068 Analog Output 2 Main Type 0 to 59 1 --- F14 18=3Ph Real
OUTPUT 2 Power
1069 Analog Output 2 Main Min Value See Analog Output Range Table on page –92 0
106A Analog Output 2 Main Max Value See Analog Output Range Table on page –92 0
106B Analog Output 2 Alternate Type 0 to 59 1 --- F14 0=NOT USED
106C Analog Output 2 Alternate Min Value See Analog Output Range Table on page –92 0
106D Analog Output 2 Alternate Max Value See Analog Output Range Table on page –92 0
106E Reserved
106F Analog Output 2 Serial Value 1 --- F2 0
ANALOG 1070 Analog Output 3 Main Type 0 to 59 1 --- F14 19=3Ph Reactive
OUTPUT 3 Pwr
1071 Analog Output 3 Main Min Value See Analog Output Range Table on page –92
1072 Analog Output 3 Main Max Value See Analog Output Range Table on page –92
1073 Analog Output 3 Alternate Type 0 to 59 1 --- F14 0=NOT USED
1074 Analog Output 3 Alternate Min Value See Analog Output Range Table on page –92
1075 Analog Output 3 Alternate Max Value See Analog Output Range Table on page –92
1076 Reserved
1077 Analog Output 3 Serial Value 1 --- F2 0
ANALOG 1078 Analog Output 4 Main Type 0 to 59 1 --- F14 17=3Ph Power
OUTPUT 4 Factor
1079 Analog Output 4 Main Min Value See Analog Output Range Table on page –92
107A Analog Output 4 Main Max Value See Analog Output Range Table on page –92
107B Analog Output 4 Alternate Type 0 to 59 1 --- F14 0=NOT USED
107C Analog Output 4 Alternate Min Value See Analog Output Range Table on page –92
107D Analog Output 4 Alternate Max Value See Analog Output Range Table on page –92
107E Reserved
107F Analog Output 4 Serial Value 1 --- F2 0
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–55

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 40 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
ANALOG 1080 Analog Input Main/Alt Select Relay 0 to 3 1 --- F19 0=OFF
INPUT
1081 Analog In Main Name 1st and 2nd char. --- --- ASCII F10 ““
rd th
1082 Analog In Main Name 3 and 4 char. --- --- ASCII F10 “MA”
1083 Analog In Main Name 5th and 6th char. --- --- ASCII F10 “IN”
1084 Analog In Main Name 7th and 8th char. --- --- ASCII F10 “ A”
th th
1085 Analog In Main Name 9 and 10 char. -- -- ASCII F10 “NA”
1086 Analog In Main Name 11th and 12th char. -- -- ASCII F10 “LO”
1087 Analog In Main Name 13th and 14th char. --- --- ASCII F10 “G “
1088 Analog In Main Name 15h and 16th char. ---- ---- ASCII F10 “IN”
1089 Analog In Main Name 17th and 18th char. --- --- ASCII F10 “PU”
108A Analog In Main Name 19th and 20th char. --- --- ASCII F10 “T “
108B Analog In Main Units 1st and 2nd char. --- --- ASCII F10 “ U”
108C Analog In Main Units 3rd and 4th char. --- --- ASCII F10 “ni”
108D Analog In Main Units 5th and 6th char. --- --- ASCII F10 “ts”
108E Analog In Main Units 7th and 8th char. --- --- ASCII F10 “”
th th
108F Analog In Main Units 9 and 10 char. --- --- ASCII F10 ““
1090 Analog Input Main 4 mA Value 0 to 65000 1 --- F1 0
1091 Analog Input Main 20 mA Value 0 to 65000 1 --- F1 0
1092 Analog Input Main Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
1093 Analog Input Main Level 0 to 65000 1 --- F1 0
1094 Analog Input Main Delay 5 to 6000 5 0.1 x s F1 100=10.0 s
1095 Reserved
1096 Reserved
1097 Reserved
1098 Analog In Alt Name 1st and 2nd char. --- --- ASCII F10 ““
rd th
1099 Analog In Alt Name 3 and 4 char. --- --- ASCII F10 “AL”
109A Analog In Alt Name 5th and 6th char. --- --- ASCII F10 “T ”
109B Analog In Alt Name 7th and 8th char. --- --- ASCII F10 “ A”
109C Analog In Alt Name 9th and 10th char. -- -- ASCII F10 “NA”
th th
109D Analog In Alt Name 11 and 12 char. -- -- ASCII F10 “LO”
109E Analog In Alt Name 13th and 14th char. --- --- ASCII F10 “G “
109F Analog In Alt Name 15h and 16th char. ---- ---- ASCII F10 “IN”
10A0 Analog In Alt Name 17th and 18th char. --- --- ASCII F10 “PU”
10A1 Analog In Alt Name 19th and 20th char. --- --- ASCII F10 “T “
10A2 Analog In Alt Units 1st and 2nd char. --- --- ASCII F10 “ U”
10A3 Analog In Alt Units 3rd and 4th char. --- --- ASCII F10 “ni”
10A4 Analog In Alt Units 5th and 6th char. --- --- ASCII F10 “ts”
10A5 Analog In Alt Units 7th and 8th char. --- --- ASCII F10 “”
10A6 Analog In Alt Units 9th and 10th char. --- --- ASCII F10 ““
10A7 Analog Input Alt 4 mA Value 0 to 65000 1 --- F1 0
10A8 Analog Input Alt 20 mA Value 0 to 65000 1 --- F1 0
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

7–56 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 41 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
ANALOG 10A9 Analog Input Alt Relay 0-4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
INPUT
continued 10AA Analog Input Alt Level 0 to 65000 1 --- F1 0
10AB Analog Input Alt Delay 5 to 6000 5 0.1 x s F1 100=10.0 s
10AC Reserved
10AD Reserved
10AE Reserved
10AF Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–57

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 42 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
SWITCH A 10B0 Switch A Name characters 1 and 2 --- --- ASCII F10 ““
10B1 Switch A Name characters 3 and 4 --- --- ASCII F10 “ S”
10B2 Switch A Name characters 5 and 6 --- --- ASCII F10 “WI”
10B3 Switch A Name characters 7 and 8 --- --- ASCII F10 “TC”
10B4 Switch A Name characters 9 and 10 --- --- ASCII F10 “H “
10B5 Switch A Name characters 11 and 12 --- --- ASCII F10 “IN“
10B6 Switch A Name characters 13 and 14 --- --- ASCII F10 “PU”
10B7 Switch A Name characters 15 and 16 --- --- ASCII F10 “T ”
10B8 Switch A Name characters 17 and 18 --- --- ASCII F10 “A “
10B9 Switch A Name characters 19 and 20 --- --- ASCII F10 ““
10BA Switch A Function 0 to 14 1 --- F20 0=NOT USED
10BB Switch A Activation 0 to 1 1 --- F27 1=CLOSED
10BC Switch A Time Delay 0 to 6000 1 0.1 x s F1 0.0 s
10BD Reserved
10BE Reserved
10BF Reserved
SWITCH B 10C0 Switch B Name characters 1 and 2 --- --- ASCII F10 ““
10C1 Switch B Name characters 3 and 4 --- --- ASCII F10 “ S”
10C2 Switch B Name characters 5 and 6 --- --- ASCII F10 “WI”
10C3 Switch B Name characters 7 and 8 --- --- ASCII F10 “TC”
10C4 Switch B Name characters 9 and 10 --- --- ASCII F10 “H “
10C5 Switch B Name characters 11 and 12 --- --- ASCII F10 “IN“
10C6 Switch B Name characters 13 and 14 --- --- ASCII F10 “PU”
10C7 Switch B Name characters 15 and 16 --- --- ASCII F10 “T ”
10C8 Switch B Name characters 17 and 18 --- --- ASCII F10 “B “
10C9 Switch B Name characters 19 and 20 --- --- ASCII F10 ““
10CA Switch B Function 0 to 14 1 --- F20 0=NOT USED
10CB Switch B Activation 0 to 1 1 --- F27 1=CLOSED
10CC Switch B Time Delay 0 to 6000 1 0.1 x s F1 0.0 s
10CD Reserved
10CE Reserved
10CF Reserved
SWITCH C 10D0 Switch C Name characters 1 and 2 --- --- ASCII F10 ““
10D1 Switch C Name characters 3 and 4 --- --- ASCII F10 “ S”
10D2 Switch C Name characters 5 and 6 --- --- ASCII F10 “WI”
10D3 Switch C Name characters 7 and 8 --- --- ASCII F10 “TC”
10D4 Switch C Name characters 9 and 10 --- --- ASCII F10 “H “
10D5 Switch C Name characters 11 and 12 --- --- ASCII F10 “IN“
10D6 Switch C Name characters 13 and 14 --- --- ASCII F10 “PU”
10D7 Switch C Name characters 15 and 16 --- --- ASCII F10 “T ”
10D8 Switch C Name characters 17 and 18 --- --- ASCII F10 “C “
10D9 Switch C Name characters 19 and 20 --- --- ASCII F10 ““
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

7–58 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 43 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
SWITCH C 10DA Switch C Function 0 to 14 1 --- F20 0=NOT USED
continued
10DB Switch C Activation 0 to 1 1 --- F27 1=CLOSED
10DC Switch C Time Delay 0 to 6000 1 0.1 x s F1 0.0 s
10DD Reserved
10DE Reserved
10DF Reserved
SWITCH D 10E0 Switch D Name characters 1 and 2 --- --- ASCII F10 ““
10E1 Switch D Name characters 3 and 4 --- --- ASCII F10 “ S”
10E2 Switch D Name characters 5 and 6 --- --- ASCII F10 “WI”
10E3 Switch D Name characters 7 and 8 --- --- ASCII F10 “TC”
10E4 Switch D Name characters 9 and 10 --- --- ASCII F10 “H “
10E5 Switch D Name characters 11 and 12 --- --- ASCII F10 “IN“
10E6 Switch D Name characters 13 and 14 --- --- ASCII F10 “PU”
10E7 Switch D Name characters 15 and 16 --- --- ASCII F10 “T ”
10E8 Switch D Name characters 17 and 18 --- --- ASCII F10 “D “
10E9 Switch D Name characters 19 and 20 --- --- ASCII F10 ““
10EA Switch D Function 0 to 14 1 --- F20 0=NOT USED
10EB Switch D Activation 0 to 1 1 --- F27 1=CLOSED
10EC Switch D Time Delay 0 to 6000 1 0.1 x s F1 0.0 s
10ED Reserved
10EE Reserved
10EF Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–59

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 44 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
PULSE 10F0 Positive kWh Pulse Output Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
OUTPUT
10F1 Positive kWh Pulse Output Interval 1 to 65000 1 kWh F1 100 kWh
10F2 Negative kWh Pulse Output Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
10F3 Negative kWh Pulse Output Interval 1 to 65000 1 kWh F1 100 kWh
10F4 Positive kvarh Pulse Output Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
10F5 Positive kvarh Pulse Output Interval 1 to 65000 1 kvarh F1 100 kvarh
10F6 Negative kvarh Pulse Output Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
10F7 Negative kvarh Pulse Output Interval 1 to 65000 1 kvarh F1 100 kvarh
10F8 kVAh Pulse Output Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
10F9 kVAh Pulse Output Interval 1 to 65000 1 kVAh F1 100 kVAh
10FA Pulse Output Width 100 to 10 ms F1 100 ms
2000
10FB Serial Pulse Relay Interval 100 to 100 ms F1 100 ms
10000
10FC Reserved
PULSE 10FD Pulse Input Units 1st and 2nd char. --- --- ASCII F10 “ U”
INPUT
10FE Pulse Input Units 3rd and 4th char. --- --- ASCII F10 “ni”
10FF Pulse Input Units 5th and 6th char. --- --- ASCII F10 “ts”
1100 Pulse Input Units 7th and 8th char. --- --- ASCII F10 ““
1101 Pulse Input Units 9th and 10th char. --- --- ASCII F10 ““
1102 Pulse Input 1 Value 0 to 65000 1 Units F1 1
1103 Pulse Input 2 Value 0 to 65000 1 Units F1 1
1104 Pulse Input 3 Value 0 to 65000 1 Units F1 1
1105 Pulse Input 4 Value 0 to 65000 1 Units F1 1
1106 Pulse Input Total 0 to 10 1 --- F43 9 = 1+2+3+4
1107 Reserved
ALARM 1108 Alarm Relay Operation 0 to 1 1 --- F17 0 = NON-
RELAY FAILSAFE
1109 Alarm Relay Activation 0 to 1 1 --- F18 0 = UNLATCHED
110A Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
110F Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

7–60 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 45 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
AUXILIARY 1110 Auxiliary Relay 1 Operation 0 to 1 1 --- F17 0 = NON-
RELAY 1 FAILSAFE
1111 Auxiliary Relay 1 Activation 0 to 1 1 --- F18 0 = UNLATCHED
1112 Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
1117 Reserved
AUXILIARY 1118 Auxiliary Relay 2 Operation 0 to 1 1 --- F17 0 = NON-
RELAY 2 FAILSAFE
1119 Auxiliary Relay 2 Activation 0 to 1 1 --- F18 0 = UNLATCHED
111A Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
111F Reserved
AUXILIARY 1120 Auxiliary Relay 3 Operation 0 to 1 1 --- F17 0 = NON-FAILSAFE
RELAY 3
1121 Auxiliary Relay 3 Activation 0 to 1 1 --- F18 0 = UNLATCHED
1122 Reserved
1123 Reserved
1124 Reserved
1125 Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–61

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 46 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
CURRENT/ 1126 Phase Overcurrent Activation 0 to 1 1 --- F115 0=AVERAGE
VOLTAGE
ALARMS 1127 Detect I/V Alarms Using Percentage 0 to 1 1 --- F31 0=NO
1128 Phase Undercurrent Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
1129 Phase Undercurrent Level in Amps 1 to 12000 1 A F1 100 A
112A Phase Undercurrent Delay 5 to 6000 5 0.1 x s F1 100=10.0 s
112B Phase Overcurrent Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
112C Phase Overcurrent Level in Amps 1 to 12000 1 A F1 100 A
112D Phase Overcurrent Delay 5 to 6000 5 0.1 x s F1 100=10.0 s
112E Neutral Overcurrent Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
112F Neutral Overcurrent Level in Amps 1 to 12000 1 A F1 100 A
1130 Neutral Overcurrent Delay 5 to 6000 5 0.1 x s F1 100=10.0 s
1131 Undervoltage Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
1132 Undervoltage Level in Volts 20 to 1 V F1 100 V
65000
1133 Undervoltage Delay 5 to 6000 5 0.1 x s F1 100=10.0 s
1134 Phases Req’d for Operation of U/V 0 to 2 1 --- F30 0=ANY ONE
1135 Detect U/V Below 20V 0 to 1 1 --- F11 0=DISABLE
1136 Overvoltage Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
1137 Overvoltage Level in Volts 1 to 65000 1 V F1 100 V
1138 Overvoltage Delay 5 to 6000 5 0.1 x s F1 100=10.0 s
1139 Phases Req’d for Operation of O/V 0 to 2 1 --- F30 0=ANY ONE
113A Phase Current Unbalance Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
113B Phase Current Unbalance Level 1 to 100 1 % F1 10%
113C Phase Current Unbalance Delay 5 to 6000 5 0.1 x s F1 100=10.0 s
113D Voltage Unbalance Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
113E Voltage Unbalance Level 1 to 100 1 % F1 10%
113F Voltage Unbalance Delay 5 to 6000 5 0.1 x s F1 100=10.0 s
1140 Voltage Phase Reversal Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
1141 Voltage Phase Reversal Delay 5 to 6000 5 0.1 x s F1 100=10.0 s
1142 Detect Undercurrent When 0A 0 to 1 1 --- F31 0=NO
1143 Phase Undercurrent Level in % of CT 1 to 100 1 % F1 100%
1144 Phase Overcurrent Level in % of CT 1 to 150 1 % F1 100%
1145 Neutral Overcurrent Level in % of CT 1 to 150 1 % F1 100%
1146 Undervoltage Level in % of VT 20 to 100 1 % F1 100%
1147 Overvoltage Level in % of VT 20 to 100 1 % F1 150%
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

7–62 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 47 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
TOTAL 1148 Average Current THD Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
HARMONIC
DISTORTION 1149 Average Current THD Level 5 to 1000 5 0.1 x % F1 100=10.0%
ALARMS 114A Average Current THD Delay 5 to 6000 5 0.1 x s F1 100=10.0 s
114B Average Voltage THD Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
114C Average Voltage THD Level 5 to 1000 5 0.1 x % F1 100=10.0%
114D Average Voltage THD Delay 5 to 6000 5 0.1 x s F1 100=10.0 s
114E Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
1157 Reserved
FREQUENCY 1158 Underfrequency Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
ALARMS
1059 Underfrequency Level 2000 to 1 0.01 x Hz F1 40.00 Hz
7000
115A Underfrequency Delay 1 to 100 1 0.1 x s F1 100=10.0 s
115B Zero Frequency Detect 0 to 1 1 --- F11 0=DISABLE
115C Overfrequency Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
115D Overfrequency Level 2000 to 1 0.01 x Hz F1 70.00 Hz
12500
115E Overfrequency Delay 1 to 100 1 0.1 x s F1 100=10.0 s
115F Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
1166 Reserved
POWER 1167 Power Alarms Level Base Units 0 to 1 1 --- F114 0=kW/kVAR
ALARMS
1168 Positive Real Power Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
1169 Positive Real Power Level in kW 1 to 65000 1 kW F1 1000 kW
116A Positive Real Power Delay 5 to 6000 5 0.1 x s F1 100=10.0 s
116B Negative Real Power Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
116C Negative Real Power Level in kW 1 to 65000 1 kW F1 1000 kW
116D Negative Real Power Delay 5 to 6000 5 0.1 x s F1 100=10.0 s
116E Positive Reactive Power Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
116F Positive Reactive Power Level in kVAR 1 to 65000 1 kVAR F1 1000 kVAR
1170 Positive Reactive Power Delay 5 to 6000 5 0.1 x s F1 100=10.0 s
1171 Negative Reactive Power Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
1172 Negative Reactive Power Level in kVAR 1 to 65000 1 kVAR F1 1000 kVAR
1173 Negative Reactive Power Delay 5 to 6000 5 0.1 x s F1 100=10.0 s
1174 Positive Real Power Level in MW 1 to 65000 1 0.01 MW F1 10.00MW
1175 Negative Real Power Level in MW 1 to 65000 1 0.01 MW F1 10.00MW
1176 Positive Reactive Power Level in MVAR 1 to 65000 1 0.01 MVAR F1 10.00MVAR
1177 Negative Reactive Power Level in MVAR 1 to 65000 1 0.01 MVAR F1 10.00MVAR
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–63

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 48 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
POWER 1178 Power Factor Lead 1 Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
FACTOR
ALARMS 1179 Power Factor Lead 1 Pickup Level 0 to 100 1 0.01 x PF F1 0.99
117A Power Factor Lead 1 Dropout Level 0 to 100 1 0.01 x PF F1 1.00
117B Power Factor Lead 1 Delay 5 to 6000 5 0.1 x s F1 100=10.0 s
117C Power Factor Lag 1 Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
117D Power Factor Lag 1 Pickup Level 0 to 100 1 0.01 x PF F1 0.99
117E Power Factor Lag 1 Dropout Level 0 to 100 1 0.01 x PF F1 1.00
117F Power Factor Lag 1 Delay 5 to 6000 5 0.1 x s F1 100=10.0 s
1180 Power Factor Lead 2 Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
1181 Power Factor Lead 2 Pickup Level 0 to 100 1 0.01 x PF F1 0.99
1182 Power Factor Lead 2 Dropout Level 0 to 100 1 0.01 x PF F1 1.00
1183 Power Factor Lead 2 Delay 5 to 6000 5 0.1 x s F1 100=10.0 s
1184 Power Factor Lag 2 Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
1185 Power Factor Lag 2 Pickup Level 0 to 100 1 0.01 x PF F1 0.99
1186 Power Factor Lag 2 Dropout Level 0 to 100 1 0.01 x PF F1 1.00
1187 Power Factor Lag 2 Delay 5 to 6000 5 0.1 x s F1 100=10.0 s
1188 Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
118F Reserved
DEMAND 1190 Phase A Current Demand Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
ALARMS
1191 Phase A Current Demand Level 10 to 7500 1 A F1 100 A
1192 Phase B Current Demand Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
1193 Phase B Current Demand Level 10 to 7500 1 A F1 100 A
1194 Phase C Current Demand Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
1195 Phase C Current Demand Level 10 to 7500 1 A F1 100 A
1196 Neutral Current Demand Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
1197 Neutral Current Demand Level 10 to 7500 1 A F1 100 A
1198 Positive Real Power Demand Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
1199 Positive Real Power Demand Level 1 to 65000 1 kW F1 1000 kW
119A Positive Reactive Power Demand Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
119B Positive Reactive Power Demand Level 1 to 65000 1 kvar F1 1000 kvar
119C Apparent Power Demand Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
119D Apparent Power Demand Level 1 to 65000 1 kVA F1 1000 kVA
119E Negative Real Power Demand Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
119F Negative Real Power Demand Level 1 to 65000 1 kW F1 1000 kW
11A0 Negative Reactive Power Demand Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
11A1 Negative Reactive Power Demand Level 1 to 65000 1 kvar F1 1000 kvar
11A2 Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
11A7 Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

7–64 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 49 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
PULSE 11A8 Pulse Input 1 Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
INPUT
ALARMS 11A9 Pulse Input 1 Level 1 to 65000 1 --- F1 100
11AA Pulse Input 1 Delay 5 to 6000 5 0.1 x s F1 100=10.0 s
11AB Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
11AF Reserved
MISC. 11B0 Serial COM1 Failure Alarm Delay 5 to 61*** 1 s F1 61=OFF
ALARMS
11B1 Serial COM2 Failure Alarm Delay 5 to 61*** 1 s F1 61=OFF
11B2 Clock Not Set Alarm 0 to 1 1 --- F11 1 = ENABLE
11B3 Data Log 1 Percentage Full Alarm Level 50 to 1 s F1 101=OFF
101***
11B4 Data Log 2 Percentage Full Alarm Level 50 to 1 s F1 101=OFF
101***
11B5 Reserved
11B6 Reserved
11B7 Reserved
PULSE 11B8 Pulse Input 2 Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
INPUT
ALARMS 11B9 Pulse Input 2 Level 1 to 65000 1 --- F1 100
11BA Pulse Input 2 Delay 5 to 6000 5 0.1 x s F1 100=10.0 s
11BB Pulse Input 3 Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
11BC Pulse Input 3 Level 1 to 65000 1 --- F1 100
11BD Pulse Input 3 Delay 5 to 6000 5 0.1 x s F1 100=10.0 s
11BE Pulse Input 4 Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
11BF Pulse Input 4 Level 1 to 65000 1 --- F1 100
11C0 Pulse Input 4 Delay 5 to 6000 5 0.1 x s F1 100=10.0 s
11C1 Totalized Pulse Input Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
11C2 Totalized Pulse Input Level 1 to 65000 1 --- F1 100
11C3 Totalized Pulse Input Delay 5 to 6000 5 0.1 x s F1 100=10.0 s
11C4 Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
11C7 Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–65

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 50 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
SIMULATION 11C8 Current/Voltage Simulation 0 to 1 1 --- F11 0=OFF
11C9 Current/Voltage Simulation Time 5 to 305 5 min F1***** 15 min
11CA Phase A Current 0 to 10000 1 A F1 0A
11CB Phase B Current 0 to 10000 1 A F1 0A
11CC Phase C Current 0 to 10000 1 A F1 0A
11CD Neutral Current 0 to 10000 1 A F1 0A
11CE Vax Voltage 0 to 65000 1 V F1 0V
11CF Vbx Voltage 0 to 65000 1 V F1 0V
11D0 Vcx Voltage 0 to 65000 1 V F1 0V
11D1 Phase Angle 0 to 359 1 degrees F1 0 degrees
11D2 Analog Output Simulation 0 to 1 1 --- F11 0=OFF
11D3 Analog Output Simulation Time 5 to 305 5 min F1***** 15 min
11D4 Analog Output 1 0 to 1 0.1 x % F1 1201=OFF
1201***
11D5 Analog Output 2 0 to 1 0.1 x % F1 1201=OFF
1201***
11D6 Analog Output 3 0 to 1 0.1 x % F1 1201=OFF
1201***
11D7 Analog Output 4 0 to 1 0.1 x % F1 1201=OFF
1201***
11D8 Analog Input Simulation 0 to 1 1 --- F11 0=OFF
11D9 Analog Input Simulation Time 5 to 305 5 min F1***** 15 min
11DA Analog Input 40 to 201 1 0.1 x mA F1 201=OFF
11DB Switch Input Simulation 0 to 1 1 --- F11 0=OFF
11DC Switch Input Simulation Time 5 to 305 5 min F1***** 15 min
11DD Switch Input A 0 to 1 1 --- F27 0=OPEN
11DE Switch Input B 0 to 1 1 --- F27 0=OPEN
11DF Switch Input C 0 to 1 1 --- F27 0=OPEN
11E0 Switch Input D 0 to 1 1 --- F27 0=OPEN
11E1 Reserved
11E2 Reserved
11E3 Reserved
TIME 11E4 Time Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
ALARM
11E5 Pickup Time Hours/Minutes 0 to 65535 1 hr/min F22 12:00
11E6 Pickup Time Seconds 0 to 59000 1000 ms F1 0
11E7 Dropout Time Hours/Minutes 0 to 65535 1 hr/min F22 12:00
11E8 Dropout Time Seconds 0 to 59000 1000 ms F1 0
11E9 Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
11EF Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

7–66 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 51 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
PROGRAM- 11F0 Programmable message chars 1 & 2 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “Ph”
MABLE
MESSAGE 11F1 Programmable message chars 3 & 4 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “on”
11F2 Programmable message chars 5 & 6 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “e:”
11F3 Programmable message chars 7 & 8 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “ 9"
11F4 Programmable message chars 9 & 10 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “05”
11F5 Programmable message chars 11 & 12 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “-2”
11F6 Programmable message chars 13 & 14 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “94”
11F7 Programmable message chars 15 & 16 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “-6”
11F8 Programmable message chars 17 & 18 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “22”
11F9 Programmable message chars 19 & 20 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “2 “
11FA Programmable message chars 21 & 22 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “GE”
11FB Programmable message chars 23 & 24 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “in”
11FC Programmable message chars 25 & 26 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “du”
11FD Programmable message chars 27 & 28 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “st”
11FE Programmable message chars 29 & 30 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “ri”
11FF Programmable message chars 31 & 32 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “al”
1200 Programmable message chars 33 & 34 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “.c”
1201 Programmable message chars 35 & 36 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “om”
1202 Programmable message chars 37 & 38 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “/p”
1203 Programmable message chars 39 & 40 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “m “
1204 Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
120F Reserved
FLASH 1210 Flash message characters 1 and 2 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “”
MESSAGE
1211 Flash message characters 3 and 4 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “”
1212 Flash message characters 5 and 6 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “”
1213 Flash message characters 7 and 8 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “”
1214 Flash message characters 9 and 10 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “”
1215 Flash message characters 11 and 12 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “”
1216 Flash message characters 13 and 14 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “”
1217 Flash message characters 15 and 16 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “”
1218 Flash message characters 17 and 18 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “”
1219 Flash message characters 19 and 20 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “”
121A Flash message characters 21 and 22 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “”
121B Flash message characters 23 and 24 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “”
121C Flash message characters 25 and 26 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “”
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–67

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 52 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
FLASH 121D Flash message characters 27 and 28 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “”
MESSAGE
continued 121E Flash message characters 29 and 30 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “”
121F Flash message characters 31 and 32 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “”
1220 Flash message characters 33 and 34 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “”
1221 Flash message characters 35 and 36 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “”
1222 Flash message characters 37 and 38 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “”
1223 Flash message characters 39 and 40 32 to 127 1 ASCII F10 “”
1224 Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
125F Reserved
DATA 1260 Log 1 Interval (high)
LOGGER 1 to 86400 1 s F3 3600
1261 Log 1 Interval (low)
1262 Log 2 Interval (high)
1 to 86400 1 s F3 3600
1263 Log 2 Interval (low)
1264 Log 1 Mode 0 to 1 1 --- F32 0 = RUN TO FILL
1265 Log 2 Mode 0 to 1 1 --- F32 0 = RUN TO FILL
1266 Log Size Determination 0 to 1 1 --- F33 0 = AUTOMATIC
1267 Log 1 Size 0 to 100 1 % F1 0%
1268 Data Log Memory Access Block Number 0 to 511 1 --- F1 0
1269 Stop Data Log 1 0 to 1 1 --- F31 0=NO
126A Stop Data Log 2 0 to 1 1 --- F31 0=NO
126B Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
126F Reserved
1270 Ia Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
1271 Ib Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
1272 Ic Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
1273 Iavg Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
1274 In Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
1275 I Unbalance Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
1276 Van Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
1277 Vbn Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
1278 Vcn Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
1279 Vpavg Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
127A Vab Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
127B Vbc Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
127C Vca Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
127D Vlavg Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
127E V Unbalance Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
127F Pa Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
1280 Qa Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
1281 Sa Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

7–68 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 53 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
1282 PFa Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
1283 Pb Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
1284 Qb Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
1285 Sb Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
1286 PFb Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
1287 Pc Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
1288 Qc Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
1289 Sc Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
128A PFc Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
128B P3 Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
128C Q3 Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
128D S3 Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
128E PF3 Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
128F Frequency Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
1290 Positive kWh Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
1291 Negative kWh Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
1292 Positive kvarh Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
1293 Negative kvarh Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
1294 kVAh Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
1295 Ia Demand Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
1296 Ib Demand Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
1297 Ic Demand Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
1298 In Demand Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
1299 P3 Demand Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
129A Q3 Demand Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
129B S3 Demand Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
129C Ia THD Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
129D Ib THD Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
129E Ic THD Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
129F In THD Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
12A0 Van THD Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
12A1 Vbn THD Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
12A2 Vcn THD Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
12A3 Vab THD Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
12A4 Vbc THD Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
12A5 Analog Input Log Assignment 0 to 3 1 --- F34 0 = NONE
12A6 Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
12BF Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–69

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 54 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
EVENT 12C0 Event Recorder Memory Access Event 0 to 65535 1 --- F1 0
RECORDER Number
12C1 Event Recorder Operation 0 to 1 1 --- F11 0 = DISABLE
12C2 Event Recorder Event Enable Flags 1 0 to 65535 1 --- F105 65535
12C3 Event Recorder Event Enable Flags 2 0 to 65535 1 --- F106 65535
12C4 Event Recorder Event Enable Flags 3 0 to 65535 1 --- F107 65535
12C5 Event Recorder Event Enable Flags 4 0 to 65535 1 --- F112 65535
12C6 Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
12CF Reserved
TRACE 12D0 Trace Memory Usage 0 to 2 1 --- F37 0=1x36 cycles
MEMORY
12D1 Trace Memory Trigger Mode 0 to 1 1 --- F38 0=ONE SHOT
12D2 Ia Overcurrent Trigger Level 1 to 151*** 1 % CT F1 151=OFF
12D3 Ib Overcurrent Trigger Level 1 to 151*** 1 % CT F1 151=OFF
12D4 Ic Overcurrent Trigger Level 1 to 151*** 1 % CT F1 151=OFF
12D5 In Overcurrent Trigger Level 1 to 151*** % CT F1 151=OFF
12D6 Va Overvoltage Trigger Level 20 to 1 % VT F1 151=OFF
151***
12D7 Vb Overvoltage Trigger Level 20 to 1 % VT F1 151=OFF
151***
12D8 Vc Overvoltage Trigger Level 20 to 1 % VT F1 151=OFF
151***
12D9 Va Undervoltage Trigger Level 20 to 1 % VT F1 151=OFF
151***
12DA Vb Undervoltage Trigger Level 20 to 1 % VT F1 151=OFF
151***
12DB Vc Undervoltage Trigger Level 20 to 1 % VT F1 151=OFF
151***
12DC Switch Input A Trigger 0 to 2 1 --- F39 0=OFF
12DD Switch Input B Trigger 0 to 2 1 --- F39 0=OFF
12DE Switch Input C Trigger 0 to 2 1 --- F39 0=OFF
12DF Switch Input D Trigger 0 to 2 1 --- F39 0=OFF
12E0 Trace Memory Trigger Delay 0 to 30 1 cycles F1 0 cycles
12E1 Trace Memory Waveform Selection 0 to 6 1 --- F40 0=Ia
12E2 Trace Memory Trigger Relay 0 to 4 1 --- F29 0=OFF
12E3 Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
12EF Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

7–70 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–10: PQM Memory Map (Sheet 55 of 55)

GROUP ADDR DESCRIPTION RANGE STEP UNITS and FORMAT FACTORY
(HEX) VALUE SCALE DEFAULT
PRODUCT 12F0 Product Options Upgrade 0 to 23 1 --- F116 0
OPTIONS
12F1 Product Modifications Upgrade MOD1 0 to 999 1 --- F1 0
12F2 Product Modifications Upgrade MOD2 0 to 999 1 --- F1 0
12F3 Product Modifications Upgrade MOD3 0 to 999 1 --- F1 0
12F4 Product Modifications Upgrade MOD4 0 to 999 1 --- F1 0
12F5 Product Modifications Upgrade MOD5 0 to 999 1 --- F1 0
12F6 Passcode Input 1 32 to 127 1 --- F10 32
12F7 Passcode Input 2 32 to 127 1 --- F10 32
12F8 Passcode Input 3 32 to 127 1 --- F10 32
12F9 Passcode Input 4 32 to 127 1 --- F10 32
12FA Passcode Input 5 32 to 127 1 --- F10 32
12FB Passcode Input 6 32 to 127 1 --- F10 32
12FC Passcode Input 7 32 to 127 1 --- F10 32
12FD Passcode Input 8 32 to 127 1 --- F10 32
12FE Passcode Input 9 32 to 127 1 --- F10 32
12FF Passcode Input 10 32 to 127 1 --- F10 32
1300 Reserved
to ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
131F Reserved
Notes:* Data type depends on the Command Operation Code.** Any valid Actual Values or Setpoints address.
*** Maximum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.**** Minimum Setpoint value represents “OFF”.
***** Maximum Setpoint value represents “UNLIMITED”.****** Applicable to older revisions with VFD display only

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–71

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

7.3.4 Memory Map

Data Formats
Table 7–11: Memory Map Data Formats (Sheet 1 of 20)
CODE DESCRIPTION BITMASK
F1 UNSIGNED INTEGER - NUMERICAL DATA FFFF
F2 SIGNED INTEGER - NUMERICAL DATA FFFF
F3* UNSIGNED LONG INTEGER - NUMERICAL DATA FFFFFFFF
F4* SIGNED LONG INTEGER - NUMERICAL DATA FFFFFFFF
F5 HARDWARE VERSION CODE FFFF
1=A ---
2=B ---
↓ Ø
26 = Z ---
F6 UNSIGNED INTEGER - CURRENT KEY PRESS FFFF
0000 = no key ---
FE01 = STORE ---
FE02 = SETPOINT ---
FE04 = MESSAGE RIGHT ---
FE08 = VALUE UP ---
FD01 = RESET ---
FD02 = MESSAGE LEFT ---
FD04 = MESSAGE UP ---
FD08 = VALUE DOWN ---
FB01 = ACTUAL ---
FB02 = MESSAGE DOWN ---

* Refer to section A.7 - Reading Long Integers From Memory Map - for more information.

7–72 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–11: Memory Map Data Formats (Sheet 2 of 20)

CODE DESCRIPTION BITMASK
F7 UNSIGNED INTEGER - COMMAND FFFF
1 = Reset ---
2 = Alarm Relay On ---
3 = Alarm Relay Off ---
4 = Auxiliary Relay 1 On ---
5 = Auxiliary Relay 1 Off ---
6 = Auxiliary Relay 2 On ---
7 = Auxiliary Relay 2 Off ---
8 = Auxiliary Relay 3 On ---
9 = Auxiliary Relay 3 Off ---
10 = Set Clock Time ---
11 = Set Clock Date ---
12 = Display 40 character Flash Message for 5 s ---
13 = Simulate Keypress ---
14 = Clear Energy Values ---
15 = Clear Max. Demand Values ---
16 = Clear Min./Max. Current Values ---
17 = Clear Min./Max. Voltage Values ---
18 = Clear Min./Max. Power Values ---
19 = Clear Max. THD Values ---
20 = Clear Switch Input Pulse Count ---
21 = High Speed Sampling Trigger ---
22 = Upload Mode Entry 2 ---
23 = Upload Mode Entry 1 ---
F7 24 = Factory Setpoints Reload 2 ---
con’t 25 = Factory Setpoints Reload 1 ---
26 = Test Relays and LEDs ---
27 = Waveform Capture Trigger ---
28 = Start Data Log(s) ---
29 = Stop Data Log(s) ---
30 = Resize Data Logs ---
(valid only if both logs are stopped)
31 = Clear Event Record ---
32= Trigger Trace Memory ---
33= Re-arm Trace Memory ---
34= Clear All Demand ---
35= Clear Min./Max. Frequency ---

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–73

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–11: Memory Map Data Formats (Sheet 3 of 20)

CODE DESCRIPTION BITMASK
F8 UNSIGNED INTEGER - KEYPRESS SIMULATION FFFF
49 = '1' = SETPOINT ---
50 = '2' = ACTUAL ---
51 = '3' = RESET ---
52 = '4' = STORE ---
53 = '5' = MESSAGE UP ---
54 = '6' = MESSAGE DOWN ---
55 = '7' = MESSAGE LEFT ---
56 = '8' = MESSAGE RIGHT ---
57 = '9' = VALUE UP ---
97 = 'a' = VALUE DOWN ---
F9 UNSIGNED INTEGER - RELAY/LED TEST DATA FFFF
Alarm Relay 0001
Auxiliary Relay 1 0002
Auxiliary Relay 2 0004
Auxiliary Relay 3 0008
‘ALARM’ LED 0010
‘PROGRAM’ LED 0020
‘SIMULATION’ LED 0040
‘SELF TEST’ LED 0080
‘ALARM’ Relay LED 0100
‘AUX 1’ Relay LED 0200
‘AUX 2’ Relay LED 0400
‘AUX 3’ Relay LED 0800
F10 TWO ASCII CHARACTERS FFFF
32-127 = ASCII Character 7F00
32-127 = ASCII Character 007F
F11 UNSIGNED INTEGER - ENABLE/DISABLE FFFF
0 = Disable/OFF ---
1 = Enable/ON ---
F12 UNSIGNED INTEGER - MODBUS BAUD RATE FFFF
0 = 1200 ---
1 = 2400 ---
2 = 4800 ---
3 = 9600 ---
4 = 19200 ---
F13 UNSIGNED INTEGER - PARITY TYPE FFFF
0 = None ---
1 = Even ---
2 = Odd ---

7–74 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–11: Memory Map Data Formats (Sheet 4 of 20)

CODE DESCRIPTION BITMASK
F14 UNSIGNED INTEGER - ANALOG OUTPUT TYPE FFFF
0 = Not Used ---
1 = Phase A Current ---
2 = Phase B Current ---
3 = Phase C Current ---
4 = Neutral Current ---
5 = Average Phase Current ---
6 = Current Unbalance ---
7 = Voltage Van ---
8 = Voltage Vbn ---
9 = Voltage Vcn ---
10 = Voltage Vab ---
11 = Voltage Vbc ---
12 = Voltage Vca ---
13 = Average Phase Voltage ---
14 = Average Line Voltage ---
15 = Voltage Unbalance ---
16 = Frequency ---
17 = 3 Phase Power Factor ---
18 = 3 Phase Real Power (kW) ---
19 = 3 Phase Reactive Power (kvar) ---
20 = 3 Phase Apparent Power (kVA) ---
21 = 3 Phase Real Power (MW) ---
22 = 3 Phase Reactive Power (Mvar) ---
23 = 3 Phase Apparent Power (MVA) ---
24 = Phase A Power Factor ---
25 = Phase A Real Power ---
26 = Phase A Reactive Power ---
27 = Phase A Apparent Power ---
28 = Phase B Power Factor ---
29 = Phase B Real Power ---
30 = Phase B Reactive Power ---
31 = Phase B Apparent Power ---
32 = Phase C Power Factor ---
33 = Phase C Real Power ---
34 = Phase C Reactive Power ---
35 = Phase C Apparent Power ---

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–75

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–11: Memory Map Data Formats (Sheet 5 of 20)

CODE DESCRIPTION BITMASK
F14 36 = 3 Phase Positive Real Energy Used ---
con’t 37 = 3 Phase Positive Reactive Energy Used ---
38 = 3 Phase Negative Real Energy Used ---
39 = 3 Phase Negative Reactive Energy Used ---
40 = 3 Phase Apparent Energy Used ---
41 = Phase A Current Demand ---
42 = Phase B Current Demand ---
43 = Phase C Current Demand ---
44 = Neutral Current Demand ---
45 = 3 Phase Real Power Demand ---
46 = 3 Phase Reactive Power Demand ---
47 = 3 Phase Apparent Power Demand ---
48 = Three Phase Current THD ---
49 = Three Phase Voltage THD ---
50 = Phase A Current THD ---
51 = Phase B Current THD ---
52 = Phase C Current THD ---
53 = Voltage Van THD ---
54 = Voltage Vbn THD ---
55 = Voltage Vcn THD ---
56 = Voltage Vab THD ---
57 = Voltage Vbc THD ---
58 = Neutral Current THD ---
59 = Serial Control ---
F15 UNSIGNED INTEGER - VT WIRING FFFF
0 = Off ---
1 = 4 Wire Wye / 3 VTs ---
2 = 4 Wire Wye Direct ---
3 = 4 Wire Wye / 2 VTs ---
4 = 3 Wire Delta / 2 VTs ---
5 = 3 Wire Direct ---
6 = Single Phase Direct ---
F16 UNSIGNED INTEGER FFFF
NEUTRAL CURRENT SENSING
0 = Off ---
1 = Separate CT ---
2 = Calculated ---
F17 UNSIGNED INTEGER -FAILSAFE/NON-FAILSAFE FFFF
0 =Non-fail-safe ---
1 = Fail-safe ---
F18 UNSIGNED INTEGER - UNLATCHED / LATCHED FFFF
0 = Unlatched ---
1 = Latched ---

7–76 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–11: Memory Map Data Formats (Sheet 6 of 20)

CODE DESCRIPTION BITMASK
F19 UNSIGNED INTEGER - AUX RELAY FUNCTION FFFF
0 = Off ---
1 = Aux1 Relay ---
2 = Aux2 Relay ---
3 = Aux3 Relay ---
F20 UNSIGNED INTEGER - SWITCH FUNCTION FFFF
0 = Not Used ---
1 = Alarm Relay ---
2 = Auxiliary Relay 1 ---
3 = Auxiliary Relay 2 ---
4 = Auxiliary Relay 3 ---
5 = Pulse Input 1 ---
6 = New Demand Period ---
7 = Setpoint Access ---
8 = Select Main/Alt Analog Output ---
9 = Select Main/Alt Analog Input ---
10 = Pulse Input 2 ---
11 = Pulse Input 3 ---
12 = Pulse Input 4 ---
13 = Clear Energy ---
14 = Clear Demand ---
F22 TIME HOURS/MINUTES FFFF
Hours: 0 = 12 am, 1 = 1 am,..., 23 = 11 pm FF00
Minutes: 0-59 in steps of 1 00FF
F23 UNSIGNED INTEGER - TIME SECONDS FFFF
Seconds: 0 = 0.000s,...,59999 = 59.999s ---
F24 DATE MONTH/DAY FFFF
Month: 1=January,..., 12=December FF00
Day: 1-31 in steps of 1 00FF
F25 UNSIGNED INTEGER - DATE YEAR FFFF
Year: 1995, 1996, 1997,... ---
F26 UNSIGNED INTEGER FFFF
HARMONIC SPECTRUM PARAMETER
0 = None ---
1 = Phase A Current ---
2 = Phase B Current ---
3 = Phase C Current ---
4 = Neutral Current ---
5 = Voltage Vax ---
6 = Voltage Vbx ---
7 = Voltage Vcx ---
F27 UNSIGNED INTEGER - SWITCH ACTIVATION FFFF
0 = Open ---
1 = Closed ---

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–77

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–11: Memory Map Data Formats (Sheet 7 of 20)

CODE DESCRIPTION BITMASK
F28 UNSIGNED INTEGER FFFF
DEMAND CALCULATION TYPE
0 = Thermal Exponential ---
1 = Block Interval ---
2 = Rolling Interval ---
F29 UNSIGNED INTEGER FFFF
ALARM/CONTROL RELAY SELECTION
0 = Off ---
1 = Alarm Relay ---
2 = Auxiliary Relay 1 ---
3 = Auxiliary Relay 2 ---
4 = Auxiliary Relay 3 ---
F30 UNSIGNED INTEGER FFFF
PHASES REQ’D FOR OPERATION
0 = Any One ---
1 = Any Two ---
2 = All Three ---
F31 UNSIGNED INTEGER - YES/NO FFFF
0 = No ---
1 = Yes ---
F32 UNSIGNED INTEGER - DATA LOG MODE FFFF
0 = Run to Fill ---
1 = Circulate ---
F33 UNSIGNED INTEGER FFFF
DATA LOG SIZE DETERMINATION
0 = Automatic ---
1 = From Setpoint ---
F34 UNSIGNED INTEGER - DATA LOG SELECTION FFFF
0 = None ---
1 = Log 1 ---
2 = Log 2 ---
3 = Log 1 and Log 2 ---
F35 UNSIGNED INTEGER - DATA LOG STATUS FFFF
0 = Stopped ---
1 = Running ---

7–78 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–11: Memory Map Data Formats (Sheet 8 of 20)

CODE DESCRIPTION BITMASK
F36 UNSIGNED INTEGER - CAUSE OF EVENT FFFF
0 = No Event ---
1 = Clear Event Record ---
2 = Power On ---
3 = Power Off ---
4 = Reset ---
5 = Setpoint Access Enabled ---
6 = Switch A Alarm ---
7 = Switch B Alarm ---
8 = Switch C Alarm ---
9 = Switch D Alarm ---
10 = COM1 Fail Alarm ---
11 = COM2 Fail Alarm ---
12 = Self Test Alarm ---
13 = Clock Not Set Alarm ---
14 = Parameters Not Set Alarm ---
15 = Underfrequency Alarm ---
16 = Overfrequency Alarm ---

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–79

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–11: Memory Map Data Formats (Sheet 9 of 20)

CODE DESCRIPTION BITMASK
17 = Undercurrent Alarm ---
18 = Overcurrent Alarm ---
19 = Neutral Overcurrent Alarm ---
20 = Undervoltage Alarm ---
21 = Overvoltage Alarm ---
22 = Current Unbalance Alarm ---
23 = Voltage Unbalance Alarm ---
24 = Phase Reversal Alarm ---
25 = Power Factor Lead 1 Alarm ---
26 = Power Factor Lead 2 Alarm ---
27 = Power Factor Lag 1 Alarm ---
28 = Power Factor Lag 2 Alarm ---
29 = Positive kW Alarm ---
30 = Negative kW Alarm ---
31 = Positive kvar Alarm ---
32 = Negative kvar Alarm ---
33 = Positive kW Demand Alarm ---
34 = Positive kvar Demand Alarm ---
35 = Negative kW Demand Alarm ---
36 = Negative kvar Demand Alarm ---
37 = kVA Demand Alarm ---
38 = Phase A Current Demand Alarm ---
39 = Phase B Current Demand Alarm ---
40 = Phase C Current Demand Alarm ---
41 = Neutral Current Demand Alarm ---
42 = Pulse Input 1 Alarm ---
43 = Current THD Alarm ---
44 = Voltage THD Alarm ---
45 = Analog Input Main Alarm ---
46 = Analog Input Alternate Alarm ---
47 = Data Log 1 Alarm ---
48 = Data Log 2 Alarm ---
49 = Switch A Alarm Clear ---
50 = Switch B Alarm Clear ---
51 = Switch C Alarm Clear ---
52 = Switch D Alarm Clear ---
53 = COM1 Fail Alarm Clear ---
54 = COM2 Fail Alarm Clear ---
55 = Self Test Alarm Clear ---
56 = Clock Not Set Alarm Clear ---
57 = Parameters Not Set Alarm Clear ---
58 = Underfrequency Alarm Clear ---
59 = Overfrequency Alarm Clear ---
60 = Undercurrent Alarm Clear ---
61 = Overcurrent Alarm Clear ---
62 = Neutral Overcurrent Alarm Clear ---
63 = Undervoltage Alarm Clear ---

7–80 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–11: Memory Map Data Formats (Sheet 10 of 20)

CODE DESCRIPTION BITMASK
64 = Overvoltage Alarm Clear ---
65 = Current Unbalance Alarm Clear ---
66 = Voltage Unbalance Alarm Clear ---
67 = Phase Reversal Alarm Clear ---
68 = Power Factor Lead 1 Alarm Clear ---
69 = Power Factor Lead 2 Alarm Clear ---
70 = Power Factor Lag 1 Alarm Clear ---
71 = Power Factor Lag 2 Alarm Clear ---
72 = Positive kW Alarm Clear ---
73 = Negative kW Alarm Clear ---
74 = Positive kvar Alarm Clear ---
75 = Negative kvar Alarm Clear ---
76 = Positive kW Demand Alarm Clear ---
77 = Positive kvar Demand Alarm Clear ---
78 = Negative kW Demand Alarm Clear ---
79 = Negative kvar Demand Alarm Clear ---
80 = kVA Demand Alarm Clear ---
81 = Phase A Current Demand Alarm Clear ---
82 = Phase B Current Demand Alarm Clear ---
83 = Phase C Current Demand Alarm Clear ---
84 = Neutral Current Demand Alarm Clear ---
85 = Pulse Input 1 Alarm Clear ---
86 = Current THD Alarm Clear ---
87 = Voltage THD Alarm Clear ---
88 = Analog Input Main Alarm Clear ---
89 = Analog Input Alternate Alarm Clear ---
90 = Data Log 1 Alarm Clear ---
91 = Data Log 2 Alarm Clear ---
92 = Pulse Input 2 Alarm ---
93 = Pulse Input 3 Alarm ---
94 = Pulse Input 4 Alarm ---
95 = Pulse Count Total Alarm ---
96 = Pulse Input 2 Alarm Clear ---
97 = Pulse Input 3 Alarm Clear ---
98 = Pulse Input 4 Alarm Clear ---
99 = Pulse Input Total Alarm Clear ---
100 = Time Alarm ---
101 = Time Alarm Clear ---
102 = Trace Memory Trigger ---
F37 TRACE MEMORY USAGE FFFF
0 = 1 x 36 cycles ---
1 = 2 x 18 cycles ---
2 = 3 x 12 cycles ---
F38 TRACE MEMORY TRIGGER MODE FFFF
0 = ONE SHOT ---
1 = RETRIGGER ---

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–81

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–11: Memory Map Data Formats (Sheet 11 of 20)

CODE DESCRIPTION BITMASK
F39 TRACE MEMORY SWITCH INPUT TRIGGER FFFF
0 = OFF ---
1 = OPEN-TO-CLOSED ---
2 = CLOSED-TO-OPEN ---
F40 TRACE MEMORY WAVEFORM SELECTION FFFF
0 = Ia ---
1 = Ib ---
2 = Ic ---
3 = In ---
4 = Va ---
5 = Vb ---
6 = Vc ---
F41 TRACE MEMORY TRIGGERS FFFF
0 = Trace Memory Not Triggered ---
1 = Ia Overcurrent ---
2 = Ib Overcurrent ---
3 = Ic Overcurrent ---
4 = In Overcurrent ---
5 = Va Overvoltage ---
6 = Vb Overvoltage ---
7 = Vc Overvoltage ---
8 = Va Undervoltage ---
9 = Vb Undervoltage ---
10 = Vc Undervoltage ---
11 = Switch Input A ---
12 = Switch Input B ---
13 = Switch Input C ---
14 = Switch Input D ---
15 = Serial Communication ---
F43 PULSE INPUT TOTALIZATION FFFF
0 = 1+2 ---
1 = 1+3 ---
2 = 1+4 ---
3 = 2+3 ---
4 = 2+4 ---
5 = 3+4 ---
6 = 1+2+3 ---
7 = 1+3+4 ---
8 = 2+3+4 ---
9 = 1+2+3+4 ---
10 = 1+2+4 ---
F44 PHASE CT WIRING FFFF
0 = Phase A, B and C ---
1 = Phase A and B only ---
2 = Phase A and C only ---
3 = Phase A only ---

7–82 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–11: Memory Map Data Formats (Sheet 12 of 20)

CODE DESCRIPTION BITMASK
F47 DNP PORT FFFF
0 = NONE ---
1 = RS232 ---
2 = COM1 ---
3 = COM2 ---
F100 PQM OPTIONS FFFF
No Options Installed (Chassis Mount) 0000
PQM (Display Version) 0001
T20 (4-20mA Transducer) Option 0002
T1 (0-1mA Transducer) Option 0004
C (Control) Option 0008
A (Power Analysis) Option 0010
Not Used 0020
Not Used 0040
Not Used 0080
Not Used 0100
Not Used 0200
Not Used 0400
Not Used 0800
Not Used 1000
Not Used 2000
Not Used 4000
Not Used 8000
F101 SWITCH INPUT STATUS FFFF
(0 = OPEN, 1 = CLOSED)
Not Used 0001
Not Used 0002
Not Used 0004
Not Used 0008
Not Used 0010
Not Used 0020
Not Used 0040
Not Used 0080
Switch A 0100
Switch B 0200
Switch C 0400
Switch D 0800
Not Used 1000
Not Used 2000
Not Used 4000
Not Used 8000

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–83

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–11: Memory Map Data Formats (Sheet 13 of 20)

CODE DESCRIPTION BITMASK
F102 LED STATUS FLAGS: FFFF
(0 = INACTIVE, 1 = ACTIVE)
AUX 1 Relay 0001
AUX 2 Relay 0002
AUX 3 Relay 0004
ALARM 0008
PROGRAM 0010
SIMULATION 0020
ALARM Relay 0040
SELF TEST 0080
Not Used 0100
Not Used 0200
Not Used 0400
Not Used 0800
Not Used 1000
Not Used 2000
Not Used 4000
Not Used 8000
F103 LED ATTRIBUTE FLAGS FFFF
(0 = FLASHING, 1 = SOLID; ACTIVE)
AUX 1 Relay 0001
AUX 2 Relay 0002
AUX 3 Relay 0004
ALARM 0008
PROGRAM 0010
SIMULATION 0020
ALARM Relay 0040
SELF TEST 0080
Not Used 0100
Not Used 0200
Not Used 0400
Not Used 0800
Not Used 1000
Not Used 2000
Not Used 4000
Not Used 8000

7–84 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–11: Memory Map Data Formats (Sheet 14 of 20)

CODE DESCRIPTION BITMASK
F104 OUTPUT RELAY FLAG FFFF
(0=DE-ENERGIZED,1=ENERGIZED)
Alarm Relay 0001
Auxiliary Relay 1 0002
Auxiliary Relay 2 0004
Auxiliary Relay 3 0008
Not Used 0010
Not Used 0020
Not Used 0040
Not Used 0080
Not Used 0100
Not Used 0200
F104 Not Used 0400
con’t Not Used 0800
Not Used 1000
Not Used 2000
Not Used 4000
Not Used 8000
F105 ALARM STATUS FLAGS 1: FFFF
Phase Undercurrent Alarm 0001
Phase Overcurrent Alarm 0002
Neutral Overcurrent Alarm 0004
Undervoltage Alarm 0008
Overvoltage Alarm 0010
Current Unbalance Alarm 0020
Voltage Unbalance Alarm 0040
Voltage Phase Reversal 0080
Power Factor Lead Alarm 1 0100
Power Factor Lead Alarm 2 0200
Power Factor Lag Alarm 1 0400
Power Factor Lag Alarm 2 0800
Positive Real Power Alarm 1000
Negative Real Power Alarm 2000
Positive Reactive Power Alarm 4000
Negative Reactive Power Alarm 8000

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–85

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–11: Memory Map Data Formats (Sheet 15 of 20)

CODE DESCRIPTION BITMASK
F106 ALARM STATUS FLAGS 2: FFFF
Underfrequency Alarm 0001
Overfrequency Alarm 0002
Positive Real Power Demand alarm 0004
Positive Reactive Power Demand Alarm 0008
Apparent Power Demand Alarm 0010
Phase A Current Demand Alarm 0020
Phase B Current Demand Alarm 0040
Phase C Current Demand Alarm 0080
Neutral Current Demand Alarm 0100
Switch A Alarm 0200
Switch B Alarm 0400
Switch C Alarm 0800
Switch D Alarm 1000
Internal Fault Alarm 2000
Serial COM1 Failure Alarm 4000
Serial COM2 Failure Alarm 8000
F107 ALARM STATUS FLAGS 3: FFFF
Clock Not Set Alarm 0001
Parameters Not Set Alarm 0002
Pulse Input 1 Alarm 0004
Current THD Alarm 0008
Voltage THD Alarm 0010
Analog Input Main Alarm 0020
F107 Analog Input Alt Alarm 0040
con’t Data Log 1 0080
Data Log 2 0100
Negative Real Power Demand alarm 0200
Negative Reactive Power Demand Alarm 0400
Pulse Input 2 Alarm 0800
Pulse Input 3 Alarm 1000
Pulse Input 4 Alarm 2000
Totalized Pulse Input Alarm 4000
Time Alarm 8000

7–86 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–11: Memory Map Data Formats (Sheet 16 of 20)

CODE DESCRIPTION BITMASK
F108 INTERNAL FAULT ERROR CODE FFFF
ADC Reference Out of Range 0001
HC705 Processor Not Responding 0002
Switch Input Circuit Fault 0004
HC705 MOR Byte is Not Programmed 0008
Not Used 0010
Not Used 0020
Not Used 0040
Not Used 0080
Not Used 0100
Not Used 0200
Not Used 0400
Not Used 0800
Not Used 1000
Not Used 2000
Not Used 4000
Not Used 8000
F109 GENERAL STATUS FFFF
Alarm Present 0001
Clock Not Set 0002
Clock Drifting 0004
Data Log 1 Running 0008
Data Log 2 Running 0010
Not Used 0020
Not Used 0040
Not Used 0080
Not Used 0100
Not Used 0200
Not Used 0400
Not Used 0800
Not Used 1000
Not Used 2000
Not Used 4000
Not Used 8000
F110 DATA LOGGER NUMBERS FFFF
Log 1 0001
Log 2 0002

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–87

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–11: Memory Map Data Formats (Sheet 17 of 20)

CODE DESCRIPTION BITMASK
F110 Not Used 0004
con’t Not Used 0008
Not Used 0010
Not Used 0020
Not Used 0040
Not Used 0080
Not Used 0100
Not Used 0200
Not Used 0400
Not Used 0800
Not Used 1000
Not Used 2000
Not Used 4000
Not Used 8000
F111 EVENT RECORD SWITCHES AND RELAY STATUS FFFF
Alarm Relay 0001
Auxiliary Relay 1 0002
Auxiliary Relay 2 0004
Auxiliary Relay 3 0008
Not Used 0010
Not Used 0020
Not Used 0040
Not Used 0080
Switch A 0100
Switch B 0200
Switch C 0400
Switch D 0800
Not Used 1000
Not Used 2000
Not Used 4000
Not Used 8000

7–88 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–11: Memory Map Data Formats (Sheet 18 of 20)

CODE DESCRIPTION BITMASK
F112 EVENT RECORDER EVENT ENABLE FLAGS 4 FFFF
Power On 0001
Power Off 0002
Alarm / Control Reset 0004
Setpoint Access Enable 0008
Not Used 0010
Not Used 0020
Not Used 0040
Not Used 0080
Not Used 0100
Not Used 0200
Not Used 0400
Not Used 0800
Not Used 1000
Not Used 2000
Not Used 4000
Not Used 8000
F113 TRACE MEMORY TRIGGERED FLAG STATUS FFFF
0=Trace Memory Not Triggered ---
1=Trace Memory Triggered ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–89

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7–11: Memory Map Data Formats (Sheet 19 of 20)

CODE DESCRIPTION BITMASK
F114 POWER ALARMS LEVEL BASE UNITS FFFF
0=kW/kVAR ---
1=MW/MVAR ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
F115 PHASE OVERCURRENT ACTIVATION FFFF
0=Average ---
1=Maximum ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
F115 Not Used ---
con’t Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---

7–90 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–11: Memory Map Data Formats (Sheet 20 of 20)

CODE DESCRIPTION BITMASK
F116 PRODUCT OPTIONS UPGRADE FFFF
0=PQM/ND ---
1=PQM ---
2=PQM/ND-T20 ---
3=PQM-T20 ---
4=PQM/ND-T1 ---
5=PQM-T1 ---
6=PQM/ND-C ---
7=PQM-C ---
8=PQM/ND-T20-C ---
9=PQM-T20-C ---
10=PQM/ND-T1-C ---
11=PQM-T1-C ---
12=PQM/ND-A ---
13=PQM-A ---
14=PQM/ND-T20-A ---
15=PQM-T20-A ---
16=PQM/ND-T1-A ---
17=PQM-T1-A ---
18=PQM/ND-C-A ---
19=PQM-C-A ---
20=PQM/ND-T20-C-A ---
21=PQM-T20-C-A ---
22=PQM/ND-T1-C-A ---
23=PQM-T1-C-A ---
F117 Invalid Serial Number Flag FFFF
0=Serial Number Valid ---
1= Serial Number Invalid ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---
Not Used ---

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–91

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

7.3.5 Analog Output

Parameter
Range

Table 7–12: Analog Output Parameter Range for Serial Ports (Sheet 1 of 2)
NO. ANALOG OUT PARAMETER RANGE STEP UNITS/ DEFAULT
SCALE
0 Not Used 0 0 --- 0
1 Phase A Current 0 to 150 1 % 0
2 Phase B Current 0 to 150 1 % 0
3 Phase C Current 0 to 150 1 % 0
4 Neutral Current 0 to 150 1 % 0
5 Average Phase Current 0 to 150 1 % 0
6 Current Unbalance 0 to 1000 1 0.1 x% 0
7 Voltage Van 0 to 200 1 % 0
8 Voltage Vbn 0 to 200 1 % 0
9 Voltage Vcn 0 to 200 1 % 0
10 Voltage Vab 0 to 200 1 % 0
11 Voltage Vbc 0 to 200 1 % 0
12 Voltage Vca 0 to 200 1 % 0
13 Average Phase Voltage 0 to 200 1 % 0
14 Average Line Voltage 0 to 200 1 % 0
15 Voltage Unbalance 0 to 1000 1 0.1 x% 0
16 Frequency 0 to 7500 1 0.01 xHz 0
17 *3 Phase PF –99 to +99 1 0.01 xPF 0
18 3 Phase kW –32500 to +32500 1 kW 0
19 3 Phase kvar –32500 to +32500 1 kvar 0
20 3 Phase kVA 0 to 65400 1 kVA 0
21 3 Phase MW –32500 to +32500 1 0.1 xMW 0
22 3 Phase Mvar –32500 to +32500 1 0.1 xMvar 0
23 3 Phase MVA 0 to 65400 1 0.1 xMVA 0
24 *Phase A PF –99 to +99 1 0.01 xPF 0
25 Phase A kW –32500 to +32500 1 kW 0
26 Phase A kvar –32500 to +32500 1 kvar 0
27 Phase A kVA 0 to 65400 1 kVA 0
28 *Phase B PF –99 to +99 1 0.01 xPF 0
29 Phase B kW –32500 to +32500 1 kW 0
30 Phase B kvar –32500 to +32500 1 kvar 0
31 Phase B kVA 0 to 65400 1 kVA 0
32 *Phase C PF –99 to +99 1 0.01 xPF 0
*Due to the fact that –0 and +0 both exist for power factor, the value stored in the PQM serial register is the
opposite of the value shown on the display.
Example: If the range 0.23 lead (–0.23) to 0.35 lag (+0.35) is required, –77 (–100+23)and +65 (100–35) must be
sent.

7–92 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table 7–12: Analog Output Parameter Range for Serial Ports (Sheet 2 of 2)
NO. ANALOG OUT PARAMETER RANGE STEP UNITS/ DEFAULT
SCALE
33 Phase C kW –32500 to +32500 1 kW 0
34 Phase C kvar –32500 to +32500 1 kvar 0
35 Phase C kVA 0 to 65400 1 kVA 0
36 3 Phase +kWh Used 0 to 65400 1 kWh 0
37 3 Phase +kvarh Used 0 to 65400 1 kvarh 0
38 3 Phase -kWh Used 0 to 65400 1 kWh 0
39 3 Phase -kvarh Used 0 to 65400 1 kvarh 0
40 3 Phase kVAh Used 0 to 65400 1 kVAh 0
41 Phase A Current Demand 0 to 7500 1 A 0
42 Phase B Current Demand 0 to 7500 1 A 0
43 Phase C Current Demand 0 to 7500 1 A 0
44 Neutral Current Demand 0 to 7500 1 A 0
45 3 Phase kW Demand –32500 to +32500 1 kW 0
46 3 Phase kvar Demand –32500 to +32500 1 kvar 0
47 3 Phase kVA Demand 0 to 65400 1 kVA 0
48 3 Phase Current THD 0 to 1000 1 0.1 × % 0
49 Three Phase Voltage THD 0 to 1000 1 0.1 × % 0
50 Phase A Current THD 0 to 1000 1 0.1 × % 0
51 Phase B Current THD 0 to 1000 1 0.1 × % 0
52 Phase C Current THD 0 to 1000 1 0.1 × % 0
53 Voltage Van THD 0 to 1000 1 0.1 × % 0
54 Voltage Vbn THD 0 to 1000 1 0.1 × % 0
55 Voltage Vcn THD 0 to 1000 1 0.1 × % 0
56 Voltage Vab THD 0 to 1000 1 0.1 × % 0
57 Voltage Vbc THD 0 to 1000 1 0.1 × % 0
58 Neutral Current THD 0 to 1000 1 0.1 × % 0
59 Serial Control –32500 to +32500 1 --- 0
*Due to the fact that –0 and +0 both exist for power factor, the value stored in the PQM serial register is the
opposite of the value shown on the display.
Example: If the range 0.23 lead (–0.23) to 0.35 lag (+0.35) is required, –77 (–100+23)and +65 (100–35) must be
sent.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–93

MODBUS MEMORY MAP CHAPTER 7: MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

7–94 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

 GE Consumer & Industrial
Multilin

ACTUAL STORE
PQM Power Quality Meter
Ia = 100 Ib = 102 SETPOINT RESET

Ic = 100 AMPS
MESSAGE

g PQM Power Quality Meter

STATUS COMMUNICATE RELAYS

Chapter 8: DNP Communications

ALARM TX1 ALARM
VALUE
PROGRAM RX1 AUX1

SIMULATION TX2 AUX2

SELF TEST RX2 AUX3

DNP Communications

8.1 DNP 3.0 Protocol

8.1.1 Device Profile The communications port configured as a DNP slave port must support the full set of
Document features listed in the Level 2 DNP V3.00 Implementation (DNP-L2) described in Chapter 2 of
the subset definitions.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8–1

DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL CHAPTER 8: DNP COMMUNICATIONS

8–2 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 8: DNP COMMUNICATIONS DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8–3

DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL CHAPTER 8: DNP COMMUNICATIONS

8.1.2 Implementation The table below lists all objects recognized and returned by the PQM. Additional
Table information provided on the following pages includes lists of the default variations and
defined point numbers returned for each object.

Table 8–1: DNP Implementation Table

OBJECT REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJ VAR DESCRIPTION FUNC QUAL CODES FUNC QUAL
CODES (hex) CODES CODES
(hex)
1 0 Binary Input - All Variations 1 06
1 1 Binary Input 1 00, 01, 06 129 00, 01
Binary Input With Status
1 2 1 00, 01, 06 129 00, 01
(Note 6)
Binary Input Change - All
2 0 1 06, 07, 08
Variations

2 1 Binary Input Change Without 1 06, 07, 08 129 17, 28

Time

2 2 Binary Input Change With 1 06, 07, 08 129 17, 28

Time
10 0 Binary Output - All Variations 1 06
10 2 Binary Output Status 1 00, 01, 06 129 00, 01
3, 4, 5,
12 1 Control Relay Output Block 17, 28 129 17, 28
6
Binary Counter - All 1, 7, 8,
20 0 06, 07, 08 129 00. 01
Variations 9,10
32-Bit Binary Counter 1, 7, 8,
20 5 06, 07, 08 129 00. 01
Without Flag 9, 10
16-Bit Binary Counter 1, 7, 8,
20 6 06, 07, 08 129 00. 01
Without Flag 9, 10
30 0 Analog Input - All Variations 1 06

30 1 32-Bit Analog Input With 1 00, 01, 06 129 00, 01

Flag
16-Bit Analog Input With
30 2 Flag 1 00, 01, 06 129 00, 01

32-Bit Analog Input Without

30 3 1 00, 01, 06 129 00, 01
Flag
16-Bit Analog Input Without
30 4 1 00, 01, 06 129 00, 01
Flag
Analog Input Change - All
32 0 1 06, 07, 08
Variations
32-Bit Analog Input Change
32 1 1 06, 07, 08 129 17, 28
without Time
16-Bit Analog Input Change
32 2 1 06, 07, 08 129 17, 28
without Time
32-Bit Analog Input Change
32 3 1 06, 07, 08 129 17, 28
with Time
16-Bit Analog Input Change
32 4 1 06, 07, 08 129 17, 28
with Time
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6: see the IMPLEMENATION TABLE NOTES on the following page.

8–4 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 8: DNP COMMUNICATIONS DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL

Table 8–1: DNP Implementation Table (Continued)

OBJECT REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJ VAR DESCRIPTION FUNC QUAL CODES FUNC QUAL
CODES (hex) CODES CODES
(hex)
50 1 Time and Date 1, 2 07 (Note 1) 129 07
60 1 Class 0 Data (Note 2) 1 06 129
60 2 Class 1 Data (Note 3) 1 06, 07, 08 129
60 3 Class 2 Data (Note 3) 1 06, 07, 08 129
60 4 Class 3 Data (Note 3) 1 06, 07, 08 129
80 1 Internal Indications 2 00 (Note 4) 129
No object - Cold Start 13
No object - Warm Start (Note 14
5)
No object - enable
unsolicited (parsed only) 20

No object - disable 21
unsolicited (parsed only)
No object - Delay 23
Measurement
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6: see the IMPLEMENATION TABLE NOTES on the following page.
Implementation Table Notes:
1. For this object, the quantity specified in the request must be exactly 1 as there is only
one instance of this object defined in the relay.
2. All static input data known to the relay is returned in response to a request for Class 0.
This includes all objects of type 1 (Binary Input) and type 30 (Analog Input).
3. The point tables for Binary Input and Analog Input objects contain a field which
defines which event class the corresponding static data has been assigned to.
4. For this object, the qualifier code must specify an index of 7 only.
5. Warm Restart (function code 14) is supported although it is not required by the DNP
level 2 specification.
6. Object 1 Variation 1 always indicates ON LINE for all points.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8–5

DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL CHAPTER 8: DNP COMMUNICATIONS

8.1.3 Default The following table specifies the default variation for all objects returned by the relay.
Variations These are the variations that will be returned for the object in a response when no specific
variation is specified in a request.

DEFAULT VARIATIONS
Object Description Default Variation
1 Binary Input - Single Bit 1
2 Binary Input Change With Time 2
10 Binary Output Status 2
12 Control Relay Output Block 1
20 16-Bit Binary Counter Without Flag 5
30 16-Bit Analog Input Without Flag 2
32 16-Bit Analog Input Change Without Time 2

8.1.4 Internal The following internal indication bits are supported:

Indication Bits
CHARACTER BIT DESCRIPTION
POSITION POSITION
Device Restart -- set when PQM powers up,
0 7
cleared by writing zero to object 80
Need Time -- set whenever the PQM has a
0 4 “CLOCK NOT SET” alarm, cleared by setting the
clock

0 1 Class 1 -- indicates that class 1 events are

available

0 2 Class 2 -- indicates that class 2 events are

available

0 3 Class 3 -- indicates that class 2 events are

available
Buffer Overflow -- generally indicates that the
1 3 host has not picked up the event data often
enough

8–6 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 8: DNP COMMUNICATIONS DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL

8.1.5 Binary Input /

Binary Input Table 8–2: Point List for Binary Input (Object 01) / Binary Input Change (Object 02)
Change Point INDEX DESCRIPTION EVENT CLASS NOTES
List ASSIGNED TO
0 Alarm condition(s) active Class 1
1 Clock not set Class 1 Note 1
2 Clock drifting Class 1
3 Internal error: ADC reference out of range Class 1
4 Internal error: HC705 processor not responding Class 1
5 Internal error: switch input circuit fault Class 1
6* PQM (display) option installed Class 1
7* T20 (4-20 mA transducer) option installed Class 1
8* T1 (0-1 mA transducer) option installed Class 1
9* C (control) option installed Class 1
10* A (power analysis) option installed Class 1
11 Switch A closed Class 1
12 Switch B closed Class 1
13 Switch C closed Class 1
14 Switch D closed Class 1
15 Alarm relay energized Class 1
16 Auxiliary relay 1 energized Class 1
17 Auxiliary relay 2 energized Class 1
18 Auxiliary relay 3 energized Class 1
19 Aux 1 relay LED active Class 1
20 Aux 2 relay LED active Class 1
21 Aux 3 relay LED active Class 1
22 Alarm LED active Class 1
23 Program LED active Class 1
24 Simulation LED active Class 1
25 Alarm relay LED active Class 1
26 Self test LED active Class 1
27 Reserved -----
28 Reserved -----
29 Reserved -----
30 Reserved -----
31 Reserved -----
32 Reserved -----
33 Reserved -----
34 Reserved -----
35 Alarm active: phase undercurrent Class 1
36 Alarm active: phase overcurrent Class 1
37 Alarm active: neutral overcurrent Class 1

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8–7

DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL CHAPTER 8: DNP COMMUNICATIONS

Table 8–2: Point List for Binary Input (Object 01) / Binary Input Change (Object
INDEX DESCRIPTION EVENT CLASS NOTES
ASSIGNED TO
38 Alarm active: undervoltage Class 1
39 Alarm active: overvoltage Class 1
40 Alarm active: current unbalance Class 1
41 Alarm active: voltage unbalance Class 1
42 Alarm active: voltage phase reversal Class 1
43 Alarm active: power factor lead alarm 1 Class 1
44 Alarm active: power factor lead alarm 2 Class 1
45 Alarm active: power factor lag alarm 1 Class 1
46 Alarm active: power factor lag alarm 2 Class 1
47 Alarm active: positive real power Class 1
48 Alarm active: negative real power Class 1
49 Alarm active: positive reactive power Class 1
50 Alarm active: negative reactive power Class 1
51 Alarm active: underfrequency Class 1
52 Alarm active: overfrequency Class 1
53 Alarm active: real power demand Class 1
54 Alarm active: reactive power demand Class 1
55 Alarm active: apparent power demand Class 1
56 Alarm active: phase A current demand Class 1
57 Alarm active: phase B current demand Class 1
58 Alarm active: phase C current demand Class 1
59 Alarm active: Neutral demand Class 1
60 Alarm active: switch A Class 1
61 Alarm active: switch B Class 1
62 Alarm active: switch C Class 1
63 Alarm active: switch D Class 1
64 Alarm active: internal fault Class 1
65 Alarm active: serial COM1 failure Class 1
66 Alarm active: serial COM2 failure Class 1
67 Alarm active: clock not set Class 1
68 Alarm active: parameters not set Class 1
69 Alarm active: Pulse input 1 Class 1
70 Alarm active: current THD Class 1
71 Alarm active: voltage THD Class 1
72 Alarm active: analog input main Class 1
73 Alarm active: analog input alt Class 1
74 Alarm active: data log 1 Class 1
75 Alarm active: data log 2 Class 1
76 Alarm active: Negative real demand Class 1

8–8 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 8: DNP COMMUNICATIONS DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL

Table 8–2: Point List for Binary Input (Object 01) / Binary Input Change (Object
INDEX DESCRIPTION EVENT CLASS NOTES
ASSIGNED TO
77 Alarm active: Negative reactive demand Class 1
78 Alarm active: Pulse input 2 Class 1
79 Alarm active: Pulse input 3 Class 1
80 Alarm active: Pulse input 4 Class 1
81 Alarm active: Pulse input total Class 1
82 Alarm active: Time Class 1

*Binary Input Change does not apply.

This point is also reflected in the corresponding internal indication (IIN) bit in each
response header.

8.1.6 Binary Output

/ Control Relay Table 8–3: Point List for Binary Output (Object 10)
Output Point Control Relay Output Block (Object 12)
List INDEX DESCRIPTION
* Reset
0
1 Alarm relay on
2 Alarm relay off
3 Auxiliary relay 1 on
4 Auxiliary relay 1 off
5 Auxiliary relay 2 on
6 Auxiliary relay 2 off
7 Auxiliary relay 3 on
8 Auxiliary relay 3 off
Display 40 character flash message for 5 seconds (Display
9*
message must be set up using Modbus)
10* Clear energy values
11* Clear max. demand values
12* Clear min./max current values
13* Clear min./max voltage values
14* Clear min./max power values
15* Clear max. THD values
16* Clear switch input pulse count
17* Clear event record
18* Simulate “SETPOINT” keypress
19* Simulate “ACTUAL” keypress

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8–9

DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL CHAPTER 8: DNP COMMUNICATIONS

Table 8–3: Point List for Binary Output (Object 10)

Control Relay Output Block (Object 12)
INDEX DESCRIPTION
20* Simulate “RESET” keypress
21* Simulate “STORE” keypress
22* Simulate “MESSAGE UP” keypress
23* Simulate “MESSAGE DOWN” keypress
24* Simulate “MESSAGE LEFT” keypress
25* Simulate “MESSAGE RIGHT” keypress
26* Simulate “VALUE UP” keypress
27* Simulate “VALUE DOWN” keypress
* These points are not supported in binary output

The following restrictions should be observed when using object 12 to control the points
listed in the following table.
1. The Count field is checked first. If it is zero, the command will be accepted but no
action will be taken. If this field is non-zero, the command will be executed exactly
once regardless of its value.
2. The Control Code field of object 12 is then inspected:
• A NUL Code will cause the command to be accepted without any action being
taken.
• A Code of “Pulse On” (1) is valid for all points. This is used to activate the function
(e.g., Reset) associated with the point.
• All other Codes are invalid and will be rejected.
• The Queue, Clear, and Trip/Close sub-fields are ignored.
3. The On Time and Off Time fields are ignored. A “Pulse On” Code takes effect immedi-
ately when received. Thus, the timing is irrelevant.
4. The Status field in the response will reflect the success or failure of the control
attempt thus:
• A Status of “Request Accepted” (0) will be returned if the command was accepted.
• A Status of “Request not Accepted due to Formatting Errors” (3) will be returned if
the Control Code field was incorrectly formatted or an invalid Code was present in
the command.
• A Status of “Control Operation not Supported for this Point” (4) will be returned in
response to a “Latch On” or “Latch Off” command
5. An operate of the Reset, alarm relay on/off or Aux Relay 1-3 on/off points may fail
(even if the command is accepted) due to other inputs or conditions (e.g., alarm condi-
tions) existing at the time. To verify the success or failure of an operate of these points
it is necessary that the associated Binary Input(s) be examined after the control
attempt is performed.
6. When using object 10 to read the status of a Binary Output, a read will always return
zero.

8–10 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 8: DNP COMMUNICATIONS DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL

8.1.7 Point List For In the following table, the entry in the “Format” column indicates that the format of the
Analog Input/ associated data point can be determined by looking up the entry in Table 7–11: Memory
Output Map Data Formats on page 7–72. For example, an “F1” format is described in that table as
Change a (16-bit) unsigned value without any decimal places. Therefore, the value read should be
interpreted in this manner

Table 8–4: Point List for Analog Input/Output Change (Sheet 1 of 9)

POINT MOBUS DESCRIPTION UNIT / DEADBAND FORMAT EVENT

REG VALUE CODE CLASS
ASSIGNED
TO

Phase CT Primary
0 1050 amps 1 unit F1 3
setpoint 1

Neutral CT Primary
1 1052 amps 1 unit F1 3
setpoint *

2 1054 VT Ratio setpoint 0.1 x ratio 1 unit F1 3

VT Nominal Secondary
3 1055 volts 1 unit F1 3
Voltage setpoint

VT Nominal Phase-to-
Phase Voltage
4 - (VT Ratio x Nominal Sec. 32-bit volts 1 unit F3 3
adjusted for wye or
delta)

VT Nominal Phase-to-
Neutral Voltage
5 - (VT Ratio x Nominal Sec. 32-bit volts 1 unit F3 3
adjusted for wye or
delta)

Nominal Single-Phase
6 - VA** 32-bit VA 1 unit F3 3
(VT Nominal Pri. x Phase
CT Pri.)

Nominal Three-Phase
VA
7 - 32-bit VA 1 unit F3 3
(VT Nominal Pri. x Phase
CT Pri. x 3)

1000ths of
8 0240 Phase A Current 20 units F1 1
nominal A

1000ths of
9 0241 Phase B Current 20 units F1 1
nominal

1000ths of
10 0242 Phase C Current 20 units F1 1
nominal

1000ths of
11 0243 Average Current 20 units F1 1
nominal

see footnote explanations at the end of the table

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8–11

DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL CHAPTER 8: DNP COMMUNICATIONS

Table 8–4: Point List for Analog Input/Output Change (Sheet 2 of 9)

POINT MOBUS DESCRIPTION UNIT / DEADBAND FORMAT EVENT

REG VALUE CODE CLASS
ASSIGNED
TO

1000ths of
12 0244 Neutral Current 20 units F1 1
nominal

tenths of 1
13 0245 Current Unbalance 10 units F1 2
percent

1000ths of
14 0280 Voltage Van 10 units F3 1
nominal V

1000ths of
15 0282 Voltage Vbn 10 units F3 1
nominal V

16 0284 Voltage Vcn 1000ths of 10 units F3 1

nominal V

1000ths of
17 0286 Average Phase Voltage 10 units F3 1
nominal V

1000ths of
18 0288 Voltage Vab 10 units F3 1
nominal V

19 028A Voltage Vbc 1000ths of 10 units F3 1

nominal V

1000ths of
20 028C Voltage Vca 10 units F3 1
nominal V

1000ths of
21 028E Average Line Voltage 10 units F3 1
nominal

22 0290 Voltage Unbalance 0.1 x % 10 units F1 2

1000ths of
23 02F0 3 Phase Real Power 20 units F4 2
nominal VA

1000ths of
24 02F2 3 Phase Reactive Power 20 units F4 2
nominal VA

3 Phase Apparent 1000ths of

25 02F4 20 units F3 2
Power nominal VA

26 02F6 3 Phase Power Factor % 10 units F2 2

1000ths of
27 02F7 Phase A Real Power 20 units F4 3
nominal

1000ths of
28 02F9 Phase A Reactive Power 20 units F4 3
nominal

29 02FB Phase A Apparent 1000ths of 20 units F3 3

Power nominal

30 02FD Phase A Power Factor % 10 units F2 3

see footnote explanations at the end of the table

8–12 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 8: DNP COMMUNICATIONS DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL

Table 8–4: Point List for Analog Input/Output Change (Sheet 3 of 9)

POINT MOBUS DESCRIPTION UNIT / DEADBAND FORMAT EVENT

REG VALUE CODE CLASS
ASSIGNED
TO

1000ths of
31 02FE Phase B Real Power 20 units F4 3
nominal

1000ths of
32 0300 Phase B Reactive Power 20 units F4 3
nominal

Phase B Apparent 1000ths of

33 0302 20 units F3 3
Power nominal

34 0304 Phase B Power Factor % 10 units F2 3

1000ths of
35 0305 Phase C Real Power 20 units F4 3
nominal

1000ths of
36 0307 Phase C Reactive Power 20 units F4 3
nominal

Phase C Apparent 1000ths of

37 0309 Power nominal 20 units F3 3

38 030B Phase C Power Factor % 10 units F2 3

39 0400 Phase A Current 1000ths of 20 units F1 3

Demand nominal

Phase B Current 1000ths of

40 0401 Demand nominal 20 units F1 3

41 0402 Phase C Current 1000ths of 20 units F1 3

Demand nominal

Neutral Current 1000ths of

42 0403 20 units F1 3
Demand nominal

43 0404 3 Phase Real Power 1000ths of 20 units F4 3

Demand nominal

3 Phase React Power 1000ths of

44 0406 20 units F4 3
Demand nominal

3 Phase Apparent 1000ths of

45 0408 20 units F3 3
Power Demand nominal

46 0440 Frequency 0.01x Hz .05 Hz F1 1

Main/Alternate Analog Unit varies

47 0458 10 F3 2
Input -- 32 bits

48 0470 Ia Crest Factor 0.001 x CF 50 F1 -

49 0471 Ib Crest Factor 0.001 x CF 50 F1 -

50 0472 Ic Crest Factor 0.001 x CF 50 F1 -

see footnote explanations at the end of the table

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8–13

DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL CHAPTER 8: DNP COMMUNICATIONS

Table 8–4: Point List for Analog Input/Output Change (Sheet 4 of 9)

POINT MOBUS DESCRIPTION UNIT / DEADBAND FORMAT EVENT

REG VALUE CODE CLASS
ASSIGNED
TO

Ia Transformer
0.01 x
51 0473 Harmonic Derating 1 F1 -
THDF
Factor

Ib Transformer
0.01 x
52 0474 Harmonic Derating 1 F1 -
THDF
Factor

Ic Transformer
0.01 x
53 0475 Harmonic Derating 1 F1 -
THDF
Factor

54 0478 Phase A Current THD 0.1 x % 5.0% F1 3

55 0479 Phase B Current THD 0.1 x % 5.0% F1 3

56 047A Phase C Current THD 0.1 x % 5.0% F1 3

57 047B Neutral Current THD 0.1 x % 5.0% F1 3

58 047C Voltage Van THD 0.1 x % 5.0% F1 3

59 047D Voltage Vbn THD 0.1 x % 5.0% F1 3

60 047E Voltage Vcn THD 0.1 x % 5.0% F1 3

61 047F Voltage Vab THD 0.1 x % 5.0% F1 3

62 0480 Voltage Vbc THD 0.1 x % 5.0% F1 3

63 0481 Reserved ------ ------ --- ---

64 04B4 Average Current THD 0.1 x % 5.0% F1 3

65 04B5 Average Voltage THD 0.1 x % 5.0% F1 3

Phase A Current - 1000ths of

66 0246 Minimum nominal A 1 unit F1 3

Phase B Current - 1000ths of

67 0247 1 unit F1 3
Minimum nominal A

Phase C Current - 1000ths of

68 0248 1 unit F1 3
Minimum nominal A

Neutral Current - 1000ths of

69 0249 1 unit F1 3
Minimum nominal A

Current Unbalance - tenths of 1

70 024A 1 unit F1 3
Minimum percent

Phase A Current - 1000ths of

71 024B Maximum nominal A 1 unit F1 3

see footnote explanations at the end of the table

8–14 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 8: DNP COMMUNICATIONS DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL

Table 8–4: Point List for Analog Input/Output Change (Sheet 5 of 9)

POINT MOBUS DESCRIPTION UNIT / DEADBAND FORMAT EVENT

REG VALUE CODE CLASS
ASSIGNED
TO

Phase B Current - 1000ths of

72 024C 1 unit F1 3
Maximum nominal A

Phase C Current - 1000ths of

73 024D 1 unit F1 3
Maximum nominal A

Neutral Current - 1000ths of

74 024E 1 unit F1 3
Maximum nominal A

Current Unbalance - tenths of 1

75 024F 1 unit F1 3
Maximum percent

76 0291 Voltage Van - Minimum 1000ths of 1 unit F3 3

nominal V

1000ths of
77 0293 Voltage Vbn - Minimum 1 unit F3 3
nominal V

1000ths of
78 0295 Voltage Vcn - Minimum 1 unit F3 3
nominal V

79 0297 Voltage Vab - Minimum 1000ths of 1 unit F3 3

nominal V

1000ths of
80 0299 Voltage Vbc - Minimum 1 unit F3 3
nominal V

1000ths of
81 029B Voltage Vca - Minimum 1 unit F3 3
nominal V

82 029D Voltage Unbalance - 0.1 x % 1 unit F1 3

Minimum

Voltage Van - 1000ths of

83 029E 1 unit F3 3
Maximum nominal V

Voltage Vbn - 1000ths of

84 02A0 Maximum nominal V 1 unit F3 3

1000ths of
85 02A2 Voltage Vcn - Maximum nominal V 1 unit F3 3

Voltage Vab - 1000ths of

86 02A4 1 unit F3 3
Maximum nominal V

1000ths of
87 02A6 Voltage Vbc - Maximum 1 unit F3 3
nominal V

1000ths of
88 02A8 Voltage Vca - Maximum 1 unit F3 3
nominal V

Voltage Unbalance -
89 02AA 0.1 x % 1 unit F1 3
Maximum

see footnote explanations at the end of the table

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8–15

DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL CHAPTER 8: DNP COMMUNICATIONS

Table 8–4: Point List for Analog Input/Output Change (Sheet 6 of 9)

POINT MOBUS DESCRIPTION UNIT / DEADBAND FORMAT EVENT

REG VALUE CODE CLASS
ASSIGNED
TO

3 Phase Real Power - 1000ths of

90 030C 1 unit F4 3
Minimum nominal W

1000ths of
3 Phase Reactive Power
91 030E nominal 1 unit F4 3
Minimum
kvar

3 Phase Apparent 1000ths of

92 0310 Power Minimum nominal VA 1 unit F3 3

3 Phase Power Factor -

93 0312 % 1 unit F2 3
Minimum

3 Phase Real Power - 1000ths of

94 0313 1 unit F4 3
Maximum nominal

95 0315 3 Phase Reactive Power 1000ths of 1 unit F4 3

Maximum nominal

3 Phase Apparent 1000ths of

96 0317 1 unit F3 3
Power Maximum nominal

97 0319 3 Phase Power Factor - % 1 unit F2 3

Maximum

Phase A Real Power - 1000ths of

98 031A Minimum nominal 1 unit F4 3

99 031C Phase A Reactive Power 1000ths of 1 unit F4 3

Minimum nominal

Phase A Apparent 1000ths of

100 031E 1 unit F3 3
Power Minimum nominal

101 0220 Phase A Power Factor - % 1 unit F2 3

Minimum

Phase A Real Power - 1000ths of

102 0321 1 unit F4 3
Maximum nominal

Phase A Reactive Power 1000ths of

103 0323 1 unit F4 3
Maximum nominal

Phase A Apparent 1000ths of

104 0325 1 unit F3 3
Power Maximum nominal

Phase A Power Factor

105 0327 % 1 unit F2 3
Maximum

106 0328 Phase B Real Power 1000ths of 1 unit F4 3

Minimum nominal

Phase B Reactive Power 1000ths of

107 032A 1 unit F4 3
Minimum nominal

see footnote explanations at the end of the table

8–16 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 8: DNP COMMUNICATIONS DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL

Table 8–4: Point List for Analog Input/Output Change (Sheet 7 of 9)

POINT MOBUS DESCRIPTION UNIT / DEADBAND FORMAT EVENT

REG VALUE CODE CLASS
ASSIGNED
TO

Phase B Apparent 1000ths of

108 032C 1 unit F3 3
Power Minimum nominal

Phase B Power Factor

109 032E % 1 unit F2 3
Minimum

Phase B Real Power 1000ths of

110 032F 1 unit F4 3
Maximum nominal

Phase B Reactive Power 1000ths of

111 0331 1 unit F4 3
Maximum nominal

112 0333 Phase B Apparent 1000ths of 1 unit F3 3

Power Maximum nominal

Phase B Power Factor

113 0335 % 1 unit F2 3
Maximum

Phase C Real Power 1000ths of

114 0336 1 unit F4 3
Minimum nominal

115 0338 Phase C Reactive Power 1000ths of 1 unit F4 3

Minimum nominal

Phase C Apparent 1000ths of

116 033A 1 unit F3 3
Power - Minimum nominal

Phase C Power Factor

117 033C % 1 unit F2 3
Minimum

118 033D Phase C Real Power 1000ths of 1 unit F4 3

Maximum nominal

Phase C Reactive Power 1000ths of

119 033F 1 unit F4 3
Maximum nominal

Phase C Apparent 1000ths of

120 0341 Power Maximum nominal 1 unit F3 3

Phase C Power Factor

121 0343 Maximum % 1 unit F2 3

Phase A Current 1000ths of

122 040A 1 unit F1 3
Demand Maximum nominal

Phase B Current 1000ths of

123 040B 1 unit F1 3
Demand Maximum nominal

Phase C Current 1000ths of

124 040C 1 unit F1 3
Demand Maximum nominal

Neutral Current 1000ths of

125 040D 1 unit F1 3
Demand Maximum nominal

see footnote explanations at the end of the table

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8–17

DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL CHAPTER 8: DNP COMMUNICATIONS

Table 8–4: Point List for Analog Input/Output Change (Sheet 8 of 9)

POINT MOBUS DESCRIPTION UNIT / DEADBAND FORMAT EVENT

REG VALUE CODE CLASS
ASSIGNED
TO

3 Phase Real Power 1000ths of

126 040E 1 unit F4 3
Dmd Max nominal

3 Phase React Power 1000ths of

127 0410 1 unit F4 3
Dmd Max nominal

3 Phase Apparent 1000ths of

128 0412 1 unit F3 3
Power Dmd Max nominal

129 0441 Frequency Minimum 0.01 x Hz .01 Hz F1 3

130 0442 Frequency Maximum 0.01 x Hz .01 Hz F1 3

Phase A Current THD -

131 0482 0.1 x % 1 unit F1 3
Maximum

132 0483 Phase B Current THD - 0.1 x % 1 unit F1 3

Maximum

Phase C Current THD -

133 0484 0.1 x % 1 unit F1 3
Maximum

134 0485 Neutral Current THD - 0.1 x % 1 unit F1 3

Maximum

Voltage Van THD -

135 0486 Maximum 0.1 x % 1 unit F1 3

136 0487 Voltage Vbn THD - 0.1 x % 1 unit F1 3

Maximum

Voltage Vcn THD -

137 0488 0.1 x % 1 unit F1 3
Maximum

138 0489 Voltage Vab THD - 0.1 x % 1 unit F1 3

Maximum

Voltage Vbc THD -

139 048A 0.1 x % 1 unit F1 3
Maximum

140 048B Reserved ----- ----- --- ---

141 04C8 ADC Reference - 20 units F1 2

142 04C9 Power Loss Fine Time 10 ms 1 unit F1 2

Power Loss Coarse

143 04CA 0.1 min. 1 unit F1 2
Time

144 04CB Current Key Press - 1 unit F8 2

Internal Fault Error

145 04CC - 1 unit F108 2
Code

see footnote explanations at the end of the table

8–18 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 8: DNP COMMUNICATIONS DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL

Table 8–4: Point List for Analog Input/Output Change (Sheet 9 of 9)

POINT MOBUS DESCRIPTION UNIT / DEADBAND FORMAT EVENT

REG VALUE CODE CLASS
ASSIGNED
TO

Multilin Product Device

146 0000 always 65 - F1 -
Code

147 0001 Hardware Version Code - - F5 -

Main Software Version

148 0002 - - F1 -
Code

Modification File
149 0003 - - F1 -
Number 1

Boot Software Version

150 0004 - - F1 -
Code

Supervisor Processor
151 0005 - - F1 -
Version Code

Modification File
152 0007 Number 2 - - F1 -

Modification File
153 0008 - - F1 -
Number 3

Modification File
154 0009 - - F1 -
Number 4

Modification File
155 000A - - F1 -
Number 5

Serial Number
156 0020 - - F10 -
Character 1 and 2

Serial Number
157 0021 - - F10 -
Character 3 and 4

Serial Number
158 0022 - - F10 -
Character 5 and 6

Serial Number
159 0023 - - F10 -
Character 7 and 8

Manufacture Month/
160 0030 Day - - F24 -

161 0031 Manufacture Year - - F25 -

162 0032 Calibration Month/Day - - F24 -

163 0033 Calibration Year - - F25 -

see footnote explanations at the end of the table

* This point is used to reconstruct neutral current values from the 1,000ths per-unit quantities given in
the other points. Multiply the particular point by this one, and divide by 1000 to get amps.
The VT Ratio setpoint is always reported, but is not used if a direct (i.e., without VTs) voltage wiring
scheme is configured. In this case the VT Ratio setpoint is ignored, and a ratio of 1.0:1 is used in the
PQM.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8–19

DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL CHAPTER 8: DNP COMMUNICATIONS

This point is used to reconstruct voltage values from the 1,000ths per-unit quantities given in the
other points. Multiply the particular point by this one, and divide by 1000 to get volts. Since some
SCADA systems don’t read 32 bit values, you can also multiply the VT ratio and nominal secondary
(both of which are 16 bit) in the master in cases where the nominal primary may exceed 32767 volts.
** This point is used to reconstruct power values from the 1,000ths per-unit quantities given in the other
points. Multiply the particular point by this one, and divide by 1000 to get VA, kW or kvar.
In Modbus, the current keypress is reported with format code F6. In order to fit the value into a six-
teen-bit signed value, F8 is used in DNP, with ASCII zero (49 decimal) returned when no key is
pressed.

8–20 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 8: DNP COMMUNICATIONS DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL

8.1.8 Point List for

Counters
Point list for Binary Counters (object 20)
Point Modbus Description Unit Deadband Format Event class
Num Register code point assigned
to
0 0450 Pulse Input 1 - - F3 -
1 0452 Pulse Input 2 - - F3 -
2 0454 Pulse Input 3 - - F3 -
3 0456 Pulse Input 4 - - F3 -
4 0460 Totalized Pulse Input - - F3 -
3 Phase Positive Real
5 03D0 Energy Used kWh - F3 -

3 Phase Negative Real

6 03D2 Energy Used kWh - F3 -

7 03D4 3 Phase Positive React. kvarh - F3 -

Energy Used

8 03D6 3 Phase Negative React. kvarh - F3 -

Energy Used

9 03D8 3 Phase Apparent kVAh - F3 -

Energy Used

10 03DA 3 Phase Energy Used in kWh - F3 -

Last 24 h

11 03DC 3 Phase Energy Cost cents - F3 -

Since Reset
3 Phase Energy Cost Per
12 03DE cents - F3 -
Day

Only counter points 0 to 4 can be cleared using function codes 9 and 10, and
doing so disturbs the totals presented on the display and via Modbus
NOTE communications. In general, the binary output points which clear data should
be used if it is necessary to clear any of these counters.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8–21

DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL CHAPTER 8: DNP COMMUNICATIONS

8–22 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

 GE Consumer & Industrial
Multilin

ACTUAL STORE
PQM Power Quality Meter
Ia = 100 Ib = 102 SETPOINT RESET

Ic = 100 AMPS
MESSAGE

g PQM Power Quality Meter

STATUS COMMUNICATE RELAYS

Chapter 9: Commissioning
ALARM TX1 ALARM
VALUE
PROGRAM RX1 AUX1

SIMULATION TX2 AUX2

SELF TEST RX2 AUX3

Commissioning

9.1 Commissioning
Table 9–1: PQM Setpoints (Sheet 1 of 12)

S1 PQM SETUP

PREFERENCES

DEFAULT MESSAGE TIME min.

DEFAULT MESSAGE BRIGHTNESS %

(applicable to older units with VFD
only)

DISPLAY FILTER CONSTANT

SETPOINT ACCESS

SETPOINT ACCESS

ENTER SETPOINT ACCESS CODE

SETPOINT ACCESS ON FOR min.

CHANGE ACCESS CODE

ENTER NEW ACCESS CODE

RE-ENTER NEW ACCESS CODE

ENCRYPTED ACCESS CODE

COM 1 RS485 PORT

MODBUS COMM ADDRESS

COM 1 BAUD RATE baud

COM 1 PARITY

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 9–1

COMMISSIONING CHAPTER 9: COMMISSIONING

Table 9–1: PQM Setpoints (Sheet 2 of 12)

COM 2 RS485 PORT

COM 2 BAUD RATE baud

COM 2 PARITY

FRONT PANEL RS232 PORT

RS232 BAUD RATE baud

RS232 PARITY

DNP 3.0 CONFIGURATION

DNP PORT

DNP SLAVE ADDRESS

DNP TURNAROUND TIME ms

CLOCK

SET TIME hh:mm:ss

SET TIME mm:dd:yyyy

CALCULATION PARAMETERS

EXTRACT FUNDAMENTAL

CURRENT DEMAND TYPE

CURRENT DEMAND TIME INTERVAL min.

POWER DEMAND TYPE

S1 PQM SETUP continued

POWER DEMAND TIME INTERVAL min.

ENERGY COST PER kWh cents

TARIFF PERIOD 1 START TIME min.

TARIFF PERIOD 1 COST PER kWh cents

TARIFF PERIOD 2 START TIME min.

TARIFF PERIOD 2 COST PER kWh cents

TARIFF PERIOD 3 START TIME min.

TARIFF PERIOD 3 COST PER kWh cents

EVENT RECORDER

EVENT RECORDER OPERATION

TRACE MEMORY

TRACE MEMORY USAGE cycles

TRACE MEMORY TRIGGER MODE

9–2 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 9: COMMISSIONING COMMISSIONING

Table 9–1: PQM Setpoints (Sheet 3 of 12)

Ia OVERCURRENT TRIG LEVEL % CT

Ib OVERCURRENT TRIG LEVEL % CT

Ic OVERCURRENT TRIG LEVEL % CT

In OVERCURRENT TRIG LEVEL % CT

Va OVERVOLTAGE TRIG LEVEL % nominal

Vb OVERVOLTAGE TRIG LEVEL % nominal

Vc OVERVOLTAGE TRIG LEVEL % nominal

Va UNDERVOLTAGE TRIG LEVEL % nominal

Vb UNDERVOLTAGE TRIG LEVEL % nominal

Vc UNDERVOLTAGE TRIG LEVEL % nominal

SWITCH INPUT A TRIG

SWITCH INPUT B TRIG

SWITCH INPUT C TRIG

SWITCH INPUT D TRIG

TRACE MEMORY TRIGGER DELAY cycles

TRACE MEMORY TRIGGER RELAY

PROGRAMMABLE MESSAGE

PROGRAMMABLE MESSAGE NAME

S2 SYSTEM SETUP

CURRENT/VOLTS CONFIGURATION

PHASE CT WIRING

PHASE CT PRIMARY A

NEUTRAL CURRENT SENSING

NEUTRAL CT PRIMARY A

VT WIRING

VT RATIO

VT NOMINAL SEC VOLTAGE V

NOMINAL DIRECT INPUT VOLTAGE V

NOMINAL SYSTEM FREQUENCY Hz

ANALOG OUTPUT 1

ANALOG OUTPUT RANGE mA

ANALOG OUT 1 MAIN

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 9–3

COMMISSIONING CHAPTER 9: COMMISSIONING

Table 9–1: PQM Setpoints (Sheet 4 of 12)

MAIN 4 mA VALUE

MAIN 20 mA VALUE

ANALOG OUTPUT 1 ALT

ALT 4 mA VALUE:

ALT 20 mA VALUE

ANALOG OUTPUT 2

ANALOG OUT 2 MAIN

MAIN 4 mA VALUE

MAIN 20 mA VALUE

ANALOG OUTPUT 2 ALT

ALT 4 mA VALUE

ALT 20 mA VALUE

ANALOG OUTPUT 3

ANALOG OUT 3 MAIN

MAIN 4 mA VALUE

MAIN 20 mA VALUE

ANALOG OUTPUT 3 ALT

ALT 4 mA VALUE

ALT 20 mA VALUE

9–4 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 9: COMMISSIONING COMMISSIONING

Table 9–1: PQM Setpoints (Sheet 5 of 12)

S2 SYSTEM SETUP continued

ANALOG OUTPUT 4

ANALOG OUT 4 MAIN

MAIN 4 mA VALUE

MAIN 20 mA VALUE

ANALOG OUTPUT 4 ALT

ALT 4 mA VALUE

ALT 20 mA VALUE

ANALOG INPUT

ANALOG IN MAIN/ALT SELECT RELAY

ANALOG IN MAIN NAME

ANALOG IN MAIN UNITS

MAIN 4 mA VALUE

MAIN 20 mA VALUE

ANALOG IN MAIN RELAY

ANALOG IN MAIN LEVEL

ANALOG IN MAIN DELAY sec.

ANALOG IN ALT NAME

ANALOG IN ALT UNITS

ALT 4 mA VALUE

ALT 20 mA VALUE

ANALOG IN ALT RELAY

ANALOG IN ALT LEVEL

ANALOG IN ALT DELAY sec.

SWITCH INPUT A

SWITCH A NAME

SWITCH A FUNCTION

SWITCH A ACTIVATION

SWITCH A TIME DELAY sec.

SWITCH INPUT B

SWITCH B NAME

SWITCH B FUNCTION

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 9–5

COMMISSIONING CHAPTER 9: COMMISSIONING

Table 9–1: PQM Setpoints (Sheet 6 of 12)

SWITCH B ACTIVATION

SWITCH B TIME DELAY sec.

S2 SYSTEM SETUP continued

SWITCH INPUT C

SWITCH C NAME

SWITCH C FUNCTION

SWITCH C ACTIVATION

SWITCH C TIME DELAY sec.

SWITCH INPUT D

SWITCH D NAME

SWITCH D FUNCTION

SWITCH D ACTIVATION

SWITCH D TIME DELAY sec.

PULSE OUTPUT

POS kWh PULSE OUTPUT RELAY

POS kWh PULSE OUTPUT INTERVAL kWh

NEG kWh PULSE OUTPUT RELAY

NEG kWh PULSE OUTPUT INTERVAL kWh

POS kvarh PULSE OUTPUT RELAY

POS kvarh PULSE OUTPUT INTERVAL kvarh

NEG kvarh PULSE OUTPUT RELAY

NEG kvarh PULSE OUTPUT INTERVAL kvarh

kVAh PULSE OUTPUT RELAY

kVAh PULSE OUTPUT INTERVAL kVAh

PULSE WIDTH

PULSE INPUT

PULSE INPUT UNITS

PULSE INPUT 1 VALUE

PULSE INPUT 2 VALUE

PULSE INPUT 3 VALUE

PULSE INPUT 4 VALUE

PULSE INPUT ADDITION

9–6 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 9: COMMISSIONING COMMISSIONING

Table 9–1: PQM Setpoints (Sheet 7 of 12)

S3 OUTPUT RELAYS

ALARM RELAY

ALARM OPERATION

ALARM ACTIVATION

AUXILIARY RELAY 1

AUX1 OPERATION

AUX1 ACTIVATION

AUXILIARY RELAY 2

AUX2 OPERATION

AUX2 ACTIVATION

AUXILIARY RELAY 3

AUX3 OPERATION

AUX3 ACTIVATION

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 9–7

COMMISSIONING CHAPTER 9: COMMISSIONING

Table 9–1: PQM Setpoints (Sheet 8 of 12)

S4 ALARMS/CONTROL

CURRENT/VOLTAGE

DETECT I/V ALARMS USING PERCENT

PHASE UNDERCURRENT RELAY

PHASE UNDERCURRENT LEVEL A

PHASE UNDERCURRENT DELAY sec.

DETECT UNDERCURRENT WHEN 0 A

PHASE OVERCURRENT RELAY

PHASE OVERCURRENT LEVEL A

PHASE OVERCURRENT DELAY sec.

PHASE OVERCURRENT ACTIVATION

NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT RELAY

NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT LEVEL A

NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT DELAY sec.

UNDERVOLTAGE RELAY

UNDERVOLTAGE LEVEL V

UNDERVOLTAGE DELAY sec.

PHASES REQ’D FOR U/V OPERATION

DETECT UNDERVOLTAGE BELOW

20 V

OVERVOLTAGE RELAY

OVERVOLTAGE LEVEL V

OVERVOLTAGE DELAY sec.

PHASES REQ’D FOR O/V OPERATION

CURRENT UNBALANCE RELAY

CURRENT UNBALANCE LEVEL %

CURRENT UNBALANCE DELAY sec.

VOLTAGE UNBALANCE RELAY

VOLTAGE UNBALANCE LEVEL %

VOLTAGE UNBALANCE DELAY sec.

VOLTS PHASE REVERSAL RELAY

VOLTS PHASE REVERSAL DELAY sec.

9–8 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 9: COMMISSIONING COMMISSIONING

Table 9–1: PQM Setpoints (Sheet 9 of 12)

S4 ALARMS/CONTROL continued

TOTAL HARMONIC DISTORTION

AVERAGE CURRENT THD RELAY

AVERAGE CURRENT THD LEVEL %

AVERAGE CURRENT THD DELAY sec.

AVERAGE VOLTAGE THD RELAY

AVERAGE VOLTAGE THD LEVEL %

AVERAGE VOLTAGE THD DELAY sec.

FREQUENCY

UNDERFREQUENCY RELAY

UNDERFREQUENCY LEVEL Hz

UNDERFREQUENCY DELAY sec.

OVERFREQUENCY RELAY

OVERFREQUENCY LEVEL Hz

OVERFREQUENCY DELAY sec.

POWER

POWER ALARMS LEVEL BASE UNITS

POSITIVE REAL POWER RELAY

POSITIVE REAL POWER LEVEL kW

POSITIVE REAL POWER DELAY sec.

NEGATIVE REAL POWER RELAY

NEGATIVE REAL POWER LEVEL kW

NEGATIVE REAL POWER DELAY sec.

POSITIVE REACT POWER RELAY

POSITIVE REACT POWER LEVEL kvar

POSITIVE REACT POWER DELAY sec.

NEGATIVE REACT POWER RELAY

NEGATIVE REACT POWER LEVEL kvar

NEGATIVE REACT POWER DELAY sec.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 9–9

COMMISSIONING CHAPTER 9: COMMISSIONING

Table 9–1: PQM Setpoints (Sheet 10 of 12)

S4 ALARMS/CONTROL continued

POWER FACTOR

POWER FACTOR LEAD 1 RELAY

POWER FACTOR LEAD 1 PICKUP

POWER FACTOR LEAD 1 DROPOUT

POWER FACTOR LEAD 1 DELAY sec.

POWER FACTOR LAG 1 RELAY

POWER FACTOR LAG 1 PICKUP

POWER FACTOR LAG 1 DROPOUT

POWER FACTOR LAG 1 DELAY sec.

POWER FACTOR LEAD 2 RELAY

POWER FACTOR LEAD 2 PICKUP

POWER FACTOR LEAD 2 DROPOUT

POWER FACTOR LEAD 2 DELAY sec.

POWER FACTOR LAG 2 RELAY

POWER FACTOR LAG 2 PICKUP

POWER FACTOR LAG 2 DROPOUT

POWER FACTOR LAG 2 DELAY sec.

DEMAND

PHASE A CURRENT DMD RELAY

PHASE A CURRENT DMD LEVEL A

PHASE B CURRENT DMD RELAY

PHASE B CURRENT DMD LEVEL A

PHASE C CURRENT DMD RELAY

PHASE C CURRENT DMD LEVEL A

NEUTRAL CURRENT DMD RELAY

NEUTRAL CURRENT DMD LEVEL A

3Φ POS REAL POWER DMD RELAY

3Φ POS REAL POWER DMD LEVEL kW

3Φ POS REACT POWER DMD RELAY

3Φ POS REACT POWER DMD LEVEL kvar

3Φ NEG REAL POWER DMD RELAY

9–10 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 9: COMMISSIONING COMMISSIONING

Table 9–1: PQM Setpoints (Sheet 11 of 12)

3Φ NEG REAL POWER DMD LEVEL kW

3Φ NEG REACT POWER DMD RELAY

3Φ NEG REACT POWER DMD LEVEL kvar

3Φ APPARENT POWER DMD RELAY

3Φ APPARENT POWER DMD LEVEL kVA

S4 ALARMS/CONTROL continued

PULSE INPUT

PULSE INPUT 1 RELAY

PULSE INPUT 1 LEVEL units

PULSE INPUT 1 DELAY sec.

PULSE INPUT 2 RELAY

PULSE INPUT 2 LEVEL units

PULSE INPUT 2 DELAY sec.

PULSE INPUT 3 RELAY

PULSE INPUT 3 LEVEL units

PULSE INPUT 3 DELAY sec.

PULSE INPUT 4 RELAY

PULSE INPUT 4 LEVEL units

PULSE INPUT 4 DELAY sec.

TOTALIZED PULSES RELAY

TOTALIZED PULSES LEVEL units

TOTALIZED PULSES DELAY sec.

TIME

TIME RELAY

PICKUP TIME

DROPOUT TIME

MISCELLANEOUS

SERIAL COM1 FAILURE ALARM DELAY sec.

SERIAL COM2 FAILURE ALARM DELAY sec.

CLOCK NOT SET ALARM

DATA LOG 1 MEMORY FULL LEVEL sec.

DATA LOG 2 MEMORY FULL LEVEL sec.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 9–11

COMMISSIONING CHAPTER 9: COMMISSIONING

Table 9–1: PQM Setpoints (Sheet 12 of 12)

S5 TESTING

TEST RELAYS AND LEDS

OPERATION TEST

CURRENT/VOLTAGE SIMULATION

SIMULATION

SIMULATION ENABLED FOR min.

PHASE A CURRENT A

PHASE B CURRENT A

PHASE C CURRENT A

NEUTRAL CURRENT A

Vax VOLTAGE V

Vbx VOLTAGE V

Vcx VOLTAGE V

PHASE ANGLE °

ANALOG OUTPUTS SIMULATION

SIMULATION

SIMULATION ENABLED FOR min.

ANALOG OUTPUT 1 %

ANALOG OUTPUT 2 %

ANALOG OUTPUT 3 %

ANALOG OUTPUT 4 %

ANALOG INPUT SIMULATION

SIMULATION

SIMULATION ENABLED FOR min.

ANALOG INPUT mA

• SWITCH INPUTS SIMULATION

SIMULATION

SIMULATION ENABLED FOR min.

SWITCH INPUT A

SWITCH INPUT B

SWITCH INPUT C

SWITCH INPUT D

9–12 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

 GE Consumer & Industrial
Multilin

ACTUAL STORE
PQM Power Quality Meter
Ia = 100 Ib = 102 SETPOINT RESET

Ic = 100 AMPS
MESSAGE

g PQM Power Quality Meter

STATUS COMMUNICATE RELAYS

Chapter 10: Miscellaneous

ALARM TX1 ALARM
VALUE
PROGRAM RX1 AUX1

SIMULATION TX2 AUX2

SELF TEST RX2 AUX3

Miscellaneous

10.1 Warranty

GE MULTILIN RELAY WARRANTY

General Electric Multilin (GE Multilin) warrants each relay it manufactures to be free from
defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of 24
months from date of shipment from factory.
In the event of a failure covered by warranty, GE Multilin will undertake to repair or
replace the relay providing the warrantor determined that it is defective and it is
returned with all transportation charges prepaid to an authorized service centre or the
factory. Repairs or replacement under warranty will be made without charge.
Warranty shall not apply to any relay which has been subject to misuse, negligence,
accident, incorrect installation or use not in accordance with instructions nor any unit
that has been altered outside a GE Multilin authorized factory outlet.
GE Multilin is not liable for special, indirect or consequential damages or for loss of profit
or for expenses sustained as a result of a relay malfunction, incorrect application or
adjustment.
For complete text of Warranty (including limitations and disclaimers), refer to GE Multilin
Standard Conditions of Sale.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 10–1

TABLE OF REVISIONS CHAPTER 10: MISCELLANEOUS

10.2 Table of Revisions

10.2.1 Revisions:
1605-0003-CH Section or Table No. Revision Description
to 1.2.5 Added mod 521 to Order Codes section
1605-0003-CJ 1.2.5 Update "Accessories" EnerVista PQM Setup from 'free upon
request' to 'supplied free'
1.3.1 Analog Output Isolation spec changed
1.3.1 Update trace memory input spec to 2 cycles
1.3.1 Changed VT PRI/SEC specs under Voltage Inputs
1.3.1 Changed Voltage Inputs "Full Scale" information
1.3.1 Fuse type/rating spec added to Specifications
1.3.1 Changed timing accuracy - Specifications section, under
POWER FACTOR/UNDERVOLTAGE/OVERVOLTAGE MONITORING
1.3.1 Updated safety standards certification wording
1.3.1 Demand Monitoring specs corrected
1.3.1 VOLTAGE INPUTS Accuracy specification updated
1.3.1 UNDERFREQUENCY/OVERFREQUENCY MONITORING Timing
Accuracy specs changed
1.3.1 Measured Values Accuracy: Changed all to +/-0.4% of Full
Scale
1.3.1 CURRENT INPUTS Accuracy change
1.3.1 VOLTAGE INPUTS - changed VT PRI/SEC to VT Input and
changed data accordingly
1.3.1 Added Trace Memory Pickup Accuracy specs under TRACE
MEMORY TRIGGER,
2.2.7 Drawing 823700A1 created and inserted
2.2.6 Note to be added to the beginning description of the switch
input section
2.2.11 Updated hipot testing drawing
2.2.5 Auxiliary Relays wording change
2.2.1 Word "Delta" deleted from the text above diagram 2-8.
Replaced by "Wye."
3.2.2 ALARM wording change
3.2.4 Wording changes
3.4.3 Corrected second Default Message in sequence of 5
3.4.3 Corrected 4th and 5th Default Messages in sequence of 5
4.2.6 Clarify setting date/time through modbus. Added text to last
paragraph in section.
4.2.7 Changed tariff cost basis from MWh to kWh
4.2.6 Re-worded one hour spec for clock retention
4.2.7 Corrected power demand time interval range
4.2.7 Correction to Power Demand Type description
4.2.11 (TIPS) Corrected Programmable Message location to A2
4.3.2 Changed Analog Output4 Serial Value Register
4.3.3 Correct descriptions for Analog in Main/Alt Level and Analog In
Main/Alt Delay sections
4.5.1 Add text to over/under current/voltage levels as percentages
4.5.9 CLOCK NOT SET ALARM wording change
4.5.9 Data Logs 1 and 2 Memory Full Level ranges changed to
percentages
4.5.5 Update specs for Power Factor dropout timing

10–2 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 10: MISCELLANEOUS TABLE OF REVISIONS

Section or Table No. Revision Description

4.5.6 Phase A/B/C/N Current Demand Relay: Reference to Neutral
Demand added.
4.5.7 Updated descriptions for Pulse Input Relay and Level
4.5.9 Correct relay reference in Serial Comm Fail Alarm Delay section
4.5.3 Added "Underfrequency when 0Hz" message
4.6.2 Corrected "Simulation Enabled For" descriptions
5.2.4 3 phase kVA MAX inserted in diagram
5.3.3 CLOCK wording changes
5.4.4 Corrected order of 3 Events Records.
5.4.4 Power-Off Event Note added
5.4.1 K-factor equation corrected
5.5.1 Updated "Software Version" display and added Build Date &
Time
5.5.1 Changes to Software Versions section
6.2.2 Change GE Multilin website address to www.GEmultilin.com
6.4.4 Added "Firmware Upgrade Recovery" as a new section
6.4.4 Add text
6.6.1 Harmonic Analysis Waveform graphic corrected
7.2.5 - 7.2.7 Correct slave address (wording) to #17 in Modbus Functions
sections
7.2.5 Corrected value in Store Single Setpoint example
7.3.4 Added Reference Note to table to indicate section on long
integers in memory map
8.1.1 DNP "DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT" corrected
8.1.3 (Table) Change Analog Input default Variation
8.1.3 (Table) Change Binary Counter Default Variation
8.1.3 (Table) Object 20 Default Variation changed
4.3.6(formerly p5-23) Added Pulse Input 2+3+4 to Pulse Input Total Range
4.5.3 (formerly ch 5) Underfrequency and overfrequency levels changed from < or >
respectively, to <= or >= respectively. This change was
implemented throughout entire manual.
A.1 (formerly A1.1.1) Missing event data added to list
A.4 Updated Trace Memory application note (change A.1.4.)
A.5 Corrected Pulse Output Interval
A.8 Corrected Pulse Input values from A/B/C/D to 1/2/3/4
Global Correction all EnerVista PC Program Name References to
ENERVISTA PQM SETUP
Table 4-3 Corrected 3 Phase unit from kw to kvar
Table 7-10 Memory Map addresses 0481 and 048B changed to "Reserved"
Table 7-10 Memory Map address 1147 O/V level changed
Table 7-10 Memory map Factory Defaults corrections on addresses 1030
and 1032
Table 7-10 Memory map Description changes on addresses 0A94 and
0AAC
Table 7-10 Corrected Phasor Angle units in memory map (02E7-02EC)
Table 7-10 Remove time stamp for Vac THD max (04B0-04B3) from
memory map
Table 7-10 Corrected Tariff units in memory map (1048, 104A, 104C)
Table 7-10 Corrected Phase CT Primary default (addr 1050)
Table 7-10 Corrected Analog Output default in memory map (1060)
Table 7-10 Corrected Pulse Output Range in memory map (10F4)
Table 7-10 Corrected Power Factor pickup level defaults in memory map
(1179)

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 10–3

TABLE OF REVISIONS CHAPTER 10: MISCELLANEOUS

Section or Table No. Revision Description

Table 7-10 Added Event Recorder heading in memory map (starting 12C0)
Table 7-10 Correct User map ranges in memory map (0180-01F7)
Table 7-11 Changed Data Format descriptions for (Codes) F39 & F40
Table 7-3 Slave address corrected in Broadcast Command example
Table 8-2 Note to show Binary Input Change Points 6 to 10 not included
Table 8-3 Footnote created on points 0 and 9-27
Table 8-4 Corrections to DNP Deadband Values
Table 8-4 Renumbered Analog Inputs from 0 to 163
Tables 8-2 on Text deletions (unsupported items)

10–4 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

 GE Consumer & Industrial
Multilin

ACTUAL STORE
PQM Power Quality Meter
Ia = 100 Ib = 102 SETPOINT RESET

Ic = 100 AMPS
MESSAGE

g PQM Power Quality Meter

STATUS COMMUNICATE RELAYS

Appendix A: Application Notes

ALARM TX1 ALARM
VALUE
PROGRAM RX1 AUX1

SIMULATION TX2 AUX2

SELF TEST RX2 AUX3

Application Notes

A.1 Event Recorder

APPLICATION NOTE PQMAN01: EVENT RECORDER APPLICATION
The Event Recorder stores all online data in a section of non-volatile memory when
triggered by an event. The PQM defines any of the following situations as an event:
• Analog Input Alternate Alarm
• Analog Input Alternate Alarm Clear
• Analog Input Main Alarm
• Analog Input Main Alarm Clear
• Clear Event Record
• Clock Not Set Alarm
• Clock Not Set Alarm Clear
• COM1 Fail Alarm
• COM1 Fail Alarm Clear
• COM2 Fail Alarm
• COM2 Fail Alarm Clear
• Current THD Alarm
• Current THD Alarm Clear
• Current Unbalance Alarm
• Current Unbalance Alarm Clear
• Data Log 1 Alarm
• Data Log 1 Alarm Clear
• Data Log 2 Alarm
• Data Log 2 Alarm Clear
• kVA Demand Alarm

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL A–1

EVENT RECORDER APPENDIX A: APPLICATION NOTES

• kVA Demand Alarm Clear

• Negative kvar Alarm
• Negative kvar Alarm Clear
• Negative kvar Demand Alarm
• Negative kvar Demand Alarm Clear
• Negative kW Alarm
• Negative kW Alarm Clear
• Negative kW Demand Alarm
• Negative kW Demand Alarm Clear
• Neutral Current Demand Alarm
• Neutral Current Demand Alarm Clear
• Neutral Overcurrent Alarm
• Neutral Overcurrent Alarm Clear
• Overcurrent Alarm
• Overcurrent Alarm Clear
• Overfrequency Alarm
• Overfrequency Alarm Clear
• Overvoltage Alarm
• Overvoltage Alarm Clear
• Parameters Not Set Alarm
• Parameters Not Set Alarm Clear
• Phase A Current Demand Alarm
• Phase A Current Demand Alarm Clear
• Phase B Current Demand Alarm
• Phase B Current Demand Alarm Clear
• Phase C Current Demand Alarm
• Phase C Current Demand Alarm Clear
• Phase Reversal Alarm
• Phase Reversal Alarm Clear
• Positive kvar Alarm
• Positive kvar Alarm Clear
• Positive kvar Demand Alarm
• Positive kvar Demand Alarm Clear
• Positive kW Alarm
• Positive kW Alarm Clear
• Positive kW Demand Alarm
• Positive kW Demand Alarm Clear
• Power Factor Lag 1 Alarm
• Power Factor Lag 1 Alarm Clear
• Power Factor Lag 2 Alarm

A–2 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

APPENDIX A: APPLICATION NOTES EVENT RECORDER

• Power Factor Lag 2 Alarm Clear

• Power Factor Lead 1 Alarm
• Power Factor Lead 1 Alarm Clear
• Power Factor Lead 2 Alarm
• Power Factor Lead 2 Alarm Clear
• Power Off
• Power On
• Pulse Count Total Alarm
• Pulse Input 1 Alarm
• Pulse Input 1 Alarm Clear
• Pulse Input 2 Alarm
• Pulse Input 2 Alarm Clear
• Pulse Input 3 Alarm
• Pulse Input 3 Alarm Clear
• Pulse Input 4 Alarm
• Pulse Input 4 Alarm Clear
• Pulse Input Total Alarm Clear
• Reset
• Self Test Alarm
• Self Test Alarm Clear
• Setpoint Access Enabled
• Switch A Alarm
• Switch A Alarm Clear
• Switch B Alarm
• Switch B Alarm Clear
• Switch C Alarm
• Switch C Alarm Clear
• Switch D Alarm
• Switch D Alarm Clear
• Time Alarm
• Time Alarm Clear
• Trace Memory Trigger
• Undercurrent Alarm
• Undercurrent Alarm Clear
• Underfrequency Alarm
• Underfrequency Alarm Clear
• Undervoltage Alarm
• Undervoltage Alarm Clear
• Voltage THD Alarm
• Voltage THD Alarm Clear

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL A–3

EVENT RECORDER APPENDIX A: APPLICATION NOTES

• Voltage Unbalance Alarm

• Voltage Unbalance Alarm Clear
• Up to 40 events can be stored in non-volatile memory for retrieval and review. The
Event Recorder can be enabled, disabled, or cleared via the keypad or serial port.
The following data is saved when an event occurs:
• Analog Input (high)
• Analog Input (low)
• Date - Month/Day
• Date - Year
• Event Cause
• Event Number
• Frequency
• I Unbalance
• Ia
• Ia Demand
• Ia THD
• Ib
• Ib Demand
• Ib THD
• Ic
• Ic Demand
• Ic THD
• In
• In Demand
• In THD
• Internal Fault Error Code
• kVAh (high)
• kVAh (low)
• Negative kvarh (high)
• Negative kvarh (low)
• Negative kWh (low)
• Negative kWh (high)
• P3 (high)
• P3 (low)
• P3 Demand (high)
• P3 Demand (low)
• Pa (high)
• Pa (low)
• Pb (high)
• Pb (low)
• Pc (high)

A–4 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

APPENDIX A: APPLICATION NOTES EVENT RECORDER

• Pc (low)
• PF3
• PFa
• PFb
• PFc
• Positive kvarh (high)
• Positive kvarh (low)
• Positive kWh (high)
• Positive kWh (low)
• Q3 (high)
• Q3 (low)
• Q3 Demand (high)
• Q3 Demand (low)
• Qa (high)
• Qa (low)
• Qb (high)
• Qb (low)
• Qc (high)
• Qc (low)
• S3 (high)
• S3 (low)
• S3 Demand (high)
• S3 Demand (low)
• Sa (low)
• Sa (high)
• Sb (high)
• Sb (low)
• Sc (high)
• Sc (low)
• Switches and Relays States
• Time - Hours/Minutes
• Time - Seconds
• Trace Memory Trigger Cause
• V Unbalance
• Vab (high)
• Vab (low)
• Vab THD
• Van (high)
• Van (low)
• Van THD

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL A–5

EVENT RECORDER APPENDIX A: APPLICATION NOTES

• Vbc (high)
• Vbc (low)
• Vbc THD
• Vbn (high)
• Vbn (low)
• Vbn THD
• Vca (high)
• Vca (low)
• Vcn (high)
• Vcn (low)
• Vcn THD

ACCESS TO EVENT RECORDER INFORMATION:

There are two ways to access Event Recorder Information:
• Access only the Records and data you wish to view
• Access the entire Event Record.
The Event Recorder is indexed by Event Number (1 to 40). To access a specific Event,
the Event Number must be written to the PQM memory map location 12C0h. The data
specific to that Event can be read starting at memory map location 0AE0h. The specific
Event Number must be known to read the Event Recorder in this fashion. However, this
Event Number is usually not known and the entire Event Record must be read. The eas-
iest way to do this is to read the PQM Memory Map location 0AD0h (Total Number of
Events Since Last Clear) and loop through each Event Number indicated by the value
from 0AD0h, reading the associated data pertaining to each Event. This requires from
1 to 40 serial reads of 170 bytes each. Once this data is obtained, it can be interpreted
based upon the format of each value as described in Section 7.3: Modbus Memory Map.
It is important to note that some memory map parameters are 32 bits (4 bytes) long
and require 2 registers to contain their value, one for the two high bytes and one for
the two low bytes.

A–6 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

APPENDIX A: APPLICATION NOTES INTERFACING USING HYPERTERMINAL

A.2 Interfacing Using Hyperterminal

When upgrading firmware, the PQM may appear to lockup if there is an interruption on the
communication port during the upload process. If the PQM does not receive the necessary
control signals for configuration during firmware upload, it could remain in a halted
situation until reinitialized. The steps used by EnerVista PQM Setup to upload firmware to
the PQM are as follows:
1. Prepare the PQM for firmware upgrade by saving setpoints to a file.
2. Erase the flash memory and verify it to be blank.
3. Upload the new firmware.
4. Verify the CRC when upload is complete.
5. Run the new code.
If the PQM is interrupted prior to erasing the flash memory, it could be halted in a mode
where the display will read:

PQM FLASH LOADER

ENTER TEXT “LOAD”

If the computer being used to upload firmware has a screen saver enabled, and the screen
saver operates during the upload process, the communication port will be interrupted
during the launch of the screen saver. It is recommended to disable any screen saver prior
to firmware upload.
There are two ways to alleviate this condition: one is to cycle power to the PQM; the second
is to interface with the PQM using a terminal program, such as Hyperterminal, and perform
the upload process manually.

Cycling Power
Remove and then re-apply control power to the PQM. The PQM should then run the existing
firmware in its flash memory. If the PQM does not run the firmware in flash memory,
attempt the second method using Hyperterminal.

Hyperterminal
1. Hyperterminal is a terminal interface program supplied with Microsoft Windows. Run
the program “hypertrm.exe” which is usually located in the Accessories folder of your
PC.
2. A Connection Description window will appear asking for a name, use a name such as
PQM for the connection and click on OK.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL A–7

INTERFACING USING HYPERTERMINAL APPENDIX A: APPLICATION NOTES

3. The following window appears.

4. Select the communications port of your PC that is connected to the PQM and click on
OK.
5. The following window appears next.

6. Change the settings in the Properties window to match those shown above, and click
on OK. You should now have a link to the PQM. Enter the text LOAD in uppercase in
the text window of Hyperterminal.

A–8 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

APPENDIX A: APPLICATION NOTES INTERFACING USING HYPERTERMINAL

7. The PQM Boot Menu should appear in the text window.

8. Type “E” to Erase the PQM flash memory.

9. HyperTerminal will ask you to verify that you wish to erase the flash memory; enter “Y”
for yes. The Boot Menu appears again when complete.
10. Now select “B” to blank check the flash memory; the PQM Boot Menu will appear again
when complete.
11. Type “U” to upload software to the PQM. The PQM is now waiting for you to send a
firmware file. Select “Transfer” and then “Send File” on the Hyperterminal task bar and
the following window will appear.

12. Enter the location and the name of the firmware file you wish to send to the PQM, and
ensure the Protocol is 1KXmodem, and click on Send. The PQM will now proceed to
receive the firmware file, this usually takes 3 to 4 minutes. When complete the Boot
Menu will again appear.
13. Type “C” to check the installed firmware, and then type “R” to run the flash. If the CRC
check is bad, erase the flash and re-install the firmware. If numerous bad CRC checks
are encountered, it is likely that the file you are attempting to load is corrupted. Obtain
a new file and try again. If attempts to use Hyperterminal are unsuccessful, consult
the factory.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL A–9

PHASORS IMPLEMENTATION APPENDIX A: APPLICATION NOTES

A.3 Phasors Implementation

The purpose of the function Calc_Phasors within the PQM firmware is to take a digitally
sampled periodic signal and generate the equivalent phasor representation of the signal.
In the conventional sense, a phasor depicts a purely sinusoidal signal which is what we’re
interested in here; we wish to calculate the phasor for a given signal at the fundamental
power system frequency. The following Discrete Fourier Series equations calculate the
phasor in rectangular co-ordinates for an arbitrary digitally sampled signal. The
justification for the equations is beyond the scope of this document but can be found in
some form in any text on signal analysis.

N–1 N–1
2 2
Re(g) = ---
n ∑ g n ⋅ cos ( ω 0 nT ) ; Im(g) = ---
n ∑ g n ⋅ sin ( ω 0 nT )
n=0 n=0

where:Re(g) = Real component of phasor

Im(g) = Imaginary component of phasor
g = Set of N digital samples = {g0, g1,..., gN-1}
gn = nth sample from g
N = Number of samples
f0 = Fundamental frequency in Hertz
ω0 = 2πf0 = Angular frequency in radians
T = 1 /(f0N) = Time between samples
The PQM Trace Memory feature is employed to calculate the phasors. The Trace Memory
feature samples 16 times per cycle for two cycles for all current and voltage inputs.
Substituting N = 16 (samples/cycle) into the equations yields the following for the real and
imaginary components of the phasor:
1 π 2π 31π
Re(g) = --- ⎛ g 0 cos 0 + g 1 cos --- + g 2 cos ------ + … + g 31 cos ----------⎞
8⎝ 8 8 8 ⎠
1 π 2π 31π
Im(g) = --- ⎛ g 0 sin 0 + g 1 sin --- + g 2 sin ------ + … + g 31 sin ----------⎞
8⎝ 8 8 8 ⎠

The number of multiples in the above equation can be reduced by using the symmetry
inherent in the sine and cosine functions which is illustrated as follows:

cos φ = – cos ( π – φ ) = – cos ( π + φ ) = cos ( 2π – φ )

sin φ = sin ( π – φ ) = – sin ( π + φ ) = – sin ( 2π – φ )

cos φ = sin ⎛ π
--- – φ⎞
⎝2 ⎠

A–10 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

APPENDIX A: APPLICATION NOTES PHASORS IMPLEMENTATION

Let k1 = cos(π/8), k2 = cos(π/4), k3 = cos(3π/8); the equations for the real and imaginary
components are reduced to:

1
Re(g) = --- ( k 1 ( g 1 – g 7 – g 9 + g 15 + g 17 – g 23 – g 25 + g 31 ) + k 2 ( g 2 – g 6 – g 10 + g 14 +
8
k 3 ( g 3 – g 5 – g 11 + g 13 + g 19 – g 21 – g 27 + g 29 ) + ( g 0 – g 8 + g 16 – g 24 ) )

1
Im(g) = --- ( k 1 ( g 3 + g 5 – g 11 – g 13 + g 19 + g 21 – g 27 – g 29 ) + k 2 ( g 2 + g 6 – g 10 – g 14 +
8
k 3 ( g 1 + g 7 – g 9 – g 15 + g 17 + g 23 – g 25 – g 31 ) + ( g 4 – g 12 + g 20 – g 28 ) )

The number of subtractions can be reduced between the calculations of real and
imaginary components by not repeating the same subtraction twice. The following
subtractions are repeated:

Δ0 = g0 – g8 Δ1 = g1 – g9 Δ 2 = g 2 – g 10
Δ 4 = g 4 = g 12 Δ 5 = g 5 – g 13 Δ 6 = g 6 – g 14
Δ 8 = g 16 – g 24 Δ 9 = g 17 – g 25 Δ 10 = g 18 – g 26
Δ 12 = g 20 – g 28 Δ 13 = g 21 – g 29 Δ 14 = g 22 – g 30

Δ 3 = g 3 – g 11
Δ 7 = g 7 – g 15
Δ 11 = g 19 – g 27
Δ 15 = g 23 – g 31

Substituting in the above ‘delta’ values results in the form of the equations that will be used
to calculate the phasors:

1
Re(g) = --- ( Δ 0 + Δ 8 + k 1 ( Δ 1 – Δ 7 + Δ 9 – Δ 15 ) + k 3 ( Δ 3 – Δ 5 + Δ 11 – Δ 13 ) )
8
1
Im(g) = --- ( Δ 4 + Δ 12 + k 1 ( Δ 3 + Δ 5 + Δ 11 + Δ 13 ) + k 2 ( Δ 1 + Δ 7 + Δ 9 + Δ 15 ) )
8

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL A–11

TRIGGERED TRACE MEMORY APPENDIX A: APPLICATION NOTES

A.4 Triggered Trace Memory

The Triggered Trace Memory can be used to detect and record system disturbances. The
PQM uses a dedicated continuous sampling rate of 16 samples per cycle to record
fluctuations in voltage or current as per user defined levels. The PQM calculates the true
RMS value of one consecutive cycle, or 16 samples, and compares this value with the user-
defined trigger levels to determine if it will record all sampled waveforms. The sampled
waveforms include Ia, Ib, Ic, In, Va, Vb and Vc.
Since the PQM requires a minimum 20 V for detection and has an upper voltage input limit
of 600 V, the following limitation exists for the Trace Memory undervoltage and
overvoltage trigger levels:

160

140
TRIGGER LEVEL AS % OF NOMINAL

120

100

80
Maximum
60
Minimum
40

20

0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
NOMINAL VOLTAGE (V)

FIGURE A–1: Trace Memory Phase Voltage Trigger Level Limits

A–12 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

APPENDIX A: APPLICATION NOTES PULSE OUTPUT APPLICATION

A.5 Pulse Output Application

Up to 4 SPDT Form C output relays are configurable as Pulse Initiators based on energy
quantities calculated by the PQM. Variables to consider when using the PQM as a Pulse
Initiator are:
• PQM Pulse Output Parameter
• PQM Pulse Output Interval
• PQM Pulse Output Width
• PQM Output Relay Operation
• Pulse Acceptance Capability of the end receiver
• Type of Pulse Receiver
• Maximum Energy Consumed over a defined interval
1. PQM Pulse Output Parameter: The PQM activates the assigned output relay based
upon the energy quantity used as the base unit for pulse initiation. These energy
quantities include ±kWhr, ±kVARh, and kVAh.
2. PQM Pulse Output Interval: The PQM activates the assigned output relay at the accu-
mulation of each Pulse Output Interval as defined by the user. This interval is based
upon system parameters such that the PQM pulse output activates at a rate not
exceeding the Pulse Acceptance Capability of the end receiver.
3. PQM Pulse Output Width: This user defined parameter defines the duration of the
pulse initiated by the PQM when a quantity of energy equal to the Pulse Output Inter-
val has accumulated. It is based upon system parameters such that the PQM pulse
output will activate for a duration that is within the operating parameters of the end
receiver.
4. PQM Output Relay Operation: This user defined parameter defines the normal state
of the PQM output relay contacts, i.e. Fail-safe or Non-Failsafe.
5. Pulse Acceptance Capability of the end Receiver: This parameter is normally
expressed as any one of the following: (a) Pulses per Demand Interval; (b) Pulses per
second, minute or hour; (c) Minimum time between successive closures of the con-
tacts.
6. Type of Pulse Receiver: There are 4 basic types of Pulse receivers: a) Three-wire, every
pulse counting; b) Three-wire, every other pulse counting; c) Two-wire, Form A nor-
mally open, counts only each contact closure; d) Two-wire, counts every state change,
i.e. recognizes both contact closure and contact opening.
7. Maximum Energy Consumed over a defined interval: This is based upon system
parameters and defines the maximum amount of energy that may be accumulated
over a specific time.
Application of the PQM Pulse Output Relays to an End Receiver Using KYZ Terminals:
Typical end receivers require a contact closure between KY or KZ based upon the type of
receiver. The PQM Pulse Output feature can be used with either two- or three-wire
connections. The PQM activates the designated Output Relay at each accumulation of the
defined Pulse Output Interval for the defined Pulse Output Width. Therefore, each PQM
contact operation represents one interval. For end receivers that count each closure and
opening of the output contacts, the PQM Pulse Output Interval should be adjusted to

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL A–13

PULSE OUTPUT APPLICATION APPENDIX A: APPLICATION NOTES

match the registration of the end receiver. For example, if the end receiver counts each
closure as 100 kWh and each opening as 100 kWh, the PQM Pulse Output Interval should
be set to 200 kWh.
The PQM Output Relays can be configured as Failsafe or Non-Failsafe to match the
normally open/closed configuration of the KY and KZ connections at the end receiver. The
K connection is always made to the COM connection of the designated PQM output relay,
and the Y and Z connections can be made to the N/O or N/C connections based upon the
type of end receiver.

A–14 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

APPENDIX A: APPLICATION NOTES DATA LOGGER IMPLEMENTATION

A.6 Data Logger Implementation

The Data Logger allows various user defined parameters to be continually recorded at a
user defined rate. The Data Logger uses 64 samples/cycle data. The PQM has allocated
65536 bytes of memory for Data Log storage. The memory structure is partitioned into 512
blocks containing 64 × 2 byte registers as shown below:

BLOCK 0 REGISTER 1 REGISTER 2 REGISTER 64

BLOCK 1 REGISTER 1 REGISTER 2 REGISTER 64

BLOCK 2 REGISTER 1 REGISTER 2 REGISTER 64

BLOCK 510 REGISTER 1 REGISTER 2 REGISTER 64

BLOCK 511 REGISTER 1 REGISTER 2 REGISTER 64

FIGURE A–2: Data Logger Memory Structure

Each entry into the Data Log is called a Record. The Record can vary in size depending
upon the parameters the user wishes to log. The memory structure can also be partitioned
into 2 separate Data Logs. The 2 logs can be user defined in size, or can be optimized by
EnerVista PQM Setup. The top of each Data Log contains what is called the Header. Each
Data Log Header contains the following information…
• Log Time Interval: This is the user defined interval at which the data log will store
entries
• Present Log Time and Date: This is the time and date of the most recent Record
• Log Start Address: This is the start address for the beginning of the logged data
• Log Record Size: This is the size of each Record entry into the Data Log based upon
the user defined Data Log structure
• Log Total Records: This is the total number of records available based upon the user
defined Data Log parameter structure
• Log Pointer to First Item of First Record: This is a pointer to the first record in the
Data Log
• Log Pointer to First Item of Record After Last: This is a pointer to the next record to
be written into the Data Log
• Log Status: This reports the current status of the Data Log; i.e.: Running or Stopped
• Log Records Used: This is the number of records that have been written into the Data
Log

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL A–15

DATA LOGGER IMPLEMENTATION APPENDIX A: APPLICATION NOTES

• Log Time Remaining Until Next Reading: This is a counter showing how much time
remains until the next record is to be written into the Data Log
The Data Logger has 2 modes of operation, Run to Fill and Circulate. In the Run to Fill
mode, the Data Log will stop writing records into the memory structure when there is not
enough memory to add another record. Depending on the size of each record, the Data
Log may not necessarily use the entire 65536 bytes of storage available. In the Circulate
mode, the Data Log will continue to write new Records into the Log beyond the last
available Record space. The Log will overwrite the first Record after the Header and
continue to overwrite the Records to follow until the user wishes to stop logging data. The
Log will act as a rolling window of data in time, going back in time as far as the amount of
records times the Log Time Interval will allow in the total space of memory available.

ACCESSING THE DATA LOG INFORMATION

The Data Log can be accessed in two ways: using EnerVista PQM Setup via the serial port.
Access via EnerVista PQM Setup is as described in Chapter 6: SOFTWARE. Access is
manually via the serial port as follows:
• Set the Block of data you wish to access at 1268h in the PQM Memory Map
• Read the required amount of data from the 64 Registers in the Block
Accessing the Data Log in this manner assumes that the user knows which Block they wish
to access, and knows the size of each Record based upon the parameters they have
selected to log.
The easiest way to access the data in the Data Log is to read the entire log and export this
data into a spreadsheet for analysis (this is the method incorporated by EnerVista PQM
Setup). This requires defining the Block to be read, starting at Block 0, and reading all 128
bytes of data in each of the 64 Registers within the Block. You would then define Blocks
1,2,3 etc. and repeat the reading of the 64 Registers for each block, until Block 511. This
requires 512 reads of 128 bytes each. The data can then be interpreted based upon the
parameter configuration.

INTERPRETING THE DATA LOG INFORMATION

Using 2 Data Logs in the Run to Fill mode, the Data Log is configured as follows:

RESERVED

RESERVED

LOG 1 HEADER LOG 2 HEADER

32 33

BLOCK 3

FIRST RECORD OF DATA

FIGURE A–3: Data Log Configuration

A–16 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

APPENDIX A: APPLICATION NOTES DATA LOGGER IMPLEMENTATION

Blocks 0 and 1 are reserved for Data Logger Data Interval information. Block 2 contains the
Header information for both Data Logs. The first 32 registers of Block 2 are reserved for
Data Log 1 Header Information, and the remaining 32 registers of Block 2 are reserved for
Data Log 2 Header Information. The first register of Data Log information resides at
Register 1 of Block 3. This leaves 65152 bytes of storage for data.
The location of the first Record in Log 2 will depend upon the Log configuration. Its location
is determined by reading the Log 2 Header value for Log Start Address at location 0AAEh in
the memory map and performing a calculation. The Log Start Address is a value from 0 to
65535 representing the first byte of the first Record within the Data Log memory structure.
Add 1 to this number and then divide this number by 64 (number of Records in a Block).
Then divide this number by 2 (number of bytes in a record), and truncate the remainder of
the division to determine the Block number. Multiplying the remainder of the division by 64
will determine the Register number. For example, if the Log Start Address was 34235, then
the Block and Register numbers containing the first record of Log 2 are:
Block Number = (34235 + 1) / 64 / 2 = 267.46875
Therefore, Block Number 267 contains the starting record.
Record Number = 0.46875 × 64 = 30
Therefore, Register Number 30 contains the first byte of Log 2 data
This location will always be the starting address for Data Log 2 for the given configuration.
Adding or deleting parameters to the configuration will change the Log 2 Starting Address.
The Data Logs will use the maximum amount of memory available, minus a 1 record buffer,
based upon the user configuration. For Example, if the Record Size for a given
configuration was 24 bytes, and there were 40 bytes of memory left in the memory
structure, the Data Logger will not use that last 40 bytes, regardless of the mode of
operation. The Data Logger uses the following formula to determine the total record space
available…
Total Space = (65152 / Record Size) – 1
As in the example, the total space calculated would be 65152 / 24 – 1 = 2713.67. This
equates to 2713 records with 40 bytes of unused memory at the end of Block 511. The
total amount of space used in the structure can also be found in the Log Header in the Log
Total Records field.
When the Data Log is configured for Circulate mode of operation, the memory structure is
the same as for Run to Fill mode. To read the Log data, you must use the Log Starting
Address, Log Record Size, and Log Total Records information from each of the Log
Headers. The Log Starting Address for Log 2 can be determined as shown in the previous
calculation for Run to Fill mode. The total space occupied in the memory structure by
either log is determined by multiplying the Log Total Records by the Log Record Size and
adding this value to the Log Starting Address. It is important to note that the Log Starting
Address is always referenced to the first Register of Block 0, or the first byte of the Data
Log memory structure.
Once you have separated the Data Log data from the Headers, you will then need to
interpret the data into a structured format. Each Record is comprised of user-defined
parameters. These parameters are implemented into the user-defined structure in a
specific order based upon selection into either, or both, Data Log(s). Address 1270h in the
PQM Memory Map is the Holding Register for the first available parameter for use by the

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL A–17

DATA LOGGER IMPLEMENTATION APPENDIX A: APPLICATION NOTES

Data Logs. The Data Logs will place the user-selected parameters into their respective
Record structures based upon their respective order in the PQM Memory Map. For
example, if Positive kWh, Frequency and Current Unbalance were selected to be measured
parameters, they would be placed into the Record structure in the following order:
Unbalance2 bytes(16 bit value)
Frequency2 bytes(16 bit value)
Positive kWh4 bytes(32 bit value)
The DATA LOG PARAMETERS table on the following page illustrates the order of parameters
and their size.
Therefore, the Record size would be 8 bytes. To put a time value associated with each
Record, you must read the Log Time and Date from the Header. This is the time of the last
Record in the Log. To time stamp the first Record used, multiply the Log Time Interval by
the Log Records Used and subtract this number from the time associated with the last
Record. To determine the time associated with any Record, add the Log Time Interval times
the Record to be read to the time associated with the first Record in the Log.
For example:
Log Time Interval:3600
Log Time - Hours/Minutes:02 30
Log Time - Seconds:30300
Log Date - Month:06 15
Log Date - Year:1997
Log Records Used:1600
The last Record entry time is interpreted as 2:30 AM, 30.300 seconds, June 15, 1997. The
Log Time Interval is 3600 seconds, or 1 hour. Taking the Log Records Used (1600) and
multiplying this by the Log Time Interval(3600) gives 5760000 seconds. This translates into
66 days and 16 hours. Subtracting backwards on a calendar from the time for the last
Record gives a time and date of 10:30:30.000AM, April 9, 1997. This is the time stamp for
the first Record. Time stamping the remaining Records requires adding 3600 seconds for
each Record starting from the time associated with the first Record. It is important to note
that when in the Circulate mode, and the Data Log fills the available memory, the Log
wraps around the first available Register of the memory structure and the Log Pointer to
First Item of First Record will float along in time with each additional entry into the Log. For
example, if the Data Log has wrapped around the available memory more than once, the
Log Pointer to First Item of First Record will always be preceded in memory by the Log
Pointer to First Item of Record After Last. As each new entry is written into the Log, these
two pointers move down to the next record space in memory, overwriting the first entry
into the log as of the Present Log Time and Date.

A–18 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

APPENDIX A: APPLICATION NOTES DATA LOGGER IMPLEMENTATION

Data Log Parameters

Listed below are the parameters available for capturing data via the Data Logger. Note
that these parameters will be placed within the Record structure of the Data Log in the
order and size that they appear in this table.

Table A–1: Data Log Parameters

DATA LOG SIZE DATA LOG SIZE DATA LOG SIZE

PARAMETER (BYTES) PARAMETER (BYTES) PARAMETER (BYTES)

Ia 2 PFa 2 kVAh 4

Ib 2 Pb 4 Ia Demand 2

Ic 2 Qb 4 Ib Demand 2

Iavg 2 Sb 4 Ic Demand 2

In 2 PFb 2 In Demand 2

I Unbalance 2 Pc 4 P3 Demand 4

Van 4 Qc 4 Q3 Demand 4

Vbn 4 Sc 4 S3 Demand 4

Vcn 4 PFc 2 Ia THD 2

Vpavg 4 P3 4 Ib THD 2

Vab 4 Q3 4 Ic THD 2

Vbc 4 S3 4 In THD 2

Vca 4 PF3 2 Van THD 2

Vlavg 4 Frequency 2 Vbn THD 2

V Unbalance 2 Positive kWh 4 Vcn THD 2

Pa 4 Negative kWh 4 Vab THD 2

Qa 4 Positive kvarh 4 Vbc THD 2

Sa 4 Negative kvarh 4 Analog Input 4

where:I = current; V = Voltage; P = Real Power; Q = Reactive Power; S = Apparent Power; PF

= Power Factor
THD = Total Harmonic Distortion

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL A–19

READING LONG INTEGERS FROM MEMORY MAP APPENDIX A: APPLICATION NOTES

A.7 Reading Long Integers from Memory Map

APPLICATION NOTE PQMAN08: READING LONG INTEGER VALUES FROM THE
MEMORY MAP
The PQM memory map contains some data which is formatted as a long integer type, or
32 bits. Because the Modbus Protocol maximum register size is 16 bits, the PQM stores
long integers in 2 consecutive register locations, 2 high order bytes, and 2 low order bytes.
The data can be retrieved by the following logic:

READ THE HIGH ORDER REGISTER AND

STORE THIS VALUE INTO “A”

READ THE LOW ORDER REGISTER AND

STORE THIS VALUE INTO “B”

16
DATA VALUE = (A x 2 ) + B

IS THE MOST SIGNIFICANT BIT OF THE HIGH

ORDER REGISTER SET? NO DATA VALUE = DATA VALUE
i.e. is HIGH ORDER REGISTER > 32767?
YES

32
(DATA VALUE = DATA VALUE – 2 )
OR
APPLY 2’s COMPLEMENT TO DATA VALUE;
THE SIGN IS IMPLIED TO BE NEGATIVE

EXAMPLE:
1. Reading a positive 3 Phase Real Power actual value from the PQM:

REGISTER ACTUAL VALUE DESCRIPTION UNITS & SCALE FORMAT

(hex)

02F0 004F 3 Phase Real Power (high)

0.01 x kW F4
02F1 35D1 3 Phase Real Power (low)

2. Following the method described above:

DATA VALUE = (004F × 216) + 35D1hexadecimal
= 5177344 + 13777converted to decimal
= 5191121decimal

A–20 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

APPENDIX A: APPLICATION NOTES READING LONG INTEGERS FROM MEMORY MAP

The most significant bit of the High Order register is not set, therefore the DATA VALUE is as
calculated. Applying the Units & Scale parameters to the DATA VALUE, we multiply the DATA
VALUE by 0.01 kW. Therefore the resultant value of 3 Phase Real Power as read from the
memory map is 51911.21 kW.
3. Reading a negative 3 Phase Real Power actual value from the PQM:

REGISTER ACTUAL VALUE DESCRIPTION UNITS & SCALE FORMAT

(hex)

02F0 FF3A 3 Phase Real Power (high)

0.01 x kW F4
02F1 EA7B 3 Phase Real Power (low)

4. Following the method described above:

DATA VALUE = (FF3A × 216) + EA7Bhexadecimal
= (65338 × 216) + 60027converted to decimal
= 4282051195decimal
5. The most significant bit of the High Order register is set, therefore the DATA VALUE is
calculated as:
DATA VALUE = DATA VALUE – 232
= 4282051195 – 4294967296
= –12916101
Applying the Units & Scale parameters to the DATA VALUE, we multiply the DATA VALUE by
0.01 kW. Therefore the resultant value of 3 Phase Real Power as read from the memory
map is –129161.01 kW.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL A–21

PULSE INPUT APPLICATION APPENDIX A: APPLICATION NOTES

A.8 Pulse Input Application

The PQM has up to 4 Logical Switch Inputs that can be configured as Pulse Input Counters.
Variables to consider when using the PQM as a Pulse Input Counter are:
• PQM Switch Input A/B/C/D Function
• PQM Switch Input A/B/C/D Activation
• PQM Switch Input A/B/C/D Name
• PQM Pulse Input (Units)
• PQM Pulse Input 1/2/3/4 (Value)
• PQM Totalized Pulse Input
1. PQM Switch Input A/B/C/D Function: This parameter defines the functionality to be
provided by the PQM Switch Input. For use as a Pulse Input Counter, the PQM Switch
Input to be used must be assigned as either Pulse Input 1/2/3 or 4.
2. PQM Switch Input A/B/C/D Activation: This parameter is set to OPEN or CLOSED. The
PQM will see the operation of the Switch Input in the state as defined by this parame-
ter.
3. PQM Switch Input A/B/C/D Name: This parameter defines the name given to each of
the Switch Inputs used. It is used as a label only and has no bearing on the operation
of the Switch Input.
4. PQM Pulse Input (Units): This parameter is the name given to the base units that the
PQM Pulse Input(s) will be counting. It is used as a label only and has no bearing on the
operation of the Pulse Input.
5. PQM Pulse Input 1/2/3/4 Value: This is the value assigned to each counting operation
as determined by the Switch Input.
6. PQM Totalized Pulse Input: This parameter creates a summing register of the various
Pulse Inputs configured. It can be configured for any combination of the PQM Switch
Inputs used as Pulse Inputs.
Application of the PQM Pulse Input(s) With a Pulse Initiator Using KYZ Ter-
minals:
Typical end receivers require a contact closure between KY or KZ based upon the type of
receiver. Because of the multi-functional parameters of the PQM Switch Inputs, the PQM
Switch Inputs are not labeled with KYZ markings as a dedicated pulse input device.
However, the PQM can still be used as a pulse counter. The PQM Switch Inputs require a
signal from the PQM Switch Common terminal to be activated. The PQM configured as a
Pulse Counter can be used with Two-Wire Pulse Initiators. The Pulse Initiator must provide
a dry contact operation. The Switch Common terminal of the PQM is connected to the K
terminal of the Pulse Initiator. The PQM Switch Input assigned to count pulses can be
connected to the Y or the Z terminal of the Pulse Initiator, depending on the operation of
the Pulse Initiator, i.e. OPEN or CLOSED. The PQM Pulse Input (Value) must be assigned to
match the pulse value of the Pulse Initiator, i.e if the Pulse Initiator delivers a dry contact
closure for every 100kWh, the PQM Pulse Input (Value) must also be set to 100.
Various operating parameters with regard to the PQM Switch Inputs must be taken into
account. The PQM Switch Inputs require a minimum 100ms operation time to be detected.
The duration of the contact operation can be indefinite. The internal Switch Input circuit of
the PQM is itself switched on and off at the times when the PQM is reading the status of the

A–22 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

APPENDIX A: APPLICATION NOTES PULSE INPUT APPLICATION

Switch Inputs. Monitoring the input to one of the PQM Switch Inputs will reveal a pulsed
24VDC waveform, not a constant signal. Standard wiring practice should be adhered to
when making connections to the PQM Switch Inputs, i.e. avoiding long runs of cable along
current carrying conductors or any other source of EMI. An induced voltage on the Switch
Input can cause malfunction of the Switch Input.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL A–23

PULSE TOTALIZER APPLICATION APPENDIX A: APPLICATION NOTES

A.9 Pulse Totalizer Application

The PQM has up to 4 Logical Switch Inputs that can be configured as Pulse Input Counters.
One common application of these Pulse Inputs is their use as an energy totalizer for more
than one circuit. One PQM can totalize input from up to 4 different sources and sum these
results into a single register. Variables to consider when using the PQM as a Pulse Input
Counter are:
• PQM Switch Input A/B/C/D Function
• PQM Switch Input A/B/C/D Activation
• PQM Switch Input A/B/C/D Name
• PQM Pulse Input (Units)
• PQM Pulse Input 1/2/3/4 (Value)
• PQM Totalized Pulse Input
1. PQM Switch Input A/B/C/D Function: This parameter defines the functionality to be
provided by the PQM Switch Input. For use as a Pulse Input Counter, the PQM Switch
Input to be used must be assigned as either Pulse Input 1/2/3 or 4.
2. PQM Switch Input A/B/C/D Activation: This parameter is set to OPEN or CLOSED. The
PQM will see the operation of the Switch Input in the state as defined by this parame-
ter.
3. PQM Switch Input A/B/C/D Name: This parameter defines the name given to each of
the Switch Inputs used. It is used as a label only and has no bearing on the operation
of the Switch Input.
4. PQM Pulse Input (Units): This parameter is the name given to the base units that the
PQM Pulse Input(s) will be counting. It is used as a label only and has no bearing on the
operation of the Pulse Input.
5. PQM Pulse Input 1/2/3/4 Value: This is the value assigned to each counting operation
as determined by the Switch Input.
6. PQM Totalized Pulse Input: This parameter creates a summing register of the various
Pulse Inputs configured. It can be configured for any combination of the PQM Switch
Inputs used as Pulse Inputs.

A–24 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

APPENDIX A: APPLICATION NOTES PULSE TOTALIZER APPLICATION

Configuring the PQM to Totalize Energy From Multiple Metering Locations:

F1 F2 F3 F4

PQM PQM PQM PQM

COM
41
#1 #2 #3 #4

AUX1
42
N/O
AUX1 AUX1 AUX1
L L
M
COM N/O COM N/O COM N/O
41 42 41 42 41 42

+24VDC

SW1

SW2

SW3

SW4
33 32 31 30 29
M

FIGURE A–4: Multiple Metering Locations

The diagram above shows an example of a PQM being used to totalize the energy from 4
other PQMs. PQMs 1 through 4 have each of their respective AUX1 relays configured for
Pulse Output functionality (refer to the Pulse Output PQM Application note for details, or
the PQM manual). The Switch Common output from PQM#4 is fed to the common contact
of the AUX1 relays on PQMs 1 through 4. The N/O contact of AUX1 for PQMs 1 through 4
will operate based upon the setup as described in the Pulse Output functionality section of
the PQM manual. The Totalized Pulse Input register of PQM#4 can be set to sum the counts
from Switch Inputs 1 through 4, thus giving a total energy representation for the 4
metering locations. The count value for each Pulse Input on PQM#4 can be set to match
the Pulse Output Interval as programmed on each PQM. For example, if PQM#1 had a
Pulse Output Interval = 100 kWhr, and PQM#2 had a Pulse Output Interval = 10 kWhr, then
Pulse Input 1 on PQM#4 would have the Pulse Input Value set for 100 and Pulse Input 2 on
PQM#4 would have the Pulse Input Value set for 10.
Various operating parameters with regard to the PQM Switch Inputs must be taken into
account. The PQM Switch Inputs require a minimum 100 ms operation time to be detected.
Therefore the Pulse Output Width should be equal to or greater than 100 ms. The duration
of the contact operation can be indefinite. The internal Switch Input circuit of the PQM is
itself switched on and off at the times when the PQM is reading the status of the Switch
Inputs. Monitoring the input to one of the PQM Switch Inputs will reveal a pulsed 24 V DC
waveform, not a constant signal. Standard wiring practice should be adhered to when
making connections to the PQM Switch Inputs, i.e. avoiding long runs of cable along
current carrying conductors or any other source of EMI. An induced voltage on the Switch
Input can cause malfunction of the Switch Input.

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL A–25

PULSE TOTALIZER APPLICATION APPENDIX A: APPLICATION NOTES

A–26 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

INDEX

Index

A
ACCESS TO EVENT RECORDER INFORMATION
.......................................................................................................................... A-6
ACCESSING THE DATA LOG INFORMATION ................................................. A-16
ACTUAL KEY ...................................................................................................... 3-5
ACTUAL VALUES
description ........................................................................................................ 5-1
organization ..................................................................................................... 5-2
viewing via software ........................................................................................ 6-15
ALARM RELAY
setpoints .......................................................................................................... 4-37
ALARMS ...................................................................................................... 1-5, 5-21
critical setpoints not stored ............................................................................. 4-1
current ............................................................................................................. 4-39
current THD ..................................................................................................... 4-45
miscellaneous .................................................................................................. 4-57
power ............................................................................................................... 4-47
self-test ........................................................................................................... 5-23
voltage ............................................................................................................. 4-39
voltage THD ..................................................................................................... 4-45
ANALOG INPUT ................................................................................................ 5-19
description ....................................................................................................... 2-19
multiplexing ..................................................................................................... 2-18
setpoints .......................................................................................................... 4-29
ANALOG INPUT SIMULATION ......................................................................... 4-61
ANALOG OUTPUTS
description ....................................................................................................... 2-18
parameter range ............................................................................................. 7-92
parameters ...................................................................................................... 4-27
selection criteria .............................................................................................. 4-26
setpoints .......................................................................................................... 4-24
simulation ........................................................................................................ 4-60
APPLICATION NOTES ........................................................................................ A-1
APPLICATIONS ................................................................................................... 1-3
AUXILIARY RELAY
description ....................................................................................................... 2-16
AUXILIARY RELAYS
activation priority ............................................................................................ 4-38
setpoints .......................................................................................................... 4-38

B
BAUD RATE ........................................................................................................ 4-7
BROADCAST COMMAND ................................................................................. 7-14

C
CALCULATION PARAMETERS .......................................................................... 4-10
CAPACITOR BANK SWITCHING ....................................................................... 4-50

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL I–1

 INDEX

CAPTURED WAVEFORM .................................................................................... 1-8

CLEAR DATA ..................................................................................................... 4-12
CLEAR ENERGY VALUES .................................................................................. 4-12
CLEAR EVENT RECORD .................................................................................... 4-13
CLEAR MAX DEMAND VALUES ........................................................................ 4-12
CLEAR MAX THD VALUES ................................................................................ 4-13
CLEAR MIN/MAX CURRENT VALUES .............................................................. 4-12
CLEAR MIN/MAX POWER VALUES .................................................................. 4-13
CLEAR MIN/MAX VOLTAGE VALUES .............................................................. 4-13
CLEAR PULSE COUNTER VALUE ..................................................................... 4-13
CLOCK ............................................................................................................... 5-24
set date ............................................................................................................. 4-9
set time .............................................................................................................. 4-9
setpoints ............................................................................................................ 4-9
COMMISSIONING ............................................................................................... 9-1
COMMUNICATIONS
broadcast command ....................................................................................... 7-18
commands ....................................................................................................... 7-18
configuration with software .............................................................................. 6-6
data format/rate ............................................................................................... 7-2
DNP ............................................................................................................. 4-8, 8-1
electrical interface ............................................................................................ 7-1
error responses ............................................................................................... 7-15
errors ................................................................................................................. 7-3
indicators .......................................................................................................... 3-3
memory map actual values ............................................................................. 7-20
memory map setpoints ................................................................................... 7-52
modbus ............................................................................................... 4-7, 4-8, 7-1
overview ............................................................................................................ 1-5
RS232 ....................................................................................................... 2-21, 6-2
RS485 .............................................................................................. 2-19, 2-21, 6-3
serial port ........................................................................................................ 2-19
supported modbus functions ............................................................................ 7-5
timing ................................................................................................................ 7-4
user definable registers ................................................................................... 7-19
CONNECTION TABLE ......................................................................................... 2-5
CONTROL OPTION ............................................................................................. 1-7
CONTROL POWER
description ....................................................................................................... 2-15
CRC-16 ALGORITHM .......................................................................................... 7-3
CRITICAL SETPOINTS NOT STORED ALARM .................................................... 4-1
CT
primary ............................................................................................................ 4-22
CT INPUTS
description ....................................................................................................... 2-15
CT PRIMARY ...................................................................................................... 4-22
CTs
alternate connections for 3-wire system ........................................................ 2-14
CT inputs .......................................................................................................... 2-15
neutral primary ............................................................................................... 4-22
phase CT wiring ............................................................................................... 4-21
CURRENT ALARMS ........................................................................................... 4-39
CURRENT DEMAND TIME INTERVAL .............................................................. 4-11
CURRENT DEMAND TYPE ................................................................................ 4-11
CURRENT METERING ......................................................................................... 5-3
CURRENT SIMULATION ................................................................................... 4-59

I–2 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

INDEX

CURRENT THD ALARM ..................................................................................... 4-45

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
see CTs
CURRENT UNBALANCE ............................................................................. 4-42, 5-4
CURRENT/VOLTAGE CONFIGURATION .......................................................... 4-21
CYCLING POWER ............................................................................................... A-7

D
DATA ENTRY METHODS .................................................................................... 3-7
DATA FORMAT ................................................................................................... 7-2
DATA LOG PARAMETERS ................................................................................ A-19
DATA LOGGER ......................................................................... 1-9, 4-36, 5-27, 6-22
DATA LOGGER IMPLEMENTATION ................................................................. A-15
DATA PACKET FORMAT .................................................................................... 7-2
DATA RATE ......................................................................................................... 7-2
DATE ................................................................................................................... 4-9
DEFAULT MESSAGES
adding .............................................................................................................. 3-9
brightness ......................................................................................................... 4-3
delay ................................................................................................................. 4-3
deleting ............................................................................................................. 3-9
DEFAULT SETPOINTS
loading ............................................................................................................. 4-13
DEMAND
alarms .............................................................................................................. 4-52
calculation methods ........................................................................................ 4-11
power ............................................................................................................... 4-11
DEMAND ALARMS ............................................................................................ 4-52
DEMAND METERING ........................................................................................ 5-16
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT .......................................................................... 8-1
DIELECTRIC STRENGTH TESTING ................................................................... 2-22
DIMENSIONS ..................................................................................................... 2-2
DISPLAY ............................................................................................................. 3-2
DISPLAY FILTERING .......................................................................................... 4-4
DNP
analog input/output change point list ............................................................. 8-11
binary input change point list .......................................................................... 8-7
binary input point list ....................................................................................... 8-7
binary output point list ..................................................................................... 8-9
control relay output point list ........................................................................... 8-9
counter point list ............................................................................................. 8-21
default variations ............................................................................................. 8-6
device profile document ................................................................................... 8-1
implementation table ....................................................................................... 8-4
setpoints ........................................................................................................... 4-8
DNP 3.0 CONFIGURATION ............................................................................... 4-8
DOWNLOADING PRODUCT ENHANCEMENTS ................................................ 1-6

E
ENERGY COST ................................................................................................... 4-11
ENERGY METERING .......................................................................................... 5-14
ENTERING SETPOINTS ..................................................................................... 6-14

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL I–3

 INDEX

ERROR CHECKING ............................................................................................. 7-3

ERROR RESPONSES ......................................................................................... 7-15
EVENT LIST ....................................................................................................... 5-29
EVENT RECORDER .......................................................................... 4-14, 5-28, A-1
EXPANSION ........................................................................................................ 1-6
EXTERNAL CONNECTION TABLE ...................................................................... 2-5
EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS ................................................................................ 2-5

F
FACTORY DEFAULTS ........................................................................................ 4-13
FACTORY USE ONLY ........................................................................................ 4-62
FEATURES ........................................................................................................... 1-3
highlights ........................................................................................................... 1-2
optional ............................................................................................................. 1-6
FIRMWARE
upgrading .......................................................................................................... 6-9
FREQUENCY .................................................................................... 4-23, 4-46, 5-17
FRONT PANEL .................................................................................................... 3-2
FRONT PANEL PORT ........................................................................................ 2-21

H
HARMONIC ANALYSIS ..................................................................................... 6-18
HARMONIC SPECTRUM ..................................................................................... 1-8
HI-POT TESTING ............................................................................................... 2-22
HYPERTERMINAL ............................................................................................... A-7

I
INTERFACING USING HYPERTERMINAL .......................................................... A-7
INTERPRETING THE DATA LOG INFORMATION ............................................ A-16
INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................. 1-1

K
KEYPAD ............................................................................................................... 3-5
KEYPAD ENTRY ................................................................................................... 3-7

L
LABEL .................................................................................................................. 2-3
LEDs
testing ............................................................................................................. 4-58

I–4 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

INDEX

M
MEMORY MAP .......................................................................................... 7-16, 7-17
MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS ...................................................................... 7-72
MESSAGE KEY OPERATION .............................................................................. 3-7
MESSAGE KEYS ................................................................................................. 3-6
METERING
overview ........................................................................................................... 1-5
MISCELLANEOUS ALARMS .............................................................................. 4-57
MODBUS
address ...................................................................................................... 4-7, 4-8
broadcast command ................................................................................ 7-8, 7-14
execute operation ............................................................................................ 7-7
function code 03 ............................................................................................... 7-6
function code 04 ............................................................................................... 7-6
function code 05 ........................................................................................ 7-7, 7-8
function code 06 ............................................................................................... 7-9
function code 07 .............................................................................................. 7-10
function code 08 .............................................................................................. 7-11
function code 16 ............................................................................ 7-12, 7-13, 7-14
loopback test ................................................................................................... 7-11
memory map ................................................................................................... 7-16
performing commands .................................................................................... 7-13
read actual values ............................................................................................ 7-6
read device status ........................................................................................... 7-10
read setpoints ................................................................................................... 7-6
store multiple setpoints ................................................................................... 7-12
store single setpoint ......................................................................................... 7-9
supported functions ......................................................................................... 7-5
MODBUS PROTOCOL ........................................................................................ 7-1
MODEL INFORMATION ........................................................................... 5-33, 5-34
MOUNTING ........................................................................................................ 2-1

N
NEUTRAL CT PRIMARY ..................................................................................... 4-22
NEUTRAL CURRENT SENSING ......................................................................... 4-22
NOMINAL DIRECT INPUT VOLTAGE ................................................................ 4-23
NOMINAL FREQUENCY .................................................................................... 4-23

O
ORDER CODES .................................................................................................. 1-12
OUTPUT RELAYS
description ....................................................................................................... 2-16
overview ........................................................................................................... 1-7
setpoints .......................................................................................................... 4-37
testing ............................................................................................................. 4-58
OVERCURRENT
function ........................................................................................................... 4-41
neutral ............................................................................................................. 4-41
OVERFREQUENCY ............................................................................................ 4-46
OVERVOLTAGE
function ........................................................................................................... 4-42

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL I–5

 INDEX

P
PARITY ................................................................................................................. 4-7
PHASE CT WIRING ........................................................................................... 4-21
PHASE REVERSAL
connections ..................................................................................................... 4-44
function ........................................................................................................... 4-43
PHASORS ............................................................................................................ 5-7
PHASORS IMPLEMENTATION ......................................................................... A-10
PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS .................................................................................... 2-2
POWER ................................................................................................................ 5-9
POWER ALARMS .............................................................................................. 4-47
POWER ANALYSIS .............................................................................................. 1-7
POWER DEMAND TIME INTERVAL .................................................................. 4-11
POWER DEMAND TYPE .................................................................................... 4-11
POWER FACTOR ............................................................................................... 4-49
POWER MEASUREMENT CONVENTIONS ....................................................... 5-13
POWER QUALITY .............................................................................................. 5-25
PQM SETUP ......................................................................................................... 4-3
PQMPC
see SOFTWARE
PREFERENCES .................................................................................................... 4-3
PRINTING SETPOINTS ........................................................................................ 6-9
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION ............................................................................... 2-2
PRODUCT LABEL ................................................................................................ 2-3
PRODUCT OPTIONS ......................................................................................... 4-20
PROGRAMMABLE MESSAGE ......................................................... 4-18, 4-19, 5-24
PULSE COUNTER .............................................................................................. 5-18
PULSE INPUT ........................................................................................... 4-34, 4-54
PULSE INPUT APPLICATION ........................................................................... A-22
PULSE INPUT TIMING ...................................................................................... 5-19
PULSE OUTPUT ................................................................................................ 4-33
PULSE OUTPUT APPLICATION ....................................................................... A-13
PULSE OUTPUT TIMING ................................................................................... 4-34
PULSE TOTALIZER APPLICATION ................................................................... A-24

R
REACTIVE POWER ............................................................................................ 4-48
READING LONG INTEGERS FROM MEMORY MAP ........................................ A-20
REAL POWER ........................................................................................... 4-47, 4-48
REAR TERMINALS ............................................................................................... 2-6
RELAY INDICATORS ........................................................................................... 3-4
RESET KEY .......................................................................................................... 3-6
REVISION ............................................................................................................ 2-3
software ............................................................................................................ 2-3
REVISION HISTORY ............................................................................................ 2-3
RS232 CONNECTION ....................................................................................... 2-21
RS485 COMMUNICATIONS WIRING ............................................................... 2-21
RS485 SERIAL PORTS ...................................................................................... 2-19

I–6 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

INDEX

S
S3 OUTPUT RELAYS ......................................................................................... 4-37
SCADA ENTRY .................................................................................................... 3-8
SECURITY
setpoint access .......................................................................................... 3-8, 4-4
SELF TEST ALARM ............................................................................................ 5-23
SERIAL PORT ..................................................................................................... 2-19
SERIAL PORTS ................................................................................................... 4-7
SETPOINT ACCESS ............................................................................. 2-17, 4-4, 4-6
SETPOINT ACCESS SECURITY .......................................................................... 3-8
SETPOINT DEFAULTS ....................................................................................... 4-13
SETPOINT ENTRY ....................................................................................... 4-1, 6-14
SETPOINT KEY ................................................................................................... 3-5
SETPOINT MESSAGE ORGANIZATION ............................................................. 4-2
SETPOINTS
loading ............................................................................................................. 6-15
printing ............................................................................................................. 6-9
saving .............................................................................................................. 6-13
SETPOINTS TABLE ............................................................................................. 9-1
SETUP SETPOINTS ............................................................................................. 4-3
SIMULATION
analog input .................................................................................................... 4-61
analog outputs ................................................................................................ 4-60
current ............................................................................................................. 4-59
switch inputs ................................................................................................... 4-62
voltage ............................................................................................................. 4-59
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM ..................................................................................... 1-4
SINGLE PHASE CONNECTION ......................................................................... 2-13
SOFTWARE
configuration .................................................................................................... 6-2
installation ........................................................................................................ 6-4
loading setpoints files ..................................................................................... 6-15
menu structure ................................................................................................. 6-8
overview ................................................................................................... 1-11, 6-1
printing setpoint files ....................................................................................... 6-9
upgrading ......................................................................................................... 6-4
SOFTWARE VERSIONS ..................................................................................... 5-33
SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................................. 1-13
STATUS INDICATORS ........................................................................................ 3-3
STORE KEY ......................................................................................................... 3-5
SWITCH INPUT NAME ...................................................................................... 4-31
SWITCH INPUTS
description ....................................................................................................... 2-16
name ................................................................................................................ 4-31
overview ........................................................................................................... 1-7
setpoints ................................................................................................. 4-31, 4-32
SWITCH INPUTS SIMULATION ........................................................................ 4-62
SWITCH STATUS ............................................................................................... 5-23

T
TARIFF PERIOD ................................................................................................. 4-11
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................... 1-13

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL I–7

 INDEX

TERMINAL CONNECTIONS ................................................................................ 2-5

TERMINALS .................................................................................................. 2-5, 2-6
TEST LEDs ......................................................................................................... 4-58
TEST OUTPUT RELAYS ..................................................................................... 4-58
THD .......................................................................................................... 4-45, 5-26
TIME ........................................................................................................... 4-9, 4-55
TOTAL HARMONIC DISTORTION ............................................................ 4-45, 5-26
TRACE MEMORY ............................................................................................... 6-20
setpoints .......................................................................................................... 4-15
trigger modes .................................................................................................. 4-16
triggers ............................................................................................................ 4-16
TRACE MEMORY CAPTURE .............................................................................. 1-10
TRACE MEMORY TRIGGERS ............................................................................. 1-10
TRANSDUCER ..................................................................................................... 1-6
TRIGGERED TRACE MEMORY RESOLUTION .................................................. A-12

U
UNBALANCE
current ............................................................................................................... 5-4
voltage ..................................................................................................... 4-43, 5-6
UNDERCURRENT .............................................................................................. 4-40
UNDERFREQUENCY ......................................................................................... 4-46
UNDERVOLTAGE .............................................................................................. 4-41
UPGRADING FIRMWARE ................................................................................... 6-9
USER MAP
printing .............................................................................................................. 6-9
USER-DEFINABLE MEMORY MAP .......................................................... 7-16, 7-19

V
VALUE KEYS ........................................................................................................ 3-7
VOLTAGE ALARMS ........................................................................................... 4-39
VOLTAGE METERING ......................................................................................... 5-5
VOLTAGE SIMULATION .................................................................................... 4-59
VOLTAGE THD ALARM ..................................................................................... 4-45
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
see VTs
VOLTAGE UNBALANCE ............................................................................. 4-43, 5-6
VT INPUTS ......................................................................................................... 2-15
VT NOMINAL SECONDARY .............................................................................. 4-23
VT RATIO ........................................................................................................... 4-22
VT WIRING ........................................................................................................ 4-22
VTs
inputs .............................................................................................................. 2-15
nominal secondary .......................................................................................... 4-23
ratio ................................................................................................................. 4-22
wiring ............................................................................................................... 4-22

W
WARRANTY ....................................................................................................... 10-1
WAVEFORM CAPTURE ..................................................................................... 6-17

I–8 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

INDEX

WIRING DIAGRAM
3-wire delta (2 VTs) .......................................................................................... 2-11
3-wire direct (no VTs) ....................................................................................... 2-12
4-wire wye (2 VTs) ............................................................................................. 2-9
4-wire wye (3 VTs) ............................................................................................. 2-7
4-wire wye direct (no VTs) ............................................................................... 2-10

XYZ

PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL I–9

 INDEX

I–10 PQM POWER QUALITY METER – INSTRUCTION MANUAL